Home

User`s Manual

Contents

1. Selection 00 00 30 BlackMagic MPEG 2 Playback 1 3 1 Preview This tab shows the currently playing video The Video window can be moved outside the main window by checking External video wndow fromthe View menu If you accidentally close the window you can view it again by checking Show external video wndow in the View menu Some AirBox configurations do not provide such video overlay functionality In some cases you might want to disable the window since it consumes additional resources from the system Then you will have to uncheck Show External Video Window in the View menu 20 AIRBOX I1 3 2 Counters This tab contains all counters that can be found in the View menu Their names are written in the left Right clicking in the Clip timer or in the Block timer will invoke a Ke A UI VK context menu to switch it to count down System time 1 5 1 3 56 mode Please check the View menu section below for detailed description of the counters I1 3 3 Current Playlist Preview Counters Current playlist Playlists Log gt A S Name Unnamed playlist This tab contains information and simple controls about the currently loaded playlist O Name this is the title of the currently loaded E Lock playlist playlist It is different than its filename You can GC Playlist Loop change it in the dialog that appears after double clicking in the string TC this is an offs
2. Rename output xi Name JLive Cam2 Matris size Inputs fi 6 Outputs D Level Iv bte Run event jo Ee earlier DI Clear commands x Cancel Cancel VikinX Matrix Switcher Output Similar to other matrix switchers VikinX has two operation modes Command and Online 49 AIRBOX E ikinX Switcher on Airbox 1 5 x oui foun baaa oura Buas oan Owe oaae Ecg e S a Grid matis Outputs G Inputs i Run event fo Zei earlier DI Clear commands X Cancel While in Command mode you can configure the combination of the matrix switcher and push OK to add the event in the playlist In Online mode you can control the inputs outputs in real time just by pressing the relevant cell in the switcher grid You can specify the number of inputs outputs in the grid using the relevant buttons in the dialog In its lower left part specify the delay precession of the event in milliseconds TIP t Switcher Servers You can control one switcher fromnumerous AirBox machines using the relevant switcher server add on In this example we will configure the Quartz matrix plug in to send commands to the Quartz Server IP Go to Settings menu gt Modules gt Remote tab and select the Quartz Matrix Switcher output row Pressing the Configure button will invoke a setup dialog You can specify the IP address in it The switcher server
3. 100 Log options 109 Log VIEW 00 59 LOO E TI Logo options 107 Media Folders 130 Mirror mode 132 Missing files 64 Modules 67 Playback control 23 Playback modules Playlist and clip buttons 0 24 Playlist grid 25 Remote control Remote control Kramer Matrix Remote control Kramer S witcher 368 Re mote control Ocelot 75 Remote control Title Bo x Net Control 76 Remote control video resize 76 Save config 129 Settin gs General ol Startup options 110 Status Bar 22 SubtitleBox 131 Switcher servers 45 Timecode options EE 113 Timecode Timer 57 User interface 19 Video Overlay CAPTUREBOX Audio control 171 Batch capture list de 157 Capture settings DeckLink 149 Capture settings IP capture 156 Capture tab 157 Capturing 163 DTME Control 173 Menu bar 172 Printing to tape 165 Quick stat 148 BR E 170 Schedule 167 TDIR caacateacaueetinss 164 CLIPTRIMMER Clip shots 288 Clip zones 286 Preview screen 28 Status bar 285 Trimmer control282 User interface 281 Video clip info 286 Volume control 285 DA TABOX Classification 212 Credits 213 Default values 205 Men 192 Multi editing 189 New record Credits 198 New record
4. Macro Block Adaptive Frame Field coding Further down you can specify the fields order bottom or top first and the Pull down mode Pull down is applied for conversion when the source bitrate and the output bitrate are different Slice count defined the number of slices per picture In the Aspect Ratio field there are two options Picture AR to fix the aspect ratio of the whole picture Sample AR to fix the aspect ratio of pixels in the output picture In the Bitrate Control field there are two drop down lists and several strings Mode specifies the rate control mode Constant Variable or Constant Quantizer The Pass drop down list is used to specify the multi pass encoding mode Simple encoding without gathering statistics Analyze encoding and gathering statistics for ne xt pass Encode encoding using the gathered statistics and updating it 121 AIRBOX Bit rate bits sec specifies the average bit rate bits sec of the encoded video elementary stream HSS rate bits sec specifies the hypothetical stream scheduler rate bits sec of the encoded video elementary stream CPB size bits specifies the size of coded picture buffer in bits Init Delay 90 kHz specifies the initial CPB removal delay in 90 kHz clock units Dest Delay 90 kHz specifies the destination CPB removal delay in 90 kHz clock units In the GOP Structure field you can set Max GOP length the maxi
5. Status Tape In Out Mode Title Comment part of the window Many es News 07 00 01 00 00 00 03 30 00 VA Event_003 e e es News_07 00 04 00 00 00 04 40 00 M Event_004 people refer to this function as es News 07 00 04 50 00 00 07 0000 VA Event 005 batch capturing You can define a list of scenes with their start and end timecode values Then activate batch capturing CaptureBox captures the desired scenes automatically from the corresponding tapes The operator should only change the tapes when prompted Grid Co lu mns e Status column shows the current state of each clip as follows If the clip has been successfully captured a green mark v appears 184 CAPTUREBOX If the clip is captured but there is no option for VTR control a yellow hand appears and the timecode values in the In and Out columns are zeroes If not the whole clip has been captured or there has been a problemduring the capturing process a red mark appears Ifthe clip is not captured yet a camera appears If the clip is included in the next capture session list a blue dot appears The dot can be removed by clicking that field This will exclude the clip fromthe next capturing Session If the clip is not included in the next capture session the blue dot is missing The dot can be added by clicking that field Thus you will include the clip in the next capturing Session Tape column shows the ID of the tape
6. Audio Encoder options If the source oo ny Ree ee oe stream contains an uncompressed audio file wav C Layer None the program will automatically encode it in MPEGI PA corel E ees layer 1 or 2 Use this button to determine the ET ee encoding conditions Compression Data rate fis2kbits sec 7 Psychoacoustics Stereo Mode De emphasis Psychoacousties T Eror Protection for decoder Model 1 MUSICAM Copyrighted Material Information flags you can add some information Model 2 AT amp T T Original Material in the encoded audio stream by checking the EE relevant box Error protection Copyrighted Stereo material or Original material C Joint stereo Dual channel g S a X Cancel The Throttle is a kind of process accelerator The C Mono Bee higher you set it the less the process prolongs but the CPU usage will go higher 206 I 2 Folder Watch This function allows running FinishBox in the background watching over a particular folder or list of folders for incoming files When video and audio files arrive at the watched folders FinishBox automatically starts multiplexing them into MPEG file format and saves the new file to a predefined output folder Pressing the Folder Watch button in the Standard window will open the dialog box you eee e Video Folder select the main folder to be Video Foder ES E sox watched over for video files Use the browse Audio F
7. Cancel Tl Display As Icon M Script Control IT Neutral Override J Numeric Override IT Context Digits IT Legacy BidiClass Set Default X Cancel The last three buttons are related to inserting object links in the Text Push the Le button to insert a still picture object link and the ir button to insert OLE compatible objects Use the drop down list to fix their position in the Text object Import OLE co mpatible objects using the button The standard Windows OLE dialog box appears after pressing it 268 TITLEBOX 2 xi If you choose Create New the relevant application opens and you will be able to a EES Cancel create the desired object Any changes in Ze Create from File C Documents and Settings Branimira D the relev ant OLE objec tw ill be vis ible Lionas Tbk M Display As icon LitheBox when saved see the Text Property section above Result If you choose Create from File you Inserts the contents of the file as an object into pu cae ote e ES activate it using will be pro mpted to browse for it You can create a link or display it as icon through checking the relevant box Text Template Property Tools The property dialog box for text objects allows 4 JB kla Pes SI O wi ei E E Auto Refresh Time Text displaying different texts consequently for specified periods in seconds The different texts are shown as a list of texts separate lines in th
8. hirBox 2 All AirBox instances Load config gt 151 AIRBOX To export the settings of all AirBox channels select All AirBox instances The resulting file has extension obt Later when you load it on another machine it will affect all AirBox channels available there 152 Tools Commands Change file path SubtitleBox gt Mirror mode gt Playlist checker Media folders AirBox III 5 1 This module is intended for relocating file paths If you have built a playlist and for some reason the file locations have been changed here you can quickly relocate file paths It is easily done fill in the Old folder field with the original location and then fill in the New folder field with the new location You may browse for path with the 2 button There are two view options if you check M Show Change file path SE AIRBOX III Tools Menu This menu was created to accommodate some useful tools in Old folder JH Mpeg2 PAL Movie Goodies 4 34S corpion King Cl New folder H Mpeg2 PAL M ovie Goodies 4 3 The Scorpion King Cl Show only missing files H Mpeg2 PAL Movie Goodies 4 34S corpion King Making2 mpg H Mpeg2 PAL Movie Goodies 4 34S corpion King Making3 mpg H Mpeg2 PAL Movie Goodies 4 3 Scorpion King Making4 mpg L H Mpeg2 PAL Movie Goodies 4 34Scorpion King Making5 mpg OO All None Invert Missing only C
9. General 193 New record Instances 194 Options 200 Print wo eee 213 Qualities 211 Searching 186 Sequences 184 PLAQBOX Splitting_Files_Into _ Parts 196 Temp lates 185 Tree view 183 FINIS HBOX LE 177 Watch folder 180 GLOSSARY 319 GOP e vesssctsccitccctiscencesss 312 LISTBOX Edit menu 220 Installation 216 Playlist grid 217 Toolbat 217 MULTIAIRBOX MANAGER Installation 297 User interface 298 QUICKSTART DataBox 182 ListBOX nsneena 216 MultiAirBo x Manager 297 Title box 222 TITLEBOX Analog clock 248 Animation properties 249 Banner 253 Browser object 260 Chat note 256 Creating objects 237 369 Digital clock 257 Direct Show media Editing objects 237 Event Manager 233 Flash objects 258 General options 235 Menu bar 230 Network control230 Object palette 228 Power Point objects Primary Shapes 230 Roll amp crawl properties 243 Schedule mode 263 Screen capture 261 Sound objects 256 Still picture properties 239 System bar 229 Text field properties User interface 223 VDCP MANAGER Adding new clips Or ee errr 140 User Interface 139 PLAQBOX NOTES 370
10. Info Zones Shots Fites Susam Exta L jti v Stream D Video Stream 2 Audio Yolume A WOK Balance X Cancel CC i CLIP TRIMMER 1 5 Extra Trim Window ListBox Be This extra will Info Zones Shots help you in managing Filt St Extra 1 ilters ram mu ltiple monitor video al wall systems of up to 16 Position 00 00 34 00 monitors The files that Die o are usually used for CIESDV dChannels 73_tralercl avi video walls end m C ENDV 4Channels T3_trailer c2 avi c mpg or c avi for TI E NDV 4Channels T3_trailer c3 avi X E EADY 4ChannelsiT3_trailer c4 avi example cl mpg or c3 avi Just load the first file in the playlist P Ee Fee AirBox will detect the 00 00 00 00 00 01 42 00 00 01 42 00 others automatically Position Details Total Duration TR Leen CORR PR cies Teri Bone ne Dan ane i buttons above the list of pme wm files are designed for Balance XK Cancel JL Lelleg ee d kO s a a os ki control of the entire bunch The trim bar and the buttons under the preview window are used for control of the currently selected monitor the one in the red dotted line frame This feature will help you in synchronizing the video wall and will allow you to control each monitor separately You can also rearrange the display positions of files by drag and dropping the relevant square
11. Universal path change This setting will take only the name of the media files contained in the Masters playlist without their subdirectory paths and will move the files to a location specified from the user Ed Setup External Plug ins press it to browse for the directory where are situated all the external plug ins 172 AIRBOX Force switch for selected Master if there is any preferred Slave this button allows you to switch to the first available pre ferred Backup AirBox If all preferred Slaves are busy or there are no such Slaves MBM will switch to the first available Slave machine V 2 2 The Master and Slave configuration fields In the upper part of the main dialog there are the Master AB Slave AB and Online AB configuration fields The user has to specify which AirBox will be Master and which Slave V 2 2 1 The Master AB configuration field Here the user can specify as many Master AirBoxes as needed depending on the project To each one of them can be assigned a Preferred Slave AirBox The b it and SS signs situated after each one from the Master addresses are showing the current status of an AirBox machine running paused or stopped TIP If you want an exact defined Slave to back up a particular Master AirBox just drag the relevant slave fromthe middle Slave AB field to the Preferred Slaves string situated at the Master AB configuration field Right clicking within the Mast
12. CPU Central Processing Unit The part of a computer a microprocessor chip that does most of the data processing interprets and executes instructions the CPU together with the memory form the central part of a computer to which the peripherals are attached CVBS Composite Video Broadcast Signal analogue composite video DI A format for digital video tape recording working in 4 2 2 standard using 8 bit sampling The tape is 19 mm wide and allows up to 94 minutes to be recorded on a cassette As a component recording system it is ideal for studio or postproduction work for its high chrominance bandwidth allowing excellent chroma keying Also multiple generations are possible with very little degradation of quality The D1 equipment can integrate without transcoding to various digital effects systems disk recorders telecines graphics devices etc Despite the advantages D1 equipment is not extensively used in general areas of TV production due to its high cost 356 PLAQBOX Abbreviation Previously known as Digital S this is a half inch digital tape format for video data recording at rate of 50 Mb s The tape can be shuttled and searched up to x32 speed Video sampled at 4 2 2 is compressed at 3 3 1 using intra frame compression Two audio channels are recorded at 16 bit 48 kHz sampling each is individually editable The format also includes two cue tracks and four further audio channels in a cassette ho
13. In the Media Folder window you can create a list of search locations Path the searching location double click in the field to open the browse window Active Y check this cell to permit searching in the selected folder SubFolders V check it to search in the subfolders as well Media Type which Media Type to be assigned to the record s instance To add a new line in the window Le a new SCH location press the Plus RI button To delete a line select it and press the Minus 241 button DATABOX Check Scope it is used to define the scope of records within which search will be carried out Al records in the database All visible in the grid records or only the Selected records Log search Begin search progress If this box is Een eot Seovin King The Muse checked M the search Searching Trueserven Mpeg2 PAL Makingl mp progress will be shown in Searching Trueserver E Mpeg2 PAL Albena Making1 mpg the bottom area of the eT window Check file size check this to performa checking for the file Save old trim points check this if you want to save already entered trim points into the record Press Check to start the search 242 GETTING STARTED ListBox is dedicated to creating and editing playlists It allows preparing playlists in advance for the AirBox module and playing them on air later ListBox doesn t need any special workstation or platfor
14. shows the comments for each clip Grid buttons Show days field here you can define how many days in advance counting fromtoday you will see in the schedule list Press the Arm button 4 after creating the schedule list This will activate the schedule capturing mode The capturing will automatically start and stop according to the Start time and End time values entered in the list Clone clones the selected clip Its data type channel in out point duration is copied for use in the next clip to be included in the schedule list Edit button changes the description of the clip The clip data are loaded into the Data Fields and you can change them During editing the Edit button transforms to Cancel and Add to List button transforms to Apply The changes you ve made will be applied in the list by pressing the Apply button You can also edit a clip in the list by double clicking it Delete button removes the selected clip from the list If you select a grid entry and press the TOMOITOW button a new entry to the list will be created It will have the same data as that of the selected entry but its starting day will be on the following day In short this button performs a kind of to morro w cloning I 3 2 Clip Data Fields Folder D Temp e Free disk space 7697 MB The Folder field contains information about the file location of the captured clip Pressing the browse Channel 1 8TV ZlSr e button next
15. Audio streams 1 p 5 S Ee Audio st found Video stream information number of streams image width UE stereo 224 kbps g Total Ce and height in pixels video frame rate video bitrate Type of packs MPEG2 P f PES MPEG2 Audio stream information number of streams audio Juste 1172480 compression type audio sampling rate audio channels audio Stat Te 1053 3 000 bitrate Type of MPEG packages Type of PES packetized elementary stream a Muxrate the multiplexing rate in bps Duration of the clip in HH MM SS ms hours minutes seconds miliseconds 322 Fitters Stream Extra e w See as 2 Clip Zones el IR lm A Zone 1 This page is used for registering a set of timecodes points in the GAR ae clip Thus you can mark an initial or final timecode of an important oo zone in the clip For example in each movie there are predefined DEn commercial break points that might be used later for automated commercial slot insertion Those breakpoints can be defined in Clip Trimmer as single split points or zones blank stills that will be skipped and a commercial slot will be inserted instead To add a Zone set the cursor at the appropriate point and press the Add Zone button in the page or in the main window A yellow point appears in the trim bar showing the beginning of the zone You can define different zone types pressing the black arrow of the Add Zone button I
16. C Zoom Force Output Aspect Ratioy Aspect Convertion T R 98 AIRBOX 14x9 small parts in the top and the bottom of the video will remain off the screen Thinner black bars will appear on both sides Zoom the horizontal size of the video will be preserved Video will be cut equally on the top and in the bottom NOTE The Aspect Conversion will not result in image deformations It just cuts certain parts of the video 11 4 4 3 Soft Mixed plug in While other plug ins are MPEG 2 only or DV only compliant the Mixed playout plug in allows mixing files of different compressions and frame rates in the same playlist The adjustments provided here are the same as with the Software based BlackMagic Mixed Playout Plug in descried further NOTE This plug in supports transitions between clips in the playlist Please check the clip properties description for details 99 AIRBOX 11 4 4 4 DeckLink MPEG2 Output Se all The BlackMagic MPEG2 module settings General Logo Alpha Aspect Ratio About dialog contains four tabs gt ao The name of the General tab implies that Keying Type Flip fields there are some basic settings in it you None S gt See can select the Video standard and Cue delay 550 2 ms Keying type from the drop down lists to the left and then make some additional settings M Flip image check it to rotate the Decoder Setup X Cancel video
17. If you check the box underneath as well only files larger than the specified size will be deleted You could also manage files according to the free disc space IV Delete expired playlist files WIPE file directory E SafeBox CC on your computer el ees MI Maintain at least MB free space will delete any files regardless their type in order to achieve the required space M Do not delete files used in non expired playlist will check if the non expired ply files contain paths of files that are to be deleted according to the previous settings If this boxis checked such files will not be deleted The last check box concerns the management of playlist files ply that fit the expiration criteria IM Delete expired playlist files is checked all playlist files in the Destination directory that fit the expiration criteria will be deleted without notification If not checked the playlist files will not be deleted even if they have expired according to the criteria set above You can move all expired files to a specified folder Just check M Move expired files to and browse for the folder s location or enter its path in the string below NOTE The removal list that controls all removal move operations is updated each hour or at clicking OK in the Options dialog Therefore deleting and moving files will start about one hour after their expiry SafeBox can remove files according to predefined rem
18. NEW M Stop Capture on VTR ServoLock Lost this option is designed to prevent bad video capturing If for some reason the VTR reports lost servo lock CaptureBox will stop capturing and will send a Stop command to the VIR Thus you will be able to see the exact position of the bad tape In the Schedule page you can define Naming Type for the captured files They are AUTOMATICALLY formed using the original filename entered in the File Name field while in Schedule mode plus some kind of index to distinguish them from one another Increment name Zero Based the consequent file names will be formed by adding increasing numbers to the original file name The number in the original file name is always zero therefore this naming type is called Zen based In the Zero Based Settings field you can specify the number of digits to be displayed Increment name Calendar Based the names of consequent files will be formed by adding the subsequent calendar number of the capturing day to the original file name this number may vary from 1 to 365 366 in leap years nsert date inserts the capturing date in the filename If you choose this the Date position choose position before or after the file name and Date format fields will become active Same name Overwrite Thus each time CaptureBox starts schedule capturing it will write the data to the same file Below you can specify the date format and position NOTE
19. Year of Production 76 AIRBOX 11 4 2 Colors This option allows users to define the PlayList Timers Ee ss 4 colors used in AirBox s playlist for color coding as well as for timers Playlist colors Background playlist background Playing currently played clip Event event rows Cued a clip prepared for playback Missing missing file rows Note note comment line You can define colors for Normal and for Selected status of each playlist row Timer colors Clip timer colors for the progress bar and the letters in the Clip Timer Block timer colors for the progress bar and the letters in the Block Timer TC timecode timer colors for the progress bar and letters in the TC Timer Clic king on the desired color boxenables a combo box for choosing a color or defining a custom one Reset button resets the selected field to default colors All the screenshots in this User s Manual are made with default AirBox colors and all explanations are accorded to them T1 AIRBOX 11 4 3 Modules 11 4 3 1 Playback Here you can choose the active playback module depending on the installed hardware platform Select the desired module from the list of available modules in the upper window and assign it to the corresponding AirBox channel in the lower window by double clicking the module or by pressing the Set button This option allows you to start multiple AirBox ap
20. are used for changing the sequence files view list or 277 TITLEBOX After adding your animation to the preview area an additional toolbar becomes active To see it click on the animation object Speed D RangeFiom 4 2 To 23 ZE Loop Count D Stat 4 H End 19 A Select the desired Speed and how many times you want to Loop the animation This taskbar duplicates the range and loop setting in the Properties dialog box You can change those here as well choose a Range of animation frames to be displayed or activate deactivate the Loop option it enables leader loop trailer functionality CheckW it and select the range of frames within which you want to loop If this option is selected animation will start fromthe beginning run to the End frame and loop between Start and End frames If you want the animation to run as regular again just uncheck LJ the Loop option NOTE The From and Start fields represent the first frame that will be shown and the To and End fields represent the first frame that will NOT be shown Thus the difference between the To and From and between the End and Start values will equal the number of frames that will be shown in your sequence These numbers will be displayed in the status bar of the sequence properties dialog box Count stands for the total number of frames in the list Used stands for the number of frames in the working Range and Loop stands for the number of frames that will be loo
21. for picture objects only In the following two cells you can define the object s Speed and number of Loops Speed field controls the speed of dynamic objects such as animations crawls and rolls Its value can be positive right to left movement or negative left to right movement If zero the object is frozen NOTE You can change the speed interactively at any moment even when the object is running on air If the value in the eae field is 0 the object will be displayed endlessly bj 2 bet y p The next three buttons refer to the object s background continuity mode The first one means that background will be displayed only while text is running The second one will glue the texts one after another without any space in between The third button will display the background continuously The last two buttons in this toolbar concern the Queuing functionality After pressing one of these buttons Title Box will remember all new changes background colors dimension texts and text colors and will play them one after another i e you will be able to make a queue of changes loops If none of them is pressed TitleBox will show only the latest change You can choose how to switch between changes loops while in play mode 270 TITLEBOX Use if you want to display the subsequent loops one by one Le to leave some space between them empty or with background color depending on your settings
22. lt Shift gt selects from to while lt Ctrl gt adds asingle clip to the selection 11 3 3 Multi editing This feature allows you to edit data in several records simultaneously Select the records right click and choose Edit fromthe context menu A Multiple Records window opens It shows only the data fields that are identical for all the records Differing data appear as Various in the data fields NOTE Multiple records gt Instances fields do not subject to multi ed iting Therefore the Instances tab will not appear in the window at all After multi editing click OK and the changes you ve made will take effect in all the selected records I1 3 4 Sorting By clicking over a field column name you can sort the grid according to the data in that field I1 3 5 Filtering If you write a word in the row under a column s header you can filter the Grid by this word in the relevant field The way of updating the filtering result after lt Enter gt or after every key stroke is defined in Option gt Grid Filter options You can sort by one field and filter by another field at the same time NOTE When filtering is being made in the grid are shown only the records that correspond to this inquiry If you want to see all records delete the filtering word from the line I1 3 6 Right click menu Right click over a line in the database grid invokes the following context menu New Record opens an empty New Record d
23. see the previous paragraph In addition use if you do not want any space between the successive loops in the object TifleBox will generate one loop out of all loops in the queue Text and Background Properties You can edit the common text attributes such as font selection size color blur shadow etc and background attributes from another object specific toolbar It appears in the last row of the TitleBox toolbar when you double click a Roll Crawl object Another way to invoke it is by pressing the Property button P in the second row of the toolbar while a Crawl Roll object is selected single click Write the new texts directly in the object NOTE There is no possibility for inserting images as background but still you can insert images and OLE objects in the Roll Crawl objects xj Pressing IF invokes the Font formatting General window Here you can find all the formatting mmm Bold options as known from other windows based Charset Antialising 8 e editing ap p lications S Cuil z Hon Stike Ou Use the Fill Effect drop down list to modify WV Fl dv Outine KR Shadow gradient colors for your text AR pa aaea a a In the Font For matting dialog box click the CO t p a A o Effect Effect Blur e Offset Fill Effect button Shetek jo a p E Ce Select Gradient color from the drop down list I Contour b 3 Here you can have 255 levels of graded oe transparency and a vast
24. 0 x opens the following property window Field type Sequential Number v E Padto 4 Z Field type shows the field name It could be a random or a sequential number Pad to check it if you want to fill up the randon sequential number with a specific symbol and define the number of symbols This option is used when you want to visualize numbers with equal length For example if you define a Random number between 0 and 100 it will appear in House ID like that 2 34 98 5 etc If you check M the Pad to box define pad to 3 and the previously set padding symbol is zero it is defined in Option s gt Hou selD gt Number padding symbol the numbers will appear like that 002 034 098 005 BEE etc Field type SEPARATOR zl Symbol f o Choosing separator opens a property window where you can define the separator sign By default the separator sign is a slash Text padding symbol here you can define a symbol for filling up missing characters when the Pad up box is checked By default it is an interval Number padding symbol symbol for filling up missing digits when Pad up box is checked By default it is zero Sequential numbers this field contains the sequential number features presented in two pages 230 DATABOX L oca gt Sequential numbers Local DB Global This page concerns the generation of sequential numbers when Oo Tl the computer is in local mode Le the records
25. 8 Choose a name for the output MPG file this is not obligatory 9 Click the Multiplex Now button Congratulations You have just multiplexed your first FinishBox LE file 204 ll USER INTERFACE FinishBox LE always starts up in the last used mode There are two FinishBox LE modes Standard and Folder Watch I 1 Standard mode 9 j x Working with FinishBox LE is 7 e Source streams Batch List very simple and easy The D mpesa Discieet 2002 SMBNDs Go Standard interface is used for e one time mu Itip le xing of video e and audio streams e Y P e Inthe Source streams fields you need to select the Il Ip i vi de o avi file and the Dutput program stream 1 IV Auto Musrate JI Force Mux Rate f1 000 Kbits s audio wav file by usin g the D Multiplexed Discreet2002 Design Stop M E folder icon S or by drag n dropping the files When you select a video file and in the same folder there is an audio file with the same name it is loaded in FinishBox LE PROMES ee automatically If you use two mono audio files instead of one stereo audio file you have to keep the following naming convention for the left and the nght channels respectively lt filename gt al wav lt filename gt a2 wav or lt filename gt a3 wav lt filename gt a4 wav or lt filename gt _1 wav lt filename gt _2 wav or lt filename gt _3 wav lt filename gt _4 wav In case you use
26. If there is more than one board and or channels on the machine specify the one to output using the Channel drop down list In the Output Bitrate spin box specify the output bit rate If your content has lower bitrate than the specified AirBox will stuff it up to the specified value If you check M Dump to File a browse dialog will open for you to select the location of the MPEQG2 TS file to save the output stream Checking M Enable UDP Streaming box the user has to specify Address and Port for the ASI output video to be streamed via UDP during pumping the content TTL stands for time to live for the Internet packets The higher the TTL value the longer the packets will live and pass through more routers By default it is 1 which is enough for local networks If you check Multicast i e streaming to multiple machines you will have to enter a special multicast address in the Address field In the lower part of this dialog you can view the status of the plug in The O Active box is checked only during playout To the right you can see information about the number of streamed bytes IMPORTANT There will be no Preview window available using this plug in Graphics insertion and Video Resize Control events are not possible NOTE Should you need more information about the ASI solutions and workflo ws in PlayBox please contact support playboxtv We will be glad to provide you with the latest available ASI info pack 10
27. Location shows the file location full path Star contains data fed by DataBox describing the talents in the clip Notes contains data from fields specified in DataBox Options gt General gt Fields to AirBox Notes or in ListBox 2l AIRBOX TIP You can change the columns order by drag n dropping them TIP A double click in the first column that contains the items numbers will invoke the clip properties dialog Double clicking in any other column will open the Clip Trimmer if it is enabled in Settings menu General see the description further in this manual 28 AIRBOX I1 8 2 Color coding The color coding of the playlist rows provides additional information to the user e Pink row outlines the currently playing clip It is visible in PLAY and PAUSE modes only e Yellow row it is visible only while switching between clips It shows which clip will be played next In that moment the yellow clip is being actually fed into the decoder circuit This happens during the last couple of seconds before the end of the previous clip The clip cannot be moved trimmed or deleted anymore Just for comparison competitive playout solutions tend to permanently lock the clip after the currently playing one which reduces on air fle xibility and your last minute decision freedom e Blue row indicates the currently selected clip all actions ie Jump Move Up Down will be applied to it e Red row
28. Result g Inserts the contents of the file as an object into P your document so that you may activate it using bala the program which created it 212 TITLEBOX 1 TIP When a Roll Crawl or Text object is linked to a text file you can insert a still picture in the text the image will be displayed among the characters according to the position of its script in the text Write the following command in the text file lt BITMAP gt file path of the image file lt BITMAP gt Make sure that BITMAP is written in capital letters Here is an example 1 Save your image Let us assume the file name is logo bmp located on D 2 Enter the text in a txt file for example Hello this is a test project 3 Continue writing the following lt BITMAP gt D logo jpg lt BITMAP gt Thus your txt file will read Hello this is a test project lt BITMAP gt D logo j pg lt B ITMAP gt It could also be Hello this lt B ITMAP gt D logo j pg lt BITMAP gt is a test project or Hello this is a lt BITMAP gt D logo jpg lt B ITMAP gt test project etc Every time you edit the text and save the changes the text on the output will be refreshed If you want to change the picture change the file name and location part in the script here D logo jpg If you want to insert an animated GIF file in the text write lt MOVIE gt instead of lt BITMAP gt For example Hello this is a test project lt MOVIE gt D smilie
29. gt X dee Apa5 28 Seel D 28 Ae 28 E Artisbas Jj Deg a3 EE TitleBox 3D E X Corcel The second picture shows aspect 2 BET b x deg Aipha 25 gt i cake 00 Hsi Aspect W Artika Position z xa EE Dee a3 Rotation Ammation 3D Text z TitleBox 3D 5 X Core Check Antialias check box at the top of property s window to use anti aliasing engine for the object At the top of the Properties window there are three more icons Load Texture Clear Texture and Background color Background color is used for selecting the background color Load Texture is used if you want to put a specific graphic as a texture of the text See the example 291 TITLEBOX zl E Cece Clear texture is used if you want to delete the texture At the right side of the Properties window there are settings for Position Rotation Animation and 3D Text properties At the nght of each Properties area there is a Reset button Press it to reset all changed values The Position of the object can be defined according to the X Yand Z coordination system The Z position corresponds to the viewer camera distance to the object If you want to bring the object closer to the viewer you have to decrease the Z value If you want to take away the object from the viewer you have to increase the Z value Using the Rotation parameters enables you to rotate the objects around X Y and Z axes If
30. is used for locking the Clip name to the File name Any changes you make in either field will automatically occur in the other In the File Name field you can enter a name for the captured file If the field is left empty it will be automatically filled with the Clip name Add to List button transfers the clip data into the schedule capture list Clear Clip button clears all clip data Crash Capture button begins capturing of the available channel immediately and without confirmation irrespective of the entered schedule list Prepare Capture opens a dialog boxasking for confirmation to begin capturing of the available channel instantly independent of the entered schedule list 196 CAPTUREBOX I1 3 3 RS 422 Controller Each VTR with RS 422 SONY protocolcan be EAS used in CaptureBox Switching the active e Eiect Gto window between the main and this one is done _a gt ul al J Ret by pressing the lt Insert gt key It is possible to M Tape AutoEE _ Confia attach this window to the main one by moving rrutte m Beci TPT it close to any of its edges Thus the VTR control panel will move together with the main window Here is a short description of the VTR control panel The VTR brand is displayed in the window s caption If there is no connection the text Not Connected will appear Display Indicators TCR has three possible states TCR normally read timecode T R corrected timecode TCG gen
31. naming automatically 128 AIRBOX Playback recovery options Here you can specify what should AirBox do in case of accidental restart abnormal termination of the module The fo llo wing options are available if AirBox is not running in daily playlist mode Last playback status Play Pause Stop if chosen resumes the last playback status of AirBox depending on the status in which it was before stopping Last played item from the last playlist applies playback status to the last running object before stopping This option doubles the first one and cannot be selected without it Last played position in the last played item functions as of the two previous options and even more remembers the position in the last item to resume status exactly at it The interval for saving the last position is changeable Catch up wth schedule according the system clock this option allows playlist recovery after a failure and synchronizing it with the system Clock When setting this option you should bare in mind that the default start time for all playlists in AirBox is 00 00 00 hours Therefore if you have started your playlist manually after a power failure AirBox will resume playback from that point in the playlist which corresponds to the initial time 00 00 00 plus the current system clock time For example you start your playlist manually at 9 00 o clock at 9 30 occurs a power failure that persists till 10 00 After
32. sec cell the least allowable is 10 Below you can set the maximum allowable difference in seconds between the Master and the Slave playback If the difference goes beyond this value the Slave machine will have to resynchronize to the Master Playback offset value compensates the delay that may occur because of some additional factors e g the network communication delay or backup playback reaction time Check M Synchronize the playlist also if you want to check the playlists at each resynchronization This is a double insurance in case some playlist data is lost during the IP communication It is possible to group several Slave machines to operate together The Group related settings are situated in the bottom of the Setup dialog The purpose of Grouping is described in the example below Let us assume that we have three Master AirBox channels Their outputs are connected to one external device let us call it MasterOut The output of Master Out sends the three signals together as a Multiple xer would do There are three Slave AirBox machines listening to the three Master machines The outputs of the Slaves are connected to another external device similar to that of the Masters we will call this device SlaveOut The outputs of MasterOut and SlaveOut are connected to a switcher In case any of the masters fails for example AirBox 2 Slave 2 will take over the playout But the MasterOut device will be outputting only the s
33. 1 2 another output stream but em S e VBR Quali 10 Max Bi 0 with different Bitrate press umn SC e zess Add button A new SE HESS numbered button will appear Press it and select new streams settings It is possible to define up to 8 streams In the Audio tab you can choose the audio Codec to be used as well as the audio format IMPORTANT This plug in requires installing Windows Media Format Runtime files versions 10 0 or later in order to operate properly NOTE You can insert only MPEG 2 files in your playlists 123 AIRBOX I11 4 4 16 Mixed IP WMV Stream This plug in was designed to allow our users stream Windows Media Video streams to the network The difference when compare to the IP WMV streaming plug in is that the IP WMV streamer supports only MPEG 2 compressed files while in Mixed IP WM V streamer you can use all supported file formats in the same play list MPEG 2 DV MXF DivX etc Output settings here in Mixed IP WMV are identical to these described above for IP WM V Please check the details there NOTE This plug in requires installing Windows Media Format Runtime files versions 10 0 or later in order to operate properly IMPORTANT 24 bit audio is not supported 124 11 4 5 Logo In this configuration dialog logo images are set for displaying in AirBox their position on the screen transparency etc Logo Preset field contains a list of logo presets available for use To
34. Add e Media Files Adds existing clip s in the playlist Browse in the dialog opening to point which clip s you d like to append or insert e Note Adds acomment line in the a tk e Dummy Clip The Dummy Clip xl invokes a special dialog box for adding Seal or inserting virtual clips in the playlist Title The Two Towers Mir You can use this option when you want Fle Two Towers Trailer3mpg zl Cal to build your playlist prior to receiving a Location d Captued 03 299 zip clip whose properties are already known N Jb mnn Duration OOOO AirBox will mark it as Missing but out boom me mm when it becomes available it could be Housed z F TeeD s2 z OF used right away Sta Mke dl Categow Traies zl P In the General tab fill in the Title aE File name and Location of the clip The i ee IN and OUT points the Duration and the Timecode are also editable If you want to write the Category Starand Previous X Cancel gt gen Notes You can make the module reme mber each last string entry by checking the boxnext to its row If you want to choose the File type or leave it as Auto J Set out point of live item IT Live delayed file 39 AIRBOX Use the Fixed time tab if you would like the dummy clip to start at a specific point in time Check the Properties dialog description for details on fixed time settings Add some more info about the file in the Metadata tab You can use this
35. Clip Shots Use this page to extract shots from the video clip To create a shot stop the playhead at the desired frame and press the Add CS button The shot as a thumbnail and its time code are displayed in the tab You can change the shot s name Scene No by default manually To delete a shot select it and press the Delete CS button To extract a shot to a file select it and press the Export A button A browse window appears to select the file name type jpg or bmp and location To set ashot as thumbnail of a file press the Thumbnail 9 button I 4 Clip Streams This feature is applicable in case the file contains more than one video and or audio stream Here you can choose which of them to view listen during playback The check boxes M in front the relevant streams show their playback status The checked streams will be loaded in the playlist after clicking and will be played in their turn The green ticks serve for previewing the desired streams if you click on the single tick you will preview only the selected stream If you click on the double tick you will preview all the streams simultaneously If you preview several audio streams they will be mixed up If the streams are video the preview window will split according to the number of streams up to 32 Use the blue arrows to move streams up and down the list 324 Stream Extra Shots Filters Info Zones wwa
36. Concerto Switcher Output is an event which gives you the ability to control Concerto series of routing switchers When you choose it you will be able to see the dialog to the right Double click on the relevant Level to specify the number of inputs and outputs in it After that specify the commands in the grid it will reflect your Configure settings If you choose the Command mode you ll have to press OK to insert the event in the playlist In Online mode you can control the matrix switcher in real time You can also set an event offset if necessary BER Re Bupa Supa 2 ae Joe Owras upne Joe Sa E Deco Sz ey Refresh IT Auto refresh Mode OFFLINE ONLINE DI Run event 3 EZ earlier DI Clear commands X Cancel 45 AIRBOX Elpro Switcher Output d BE Imputi ber re Jeer Jeer rer inputz berg Freen 2 NEE i H l me SSeS 4udio Follow video Keel EECH Mode reee mme Command C onli Refresh Run event g zj ms Jearlier DI Clear commands EEN X Cancel This feature activates the Elpro Switcher output When you choose it the dialog to the left appears The first thing you have to do is to configure the number of inputs and outputs of the switcher Then you have to specify the desired input output configuration You can switch the Video and Audio separately or together The user can work using two modes Command and Onl
37. IP H 264 Stream MPEG 2 Playback is an optional streaming plug in In it MPEG 2 files are decoded graphics is inserted if necessary and video and audio streams are encoded in H 264 format Then the H 264 Streams are multiplexed in MPEG 2 TS and sent to the network Please check the setup details in the Settings gt Output menu section NOTE Currently the only supported source file format is MPEG 2 NOTE The IP H 264 Stream is an optional plug in and is not a part of the standard AirBox functionality IP WMV Stream MPEG 2 Playback an optional streaming plug in In it MPEG 2 files are decoded graphics is inserted if necessary and video and audio streams are encoded in WMV format Please check the setup details in the Settings gt Output menu section NOTE Currently the only supported source file format is MPEG 2 NOTE The IP WMV Stream is an optional plug in and is not a part of the standard AirBox functionality Mixed IP WMV Stream an optional streaming plug in The only difference according to the previous plug in is that the IP WMV streamer supports only MPEG 2 compressed files while the Mixed IP WMV streamer supports different file formats in the same playlist MPEG 2 DV MXF DivX etc NOTE The IP WM V Stream is an optional plug in and is not a part of the standard AirBox functionality 79 AIRBOX I11 4 3 2 Remote Control The available modules for remote control in AirBox are GPI General Purpose In
38. LT 2 2 EE 202 IT 2 3 EE 202 ITT 2 4 EE ENEE 202 E EE 202 US CAPTO VIN a acct peer ee E ee 203 HT 3 1 COTO SION eege 203 LT 3 2 deht 203 IT 3 3 Delco BICC osre ENE 203 IIT 3 4 EE 203 IT 3 5 EE 203 IIT 3 6 GEELEN 203 FINISHBOX E EEN 204 L GETTING STARIED oran n eegen 204 Le U A WE 204 IDN DATEN NOT E Ni IEN 205 II STANDARD EE 205 II 2 FOLD E WAT a eee sardaa dere mpore adic uengteeee ease 207 DAT AB 8 E 209 L GHETING SEAR TED eene eeneg 209 Pi SEU EK WEE 209 IL Ee Ee 210 If 1 EE MER 210 III Classification scheme and Credite 210 Hi CQ UCICCS Ee 211 IELTS eege eege e 212 PETA TN DUWCA NOLE eiaeaen 213 EZ SEARCH NR 213 II 3 BV a E 215 e EE EE 216 TT 3 2 Multt seiectton odere ini rA AT in Ea 216 E EE 216 EE 216 TES E EE 216 IL3 6 EE Eege 216 IN E EEN 219 EN fN RRND a aco uacwnrieseeeeconctueanseosaneeaiens 219 HLA INE TREC ORD E 219 II 2 1 OT Ee 220 II 2 2 Ee 221 III 73 Eeer 225 III 2 4 Ee 225 11 2 5 PRA GION teg 226 III 70 HEES EEN 226 Uo ug e E 221 10 3 1 EE 227 ITT 3 2 YUE EEN 228 ID 3 3 TT EE 229 TOTS DO EE 232 II 3 5 FDOT IOV EEE EE E E yan 233 II 3 6 ENEE 234 TT 3 7 TCE ID a E E E ecient enoenabonscied 235 TIT 3 8 Drag and Dn 237 Hs MEDA TYPES erriei ioiai n E a ine usenet ton aii eniti tt 238 HES OA a Ea 238 THEG CLASSIFICATION EE 239 UE CR Oe E EE 240 UE E 240 II SC MEDIA FOLDER EE 241 MT gn EE 243 I GETTING STARTED ce ers acie sass coos ce ccc
39. MAM supports a web based interface from which web users can control all AirBo xes included in the MAM Monitoring list depending on their user rights Multi AirBox Manager also referred to as MAM hereafter must be run on a computer in your LAN Local and remote AirBox channels are controlled equally well The Multi AirBox Manager allows users to activate all playback commands and do some simple playlist editing such as inserting deleting playlist items loading and saving new playlists Thus the AirBox interface will have to be invoked only for sophisticated playlist editing inserting of events clip trimming etc and module setting I GETTING STARTED 1 Installation Where to Install it Multi AirBox Manager is usually installed on one of the computers in your local network WARNING If there is a firewall that blocks UDP port 8080 or TCP port 80 either on the AirBox or on the MAM PC MAM will not see any AirBox channels neither local nor over the network Instant messengers could occupy TCP port 80 Therefore you have to disable them prior to starting the MAM application 1 2 Quick Start Launch MultiAirBox Manager Push the Add all online AirBoxes to monitoring list button Go to the control panel of one of the online AirBoxes Press Play Stop or another button depending on your needs 333 USER INTERFACE fz Multi airon manager axi File Options T 7 7 mm qim dmt test 1 m branimira
40. TCI import 4 gt In the left of this page are listed all available data fields Data Fields List Name the name of the data field Language the default language of the field Mostly used for non Latin languages It defines which keyboard locale will be used when entering data in the particular field Visible Each field could be visible Yes or not No in the Grid To switch the visibility status of a field just double click it Fixed columns Custom columns F Show only archive media type a F Color coding fills entire row ii Clear quick search on field change Font Ms Sans Serif v Filter options C update on Enter update on every keypress Tree view Iw View unassigned keywords Iw View unassigned persons Iw View unassigned companies Iw View unassigned countries Select All Select None Reset Grid Invert selection Ka va A K C K A C C C zw Buttons These buttons are valid only for to the fields area Select All button sets all fields visible Select None button sets all fields to invisible Reset Grid button resets the fields settings as defined in the program Invert selection button inverts all settings Check boxes Show only archive media type In the Media type column shows only Media type sthat have Archive flag see the Media types section below for further details Color coding fill entire row fills the
41. Target file the Excel file name to which you want to export the data Use it if you have a previously created Excel file For example you could prepare a template form in MS Excel to be filled with records from Data Box If you leave the Target file field empty or type a non existing file name a new Excel file will be created book 1 xls by default 217 DATABOX Sheet name enter the name ofa sheet in the Excel file If you don t the data will be exported to the first sheet in the file In the following fields you can define the export details DataBox Field which field fromthe record description in DataBox should be exported Excel Cell type the type of the cell text number etc Start cell the number of the first cell in MS Excel from which on will be placed the exported data Increment the cell s increment Direction the direction of filling the cells in the MS Excel s table down or right Options Crop defines the number of symbols from DataBox field content that will be exported Pad to the number of symbols which should appear in Excel s table for the respective field It is used if you select cropping but the DataBox s field does not contain enough symbols In such cases you can complete it with some symbol a padding symbol Pad type the padding symbol type symbol or number Symbol the padding symbol itself Each DataBoxX field you want to export s
42. This feature can be used for simple cuts only splicing editing and joining of MPEGZ2 files Pressing the play button while working in this mode will open a browse dialog for saving the resulting file There are no setup options for this plug in NOTE This feature works faster than the real time For example a 15 minute playlist compiles as a single file for less than 10 minutes The speed depends on the HDD performance and the input output stream configuration 78 AIRBOX IP Pump MPEG Program Dumper An optional plug in that sends the playback stream to a network IP address instead to a decoder The IP Pump uses a standard UDP mechanism for data transfer Please see the Settings menu description Output section for the P Pump Setup window IMPORTANT There is no VGA Overlay preview in this mode There is no graphics insertion in with this plug in NOTE The IP Pump is an optional plug in and is not a part of the standard AirBox functionality IP Stream MPEG 2 Playback An optional plug in that sends the playback stream to a network IP address instead to a decoder Its advantage in comparison to the IP Pump plug in is that it provides the possibility of inserting graphics in the MPEG 2 stream and there is preview of the output video Please check the setup details below in the Settings gt Output menu section NOTE The IP Stream is an optional plug in and is not a part of the standard AirBox functionality
43. This is the main information form about the new entry Title string contains the entry s name If the entry has been created by drag n dropping this string is automatically filled Title Europ ssistance Template record HouselD ea 002724 Generate Sequence _ NONE v Episode a Season Duration S Lili v Creat BMK v with the filename without its extension Maia See NM Template record if you check it We IT 3 the record will become a template record Geet Temp late records are very useful for creating Be 207 1212 d EO sequences that comprise of many records sli with the same data When the record is a template the following fields in this page are not editable House ID Episode No Instances notes and Instance s location Apply changes when Previous or Next buttons are clicked NOTE If the template record is intended for oe Roe a sequence and there are any series created to this sequence you cannot edit the template record anymore House ID Typically the House ID is a unique identification of production house including some extra data such as production date and or version etc The House Id can be entered manually or generated automatically depending on your settings Options gt HouselD See the appropriate user s manual section for detailed description Generate button you can press it if the HouselD Automatic generation option has been activated be
44. When a fixed time clip starts a Event is located after the fixed time clip but its negative offset is before the fixed time The event is executed immediately b Event is located before the fixed time clip and after the gap Both from play and from stop mode the event will be executed on time even with a negative offset c Event is located before the fixed time clip and among the skipped clips The event is executed as at jump after operation See point 3 above both from play and from stop modes 5 Gaps behave the same way as clips regarding event offsets 6 Starting a fixed time clip behaves the same way as jumping to it regarding event offsets 7 Logo events behave in a different way when jumping to a clip the last logo event before the clip is executed 8 Video scaling events should behave like logo events but at this time they don t They now act as standard external events 351 PLAQBOX APPENDIX 3 VDCP Implementation Chart Command Code Req Port Implemented System cmLocalDisable 000C cmLocalEnable 000D cmDeleteFromArchive 0014 cmDeleteProtectID 0015 cmUnDeleteProtectID 0016 Imediate cmsStop H cmPlay 1001 cm Record 1002 e e A cmFreeze 1003 cmStill 1004 cmStep 1005 cmContinue 1006 cmJog 1007 e cmVariPlay 1008 cmUnFreeze 1009 cmEEMode 100A Preset Select cmRenamelD 201D cmPresetStdTime 201E cmNewCopy 201F cmSortMode 2020 c
45. You can un assign a category either through un checking it in the METADATA list or by selecting Clear from the drop down list Select Bulk if you wish to skip a column When the preset is ready press the Save button to store it in the Templates folder Press the Validate button to check if the current template matches a specific file To load the currently selected template in the Template preset string press the Pick button If you already have some templates and you select one of them fromthe drop down list push the Load button to load it its settings will be displayed in the grid Back in the Import Tab Delimited Playlist dialog you can set a default template by pushing the Save As Default Template button NOTE Do not use the Start time tolerance spin box it is related to AirBoxonly e The Folder button allows loading a list preliminary prepared in CaptureBox with clips ready for capturing cap file The name of the current list is written in the title bar of the module right after CaptureBox If the list has been changed and not saved an asterisk appears after its name e The Diskette button saves the current capture list to a file which can be used later e The Clone button clones the selected clip Its data title file name in out point duration are copied in the right hand panel for use in the next entry of the batch capture list This functionality could save time for entering almost the same data f
46. and data from the fields defined in DataBox gt Options gt General Fields to AirBox notes You can edit these notes in the clip properties dialog in ListBox TIP You can choose the columns to be shown in the grid Go to Settings menu gt General Grid and check the ones you would like to see If you d like to change the 245 columns order rearrange them in this dialog or simply drag their headers while working in the playlist 1 3 Status Bar Total duration 00 46 58 1 Loop at 15 08 55 1 Selection 00 09 42 0 Mixed Soft Playback The Status bar is located along the lowest part of the ListBox window Its first cell Total Length shows the playlist duration If it is longer than 24 hours the number of days will be displayed in brackets in front The figure in parenthesis in the end shows the number of rows in the list The Second field End at Loop at shows when the playlist will end if the playlist is longer than 24 hours the number of days will be displayed in brackets in front The third cell Selection Length represents the duration of the currently highlighted lines in the grid The fourth cell displays the currently active lug in NOTE ListBox is always running on the Software Mixed plug in As this plug in supports virtually all file formats please go to Settings menu gt Module s gt Output and select the plug in you are planning to use in AirBox This will allow for correct file verific
47. module and describes its workflow and specifics in detail The underlying sections will give you enough information to succeed in getting all the tasks done Incase something is not clear enough please examine the FAQ section at PlayBox website http www playbox tv the answers of almost all questions that might arise during operation can be found there Our support team will be at your disposal in case you have specific questions or a non typical problem Do not hesitate to contact us at support playbox tv NOTE The features described below may vary from system to system depending on the hardware used This user s manual contains a description of all possible features Please contact your dealer and describe your needs so you could be advised properly AIRBOX GETTING STARTED LI Quick Start Verify all connections and start the workstation Make sure that you have suitable content available in the media folders 3 Ifyou do not have any available use the sample clips from the PlayBox CD Launch AirBox Click the Add button Select the files you wish to playout and click the Open button Click the PLA Y button You should now see AirBox video on your video output ao go zb Sy Yt oe Congratulations You have just launched your first AirBox playout session ll USER INTERFACE The main interface window is divided into several areas I 1 Title Bar This is the topmost horizontal bar of the AirBox wind
48. playbox tv Helpdesk fax number 359 2 9717700 13 PLAQBOX Style Conventions File names software documents or terms are written in italics The data is written in the settings ini file The file is located in C Program Files DMT AirBox For further information read Shortcuts reference book The VTR is controlled via RS 422 Direct quotations from the computer screen are presented as follows Menu Items and commands Tab Page names Column names i e in a playlist or another grid Field names check boxes Buttons Screen readings are written in square brackets The keyboard keys are enclosed in lt gt signs Terms are described in the Glossary at the end of the manual The arrows used in setting procedures mean as follows gt A menu item follows A page tab name follows 7 gt A field name a check box name ora value name follows Except for arrows you can distinguish between the relevant menu categories also by the stiles listed above 14 PLAQBOX Overview L PLAY BOX MODULES The PlayBox system consists of several modules dedicated to separate applications that communicate with each other by proprietary protocols based on TCP IP and UDP AirBox The most important part of a transmission automation system It performs on air playback and control The module is designed for uninterrupted 24 hours 7 days a week content playout from online media storage It c
49. rC LAN control J IP address 192 168 040 Pot 12345 x Conca x The configuration dialog represents the LAN setup for controlling Concerto switchers Fill in the P address and Port number of the switcher and press OK Quartz Matrix Switcher Output Ther are two possibilities for controlling the s witcher Local mode check it if the switcher is connected to one of the PC COM ports select it in the drop down list below Network mode check it if the Elpro switcher is connected to another AirBox server somewhere into the local area network Specify the Server P address and the Port number and press OK button Remote switcher mode IP 192 168 10 39 Port 8199 A Cancel 85 AIRBOX NetworkElectronics switcher output Network lectronics switcher sept R IP address 192 168 11 22 The configuration dialog represents the setup for pat a controlling the switcher Fill in the P address and Port number of the switcher and press OK GPI x AirBox has two GPI modes GPI Input Input Output where AirBox works as a GPI Slave and GPI Output where AirBox works as a GPI Master The GPI functionality is optional and is not a standard part of the AirBox module In order to use it you must obtain a relevant license If you have a licensed GPI option you can define which mode to be enabled or both of them by double clicking the Enabled field You c
50. shows the video clip which is being trimmed Pressing the right mouse button over the Preview screen invokes a context menu with the most frequently used commands in Trimmer See the screenshot to the left 1 2 Trimmer Control Once a clip is loaded you can navigate and edit it using the Clip Trimmer controls In EN Duration EN Out EN ER EK MRNA MORIR EAP Position Details Total Duration TORRI Lg ln Weer i The follo wing boxes are situated under the preview window In box displays the In point timecode Out box displays the Out point timecode Duration box displays the clip duration It is equal to the difference between Jo and Out points After entering the In and Out timecodes the Duration value will be calculated automatically Moreover after entering the In and Duration values the Out point timecode will be calculated automatically It is possible to lock the In Out or Duration value but not all the three of them of course by clicking on the lock icon to the right of the box Thus you can protect their values from changing by mistake for example To enter values in the In Out or Duration box you can use the arrows beside them or type numbers in the boxes Position boxcontains the timecode of the currently selected point in the clip If you type another timecode in this box and press lt Entef gt the marker will move to the relevant position Total Duration box displays t
51. the XSL file is needed to transform the XML file to coma separated text table If you have a header line check the check box Treat first raw as header Press More button to see the source xml file the related xls file and the result of the transformation In order to see the Result first press pla button Instance Configuration XML D Demo Weather xml XLS D DemolWeather xslt Treat First row as header Engine MSXML 6 0 O Use out of process transformation Sat SUNNY Sun PARTLY CLOUDY Mon FAIR Tues FAIR Wed PARTLY CLOUDY Conditions SUNNY PARTLY CLOUDY FAIR FAIR PARTLY CLOUDY SS 313 TITLEBOX VI 6 HTML Table Data Provider Choosing this plug in allows you to insert data into TitleBox object from an html file Choose it from the list of available plug ins and press Add button The following window will open Instance Configuration URL File path D Demolarrival2 html Empty value string Header Format Column 0 Tables found in HTML Selected table 0 Column 1 Column Column 3 OO Trainm OO Tostat OO ArrivincOO Delay C OO 13207100 BankyaOO 14 320 OO 08610000 Burgas OO 14 340 O0 50206000 PernikCOO 14 34C URL File path enter here the location of your html table Empty value string enter here the string which you want to be visible if there are no data into the table Header format the format of the table header By default it is Column 0
52. to control Kramer Matrix Switchers from AirBox This plug in is also optional AirBox supports the entire series of Kramer Remote mode matrix switchers They provide switching between Senf localhost 16 12 10 8 6 or 4 video and balanced unbalanced audio and video inputs to 16 12 10 8 6 or 4 outputs video mid audio The matrixes are mt EIS controlled via RS 232 and or RS485 422 communication ports Justselect the appropriate COM port For more detailed information about various Kramer matrix switchers look up in http www kramerelectronics com 87 AIRBOX TIP t Use the Remote mode to send commands to the Kramer Matrix server Thus you could control one matrix from several AirBox channel simultaneously NOTE This plug in also supports all Kramer switchers that are protocol 2000 compatible such as Kramer VS 1201 xl VS 1001 xl VS 801xl VS 601 xl VS 401xl and VS 1211 VS 1011 VS 811 VS 611 VS 411 They provide switching between 12 10 8 6 or 4 video and balanced unbalanced audio inputs to one output video and audio Please check your switcher manual for instructions on how to change the control protocol or contact support playboxtv IMPORTANT Play Box modules DO NOT support the Deck Control connector supplied on the DeckLink breakout cable Leitch Matrix Switcher Output AirBox can control Leitch Matrix Switchers either through the computer COM port or using the IP address o
53. 2 4 MBM will watch the playlist of each newly added AirBox Master 5 In case of failure MBM will replace it with one fromthe Slaves you have specified V 2 USER INTERFACE The main window of this application is consisting of a TOOLBAR MASTER AND SLAVE CONFIGURATION FIELDS ACTIVE SWITCHES MONITORING WINDOW and LOG VIEW 168 AIRBOX CC Multi Backup Manager Ox Ox E ae aster 4B lave Ab Online 4B 192 168 50 36 1 W 192 168 50 36 2 192 168 50 36 2 El Prefered slaves 192 168 50 36 4 F 192 168 50 36 1 192 168 50 36 2 PB Alarm events TitleBox Alarm 192 168 50 36 8 192 168 50 36 3 F eg Prefered slaves 192 168 50 36 4 F Alarm events 192 168 50 65 1 192 168 50 20 1 10 10 2008 r 10 10 2008 r 10 10 2008 r 10 10 2008 r 10 10 2008 r 10 10 2008 r 10 10 2008 r 10 10 2008 r 10 10 2008 r 10 10 2008 r 09 53 10 192 168 50 36 1 connected 09 53 10 Alarm from TitleBox Alarm Plugin Channel 192 168 50 36 1 Text TitleBox 192 168 50 31 09 53 10 Alarm rised TitleBox Alarm 192 168 50 36 8015 1 initiate switch 09 53 10 192 168 50 36 1 is offline 09 53 10 Selecting prefered slave 192 168 50 36 2 09 53 10 192 168 50 36 1 has been replaced by 192 168 50 36 2 09 53 11 Cannot connect to 192 168 50 36 3 09 53 11 Cannot connect to 192 168 50 36 4 09 53 11 192 168 50 65 1 connected 09 53 11 192 168 50 20
54. 22 66 86 Here you set modify a template which tells AirBox how to interpret the fixed width text file which contains the playlist In the Template drop down list type the template name Click the Sample File button to select an example of the text file that will be imported with this template This te xt file will be loaded in the data preview field which is situated at the lower part of the Playlist Template Builder dialog The actual columns in this sample text are not separated Each of themcontains a fixed number of symbols To define the columns width you have to signify column breaks For facility s sake there is a symbol re lated ruler To create a break line left click at the desired position To move a break line click and drag it To delete a break line double click on the line 35 AIRBOX To increase and decrease the width of the created grid use the mouse scroll While sliding the mouse within the data preview window near the pointer you can see an indicator of the symbols passed from the start of the ruler For example 24 After separating the columns left click within the bar under the ruler to specify what kind of data the relevant column is containing for example Title Filename Duration etc Click the Save button to save the template and the Pick button to load it 11 1 6 Save playlist This command saves the current playlist file The saved file contains the names of all clips arranged
55. CREDITS manager in the Main Menu Countries Locations here are described the countries that have taken part in the making of content Several countries could be added to each activity except to Country of origin The selected Country of origin is displayed in New Record gt General Country Companies companies took part in content creation Several companies could be added to each activity except to Company creator The selected Company creator is displayed in New Record gt General gt Company People artists that have participated in the making of content Several people could be added to each activity except to Star The Star is displayed in New Record gt General Star H1 2 5 Additional Here you can enter additional information about the record like Plot Outline Taglines Comments and Trivia 11 2 6 Custom properties EuropAssistance properties General Instances Classification Credits Additional Custom properties In this window the user can add any HH additional fields not existing in DataBox custom Del custom field2 Press the Plus button to add new field line Click in the line and add new custom property or select one from a list of existing custom properties In the relative Value field enter the content of this new custom property If you want to delete a property select it and p Tess Mi nus button Apply changes when Previous or Next buttons are clicked Note All c
56. D1 videos that are Half D1 2 3 D1 etc will be converted 96 AIRBOX All Input Formats all source formats will be processed Belo w are situated the conversion options You can force the Outout Aspect Ratio to 4 3 or 16 9 or leave it on Auto Auto means that the source aspect will be preserved Depending on the other settings and the differences between the source video and the desired output format adjust the appropriate Aspect Conversions Type WSS tab WSS stands for SE WSS present YES Widescreen Signalling this is the digital stream embedded in the Eug 7 video signal that carries the Signa information about the Aspect Ratio oO 16x9 of the currently represented image V Copy WSS Data It is situated in the first visible row TEE of each frame This is a code iS Send dened Rhange Eca containing descriptions When the receiver reads these descriptions it understands in what kind of aspect to represent each picture 4 3 or 16 9 This tab contains the following settings WSS Present provides information on whether there is a component which can read the WSS or not The BR tmel Signal square in the Control field keeps you informed about whether there is a signal If it 1s red there is no WSS stream If it is green in the brackets there is information about the aspect of this signal If M Copy WSS data is checked the WSS will be copied to the right place in case of scaling
57. DEL CH OH OCH AirBox control panels All AirBoxchannels that are loaded for monitoring can be controlled through separate panels grouped in tabs Originally each tab contains four AirBoxcontrol panels but if you choose to view the Channel browsing window in the far right of your MAM window the number of control panels per tab will reduce to three The header of each channel panel reads the PC name and the instance number You can edit these to your convenience in the Name string Above it are situated two buttons Activate local AirBox will show the main AirBox window of the selected channel as long as it is activated on the MAM machine Thus you can switch easily between the MAM interface and the local AirBox channels A Lock this panel will keep the selected panel always on top This will rearrange the channels in all other tabs Under the Name string you will find several buttons providing simple playback and playlist management commands All buttons provide hints NOTE Like in AirBox you will not be allo wed to insert clips in an already passed point of the playlist A progress bar is situated below the playlist control buttons It corresponds to the Clip Timer in AirBox However unlike in AirBox it cannot be switched to count down mode The predominant part of each channel control panel is occupied by a Filet mate reduced copy of the playlist It contains only two columns You can cere selec
58. Dalmatians Making 2 Mak 175 KEA CINEMA Comedy Family 101 dalmat Walt Disne Expired 6 102 Dalmatians Making 3 Mak 176 HERE CINEMA Comedy Family 101 dalmat Walt Disne H 102 Dalmatians Trailer 1 Tra 177 Film Traile COMMERCI Comedy Family 101 dalmat Walt Disne 8 102 Dalmatians Trailer 2 COMMERC Comedy Family 101 dalm Walt Dis 9 102 Dalmatians Trailer 3 Tra 179 COMMERCI Comedy Family 101 dalmat Walt Disne American Pie Trailer 2 Ame 169 COMMERCI Comedy pie Universal 11 Bourne Identity The Making Mak 54 Making CINEMA Action action Bou Universal 12 Boume Identity The MoviePart 1 Mov 50 CINEMA Action action Bou Universal 13 Bourne Identity The MoviePart 2 Mov 51 CINEMA Action action Bou Universal 14 Bourne Identity The MoviePart 3 Mov 52 CINEMA Action action Bou Universal 15 Bourne Identity The MoviePart 4 Mov 53 CINEMA Action action Bou Universal 16 Charlie s Angels Making COMM 002213 Estate CINEMA leather Columbia 17 Charlie s Angels MusicVideo 1 COMM 0043 k MUSIC Columbia 18 Charlie s Angels MusicVideo 2 COMM 0010 Musi is MUSIC Columbia 19 Charlie s Angels Trailer 1 COMM 0024 5 an COMMERCI Action Comedy leather Columbia Charlie s Anoels Trailer COMM NN 1 Fe COMMPERCIZ amp ctinn Camedi leather Toh gier The database list of entries is displayed in the GRID The grid columns correspond to the fields from entry s description You can define wh
59. Datab ase tab you can change the Database C Program Files Digital Media Technologies Ltd D ataBox databox gdb bd database to be edited in DataBox The Username SYSDBA Password name of the currently open database is nae displayed in the upper part of it You can E browse for another database using the _ SH yellow folder button to the right of this string New password Recover password Belo w you will see the default User Cafn pamar name and Password These are used Secret question automatically when connecting to a Secret answer database You cannot change the username but you Jf OK X Cancel can change the password by filling the strings in the area below When changing the password for the first time press the Recover password button The default secret question will appear on the screen Type 24 and click OK The default pass word will be entered in the Current password string Enter the new password and confirm it in the strings below Then enter a Secret question and a Secret answer to be used in case you forget the new password Push the Change password button to apply the new one If you happen to forget your password press the Recover password button The secret question you wrote during the pass word change will appear on the screen Type the secret answer in the dialog and click OK The current password will be entered in the relevant string above To check if you have entered the passwor
60. ES Am the necessary setting First enter the VIR VTR response delay 30 2 ms Default FPS 25 v name and the COM port to which it is connected Then specify the maximu m I1 rewind time Please note that in the lm playlist you do not have to insert VIR Lx See events that are overlapping in relation to the maximu m re wind time Belo w you can make some VTR specific fine tuning Play delay and VTR response delay Further set the default frame rate of the output Finally specify the time code mode and the user bits source For details on how to insert VTR control events in the playlist please see the relevant Edit menu section above 11 4 3 3 Logo xi This option allows displaying a 459g Bemsecomai tov e sx 1 By PlayBack Modul logo over the clips played m AirBox BlackMagic sa Ganan PLBlackMagicLogo pbx Xc You may select a logo source from the list and assign it to the appropriate AirBox channel By PlayBack Module this is Configure Assigned modules E AirBox 1 By PlayBack Module an internal logo generator that keys AirBox 2 Tally Logo Tally pbx AirBox ge the selected logo over the output SE video This is the options to be used AitBox 7 AirBox 8 in most cases Pressing the Configure button while will open the Logo configuration dialog box where you can define Logo Presets to be used later in AirBox see the Logo section of the Settings menu description furthe
61. Fields if the input video has flipped fields and it is necessary to change the fields order this check has to be used M Preview to enable previewing use this check M Burn Date Time check this box to burn the current system date and time in the produced files When this check is ticked the Burn Date Time tab will appear in the setup dialog This tab allows adjusting the position of the burnt date and time and its font size Pl The X Position represents the Genera Bum Date Time upmost pixel of the text Date Time Settings Info String 7 Y Position Eee eee Postion 0 2 x Position 650 hand side pixel of the text Y Position 2 Y Postion 580 2 It you want to add some co mments TentSize 132 Tewsize fia a in the captured video type them in wv teen the Info String You can adjust the text position and size using the spin boxes above X Cancel If you want to stick the note to the time and date info check M Snap Info String Back in the General tab the MI Use file splitting check is useful for splitting the video to be captured at predefined time intervals Pressing the Video Encoder Settings button will open the MainConcept AG AVC H 264 encoder setup window It is containing three tabs The About tab contains information about the codec version In the Main setting stab the user can specify an AVC Preset Each Preset is a predefined group of encoding settings designed to facilitate th
62. If not pushed counter will count up After selecting the counter type the nitial and Stop times and a Mask you are ready to run your counter Run your project and show your object using the well known Play P button Then Prepare your counter and Start it After pressing the Prepare button your counter sets to Initial time and waits fora Start command Stop the counter with the i button Pushing the Intermediate D button will freeze the counter During freeze the counter is running in the background but you see a still frame displaying the time when the Intermediate button was pressed When you push the Intermediate button once more the counter starts showing current time again Two buttons are active for the clock and counter modes Properties El and Visible Pressing Properties opens the font formatting dialog Visible determines if the 284 TITLEBOX clock counter will be visible on the monitor or not It does not stop the clock counter but just hides shows it Time Offset This pm box allows creating digital clocks for different time zones In Date mode the object will display the system date instead of system time There are two date formats Long Date and Short Date Their appearance depends on the regional settings of your Title Box server You can change themin Windows Control Panel gt Regional and Language Options gt Regional Options After pressing the Customize button go to the Date tab In it you ca
63. Into Tables found in HTML area you will see the list of tables found into the source html file In order to see a table you have to select a line and press Get Table button in the bottom of the window Press Apply button to accept the settings Press Close button to close the window without saving the changes 314 TITLEBOX VI 7 EAS Emergency Alert System Data Provider The Emergency Alert System EAS is a national warning system in the United Stated of America put into place in 1997 The EAS requires broadcasters cable television systems wireless cable systems satellite digital audio radio service SDARS providers and direct broadcast satellite DBS providers to provide the communications capability to the President to address the American public during a national emergency The systemalso may be used by state and local authorities to deliver important emergency information such as AMBER alerts and weather information targeted to specific areas Each State and several territories have their own EAS plan The EAS regulations and standards are governed by the Public Safety and Homeland Security Bureau of the FCC Federal Communications Commission All EAS equipment must be FCC certified for use TitleBox is connected to EAS decoder unit via LAN connection The messages coming from EAS unit are connected to TitleBox objects via EAS dataprovider EAS dataprovider is started as service It could be assignet to a text and to a
64. Its path is displayed in the Current location string and below are listed all sub directories contained in it There are three buttons to the right of the Current location string To browse for a new destination location use the first one Push the second one to go one level up the current directory The third button will erase all the content from the selected Destination location SafeBox allows multiple assignments Le you can transmit a given source content to more than one destination location select a Source location it will be marked in dotted line frame then select the desired online location in the list to the right Press the Assign Decline E button The assigned destination line will beco me green You can view the assigned destination s ofa source location by selecting its row All destinations will go green You can decline a destination location by pressing the ASSign Decline button once again Press the About button to check the information about the current software version and your dongle In case you need to generate a PlayBox Doctor report press the Red Cross button to start it Just fill in the mandatory fields everything else will be done automatically You can read more about the PlayBox Doctor in the Basic PlayBox manual 332 MULTI AIRBOX MANAGER Multi AirBox Manager is a web server application It was designed to control mu Itiple AirBoxchannels from within the same user environment or froma remote location
65. Logo 2 on COM 1 Logo 3 and 4 will be assigned to COM 2 and so on SH The pulse level is defined in the Active level drop down menu It is used to control the logo ON and logo OFF commands For example if the active level is High a Logo ON event turns on the output voltage and a Logo OFF event turns it off IMPORTANT No logo will be displayed on the AirBox output Press Configure while the Tally logo is selected to setup the COM port for outputting the GPI pules 92 AIRBOX I11 4 3 4 TC Generator This plug in allows Modus E AitBox Output Remote control Logo TC EE AirBox server sound card X Cancel Thus you can synchronize external devices to the time Les code coming fromAirBox To enable this plug in double click in the Active column to the right Ee Sam AirBox can output time code TimeCode Dens from most of its counters 0020 00 00 Realtek HD Audio output DI Wou have to press ie SE Sample Rate x cancel Con f igur e to select It The SE Mono e e Fiat Stereo eo gt available Counters are listed Ze N D EE Gain in the lower right corner of n i s L the LTC Generator dialog ype Type 3 TC direction Forward zl You can choose the counting I Diop Fame Counters mode for counters that Master counter H H IT Color Lock e Clip counted Suppor this feature 1n the Unassigned bit 58 Block counter TC dir ection drop down list TC counter JV Bi
66. Options gt Grid gt Tree View If you want to view only the entries that are assigned to some record do not check the boxes O A more detailed description of the Tree View and the Classifications can be found further in this manual 11 3 3 HouselD ll The House ID is a unique General Grid HouselD Defaut values Export Import Database TCI import _4 D identification number It can be entered I Automatic generation ll d icale Thi SE SE manually or generated automatically 1S Options submenu helps you create your HouselD fields Random Number EES own pattern for auto generating House IDs EE l a E oe Automatic generation check Rene EE eweg _ it to perform auto generation of House ID Local DB Global Minimum P E Insert field button inserts a Current value new fie ld to the House ID SE EES o Delete field button deletes the selected field fromthe House ID House ID fields this area ae shows the House ID sequential By default the House ID consists of two fields separated by a hyphen The first field contains three symbols from the entry s Title and the second field contains a Random number between 0 and 10000 Double clicking in the white House ID fields area T si met Title e Edit HouseID Field DEZ M Automatic generation checked invokes a Tope 7 cen context menu with the following items Gs Insert field invo
67. Out Fy To Right GI Di ze f Sy O Normal a IR ss ttle SRR EI EN counter v Initial bas HI Stop Ge 00 lll Mask ELES X Time Offset Jonn Slide T WE Bmann i 4 s ika gt ka Eizy 7 Bole EICHER MW mandi UH Vtc i e Details Preview Properties oo _ Master Container D miva A Bregas JOM Ztaein e Ou o il Picture 11 i z n Kan gorma gt 1 YS wires 25i o Lal F Picture 1 a0 M E 2 Slide1 GE Wanu MO Meyes ao MA 2 Layer 1 14 LN i BOM 2 Slide 3 an Ma 2Lauer 4 Arsena Gel rsen HOME Slide 3 OME 2 Slide 4 an Label O ane 1 II E HORMEN HEH Or HOT ECH EH O Program O Preview Update C Overlay al a Ca e e Project gt Mapped Memory Driver v2 0 X 750 3393 II 1 Work Area The Work area is the main part of the TitleBox interface It shows the objects their positions types and status Objects can be moved and resized in this area If an object is too complex and is not rendered yet a yellow black sign saying Rendering will appear on the screen This sign will automatically disappear when the rendering is complete The little icons in the upper left corners of the objects show their type lock status and transitions You can enable disable the icons from Project menu gt Options gt General gt M Show Objects Icons The color bar in the bottom of the work area displays the current mode of operation By default pre
68. PC sound card See Settings menu description General section for details on how to enable these notifications for Missing files Selection displays the cumulated duration of the currently selected items in the playlist The forth field of the Status Bar shows the hardware module that is used currently for playout If there is None please check whether the appropriate module is selected in Settings menu gt Modules gt Output tab 23 AIRBOX I 5 Playback Control and Counters The Master Counter shows the elapsed time of the a es Curent playout session Pressing the Sto button resets the counter The title of the currently playing clip is displayed under the running time code This is quite useful in case the played row is out of the visible grid range TIP To view the currently playing clip in the beginning of the grid just click in the Master counter This will shrink the playlist and will show only clips after the currently playing one If you want to view those before it use the arrow keys on your keyboard The Clip counter is situated under the master counter It can operate in two modes count up and count down mode Just double click in it to switch between them The playback control buttons a are situated under the Clip e ll bloo ZS z 9 counter Play starts the playback Stop terminates the playback Pause Resume temporary interruption and resuming of the playback Playback
69. SEN corner Here exclude the lower dash from the separators list at NONE SE IT _ SEPARATOR it represents the space within the separate fields D To the right of the Metadata fields list you can see a number of checkboxes that provide some conversion options M Convert all underscores to spaces in our case Lime_Biscuit will become Lime Biscuit M Convert all 20 to spaces is not applicable in our case but otherwise you can use it for downloaded files their names often happen to contain 20 instead spaces M ALL CAPS will turn all letters in the filename in upper case M All first caps capitalizes the first letter of each word in the relevant metadata field M Capitalize first only capitalizes only the first letter of the relevant metadata filed M Include letters and M Include numbers are checked by default If you uncheck some of them the filename parser will ignore the relevant characters i e will not include them in the field You have to set your preferences for each metadata field separately select it by clicking on it Finally you have to specify the length of each metadata field This is not a problem if you choose to name your files with fixed length per each field check the Fixed length flag and specify the number of characters using the arrows The corresponding characters in the Filename field will be highlighted in blue so that you can see your setting However setting variable le
70. Shortcut k sl To define a shortcut click in the Shortcut string and press the keys EE you would like to assign Toggle Play Stop Belo w select the command to be executed at pressing these keys Play From Slide Toggle Play Stop to show hide the slide off the screen Srel Play From Slide to start displaying all following slides in a row via the Slide Controller To clear the shortcut press the X button to the right of it Allassigned shortcut will appear in the slide s thumbnail The blue background means the assigned command is Play From The green background means the assigned command is Toggle Play Stop a The red background means that there is an assigned shortcut to this slide but the Shortcut mode button is not pressed The assigned shortcuts will be active only when the Shortcut mode button is pushed NOTE In shortcut mode the newly assigned shortcuts have higher priority than the default ones Thus while in shortcut mode the default shortcuts in TitleBox will operate normally unless duplicated with newly assigned shortcuts For examp le the default command for lt Ctrl H gt is Add to schedule but if you assign lt Ctrl gt lt H gt to be Toggle Play Stop of a slide the shortcut will act as Toggle Play Stop 305 TITLEBOX V 3 3 Properties In this tab you can see the detailed properties of the line that is currently selected in the Details tab Slide
71. Si NOTE It is not possible to capture overlay video in this object 288 TITLEBOX IV 5 17 Chat Line Chat line objects appear in the work area as the fe one below i a er Chat lines like Chat notes are developed to Oe ee ee ae ee ce ee ee ee ee Vie LO i e e E Me Se ly a Je oe ee Oe a en oN A display text messages coming from sms service applications Chat line objects should be linked to text files where third party applications save the newly received messages Unlike chat notes the messages in chat lines are moving constantly even if there are no new messages arriving in the linked text file When anew message appears there it will be displayed during the next queue rotation The Chat line toolbar contains the following settings Ei P Speed 2 S Queue Length LF use this button to format the chat line font P paragraph formatting allows you to change the alignment spacing word wrap and other properties of the currently selected paragraph You can change the speed of the text through the Speed spin box the higher value the faster will move the text If you want to change the direction type a minus in front the speed value The Queue Length spin box is used to define the number of latest messages to be displayed if no new messages appear in the linked text file IV 5 18 Chat Roll a The function of this object is the same as it is with the Chat Line and Chat Notes displaying m
72. Small Computer Systems Interface is a very widely used high data rate general purpose parallel interface A maximu m of eight devices can be connected to one bus 16 for W ide SCSI for example a controller and up to seven disks or devices of different sorts hard disks optical disks tape drives scanners etc and may be shared between several computers The SCSI interface is used by manufacturers for high performance drives while ATA is popular for lower performance drives Serial Digital Interface The standard digital televsion studio connection based on a 270 Mb s transfer rate This is a 10 bit scrambled polarity independent interface with common scrambling for both component ITU R BT 601 and composite digital video and four groups each of four channels of embedded digital audio Most new broadcast digital equipment includes SDI which greatly simplifies its installation and signal distribution It uses the standard 75 ohm BNC connector and coax cable as is commonly used for analogue video and can transmit the signal over 200 metres depending on cable type Software Developers Kit Typically a software and documentation package to facilitate the development of applications to run on a given operating system or other application It provides another layer on top of an API often including shortcuts and pre built routines to make development easier and final operation faster Serial Digital Transport Interface SMPTE 305M Base
73. __ Starttime Duration Tye Category Tite Jas Notes Ioegio Ss ES 13 28 51 00 01 09 MPEG 2 48 kHz Car Sports2 Part 1 Mike s New Car Trimmed Original duration 00 03 35 E mpeg2 Mike s New Car mpg 13 30 01 00 00 00 Ext event Video Scale UL 13 30 01 00 01 09 MPEG 2 48 kHz Clip Sports1 Mike s Trimmed Original duration 00 03 35 E mpea2 Mike s New Car mpg BT ESA 00 00 00 Ext event Video Scale 100 00 00 25 MPEG 2 48 Raina check movie Trimmed Original durati EA ike s New Car mpg 00 00 24 MPEG 2 48 00 00 25 MPEG 2 48 10 00 01 Missing Mike s New Car Trimmed Original duration 00 01 09 or the Birds Trimmed Geh duration 00 8 ike s New Car mpg or the Birds mpg TMF Raina Sports For the Birds Raina Trimmed Original duratior i 00 00 00 Event m 00 20 00 Event Max duration 20 minutes 00 01 48 MPEG 2 48 Trimmed Original duration 00 01 49 1 E 4 PAL 16_9 MI_Trailer mpy 00 00 00 Event Logo U 00 00 39 MPEG 2 48 Nice Title j E ounter IBP 8Mbit_ mpg 00 03 15 MPEG 2 48 For the Birds2 E or the Birds mpg 00 00 00 Ext event 00 01 09 MPEG 2 48 Trimmed Original duration 00 01 09 E 00 02 02 i he Saint check movie Trimmed Original durati E The Saint Trimmed Original duration 00 02 02 E Timmed ike s New Car mpg PAL 16_9 The Saint mpe PAL 16_9 The Saint mpe iginal duration O0 00 4
74. an instance Different quality levels can be user defined If a new instance with different quality is received later this data field will help you determine which instance is better A New Quality is added by pressing the New icon BI fromthe menu bar or by right clicking and selecting New Jal Sao fromthe context menu Doing so will open a dialog box where E you can enter the name of the new quality and define a color for it 238 DATABOX To change the name or the color of a Quality level select Enter name DEES color EZ it and press the Property icon BI in the menu bar You can also do that by right clicking on it and choosing Ee Properties To delete a Quality level select it and press the Delete icon MB in the menu bar or right click it and then click Delete The Up and Down arrows I in the menu bar are used for changing the Qualities order Excellent s properties xj 11 6 Classification Els lt CINEMA D Categories This is the classification structure of entries The Biographical Movie E available classification criteria are Type Keyword and ng ae Group Type describes the content type cinema news eg cn ae sport music etc This criterion has two sub branches S aus Fim i Category defines categories for each Type E E For example for Cinema these are Children film e Musical il Making Series etc iia nae a3 Genres defines genres for each Type Fo
75. and Ending events You can add beginning or ending events by pressing the Add new external event button in the Beginning Ending events section respectively msec Ending events m a la a Logo event 137 AIRBOX Pushing these buttons invokes a drop down list of all enabled external events NOTE To have any external event available in the list make sure it is enabled in AirBox Settings menu gt Modules gt Remote control tab Each time an event is being added its settings dialog opens for you to make the relevant adjustments they can be edited further on and specify its offset Gf needed The events are executed according to their offsets and regardless of their order in the Beginning Ending events list NOTE The beginning events can have earlier and or later offsets while the ending events can have only earlier offsets TIP If you need to make some fine tuning of a certain external event when inserting a Complex item in the playlist select it and press the gear wheel button above 1 A Thus each time you insert this complex item in the playlist the settings dialog of this event e a switcher configuration dialog will open for you to make the final touches These changes will not be saved in the original complex event they will be valid only for the current insertion 1 TIP If you want to change the events order select an event
76. and Property Tools which provide an additional set of properties The Property Tools are active only for texts rolls and crawls IMPORTANT The properties can be interactively changed at any moment even when the object is running on air The Play Pause Stop and Toggle Play Stop buttons 7 E control the play status of any particular object They correspond to the relevant commands in the Object Menu TIP While a project is in play mode you can control the separate objects in it through the Short Action function Press and hold lt F4 gt while setting the desired action Enter the name of the object in the Name Mask field 4 it corresponds to the Name displayed in the second rowof 2 the toolbar This string is case sensitive Select the action Play Pause Stop Play Toggle Select None using the left and right arrow keys on the keyboard The default action is Play Release the lt F4 gt key to execute the selected action The Play Toggle command will switch to Play or Stop depending on the current status of the object you just have to write the name of a currently playing object and release the lt F4 gt key to stop it and vice versa If you apply a unified naming system for your objects you could control them simultaneously using the wildcard functionality For example if your objects are named using a letter and a number 1e c1 c2 c3 etc you can activate an action for all of themby typi
77. and input pins DSR CTS RI CD You can use any of the output pins for supplying voltage to the GPI circuit GPI OUT pairs are located at output pins DTR amp RTS the first GPI trigger generates a pulse on DTR and the second GPI trigger generates a pulse on RTS GPI IN Implementation The simplest triggering device would be a pair of wires running from the COM port GPI pair soldered to a momentary contact switch This switch can be either Push Button Normally Open PBNO or Push Button Normally Closed PBNC The trigger type is configured in AirBox GPI Settings Panel as High or Low pulse Many external devices like switchers or mixers have dedicated GPI connectors or screw terminals with a description of what GPI trigger type low or high pulse was implemented Depending on the trigger setup a trigger can be a temporary closing or opening of the GPI circuit High pulse means the GPI trigger is activated when the circuit is temporary closed Low pulse means the GPI trigger is activated when the circuit is temporary opened According to the number of installed COM ports AirBox supports up to 32 GPI IN triggers up to 8 COM ports with 4 GPI IN triggers per port GPI OUT Implementation In order to control external devices by GPI a simple 12V contact relay should be used It should be connected to the corresponding COM port pin pair 4 6 or 7 8 and it should close or open the GPI circuit of the external device Depending on the AirBox setup
78. and their links if any to external files Any changes in those files are applied in real time The file links apply for the text containing and picture objects gt Event Manager select this menu item to create a list of events related to objects in the current project You can assign these events to different states of the objects Check the detailed description in the Object menu section above There are seven buttons in the Event Manger window Pushing the Object Control ec JD button will invoke the Event task dialog in the screenshot to the Ei Cs Cec CN m right It provides options for a SE creating object related events i e e Play Object Play Stop Object All objects Stop Object existing in the current project are listed in the drop down list select one to play stop and press OK TZ fil x gt o Picture 1 Digital Clock 1 Picture 6 Repeat the procedure till you have 7 all necessary events listed in the Event Manager You can also send out GPI pulses on object start stop ae Configure these pulses by pressing the GPI Event fom E button The dialog to the left will open In it specify the Dee SCH GPI Signal type and to which COM port it should be Eis z sent ER Press OK to add this event to the Event Manager list Play Sound is designed for adding sound events in the manager Pushing it will open the Play Sound dialog and all you have to do is brow
79. assigned later to the regular slides below By using these master layers you will avoid inserting the same objects in numerous slides For example if you need a logo shown in Slides 1 3 7 below just create a Layer in the Master container Then go to Slide1 click the Assign Layer U button and select the logo containing layer from the drop down list Repeat the procedure for Slides 3 and 7 Thus each time Title Box displays Slide 1 3 or 7 it will also display the logo containing layer from the Master Container Another way to do this is just drag n drop the Layer fromthe Mater Container to the relevant slide Level 2 All slides are listed in this part of the Slide Manager window You can create as many Slides and Layers as your computer can handle You must have at least one Layer per slide Each element is displayed in a separate line Each line starts with a plus sign You can click in it to expand the relevant level 302 TITLEBOX Next to the plus sign you can see a play status notification Further on there are several controls that vary within the different levels You can find a detailed description of each level below ab MEI Momings 10 1030 Ty a Slide line you will see Enable Disable check box Assign Layer button Lock Unlock button and the Slide name check the properties section below on how to change Slide names If you have assigned some layer s from the Master Container to a slide their number will be r
80. audio to an external professional AC 3 decoder x General Audio Video OSD Streaming The OSD tab contains On Screen Display settings related to Je Enable support for SubtitlePlus S i Subtitles only disable logo A Cancel grap hics Insertion in the outp ut JV Transperancy Fix for SubtitlePlus Apply video There are three checkboxes in it m MI Enable Support for SubtitlePlus to enable showing subtitles using the SubtitleBox option in AirBox M Subtitles Only disable logo ticking this box will disable showing the logo on the output M Transparency Fix for SubtitlePlus certain boards need this tick to display the subtitles background correctly Pressing the LogoS button will open the Logo Settings dialog so you can define up to 16 static logo presets 115 AIRBOX Stradis Decoder Settings g xj During playout you can stream the General Audio Video OSD Steaming program to the network as well The 3 d Enable UDP Streamin Streaming tab contains settings i Address Port THE X Cancel related to the output UDP stream 127 0 0 1 Dau bh I Multicast a Check M Enable UDP streaming to switch this option ON Specify the destination IP Address and Port in the string below In the TTL cell enter the Time to Live value Check M Multicast if you want to broadcast the stream throughout the network If there are more than one LAN cards in the playout station specify which of them to b
81. avi 15 08 2005 11 35 52 Transfer of D Camtazia Monday2 avi aborted by user 15 08 2005 11 36 15 Transfering D Camtazia Monday2 avi Typically the Destination is the location from which AirBox is playing clips but SafeBox can be used for copying all kinds of content you have not only clips and playlists The Destination location can be either on the local storage from the point of view of AirBox for example or somewhere on the network but a local one is advisable In short these are permanently accessible storage destinations a2 SAFEBOX The Source locations are locations where your files are stored or where files appear if you use some kind of removable storage or network connection In short these are temporary accessible locations You can add to the list as many Source locations as you wish This is done by simple browsing after pressing the Add button to the far left You can give priorities for each Source location This is done by right clicking on the relevant location and selecting the desired Priority NOTE Priorities are valid only in Automatic mode The highest priority is 10 Along the upper part of the main window are situated the control buttons The first pair of plus and minus signs mir is used for adding deleting Source locations The second pair is designed for the Destination locations Further on are situated the transfer control buttons They provide hints at poin
82. been changed and saved by another user Reload daily playlist without playing it in certain occasions playlists should not start playing when reloaded WARNING When this box is ticked AirBox will not calculate the insertion point when reloading playlist on file change either Pre cache new playlist minutes before start specify how many minutes before the playlist start AirBox should cache it NOTE For long playlists we recommend entering higher precache time values If there is no current daily playlist Try to load last daily playlist for same weekday AirBox will search the daily playlist folder for old playlists for the same day of the week i e Fridays and will load the most recent one Try to load past daily playlist from last days AirBox will search the daily playlist folder for old playlists according to your settings and will play the most recent one De yesterday if available NOTE If there are three playlists from the previous day i e 10 00 12 00 and 18 00 AirBox will load the latest one i e 18 00 regardless of the current time Le even ifnow it is 9 00 0 clock Reload last daily playlist on and of the current daily playlist AirBox will load again the currently playing daily playlist as soon as it ends When reload playlist In the field below you can set two additional rules on playlist reloading valid when M Reload playlist on file change is checked and the current pla
83. box Thus the command will be sent a little bit earlier to guarantee seamless switching from AirBox to VTR playout 56 AIRBOX TIP You will need a switcher to change between the AirBox and the VTR playout Therefore a Switcher Event should always be present in the playlist before or after the VTR control event unless you decide to switch manually You could use the Complex events feature to create presets for later use see the Complex Items section further in this manual NOTE Like all other External events the VTR plug in must be enabled first in Settings Modules gt Remote Control tab IMPORTANT As the VIR control is executed through the PC COM port you will need an RS232 to RS422 converter such as Addenda or Leitch IMPORTANT The Play Box modules DO NOT support the Deck Control connector supplied on the DeckLink breakout cable a AIRBOX 11 2 6 Insert The Insert commands are identical to the Add commands that have already been described in the section above They differ fromthe Add commands solely in the insertion point in the playlist While an Add command will add the selected event at the end of the playlist the Insert command will insert the selected event above the currently selected line 1 2 7 Delete current from list This item removes the currently selected clip fromthe playlist I1 2 8 Delete unsupported clips This command will remove all unsupported clips fromthe current playlist It is used
84. clip_start T Now you can show information about upcoming clips that belong to certain category The script format is CAT Category Name index Title te xt clip_title CAT_Movies clip_start CAT_Movies In the example above the content to be displayed in Title Box object Title is the title of the next clip down the playlist that belongs to Category Movies then a dash and then the start time of this clip Text 1 text clip_title CAT_Movies 1 clip_start CAT_Movies 1 In the example above the content to be displayed in Title Box object Text is the title of the second clip down the playlist that belongs to Category Movies then a dash and then the start time of this clip IMPORTANT There should be no plus or minus signs in the category name Instead of Category you could use the Star as an index modifier to show information about upcoming clips in the playlist Thus the scrip will look like this Text 1 text clip_start STAR_Madonna Z oclip_title STAR_Madonna to show the stat time and title of the next clip in the playlist that has Madonna assigned as Star OR Te xt 1 text clip_startiSTAR_Madonna l Z oclip_title STAR_Madonna 1 to show the title of the second clip down the playlist that has Madonna assigned in the Star column IMPORTANT Again there should be no plus or minus signs in the Star name Besides Category and Star you could use clips Metadata as an index modifier to
85. description in the manual above The playlist checker uses the metadata names as reference and checks the presence of the corresponding metadata values M From category Category name here you have to specify the category of the clips you want to check for example clips that belong to category Music To the left below is situated the list of metadata fields to be checked You can pick them from the list of presets to the right Just select the Metadata name you need and press the button to add it If the Metadata name is not available in the list of presets create a custom name in the string above it and press the button to add it to the left 159 AIRBOX To remove a metadata name from the check list select it in the list to the left and press the gt button To clear the whole check list pres 5 gt If the Playlist checker finds an inconsistence the relevant criterion turns red The arrow to the right of it becomes active Press it do view the list of inconsistencies sorted by their position in the playlist 160 y E Vd ww Ve E mpeg2 A E mpeg2 NTSc y En x Cancel 11 5 5 Media Folders This tool was developed to allow specifying watch folders that might contain media files Thus if there are missing files in a playlist these folders will be searched automatically on playlist loading NOTE Media folders do not operate run time You need to reload the playlist in order to check the watch
86. dialog is called Start delay compensation It allows setting offsets to a fixed time event to compensate the time needed for reaction of the hardware The offsets may be During play or pause mode tries to compensate the time in milliseconds needed for executing commands like Jump Next and Resume During stop mode tries to compensate the time needed for executing the Play command NOTE These settings are hardware specific so their exact values have to be determined experimentally WARNING When using fixed time events the playlist should start and end within the same calendar day i e the playlist should not go beyond 135 AIRBOX midnight Other wise we cannot guarantee the proper operation of the fixed time logics and of the daily playlist logics 136 AIRBOX IL A 71 Complex Items Two main ideas stand behind the complex events 1 to avoid inserting numerous rows in the playlist when there are several external events that have to be executed at a time or one after another For example when you need to run a program off tape you will have to insert a VIR event plus two switcher events one for cutting from AirBox video to VTR output and the second one to performto opposite These all can be part of a complex event so basically you have a single complex event named i e VTR1 which would take care to send signals to the matrix and to the VTR when needed 2 to enable creating such complex events
87. director editor etc The lists of names in the relevant pages contain country names company names and personal names To add a new activity or a new name right click the credits 17 Country Company People CO Dreamworks E gt Lucas Film New Line Cinema B A Universal EE Wammer Bros E El Company activities gt Co producer M gt Distributor B Producer B relevant list and then click New from the context menu Enter a name and define a color for color coding in the dialog box To change the name or the color of a credit entry name or activity right click on it and choose Properties from the context menu To delete a credit entry right click it and then click Delete 8 Print The print preview window opens after pressing the Print button in the Main menu It shows the database grid and the records listed in it the entire database or a search result etc The columns size and order are the same as in the grid 7 PAVLIN Canon S600 X aus Glo DI HouselD Category All records Wb Base ae Lager Keis V Scorpion King The Musicvideo sz Musie videos 2 Scorpion King Tne Traer common Fim Taies J 3 Scorpion King The Makingi omE0003 Making T u Mummy Returns The Trailer COMM 0004 Film Trailers ae ae E Mummy retums The Maket Jeans waking M E Leet Traer amlztendf IJ 7 Jumanji Trae SPOR OOT olosng Ceremony e foo E
88. directories To add a new watch directory click on the plus sign and browse for it As soon as it is inserted in the list you can adjust its settings Double click in the Active column to enable watching the folder described in the line to the right If you want AirBox to parse the sub directories of a selected watch folder double click in the Subfolders column to turn the closed sign into a green tick mark Auto re place this function will update the file paths of the missing files upon saving the playlist If not enabled the new location of files will not be saved in the playlist 161 AIRBOX IIL6 Commands Menu This menu contains commands related to Commands i Playback playback and logo presets The available commands are zeng fe es Jump to Erste Pause Playback commands this menu duplicates the Nex ctrl Space playback control buttons situated under the master AD eas Return BkSp counter Play Stop Pause Next Jump Return The commands are executed just by clicking the appropriate field To user s convenience relevant shortcut is written to the nght of each command Logo presets here you can trigger logo _ Sammmands Help presets through clicking them The preset EE EE Wd v Preset 1 numbers correspond to those in Settings GU menu gt Logo dialog my Jump to This is just a shortcut g Preset 6 Ctrl Shift Using it you can jump to a clip 6 ne at your will Just press and hold do
89. entire grid row with the color of the field as selected for color coding in Options Default values and previously set in the relevant Main menu item Clear quick search on field change when typing in a column header to perform a quick search DataBox will filter only the entries that correspond to your requirements Then if you click on a category in the tree view the filter will still apply Thus you will actually refine the search If you want to be able to view all entries that belong to a category from the tree view after a quick search has been performed check this box Custom columsbefore fixed columns check this to order the custom columns before fixed columns in the Grid 228 DATABOX Filter Options This field defines how the Grid will be refreshed during grid column filtering Update on Enter the Grid will be refreshed after pressing lt Enter gt Update on every key press the Grid will be refreshed after each key stroke NOTE Use this option with caution it may take a long time to refresh a large database Tree View Options The Tree view displays the classification scheme of records as a tree Similar to Windows Explorer You can define various classification criteria and enter their representatives in advance such as countries persons keywords etc If you want to see all these entries no matter if they are assigned to any record or not in the Tree View check M the corresponding boxes in
90. fields set the duration of this transition by default it is 1 00 second NOTE Increasing the figures in these fields will decrease the speed of the transition Finally define the type of motion during the transition ascending descending or constant By default the motion type is set to O0 Normal This means that the transition will proceed on constant speed For example if you have set in effect Fly From Left and duration 2 seconds your object will move on constant speed from left to right till it reaches the desired position for two seconds If you set the motion type to 1 to 5 Ascending the object will appear slower and its speed will increase during the 2 seconds of transition In descending mode the speed of transition will decrease The Full screen transition buttons are situated next to the transition duration spin boxes You might need this functionality in case there are several grouped objects on the screen and these objects have the same transition effect and duration If you trigger or stop such objects simultaneously they will move in relation to each other because they have to cover different distances on the screen for the same period Using this button will make objects move together but not in relation to each other during the transitions The transition of all grouped objects will look as if the entire screen is moving not the separate objects The lowest toolbar contains object s pecific settings that chan
91. file this will be its location on the local or network devices Notes Used for storing useful notes about the media It is a text field limited to 255 symbols E mpeg To add a new Media right click the respective Stream and choose New media from the context menu To delete a Meola right click it and then click Delete 224 DATABOX P 2 P 3 P Cl as S I f I C a t I on General Instances Classification Credits Additional a a a Si ii usic Videos r In this tab you can classify an entry using lms J fs H 5 Hard Rock lt the classification scheme created in CLASSIFICATION manager in the Main Menu Type this field describes the type of content cinema news sport etc When you choose a Type only the relevant Category and Genre will appear For example for Type cinema Categories are movie film documentary animation etc and Genres are action comedy drama etc Category a category of the selected type You can select only one category from the pop up EA p list I Apply changes when Previous or Next buttons are clicked Genre all the genres of a type Select a genre from the left hand field and move it to the right hand field You can do this in three ways by double clicking it by pressing the right arrow gt gt button or by right clicking on it and then choosing Assign from the context menu Discarding a genre from t
92. files Skip zones Grid the execution of commands related to external NM Use extemal input skip zones triggers First you have to specify the Start and ea the End time of a zone and then press the Plus 11 20 00 12 20 00 button to add it to the list 20 00 17 20 To remove a zone from the list select it and press the mmus button above Do not forget to check M Use external input Skip zones to activate them WARNING Skip zones have higher priority than the Automation graphic rules and the stat 112000 end fi22000 E Automation button in the main AirBox window Both the graphic rules and the button will not operate properly when using Skip Eed Zones so please do not use them simu Itaneously The Grid tab allows you to control the columns to appear in the playlist grid You can add new columns by pressing the PIUS button above the list Generally a new column would contain a Metadata name as it appears in the first column of the clip properties Thus once you enter some metadata for a chp its value will appear in the corresponding column in the grid 19 20 00 20 20 00 Ta AIRBOX All columns are W vi sible by default EE mined EE Double click in the green tick mark to turn them Invisible To remove a column fromthe list clickthe tr g Minus button Click it to restore the factory defaults Start time Duration Type Category Star Notes Location Title Producer CSAS
93. from the relevant drop down list Pressing the Graphic Settings button will open the setup dialog of the DMT graphic layer filter This dialog contains four tabs Graphic Layer Scale Output and WSS Allsettings in it require AirBox restart or at least pressing the Reset Hardware button in the main AirBox window to apply The Graphic layer tab is used for service purposes so please do not change anything there The Scale Output and WSS tabs are described in the Soft MPEG2 plug in description Pressing the Video Encoder x Settings button will open the About Mai EES Advanced Settings Main Concept AG A VC H 2 64 encoder Generic Bitrate Control setup window It is containing three ANC preset Baseine Mode variable Bitrate gt Video Format fauto DI Pass single Pass DI Profile Baseline profile x Bit rate bits sec fecoooo Level level auto HSSrate bits sec 1149952 The A bout tab contains information Picture type Frame zl CPB size bits 4599936 about the codec version Field order Top Field Firs Irit delay 90 kHz 324000 Pulldown Jautomode Dest delay 90 kHz Im Slice count z 0 auto GOP structure tabs v In the Main settings tab the user See 3 Max GOP length 33 can specify an AVC Preset Each E ppee p ke Z MexBiremes cans Jo x S x Sample AR Auto 7 S h detection Jo D Preset is a predefined group of encoding See E
94. from which the particular clip will be captured The In column shows the initial timecode when clip capturing will start The Out column shows the timecode when clip capturing will stop If you click on the grey bar named Out it will be renamed to Duration and the column will show the clips durations Mode column shows what will be captured for the particular clip video V audio A or both VA Currently only VA is supported The Clip Name column shows the clip names If you click the grey bar named Clip Name it will change to File Name and the column will display the destination full path where the clip will be stored hard disk name folder and file Comments column shows the comments if any for each clip You can enter your comments in the relevant string of the clip data field to the nght Grid buttons e The Blue dot button includes the selected clip in the next capture session e The Red X button excludes the selected clip from the next capture session e The Sync button synchronizes the list All clips with not captured status are included in the next capture session e The Sort button sorts the list by Tape ID and then by Start Timecode Thus the batch capture process is simplified and optimized e The Capture button starts an automated capture session During this session all clips marked with a blue dot will be captured to the hard drive e Delimited List Import button enables loading all
95. gif lt MOVIE gt Dynamic Speed Properties 2 Pushing the Property tools button Dynamic properties dialog box Dynamic Speed Properties while a Roll Crawl object is selected will open the Default Speed Point Properties Position Speed Xx Time sec Parsee e ie Pie Wel ee is i Cama i ET TANS pame TCR EE EE Se esses henane EH EE EE EE an Tree eet le EE et ete ets ares iets oust raha EEr s CA X cea Object Crawl 1 Position 188 Speed 0 6 00 This property dialog box allows you to specify different speeds of Roll s and Crawl s movement The movement is represented graphically and you can define speed for each point of the graphics The horizontal axis of the graphics represents the position of the Craw Roll on the screen The vertical axis represents the speed multiplier 0 1 2 etc to the default speed which is set in the main screen see Toolbar The Zero value means 0xdefault speed Le the object does not move one means xdefault speed Le the object moves with 273 TITLEBOX the default speed two means 2xdefault speed Le the object moves twice faster than the default speed etc On the top of the graphics you can see the object Roll Crawl text By moving the mouse pointer over the grid the blue lines or using the arrow keys you can select the position in the text where you d like to change the speed The text section which w
96. gt Auto update use it to include the currently selected clip s in the automatic file duration checking It will update the duration of your clips if the files associated with them have been or will be changed NOTE You have to enable this option first in Settings gt General gt General gt Auto update duration of marked files The file checking interval should also be set there gt Clip Trimmer opens the Clip Trimmer application if it is enabled in Settings gt General gt General gt M Use Clip Trimmer Otherwise the Clip Properties dialog will open Find detailed in formation about the Clip Trimmer in the section of the same name at the end of this manual Lo Trimmer Server The trimmer server starts at AirBox start up It was developed with two major purposes in mind 1 To enable working with the main AirBox interface while the Clip Trimmer is open 2 To eliminate the possibility of interfering with the on air playback process NOTE You can open only one Trimmer per instance 31 AIRBOX lil MENU BAR Ei AirBox Streamer HD PRO MS B 1 Daily play File Edit We Settings Tools Commands Help II 1 File Menu The File menu contains all playlist file re lated commands 1 1 1 New Playlist This command evokes the ListBox module it opens a new blank play list for editing 1 1 2 Load playlist Loads an existing playlist file ply You can also open a Dalet Automation XML playlis
97. in the Setup Form is designed ae for preset previewing Use co your mouse to squeeze and drag around the preset or Sede Git g resize it using the transition spin boxes to the right see their description below Height 64 HI gt Hla ELI ELA ELA ELAN ELP fe EE Speed 25 fr Alpha 100 Presets Crop Left 50 a e Write the name of the new Bottom 0 al preset in the Preset string and press Add to enter it Le J tye Ee in the list of available Video Server H resets Use workstation sl Las f D If you want to view the settings of a preset from the list click on its name You can change it and then press the Apply button to save the changes If you want to remove an already existing preset select it and press the Del button The Scale Transition field in the right contains tools for precise positioning and resizing of the video output All values are preset specific Left this percentage represents the offset from the left margin of the monitor The video portions that remain unseen are still being rendered Top the offset percentage from the top of the monitor Width Shows the ratio between the scaled video size and the original one Decreasing this value shrinks the video from both left and nght 54 AIRBOX Height Decreasing this percentage shrinks the video from both top and bottom Speed The time in frames for transition fromthe previous video layout to the curre
98. is z Ke lu f The rules for extracting playlist information and displaying it over the video are set here The Graphic rules dialog contains three fields Rules Conditions and Actions The Rules field contains a list of all available rule presets Rules are organized in Groups You can create new groups by clicking on the Actions External events J Skip this action on Next J Skip this action if there is an empty field Action time offset E percent DI Action script LOAD_TEMPLATE Video_Clip_Template Shape play Shape2 play Text3 text Later On Text text clip_start CAT_Movies HHMI Text2 text clip_title CAT_Movies Preset values en ale esl yl clip_title clip_location clip_categorn clip_notes clip_star clip_start clip_duration A Cancel Folder icon in the Rules zone By default you will see a General group with an Example Rule in it The Conditions field contains the list of all necessary conditions that will enable executing the relevant actions below as per the currently selected Rule In case you use Metadata from the clip properties dialog as a condition parameter type its name in the cell to the nght and then specify the operator In the Actions field there are three lists and a couple of check bo xes The list to the left contains all actions related to the currently selected rule The Action Script list re
99. it is a keyword for searching If the keyword is a date it must be in yyyy mm dd year month day format Operand defines Boolean operands OR or AND between the search lines to refine or limit your search The follo wing buttons are situated above the search fields Add button adds a new search inquiry line Remove button removes the selected line fromthe inquiry Search button starts the search Clear button clears the search inquiry Global search If this flag is checked the search proceeds in the entire database If it is not checked the search proceeds only in the previous search result NOTE The Search procedure is not case sensitive NOTE After performing a search the grid will display only the records that match this inquiry If you want to see all records clear the search inquiry and click All in the Tree View 214 DATABOX I 3 Data Grid Gg slolx EE ALL z o Types No Tite Housel Category Type Genre Keyword Company Co he Groups Sc Keywords 1 101 Dalmatians Making 1 ONE Makt WERIN CINEMA Comedy Family 101 dalmat Walt Disne_ 3 A ESEN 2 101 Dalmatians Making 2 CINE Mai een CINEMA Comedy Family 101 delmat Walt Diere H g dese 3 101 Dalmatians MusicVideo Mus 173 e MUSIC 101 dalmat Walt Disne 3 Sequences 4 102 Dalmatians Making 1 Mak 174 king CINEMA Comedy Family 101 delmat Walt Disne Templates 5 102
100. ityMessage 4irBoxPlaylistChanges 4irBoxRunningStatus Into Property field you have to select one of the possible predefined properties for the Input Plugins For each Property you have to set a Condition equal contain beginwith ends with and a Value by using the relevant strings The available Properties are TBErrMsg Title Box system messages TBIPAddress TitleBox IP address TBPort TitleBox port number Priority Message this is the priority of the routing message coming fromthe Input Plugin This Priority must be already specified in that xml message TypeMessage there are three types of messages Warning Error or Info They are described in Nemed Values section Local Time PC system time InputPlugin the coresponding Value must contain the name of the Input Plugin providing the message CBErrMsg CaptureBox system messages CBIPAddress CaptureBox IP address CBPort CaptureBox port number 345 ALARMBOX Air Bo xOutputMedia the name of the played from AirBox media file AirBo xMsg AirBox system messages Air Bo xInstance AirBox Instance number It is used when there is more than one instance of AirBox started AirBoxlPAdress AirBox IP address AirBoxWarnings AirBox warning messages For now only message for missing media is available AirBo xProcess Status current AirBox application status alive or not alive Air Bo xPlaylistChanges changes
101. label CD or partition fe FLocalHDD i Media Type See In Point 00 00 00 00 label tape user bits etc mae aoe Media Type It is selected froma list previously drawn in MEDIA TYPES manager You can also add new Media types in this field by selecting Media JV Apply changes when Previous or Next buttons are clicked type manage r from the p OF CHE list This will invoke the Media Types dialog box EEN EES Right click on any row ofthe list EE New from the context menu then specify the name the prepare time the color for color coding and the properties See also the Media Types section OI A IN Point This field is visible if the media is a video tape Betacam DVCam DVCPro etc It shows the program s initial time code on the tape HH MM SS FF A media type is considered a videotape if its Random Access flag is not set Media Types gt O Random Access OUT Point This field is visible if the media is a video tape Betacam DVCam DVCPro etc It shows the program s final time code on that media HH MM SS FF A media type is considered a videotape if its Random Access flag is not set Media Types gt O Random Access Archive describes the physical location of the copy building floor room The Archives are defined in Classification Archive gt right click gt New archive Location this is the exact position of the copy It may be a shelf number a barcode number etc If the copy is a
102. load a new preset press the Load button and select a file It will appear in the Previewarea If you approve C Program Files Digital Ment C Program Files Digital Medi C Program Files Digital Medic D 5111111111111 bmp D 4222222222222222 bmp AIRBOX Preview Matte Color Load Apply None On Startup No logo Last used Logo 1 Ze Black Invert Alpha C White Si Color Display Auto Show Show Hide Position 63438 it press the Apply button to save the logo file in the preset list Invert alpha inverts the alpha key of the logo if the original picture file has an alpha Matte Color this is the background color which should be mixed with transparent colors and thus removed from the logo image Position illustrates the logo position on the screen On Startup these options are used to define the logo appearance on pushing the Start button in AirBox No Logo no logo appears on starting AirBox Last used If there are no Logo preset events in the playlist the last used logo will appear on starting AirBox Logo 1 If there are no Logo preset events in the playlist Logo Preset 1 from the list will appear on starting AirBox Auto showbox check it if you want to display the logo while you re editing it NOTE All changes will be shown on the screen immediately Show button starts displ
103. lt Alb lt J gt MPEG info tip enables See gt Use Extended showing detailed file information in the hint when sliding the mouse pointer over a clip in the playlist Hide hardware reset button checked by default uncheck this box to be able to see the Reset hardware button under the counters in the main AirBox interface 73 AIRBOX Show progress bar in block timer sec defines the time before a clip s end for showing the progress bar inside the block timer see View Block Timer For instance if a 15 second value is set the progress bar will be visible in the last 15 seconds of the clip playout During the rest of the time the progress bar will not be displayed just the counter itself Overlay channel number first channel is Sig big figure showing the AirBox instance will be displayed in the grid background You have to set the number of the first channel The numbers of all subsequently open channek will be updated automatically You just have to check the Overlay channel number box in each AirBox Settings if you want to view it in the grid Video preview aspect ratio choose the aspect ratio of Video preview window This is needed because some decoders can not report the aspect ratio of playing content so this must be selected manually in order to preview content properly Row Height defines the height of each playlist row It cannot be less than 16 pixels Frame rate fos this entry is nee
104. mainly when you import online media library files in your playlist The OML files might contain avi wav files Both types are inserted in the playlist using the Import tab delimited functionality fromthe File menu AirBox will consider the wav files as unsupported format so use Delete unsupported clips command to clean up your playlist 11 2 9 Clear List This command removes all clips from the playlist 1 2 10 Clip Trimmer Invokes the Clip Trimmer It allows previewing non destructive trimming and exporting parts of the currently selected clip to new files lll 2 11 Properties This command opens the Clip Properties window It has four tabs General Fixed Time Transition and Metadata The first three lines in the General tab si S S 3 r i e 7 eneral Fixed time Transition Metadata contain basic clip description information Title File name and Location me hoy d r File Eth Day mpg DI MPG D ir TIP You can save the last string entry Location E MediaMaterials MPG by M checking the check boxnext to it TE vekas NOTE Saving the last string entry is p Duration 00014508 r i 00 01 45 0 00 00 possible only for Dummy or Incomplete amis To Paan clips Houseld sl TC TapelD RE R Star sl LS Category DI RW P The green square next to the Title string mmm means that the file is available This Misc options rectangle will turn red if the file is z age
105. mandatory fields and send the resulting PlayBox Doctor report to us See detailed description of the PlayBox Doctor features in the Basic Play Box manual 248 TITLEBOX I GETTING STARTED TitleBox module is an on air graphics manager You can create different static or dynamic objects in TitleBox such as rolls crawls still pictures clocks etc and save them in projects In TitleBox you can also start objects from previously created project s at different times thanks to its Scheduler TitleBox works synchronously with the AirBox playout Separate objects in TitleBox can be started or stopped via AirBox by inserting TitleBox Net control events in an AirBox playlist 1 Quick Start Launch TitleBox Click the Crawl button in the object palette in the left Draw a rectangle in the Preview Area Type a text in the Properties dialog box and press OK Press the two Play buttons one in the bottom of the window and one in the third row of the taskbar Congratulations You have just created your first Title Bo x crawl 249 TITLEBOX ll USER INTERFACE TitleBox HD NOT FOR RESALE D Shared TitleBox projects soccer_SD_Ammended tbd E E ioj xj File Edit Network Object Project Help Oe mixa bexs opo Bales Hole ke i SEA Name Digtal Clock 21 Delay 0 00 sec Duration 0 00 sec IR SS amp 2R 9 bt Rao S e 55 Sify 55 SE he ZF jn Push From Top 1 00 sec lesten 21
106. next button to remove the selected AirBo x channel from the disable list The third button will clear the whole disable list Bin playlists in this tab you can create a list of prohibited playlists All playlists available in the Play lists tab of the Content Bin will be displayed in a drop down list at pressing 2 Add Bin playlist to disable list Settings click in this menu itemto select the LAN card to be used for the connection 338 ll WEB INTERFACE In order to access the Multi AirBox Manager froma distant location you will need the user name and password set in the Options menu After you log in to the Multi AirBox Manager a list of all AirBox channels once added to the Monitoring list will be displayed Click on the one you d like to control The following interface will open Z AirBox LanControl Microsoft Internet Explorer provided by Digital Media Technologies Oj x File Edit View Favorites Tools Help g Back J x amp A L Search Favorites 4 sl 3 2 sl gt 2 Get a amp Address Lei http ocalbostitest PC DI Go Test PC 1 PlayList Unnamed playlist PlayBack Control PlayList Control Status Play Stop Pause _ Next MoveUp MoveDown Au Insert Delete Playing No Location Title Duration ivel Category Performer Notes Selected e Eimpeg2 Glona_DobreDob al mpg Gloria_DobreDo
107. number of episodes or the template record 211 DATABOX ll 1 3 Templates node EH H Search Clear J7 Global search ee i Persons Age rate is III It Companies S Counties No te Rowse len Lee Nedatype Tvpe El Sequences Templates Expired Action T hriller Derailed Anatomy of a Train Wrect TEMPLATE 49147 Making CINEMA 8 Jurassic Park TEMPLATE 519492 COMMERCIAL Action Horror Sci Fi Gladiator TEMPLATE 579438 Mini Senes CINEMA Action Adventure Drama T hri Clock Stoppers TEMPLATE 63437 Film Trailers COMMERCIAL Action Comedy Sci Fi Scorpion King The Making TEMPLATE 6757 Making CINEMA Action Adventure 12 Stuart Little 2 TEMPLATE 841005 Making CINEMA Adventure Comedy Fantasy Opening TEMPLATE 8918 Opening CINEMA Tomb Raider Making TEMPLATE 934515 CINEMA ActionAdventureFantasy gt This node is used for viewing and editing the templates Temp lates are used as models for creating new records Using templates saves efforts for entering uniform data in multiple records They are very useful for creating sequences that consist of many records with the Same data You can create a new template record in New Record gt General gt M Template record or by right clicking over the Templates node in Tree View and then selecting New in the context menu If the record is set as tem
108. of the Online AirBoxes situated at the third configuration field Simply right click within this field to Add as a Master or Add as a Slave the relevant AirBox The icon seen in the third configuration window means that the particular AirBox is available The icon means a non responding AirBox V 2 3 The active switches monitoring window This window is activated when a Master AirBox is replaced with a Slave It monitors which of the Masters has been replaced as well as the address of the Slave AirBox The last digit in the address field represents the AirBox instance number In case of a Master s replacement the colour of the Active switches monitoring window becomes red Pressing the DI button will allow you to turn back to the initial state of the Master AirBox when it is available This does not initiate and actual switch because switching back to Master is always manual After pressing this button Multi Backup Manager will watch the AirBox Masters state again NOTE For now switching back to the main playback is manual and needs human intervention NOTE Multi Backup Manager is still BETA V 2 4 Log view Multi Backup Manager generates a log txt file situated in its installation directory It logs all the necessary events as alarms switching machines connections choosing preferred Slaves etc 174 CAPTUREBOX I GETTING STARTED 1 Quick Start Connect the video source signal to CaptureBox video
109. of frames for the OUT points If the stream s GOP size is one I frames only then trimming will be frame accurate I USER INTERFACE It combines a VGA preview screen and tools for editing the n and Out points of MPEG clips Clips are loaded into the Trim Window by double clicking on themin ListBox DataBox or AirBox modules The trimmer window has a number of keyboard shortcuts that are listed in the shortcuts leaflet in the PlayBoxcustomer s package P Play Play Selection Shift Space Stop MG Pause 1 s i Next Right j i Ke Previous Left Go to In Point Ctrl Right Go to Out Point Ctrl Left uo Mark In I lou Mark Out O J Split R Mig Merge Ctrl M Delete Clip Section Ctrl D Reset Ctrl BkSp amp Add Zone Z Ctrl s Zi Screen Shot Kr Export Frame Ctrl E i Trim Window In a 00 00 00 00 Position O okee ll Stream Extra Zones Shots Filters Wiktoria _MoliaSe mpg Type MPEG2 Video streams 1 Video stream found 720x576 25 00 fps VideoBitRate 8000000 bps Audio streams 1 Audio stream found Layer 2 48000 Hz stereo 384 kbps Duration i EN 100 03 50 10 00 03 50 10 Details Total Duration oe x Ary Balance JL in buj me sa gt o Dp el ae k x Close Position 00 01 07 14 Zoom 1 24 00 Mi2 4 1 12 E mpeg2 viktoria_MoliaSe mpg Preview Screen 317 The Preview screen occupies the largest part of the Trim Window It
110. of the Master 1 e playlist playback status and position will be sent to the preferred Slave is non responsive for two seconds it will be automatically replaced by a Slave AirBox If there is no preferred Slave specified or it is not available MBM will transfer the playlist to the first available Slave WARNING Keep in mind that the actual media files from the playlist won t be transferred but only the playlist Play Box recommends having all the media files on the Slave machine For convenience these files can be automatically transferred to the Slave machine by using the SafeBox module for more information see the relevant chapter further in the manual NOTE When you have to cover multiple channels using MBM an AirBox Backup license is not required VI GETTING STARTED WII Installation Multi Backup Manager is usually installed on one of the computers in your local network It watches all AirBoxes through the network It is not recommendable to install Multi Backup Manager on a playout machine 167 AIRBOX WARNING Prior to start the MBM application it is recommendable your firewall to be disabled V 1 2 Quick start 1 Launch the Multi Backup Manager 2 Push the Manually add new Master Manually add new Slave buttons in order to create the Master Slave monitoring lists 3 Type the address of the relevant Master Slave and its instance for example 192 168 50 27 2 where 2 is the number of AirBox
111. options dialog you can specify a default auto fill clip Music of the 80 ies DI i el xj K SE and create your own auto fill categories containing certain clips These settings are necessary for the automatic filling of gaps that may appear in E mpeg2 Discreet_2002_SMbit kamelia_Rec 00 03 23 07 E mpeg2 Gloria_DobreDo6al mpg 00 04 04 08 Yes 2 E mpeg2 2Video mpa 00 00 00 00 No 4 J E mpeg2 Gloria_ DobreDo6al mpg 00 04 04 09 No Soo E mpeg2 lota mpa 00 00 30 00 Yes E E mpeg2 Roma00 4N335040a mpg 00 00 18 11 No E mpeg2 Viktoria_MoliaSe mpq 00 03 50 14 No 8 JE mpeg2 0023a mpg 00 07 07 14 Yes Zannansnannsnanannnnsnnnnsnannnds 9 J E mpeg2 Discreet_2002_9Mbit Discreet200 00 04 02 11 No your playlist when 10 E mpeg2 Discreet_2002_9Mbit kamelia_ Rec 00 03 23 08 No using ised sine events ES On the top of this window you can see the Default auto fill clip string Browse for it by pressing the folder button to the right Belo w is the Auto fill categories field The drop down list contains all previously prepared categories hence it will be empty when you open it for xj the first time To create a new category press iamo the white sheet button to the right and enter Music of the 30ed the name of the new Category Click OK Cancel You can rename your categories later by pressing the gear wheel button Now you have to add clips to your category Press the fap b
112. or a mixed approach then you should install SafeBox see the SafeBox section for details on the Slave 157 AIRBOX AirBox machine Its task will be to replicate copy automatically the new coming content fromthe Master AirBox local storage to the local storage of the Backup AirBox The Change dongles option will allow you to change the dongle WIBU key of a currently playing unit without interrupting the work of the AirBox Thus if your Master machine is down and you need the full functionality on your Slave machine you will be able to change the dongle on the latter without interrupting its playback After you have inserted the new dongle press Tools Mirror Mode gt Change Dongle and the new dongle will be recognized IMPORTANT The BackUp machine should run the same software version as the Master machine 158 AIRBOX e x l P 5 4 P l ayl I S t Ch eck er f Check criterias JV Missing clips 5 This tool checks the playlist for Eno ras Se inconsistencies Enable the criteria you a z g IV Missing Logo Off events between Logo On events need by ticking the boxin front of them JV Missing Logo On events between Logo Off events gt B l ill fin ri tion of some V Non sequential bookmarks with time zones gt oP a e A d eos P IT Files or live streams shorter than fo seconds gt of the checking criteria Playlist duration shorter than mz S hours M Overlapped clips this check is
113. played fixed time event in the playlist if such an event exists Category from fixed time event uses the category fromthe current fixed time event this corresponds to the auto fill setting in the Clip Properties dialog of the fixed time item see the beginning of this document Custom category a sequence of clips created by you in the Auto fill options dialog see below which will be played back if a gap appears Default start tolerance in case you could accept some later or earlier start of your fixed time events specify the exact parameters here Thus if the time till the end of the previous clip is within the allowable later start it will be played out without being truncated Again if it finishes earlier within the allowab le earlier period the fixed time clip will start playing without need to fill in a several seconds gap This is not a fixed offset Example Let s assume that there are two items in the playlist an ordinary clip followed by a fixed time clip The first one finishes at 11 00 20 and the second one must start at 11 00 00 This is a time conflict situation But if the fixed time has set a later start tolerance of let s say 30 seconds AirBox will play the first item to its end and the fixed time will start at 11 00 20 To recapitulate later tolerances allow playback of the previous item to the end and earlier tolerances allow avoiding short gaps if possible The last part of this
114. removed yet It also displays their current status Playing Stopped Offline which means that the relevant AirBox is not running If any of the AirBox machines does not respond correctly the following sign will appear in front its name in the Monitoring list j The lines of all AirBox channels that are not included in the Monitoring AirBoxes list will be colored green in the Online AirBoxes list 1 TIP You can group ungroup AirBoxes in the monitoring list by right clicking in them and selecting a group from the drop down list Thus all commands that are sent to a channel that belongs to a group will be applied to all other channels in the same group TIP If you double click an AirBox channel in the Monitoring AirBoxes list MAM will open its tab for viewing 335 l 2 m dmt test 1 Control Name JdmttestT Stalus Playing ie ES eat aie Ce Oe ees a ag No Fierens Duaion al d comoplayout Placeh o 00 01 00 00 d comoplayout Placeho 00 01 00 00 d comoplayout Placeho 00 01 00 00 d comoplayout Placeho 00 01 00 00 5 d comoplayout Placeho 00 01 00 00 d comoplayout Placeho 00 01 00 00 d comoplayout Placeho 00 01 00 00 a d comoplayout Placeho 00 01 00 00 a d comoplayout Placeho 00 01 00 00 d comoplayout Placeho 00 01 00 00 d comoplayout Placeho 00 01 00 00 d comoplayout Placeho 00 01 00 00 d comoplayout Placeho 00 01 00 00 ita a za ms zm men as a EN xi WL
115. require little data like still frames in MPEG 2 to use little data and to use more for those that need it to maintain quality The result is an overall saving in storage as on DVDs or more efficient allocation of total available bit rate in a multi channel broadcast multiplex Video Graphics Array A display standard for IBM PCs with 640 x 480 pixels in 16 colors and a 4 3 aspect ratio There is also a text mode with 720 x 400 pixels IBM technical references define the product name of their original VGA display board as Video Graphics Array in contrast to the preceding boards the Color Graphics Adapter CGA and Enhanced Graphics Adapter EGA VideoCD Video Compact Disc DVD Video Object Video OBject file Wide Area Network WAV An audio file format developed by Microsoft that carries audio that can be coded in many different formats Metadata in WAV files describes the coding used To play a WAV file requires the appropriate decoder to be supported by the playing device Synonyms WAV MS Windows 2000 XP A Connector for Balanced Audio Y C Analogue S Video Short for Super video a technology used for transmitting video signals over a cable by dividing the video information into two separate signals one for luminance and one for chrominance S Video is synonymous with Y C video S video is a consumer form of component video used primarily with Hi8 and S VHS equip ment 366 PLAQBOX Abbrev
116. resumes fromthe same point on Next will stop the currently playing clip immediately and will switch to the next clip in playlist This happens by asmooth cut without any sound or visual artifacts Returnis active only after a Jump has been executed Use this button to return to the position before the last Jump Jump terminates the currently playing clip immediately and starts playing the selected one regardless of its position in the grid Cue This button will interrupt the playback and will pause on the first frame of the selected clip You can activate it also by holding down the lt Ctrl gt key and pressing the JUMP button at the same time Use this for preparing a clip for playback while showing its first frame on the output Since this is a machine and decoder dependent function you might have to increase the Cue Delaytime in the Settings dialog box Settings General gt General gt Cue delay Automation This button allows you to enable disable the incoming external triggers GPI input DTMF tones When pushed the incoming 24 AIRBOX commands will be ignored The button s background becomes red to notify the operator that Automation is OFF WARNING This button will not operate properly if used together with Ignore Zones Settings menu gt General gt Skip Zones Please do not use them simultaneously Reset resets the hardware driver If under any circumstances bad MPEG media or bad system setup playbac
117. rows Then go to Settings gt Graphic rules and set the conditions and action offset time Please check the Graphic rules section for details IMPORTANT Make sure not to use tab characters in the metadata fields Otherwise the saved metadata will not be interpreted correctly The lower part of the Metadata window is used for entering a specific metadata related to video parameters of the current clip If there is no metadata into the file or they are not correct you can enter here the proper data For each parameter there is a drop down menu from which to select the data The possible video metadata in Metadata window are Rescale Type rescaling type for the video If the rescale type is Custom than you can add aspeciffic Rescale value from the next field Resample Type resampling of the video bitrate If the resample type is Custom than you can add a speciffic Resample value from the next field AFD Active Format description Type If it is custom than you can select a value from the next field TIP Here it is the complete list of AFD codes values from ETSI TS 101 154 V1 7 1 Annex B ATSC A 53 Part 4 and SMPTE 2016 1 2007 0 ETSI reserved ATSC undefined 62 5 6 T 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 AIRBOX reserved ETSI 16 9 active picture top aligned ATSC not recommended ETSI 14 9 active picture top aligned ATSC not recommended ETSI box gt 16 9 center
118. select an object from the list below to make the settings for it Date defines the Start and or Stop date By default the Start day is today The Stop date is not mandatory Start by defines the starting trigger It could be a specific time an event for example GPD or CMD Duration defines the duration of the object appearance through Loop the number of loops This field is active only for dynamic objects Stop Time the stop time within the relevant day Duration duration within the relevant day Loop Until a stop event GPI for example Type defines the frequency of the object appearing only once every day every week every month or in a more sophisticated pattern Advanced Cycling defines the period of repeating the object appearance in minutes It is possible to define the end time of the object appearance within the day Until Advanced to get access to these settings you have to check the Advanced box in the Type field Here you can define a specific day of the week or a date for showing the object 299 TITLEBOX IV 7 3 Objects List The Schedule Objects list occupies the lower part of the Scheduler window All the scheduled objects and their settings are displayed in it In front of each object in the list there is a check box It is used for Mactivating O deactivating the particular object in the schedule A right mouse click in the Objects list opens a context menu
119. sencucdesaccecaceesseusesebszcee 243 PA Ge e KE WEE 243 IL USER INTERFACE ccccsccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccsceccsces 244 II 1 TOOD EE 244 II 2 PEA OR ERE EE NEEE O EE 244 II 3 SLAT EE 246 PLAQBOX UL MENUDAR seors aa 246 ENN FE E KEEN 246 CT GE E E 246 e TEN DOTE TOS Eet 246 TT1 3 Reload Graphic Rule 246 HUT 7 IE TOE Dy TIN RE 247 UI 3 K tt RE 247 I 4 SETTINGS MINU EEN 247 TTT 4 1 Ee 247 III 4 2 EE 247 ITT 4 3 GL Ee 248 HLS HEEN ee ee 248 TG COMMANDS MENU EE 248 HUT 7 PP seet Eege 248 II 7 1 A U ea AE EEEE 248 II 7 2 EE 248 PITS PIAY BON TD OCI OV ics ratisaacatraasndsatenrranssonanasaasanacsseaataeasaaahisaiaeds 248 THLIBO EE 249 I GETTING STARTED cccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccsscccccees 249 Ke tte TAR NEE 249 IL Hatt Regeerung Ee 250 UI WOR E 250 IL 2 POO IES SIRS sacar es sebenc bers E E 251 IL 3 O24 Sits a4 B24 hl Sanne nen eer ee 255 UA S TEM DAR EE 256 UA EE 256 HE MFENUBAR E 257 UL FEE IN RE 257 M FEDEN RE 257 HULS NETWORK MENU E 257 IT A OE TE O cece cae EA E E EAA 258 HLS PROCIT VIN RE 259 II 5 1 Project playout commande 259 III 5 2 Drier EE 259 II 5 3 EE eege 259 II 5 4 TS eege 260 II S S e E EE EE EE O E E E E 262 PLAQBOX Iv CGREATING OB VEC KE 264 Be E e UP eae ccc res ee ae cess ede ae epee ee 264 TV enge OBITS EE 264 Wo DBR ETING OBI EE 264 PVA OET E 265 PV OBIECT PROPERTIES E 265 IV 5 1
120. specified command is executed immediately Playback position offset This is intended in order to compensate some delay which may occur before slave could enter in playback state External command change This rule will replace an exact concrete eg Create new switch option Ka extern al event Master 192 168 50 36 1 Slave 192 168 50 27 1 contained in the Type External command change D Mas ters p lay list with another command Eternal command change 7 Command for replacement gaoh predefined b y the Acappella switcher command 0 1 5 1 user Replacing command Geh For e xa mp le It 1S Acappella switcher command 0 1 1 1 e quite possible to have a file based tape based playback xcs Le the Master AirBox to control a VTR This involves Switcher events one for switching to the VTR and another one for switching back to AirBox If the Master machine fails and there must be a switch fromthe VTR to the Slave machine instead of the Master the cross points must be changed Broadcast text via UDP You can enter a text to be transmitted on the specified UDP port The text messages are supporting variable replacement replace time will be replaced with the actual switch time master_ab will be replaced with a name of Master AirBox slave_ab willbe replaced by a name of Slave AirBox re E is pressed a default alarming script will be set automatically
121. text oclip_title This line contains the name of the Title Box object Title and a description of the text that it should contain as you see in this case we will extract information from the clip_title column of the relevant playlist entry You can drag n drop the Preset Values fromthe list to the nght Star text clip_star similar to the above here we have described which cell contains the information to be displayed in the Star text object AirBox sends out this command to Title Box through the net control op tion and the clip title and the performer name are displayed Now we have to send out another command to hide the graphics We called it Clip_Start_Hide BES 7 Skip this action on Next i I Skip this action if there is an empty field Clip_End_Show Action time offset E ei percent Clip_End_Hide Action script SE LOAD_TEMPLATE template tmpl Background stop Title stop Star stop M Preset values EEN Le clip_title clip_location clip_category clip_notes clip_star A 142 AIRBOX LOAD_TEMPLAT E TB_Music tm pl point out which template is addressed Background stop A Stop command for the Background object Title stop A Stop command for the Title text object Star stop A Stop command for the Star te xt object WARNING All entries in the Action script field are case sensitive so enter them exactly as they are in
122. the Multi Drag list File name File path and Status Double click on a file to create a record in the database The New Record dialog box will appear After entering the file its status becomes SAVED During the next drag n drop you will see the Multi Drag list with all previously dragged files that haven t been saved To remove a file from the list nght click it and choose dele te fromthe context menu To remove the whole list choose clear list fromthe context menu NOTE The Multi Drag list is not a default option If you want to see it during drag n dropping you will have to activate it by un checking the Use Auto insert box Options gt General gt U Use Auto insert If you do not want to describe each entry separately during drag n dropping check Options gt General gt M Use Auto insert boxand select a template record or Default options for describing the files Thus most of the data will be filled up automatically If a specific category fromthe Tree Viewis selected during drag n dropping or during pressing the New Record button the new record will be automatically added to this element After pressing the New Record button in the Menu bar a New Record dialog box appears It consists of six pages General Instance Classification Credits Traffic and Additional 219 DATABOX 1 2 1 General EuropAssistance properties General Instances Classification Credits Additional Custom properties
123. the Pulse duration field After that the playback continues If you don t want to continue the playback just insert a Stop Wait or Fixed time event after the GPI event NOTE You can find detailed information about AirBox GPI plug ins in Appendix further in this manual IMPORTANT The Play Box modules DO NOT support the Deck Control connector supplied on the DeckLink breakout cable Kramer Switcher Output leis The Kramer Switch module allows you to control all x01 Model vs 211 ig and x11 Kramer Switchers AirBox controls them via the O E old protocol only Protocol 2000 not supported in this SSC plug in The switchers may be controlled via RS 232 O E and or RS485 422 communication ports The Kramer Switch output functionality is not a X corel standard part of AirBox If you have a license to use Kramer Switch output Enable and Configure it In the configuration window you can define Model the model of the Kramer Switcher used You can select it from the pop up list of the available ones Protocol the protocol used for the respective switcher You can select it from the pop up list COM Port the COM port used for connecting to the switcher You can select it fromthe available COM ports Baud rate the baud rate of the port agx CC Local mode Com Port COM1 IT Set breakway after command ave z Kramer Matrix Switcher Output The Kramer Matrix Switcher module allows you
124. there is more than one Besides you can view all CPUs simultaneously or an average value of the CPUs usage TIP You can arrange all windows together by pressing lt Ctrl F12 gt 202 CAPTUREBOX 1 3 Capture Menu I1 3 1 Compensation Invokes a dialog box for adjusting the capturing delay compensation in frames The capturing delay is hardware specific so the values in this dialog are determined after the method test and mistake 11 3 2 Setup Opens a capture setting dialog box This command duplicates the SetUp button situated under the batch capture grid The dialog box is different according to the encoder used See the Capture Settings section to view the description of some encoders setting dialogs 11 3 3 Device select Opens a dialog box for choosing the capture device 11 3 4 Capture It is active only when you work in Capture mode the Capture tab is selected It provides three options that duplicate the relevant buttons under the clip data fields Batch Capture starts the batch capturing following a predefined list Auto Capture starts auto capturing the program will control the VIR Manual Capture starts recording the currently available video source A dialog box will appear prompting for your confirmation 11 3 5 Print to tape It is active when you work in Print to tape mode the Print to tape tab is selected REC starts simultaneously the file playback and VTR recording Pl
125. to the selection Double clicking over a clip invokes the Clip Trimmer A detailed description of the Clip Trimmer can be found further in the manual Double clicking over a missing clip invokes its properties dialog If you want to view the properties of an existing clip nght click in its row and select Clip properties from the context menu Right clicking in the grid opens a context menu It contains commands fromthe Edit menu and the Playlist menu that are described further in the manual Columns description Start Time shows the start time of each clip Duration shows the actual duration of each clip If a clip has been trimmed its new actual duration is displayed in this column Type column shows the type of the clip WPEG or AVI DV Category column contains category information fed by DataBox The background is colored with the predefined category color File Name contains information about the file paths and names If you need to change the path of certain file in List Box just press lt F8 gt to open the Browse dialog If a file is missing after the playlist is loaded in AirBox its line will be skipped and the playout will continue with the next available clip Title ClipID Star columns contain data fed by DataBox describing the clip name clip ID and the performing artists You can edit these fields manually in ListBox in the clip properties dialog Notes displays trimming notification
126. to which you would like to link your object Thus your object s content will be updated at each save of the txt file An additional window will open to display all objects and their file links Gf any in the current project You can set change the file links from within the Links dialog Just press the browse button to the far right of the relevant row to open a new browse dialog B Property 2 Property Tools 265 TITLEBOX Assign GPI Event select it to control the currently x selected object through inputting GPI pulses on the PC COM a ports A dialog will open for you to specify the meaning of Signal the received GPI pulses Thus TifleBox can execute up to CTS clear to send three commands per COM port depending on the GPI signal z SE EE CTS DSR RING or RLSD You can view all GPI input ALSO receive Ine signal detect events and the objects controlled by themin the GPI dees Manager dialog select Project menu gt Plug ins gt GPI Play manager seal Assign Task this command corresponds to the Assign Ge X Cancel l Task item described in the Object menu above IV 5 1 Still Picture Properties la x SS bed EWE RRR Nomad The Picture Properties dialog box looks like the M Antiflicker z Vertical Value 7 271 fem ONE tO the left ee The Toolbar allows you to Open and Save the image Load and Invert the mask the alpha SE a channel and Flip the im
127. two mono audio files you have to select only the first one the second file will be loaded automatically FinishBox LE allows creating an MPEG2 file fromup to five streams inside the mu Itiple x In the Output program stream field you have to select the output file name and its location by using the folder icon Press the Multiplex Now button to start multiplexing the currently specified source streams You can see the multiplex progress in the bottom of the window Encoding D MPEG for TESTS I_frame_test_Lowest mpa I_frame_test_Lowest way DESEN Encoding frame 680 of 1671 ETA 00 00 05 4 13 realtime During multiplexing the Multiplex now button is replaced with a Stop button New is used for clearing of all Source streams fields and to add new source files Inthe Batch List area you can build a list for multiplexing more than one group of streams Create your batch list by selecting the desired source streams and locations and pressing the Add gt gt button or by drag n dropping them from the explorer window The name of the Output Program Stream followed by the names of source 205 stream files in brackets will appear in the Batch list If there is a batch containing an uncompressed audio stream the program will encode it first Audio Encoder Options and then will multiplex the batch Add gt gt is used for adding the files from Source streams fields in the Batch List s lt lt Edit is used for m
128. wider than 16 9 active picture The aspect ratio of the source area is not given and the size of the top bottom bars is not indicated ATSC bar data indicating the extent of top bottom left and right bars should be transmitted when using this code reserved reserved reserved Full Frame image same as the frame 4 3 or 16 9 4 3 Image Full Frame in 4 3 frame Pillarbox in 16 9 frame 16 9 Image Letterbox in 4 3 frame Full Frame in 16 9 frame 14 9 Pillarbox Letterbo x image Unused 4 3 with shoot and protected 14 9 centre The term shoot and protect is not explained in the standard but means that the areas above and below the central 14 9 region of the 4 3 active picture can be trimmed without losing important detail 16 9 with shoot and protect 14 9 centre Here the areas to the night and left of the central 14 9 region of the 16 9 active picture can be trimmed without losing important detail 16 9 with shoot and protect 4 3 centre Here the areas to the nght and left of the central 4 3 region of the 16 9 active picture can be trimmed without losing important detail Field order check it to change the original file order Item input Aspect the aspect ratio of the current clip If there is no info about the aspect in the file or it is wrong you can enter it here NOTE Metadata per clip are active in Mult Format plug ins only 63 AIRBOX III 3212 Randomize This command randomizes the order of all select
129. you need to express a movement of the text you can define Animation properties Here you have to define a rotation by X Y and Z axes where the rotation is defined in degrees per frame For example if you define Rotate by X 1 this means that the rotation by X is one degree per frame If you define Rotated by X 2 this means that the rotation by X is two degrees per frame Start frame and Stop frame fields from Animation properties are used if you want to start and stop the rotation of the object at a specific frame In these fields you have to enter a number of frames for starting and stopping the animation For example if you have defined Rotate by X and you want to stop the object at 180 than you have to define stop frame start frame 180 If Rotate by X 2 than stop frame start frame 90 292 TITLEBOX If you want the animation to start immediately at object play the Start frame field must be zero If you want the animation to start later than object play with some delay you have to enter the needed number of frames for delay into the Start Frame field 3D Text properties gives you possibility to change the text color front and back sides and text depth In the bottom of the Properties window there is area for entering the text itself and set the Font parameters lfor the text Press the green arrow button 4 to enter the text into the object 293 TITLEBOX IV 6 2 3D Picture The main properties of the
130. 0 2 7 data source to be used as a new instance ODBC Data Provider 1 0 27 Select its line and press Config The Hie dal el eles eed HTML Table Data Provider 1 0 2 7 configuration dialogs vary according to the selected plug in When you configure the plug in and press OK button into the main screen a new data d 1 Refresh Gavel provider line appears ger Ce 307 TITLEBOX DataSource Link properties Data Source HTML Table Data Provider 01 M Update m Cursor scroll Automa C Manual e Every 25 sec 2 Cursor control ET Scroll by f rows a Reset cursor on dataset change Reset cursor on field change F Start cursor scroll on any Object play C Objects control Stop Objects on bottom cursor M Stop Next Slide on bottom cursor Stop Objects on any Object stop Start Objects on any Object play 1 Start Objects on automatic update XK Cancel Select the needed data provider and drag amp drop it over the TitleBo x object in the left A DataSource Properties window will open Here you have to define the data source appearing Into the header line of the Property window is the name of the selected data provider Update area Cursor scroll area Cursor control area Objects control area Press OK button to save the settings After pressing OK an Object Properties window will appear Here you have to define how to link the data from data source to the TitleBo
131. 02 CINE 0014 Mini Series CINEMA Action Science Fiction Expired Highlander The Ep 003 CINE 0015 CINEMA Action Science Fiction 8 This node displays the sequences You can add a new sequence by right mouse clicking on the node and selecting New fromthe context menu A dialog box window appears to fill in the sequence s properties BEE Sequence name the relevant name of the Sequence Name Highlander The Color beg sequence Color color for color coding First episode the number of the first episode Last episode the number of the last episode The first episode number could not be higher than that of the last episode Templates the template record name for this sequence You could choose it from the list create a new temp late record or not set a template By default it is set to NONE After setting the episode numbers and the template record for a sequence press the OK button to create as many records as the defined number of episodes The data in these records will be the same as in the template record First episode fi Last episode fi o0 Template NONE To delete a sequence right click on it and then click Delete in the context menu To change the sequence s properties or to add new episodes right click the sequence name and choose Properties fromthe context menu A Property dialog box will appear and you will be able to change the
132. 1 Airbox browse mControk E Contro EW A Contro EH A Peet Pee I race er alal asl e ees Tee a 00 00 11 09 00 00 11 09 a D MPEG1424 mpg 2 D AMPEG1 2x4 npg 3 D AMPEG1 2x4 mpg 00 00 11 09 4 DAMPEG1 2x4 mpg 00 00 11 09 00 00 00 00 Mo Filename Duration Name dmttest 1 Status Dffline gt p lI _8 amp a a ES BR e d comoplayout Placeho 00 01 00 00 d comoplayout Placeho 00 01 00 00 3 d comoplayout Placeho 00 01 00 00 a d comoplayout Placeho 00 01 00 00 un d comoplayout Placeho 00 01 00 00 d comoplayout Placeho 00 01 00 00 d comoplayout Placeho 00 01 00 00 d comoplayout Placeho 00 01 00 00 out Placeho 00 01 00 00 d EE Placita 00 01 00 00 omoplaye d comoplayout Placeho 00 01 00 00 3 JE mpeg2 0023a mpg 00 07 07 14 d comoplayout Placeho 00 01 00 00 4 _JE mpeg2 Discreet_2002_9Mbit kar 00 03 23 08 Online Airboxes 5 d comoplayout Placeho 00 01 00 00 5 E mpeg2 lota mpg 00 00 30 00 dl ss zs zl th Mn lk Ml DE CH OC OO EE CES ti EISE BS E mpeg2 Gloria_DobreDo6al mpg 00 00 45 00 e E mpeg2 Improper Movie_001c mp 00 09 03 15 E mpeg2 Riaina_LiuboyNeProsia m 00 03 28 00 8 JE mpeg2 Roma00 4N335040a mpe 00 00 18 11 Name oranimrat Sy E e d Se ee Monitoring Aboes E mmc Ze dmt test 1
133. 1 E J raer mpi 7 Ki E oO u AN MPEG 2 48 kHz 2l 14 02 25 00 01 03 Mike s New Car Mike s New Car Trimmed Original duration 00 01 09 E mpeg2 Mike s New Campo 14 03 35 00 01 48 MPEG 2 48 kHz Trailer MI Trimmed Original duration 00 01 49 1 E mpeg2 PAL 16 2AML Tralet mp SE 14 05 24 00 01 48 MPEG 2 48 kHz Trailer Trimmed Original duration 00 01 48 E mpeg2 PAL 16_9 MI_Trailer er cl Total duration 00 46 58 OO Loop at 14 15 49 Selection 00 01 48 Mixed Soft Playback 244 Ki Grid Features The Color Coding in the grid provides additional information to users Dark Blue bar shows the currently selected clip all actions i e Move Up Down is applied to it Red text rows contain events You can insert the same events as in AirBox Red colored rows represent clips which cannot be found on the specified file location A red minus appears in front of the clip position number Drag n Drop It allows dragging playlist items within the grid or fromone grid to another from DataBox or from to AirBox If you hold down the lt Ctrl gt key while dragging the executed operation is Copy If you just drag n drop the operation is Move Multi selection allows simultaneous manipulation of many clips move randomize etc Clips can be added to the selection by holding lt Shift gt or lt Ctrl gt key The lt Shift gt key selects from to while the lt Ctrl gt adds a single clip
134. 1 connected gt 169 AIRBOX V 2 1 The Toolbar The supported features situated in the Toolbar are as follows a Manually add Master here you have to type the address of the Master AirBox Delete selected Master or preferred Slave deletes a selected Master fromthe Master AB configuration fields or preferred Slave B Manually add new Slave in the second pair buttons adds new slave AirBox in the Slave AB configuration window d Delete selected Slave in the second pair buttons deletes a selected Slave AirBox Setup switch rules You can adjust a special rule i e command to be executed in case of AirBox replacement The rules can concern a particular Master or all Masters A rule can affect just one or all the Slaves Pressing this button will open the Setup switch options dialog Setup switch options xi The three BR buttons Master fiau Slave au D S itu ated at the upper left Logo change 192 168 50 36 1 192 168 5036 2 1 gt 2 corner above External command ALL ALL Kramer sie Ps S 1211 M 1 1 In th e grid are Path change 192 168 50 36 3 192 168 50 36 4 D L test files DVRAW DY gt D _test files UDP broadcast ALL ALL oreplace_time gt omaster_ab has been us ed for Playback position offset 192 168 50 204 192 168 50 202 3 cre atin g f removing and editing rules The Master and Slave drop down lists are intended for filtering purposes They are useful for searc
135. 180 degrees M Flip fields check it if you need to change the fields order M Black video on stop in case you leave this box un checked the last shown frame will remain on the output after stopping the playback M Single field on pause use it to avoid flickering of the video caused by showing the two fields of a frame during pause Into the Logo tab you can find some basic ET x settings for having logo or subtitles or both on a Alpha Aspect Ratio About the BlackMagic MPEG2 plug in Sie Ge EE In the General filed you can enable disable the vee Fade usage of logo subtitles or both When both logo and subtitles are enabled a third check box becomes active check M Logo on top if you would like the logo to be superimposed over Decoder Setup X Conca subtitles in case they overlap You can adjust the logo fading effect by changing the transition time in frames in the Fade field below NOTE There will be no fade effect when using logo and subtitles simultaneously SS Stis XI Open the Alpha tab if you need to General Logo Alpha Aspect Ratio About do external fill and key and you need the alpha channel output on the second SDI output on a DeckLink PRO decoder Je Use alpha channel JV Use key drive Key drive do internal fill and key over a video signal E d fed on the inputs of a DeckLink card where DA p OSS
136. 1b le A You must reset 4irBox to make this option available First enable the use of alpha channel Decoder Setup co x cance Then if your key files are on another drive check M Use key drive and specify it in the drop down list 100 AIRBOX NOTE The folder structure of the key drive should be identical to the one of the video drive and the file paths of the key files should be the same as those of the video files NOTE You CANNOT mix files with and files without alpha channel in the same playlist IMPORTANT This functionality is still under development It does not operate properly Aspect Ratio tab here you can force the General Logo Alpha Aspect Ratio About aspect ratio of the output video Force Output Aspect Ratio Aspect Convertion Type C Auto Letter Box This tab provides the following options G 4x3 C 14x9 Auto it will preserve the original aspect of Lee EE the source file 4 x 3 it will force 4 3 aspect to all source files When 4x3 aspect is select you can choose Decoder Setup s ok X cores the Aspect Conversion Type how to process files that have different aspect ratio in the right side Letter Box if the source file has aspect 16 9 two horizontal black bars will be added above and under the video to fill up the remaining part of the screen The horizontal size of the video is preserved 14x9 small parts on the two sides of the vi
137. 2 TS stream in it 122 AIRBOX lll 4 4 15 IP WMV Stream This Plug in allows streaming Windows Media Video streams trough the LAN card of your AirBox server Still the playlists you use must contain MPEG 2 encoded files only Its settings are organized in three tabs General Logo About The About tab displays some information about the current plug in version In the Logo tab you can enable the use of logo and adjust its fade effect The General tab contains the basic settings of lt lt x the plug in Video Standard you have to specify the oe ae TV standard of the source media PaL In the P settings filed define the port to be dee used for streaming pon feos f Below there are two checkboxes for filters Z Feke T Deiterlace Check Flip Fields to flip the field and check Deinterlace to have deinterla zing S OK Cancel Press Configure button tabs for video audio encoder set up In the Video tab you can iP wmv Stream Confio DD choose the video Codec Deeler Profile Description AirBox PL IP WM Stream Configuration Profile and other video parameters Videos zeen In Substreams area set the output stream Bi trate as Codec Windows Media Video 9 1 Image DI De Ces well as the Width and Height FPS ES Quality 100 Height 576 rs output ms Keyframe 300 Buffer windiow 300 1 2 Birate 1500 000 you want to create VBR TI a lit DI
138. 20 for ex 297 TITLEBOX Position and Rotation properties are the same as described for 3D Text object above There are two more definitions for 3DMesh object Light this is the Light falling on the object by X Y and Z axes as wellas the global Light Intensity Color Balance the global adjustment of the intensities of the main colors Red Green and Blue 298 TITLEBOX IV 7 Scheduler The Schedule mode allows creating a schedule for playing the objects To add an object to the Schedule press the Add to Schedule button fromthe TitleBox Toolbar A Schedule window will appear It consists of Schedule commands Object s settings and Object list IM AT Scheduler Commands Activate press it to activate the schedule for the current project Log File press it if you want to create a log file A browse window will open for defining a log file Default sets the default settings You can create your own default settings as well Del deletes a selected object fromthe Object s list Clone clones the settings of the selected object A new line for the same object will appear in the Object s list Then you can modify its settings This feature is useful when you want to define a different behavior of the object in the different days or hours for example Reset resets the Schedule IV 7 2 Objects Settings Here are the available settings for scheduling of objects You should
139. 307 VI 1 WEATHER DATA RBROVIUDER 309 VEZ FPILELINK DATA PROVIDER visiccevsaesscenienceces euceseiaaesesisesiaaversnensrces 310 VI 3 ODBC DATA PROVIDER caconccenavidacevaitecnretnteceeuetorekisiallocubasstaddudaseaese 311 VLA RSS DATA PROVIDER visisicsisinccsdavcovervenserscnnsdeancsadiosonanavenavtensareaniens 312 VLS XML DATA PROVIDER wisncssicstantavsatsacedicceaciotocdvan bdonsanaeianusoranenntans 313 V1 6 HTML TABLE DATA BROVIDER 314 VI 7 EAS EMERGENCY ALERT SYSTEM DATA BRONVIDER 315 CLIP IRIMMER geeiert 317 L USER INTERFACE sicsscsisdsssinsossoossotssessveusorasesesdontosaoski ossis eg 317 LL PREVIEW SCREEN bet 317 LZ TRMMFRLCONI O EE 318 L3 VOLUME e RE 321 E US AR eee EEA EEA 321 II TRIMMER PAGES cccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccces 322 II NTO t EE 322 II 2 CE ONE EAE A AE 323 II 3 Ee KEE 324 IA NNEN 324 IL 5 EE EE EE 325 II 6 Cr EE 326 SAFED OX EE 327 MULTI AIRBOX MANAGER ccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccces 333 L GETTING SIZRTEEIRenenseige eebe eege Dee 333 ki NOS AT e EN 333 Ee OO ER WEEN 333 II USER INTERFACE sorreraren aa RAE a 334 II AIRBOX BpROwWsrR 335 UI AIRBOX CONTROLDPANELS 336 II 3 CONI T BED eT EEEE tows 337 IA IVE INE AR EE 338 TEE WEB INTERFACE ssessessssossessessessecocsossossosoossesoesossossosoesosesoeso 339 11 ALARND OX EE 341 I GETTING STARTED NEE 341 Le SSN EE 341 II USER INTERFACE essscsscasssncsscccsc
140. 3D Picture object are the same as these of 3D Text object ala x F mgges Postion z Rotation z Arimation z Vertices 2 Vetex colors eer beet wd fon Veten Iwi uf EP 0 up op aap ason Czo acrea There are two additional properties Blend color and Vertices Into Blend color box you can select a color for b lending with the picture object For example ifa red color is selected the result picture will be as below Vertices describe four vertex of the object UpperLeft UL UpperRight UR DownLeft DL and DownRight DR Tip Vertex is a special kind of point which describes the corners of the geometric shapes Vertices are commonly used in computer graphics to define the corners of surfaces in 3D models Vertex parameters are Vertex twist and Vertex color 294 TITLEBOX Vertex twist describes the shift of the object s comers position towards the Z position of the object This way you can create new shape of your object For example if you have the following object rotated towards X axis After entering Vertex twist values you will have the following object If you want to save only the new shape without the picture you can delete the picture by pressing Delete button zz Than you can define the Vertex colors for UpperLeft UL UpperRight UR Do wnLeft DL and DownRight DR corners of the objects These colors will be showed instead of the picture like in the next
141. 6 Drag and Drop EE HouselD Default values Export Import Database TCI import Drag and drop 4 gt DataB ox fields mapping Title Sequence ile name Type DataBox field AjirBox metadata field X Cancel DATABOX This page allows importing additional metadata from DataBox when dragging clips into ListBox and AirBox All explanations in this paragraph apply for both ListBox and AirBox As the General clip properties can accommodate a limited number of data now you can use the Metadata page of clip properties in ListBox to add as many additional fields as necessary All you have to do is map the relevant fields in DataBox to the corresponding Metadata categories in ListBox The gray column in the left of this tab contains a list of all fields available in DataBox The column to the right of it allows you type the names of the metadata fields in ListBox Thus you can map the Person from DataBox to the Producer metadata in the clips properties in ListBox NOTE This mapping does not affect the standard drag n drop operation of DataBox Even if you do not assign the DataBox Title to the Title filed in ListBox it will still be transferred to the relevant cell in the General clip properties But if you want to copy the DataBox Title to a metadata field as well you will have to type that field s name here 237 DATABOX II 4 Media Types It defines the types of media that ar
142. 7 AIRBOX 11 4 4 8 Deltacast ASI MPEG2 TS Output This plug in setup dialog conssts of three tabs gt The General tab contains most of the settings available for this plug in A drop down list in the upper left comer provides options for video standard selection Checking the M Use IP streaming box the User has to define Setup x General Logo About Video standard PaL D MPEG settings i TS Mux Rate Audio Bit Rate j S I Automatic J Use IP streaming ER kbps IP settings j 4000000 bizs Address 192 168 50 57 Le S ch S Buffer Size 1316 bytes Port 1234 Interface IT Multicast gt Protocot Ce UDP CC RIP IV Flip Fields Graphic Settings Encoder Settings settings for the ASI output video to be streamed through the LAN card Address enter the IP address of the remote machine to receive the stream If you check M Multicast i e streaming to multiple machines you will have to enter a special multicast address in the Address field the multicast addresses are in the range between 224 0 0 0 and 239 0 0 0 TTL stands for time to live for the Internet packets This spin box is active only if the M Multicast box is checked The higher the TTL value the longer the packets will live and pass through more network routers By default TTL is set to 1 which is enough for local networks Buffer size in this spi
143. 7 tga golf0008 tga Bilon Bitootball petz Fos Bitoctball pewttag Los FS qolF0009 tga Bilon football_new0038 tga BS Football_new0049 tga golf0010 tga golfo B Football_new0039 tga Bloc os ES qolF0011 tga Bilon B Football_new0040 tga 2 golF0001 tga BS oolF0012 tga Bilon Biroctball pewttg Los Bloc os FS qolF0013 taa golfo feo Football_new0042 tga E g0lF0003 taa H golf0014 tga Bilon Load Sequence As DU Sel Index 38 Full Frame IV Load Al gt C A Filed First E Load From al bie name tootball_new0038 tas Di C B Filed First E Load To ES Files of type Targa Files tga DI Cancel My Com mputer Mu Network F E 276 TITLEBOX Besides you can load animated giffiles If you use the Add button Title Box will load only the first picture of the file If you use the Open button TitleBox will load the entire range of gif images NOTE We do not recommend using gif sequences for high quality applications because they have only 256 indexed colors and do not have 8 bit transparency just one color can be either entirely transparent or entirely solid If you want to load only a part of the files enter the numbers of the first and of the last file of the sequence in the Load from and Load to fields respectively Use the blue arrows to the right to enter the number of the currently selected file in the relevant field If you are loading an interl
144. BOX IV 5 8 Banner Properties Pushing the Insert Banner button invokes a dialog box for you to create a list of picture files They will be displayed as a slide show in this object Ban DE Oy By Be e LC Watch Directoy S 5 00se0 i Random lt D sec S Stietch aS Use the well know buttons to add insert and delete pictures from the list invert their alpha and move themup and down and reverse their order When you select a picture from the gallery to the right it is displayed in the preview window to the left The buttons above it are relevant to the currently selected picture By pushing the S button you can choose a background color for it Specify how long it will be displayed and the transition pattern and duration as well as the pictures layout in the drop down list in the upper right corner If you would like to set the same parameters for all pictures included in the banner just press the Set AS Default button Z Thus the settings you have already made will affect all newly inserted images in this object The Watch Directory option is a relatively new feature developed to your convenience When you check this option a browser opens automatically for you to specify a folder that contains picture files Opening it will activate a kind of slide show in the banner and there will be no need to open all pictures from this folder one by one 282 TITLEBOX IV 5 9 Chat note objects Another o
145. Box could proceed in two ways preserve the tree structure of the source location if checked or save all files fromthe source in a single folder af not checked M Export Online list every sec this function automates the export of OM L information to a predefined file at user defined intervals Below you can set the period for checking the source locations for new files By default this period is set to 5 seconds In the Max simultaneous jobs field you can set the number of transfers to be performed at a time NOTE The higher this number is the slower transfer for a separate file will proceed NOTE In automatic mode simultaneous jobs are performed only for locations with equal priorities M PlayList mode In this mode SafeBox will search the Source directory only for playlist files ply and will copy move them to the Destination directory Besides it will search for and copy move all the files contained in the playlist following their file paths After copying moving the files to the Destination folder SafeBox will change their file paths in the playlist to match the Destination location so that there is no need to change them manually NOTE The playlist s and their related files will be copied moved to the same Destination directory WARNING Make sure to use real network paths when creating your playlists Do not use mapped drives when pointing to the media files locations Thus you will ensure that all files need
146. Controler EI V 4 Slide Controller The slide controller will play your slides consecutively with duration at your will If you want to rearrange the order of showing the slides you will have to drag n drop them in the Detail stab If you want to skip a slide just disable it by un checking the M Enable checkbox in its row The Slide Controller window contains four rows and eight buttons The Controller counter is situated in the top row It counts the time since the slide controller was started Below you can see the name of the currently playing slide Further down is the Slide counter By default it shows the elapsed time since the start of the current slide If you want to see how much time remains to the end of the slide duration click in the Time gt cell It will turn into lt Time and will start counting down The last row has three parts play status loop value and the number of the currently playing slide In the bottom of the Slide Controller are situated the playout control buttons They provide hints and hotkeys Button Command Shortcut GotoFirst Slide Ctrl Home Go to Previous Ctrl PageUp Go to Next Ctrl PageDown Skip Next Slide Ctrl Left arrow By default the Slide Controller is a separate window that appears outside the Slide Manager If you want to lock it in the Slide Manager window right click in the counter and select Dock in Manager 306 TITLEBOX VI Data Source Manager The Da
147. D Audio input v Capture type Ke UDP MPEG 2 Input This plug in decodes A DTMF tones that come through UDP in a MPEG2 eegen emeng Transport Stream Port i234 Select the UDP Mpeg input in the DTMF semm s plug ins list and press ASS QN Then press SE Configure to specify the source of the cue tones e e SE Host IP Address and Port and the Stream ID The S ag Nee DTMF tones could come in three different ways Analog DTMF the cue tones arrive as a FS separate audio stream in the TS The PID of this stream should be entered in the Stream ID box 80 AIRBOX When the Analog DTMF is selected to the left you can specify the Source audio channel Digital Cable DVS 253 the US implementation of digital signaling for splice points the points are described in SI tables Digital TV SMPTE 3 12M the European imp le mentation of digital signaling for splice points the points are described in SI tables After configuring the plug in click OK and go to the Commandstab It contains all possible actions that can be executed upon receiving certain DTMF sequence Please check the details in the next page DeckLink Input Options 3 ze DeckLink Input M Device This plug in allows reading DTMF tones embedded in an SDI becki zl video signal or coming through the analog audio inputs of a ee BlackMagic DeckLink board Select it in the plug ins list and Nc ie pre
148. D branimira 1 D gogo 3 P x6dae g2 1 Playlists Folders 29 11705 14 30 55 gogo 3 disconnected Morning News Trailers January Evening E mpeg2 Viktoria_MoliaS e mpa E mpeg2 0023a mpg E mpeg2 Roma00 4N335040a mpc 00 00 18 11 oG Beal tik 1 F Ge ee ee 00 03 50 14 00 07 07 14 29 11 05 14 32 26 29 11 05 14 32 26 29 11 05 14 32 26 29 11 05 14 36 59 gogo 4 disconnected 29 11 05 14 37 41 kamen 1 disconnected 29 11 05 14 38 03 kamen 1 connected 29 11 05 14 40 00 branimira 1 connected 29 11 05 14 41 22 29 11 05 14 43 40 x6dae g2 1 connected kamen connected gogo 4 connected kamen disconnected gogo 3 connected The user interface comprises of several zones all described in detail further in this section The predominant part is occupied by the control panels of all AirBox modules currently added for monitoring in the Manager They are arranged in tabs four AirBox channels per tab Each tab caption contains information about the channel included in it If you go to Options menu and select Show online AirBoxes the field to the far right will change to a global AirBox management panel called AirBox Browser see the next page The lower right section of the window is dedicated to Channel connection logging and the remaining part to the left represents the content bin TIP t You can join the Monitore
149. DBC Data Provider in the list of available plug ins and press Config The ODBC Connection Manager will open Press E to create a new connection The following dialog will open for you to specify the Connection Alias and view the New Connection gt x Connection String Connection properties Li n Ge Press Build to configure the lt New Connection gt connection The window below will Connection String open an x Provider Connection Advanced All LEJ l cns J Select the data you want to connect to OLE DE Providers MediaCatalogDB OLE DB Provider The ODBC configuration dialog contains four t abs MediaCatalogMergedDB OLE DB Provider MediaCatalogWebDB OLE DB Provider H Microsoft Jet 4 0 OLE DB Provider In the Pro vider tab select the data base type Microsoft OLE DB Provider For Data Mining Services Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Indexing Service you want to connect to Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Internet Publishing S P Microsoft OLE DB Provider for ODBC Drivers When you click Next the Conn ection tab Microsoft OLE DB Provider for OLAP Services 8 0 s Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Oracle opens so you could configure the connection Microsoft OLE DB Provider for SQL Server Microsoft OLE DB Simple Provider to the selected database MSDataShope cot Dyecton Seni e i rovider for Microsoft Directory Services The Conne cti on tab looks differently Sybase Adaptive Server Anywhere OLE DB Provide
150. DVB T DVB C A transmission scheme for CABLE digital television DVB S A transmission scheme for SATELLITE digital television areas of overlap the weaker of the two received signals is rejected DVCPRO Panasonic s development of native DV which records an 18 micron track on metal particle tape DVCPRO uses native DV compression at 5 1 froma 4 1 1 8 bit sampled source It uses 12 tracks per frame for 625 50 sources and 10 tracks per frame for 525 60 sources The video data rate is 25 Mb s It includes two 16 bit digital audio channels sampled at 48 kHz and an analogue cue track Both Linear LTC and Vertical Interval Time Code VITC are supported DVB T The DVB T is a transmission scheme for TERRESTRIAL digital television Its specification was approved by ETSI in February 1997 and DVB T services started in the UK in Autumn 1998 As with the other DVB standards MPEG 2 sound and vision coding are used It uses Coded Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple xing COFDM which spreads the signals over a large number of carriers to enable it to operate effectively in very strong multipath environments The multipath immunity of this approach means that DVB T can operate an overlapping network of transmitting stations with a single frequency In the 358 PLAQBOX Abbreviation DVCPROSO In many ways this is a x2 variant of DVCPRO with a video data rate of 50 Mb s and using 3 3 1 video compression it is aimed at the s
151. Data Provider instance press the ADD button A list of all currently available data source plug ins will open Select the Weather Data Provider and after that press the ADD button The dialog to the left will appear for Weather Service Google specifying a station and data provider cose After pressing OK a Weather Data provider instance will appear in the list to the right part of Data Source Manager the Data Source Manager dialog For displaying information using this instance D weather Data Provider 1 and select the drag it to the object desired When you release the mouse button a fine tune dialog will open so you can select what Tas Tew kind of information will be shown in the Data Source Weather Data Provider 01 object as Temperature Postal Code Current Data Links city humidity etc You can choose a period for updating the data as well sty Fxg OAutomatic if you choose this option the displayed information will be updated esters rx xc automatically when the linked data is Fri highest ch an g ed Every sec here you can define an exact period for updating the information displayed on the screen This plug in will display the weather information according to the settings you have made For example if you intend to display information about Sofia town and you have chosen TemperatureC fromthe Field drop down list the Weather Data Provider will show the current tempe
152. Default gap filling category below Let us assume that there are five minutes remaining till the fixed time and you have two clips to go before the fixed time both of them 3 minutes long AirBox will not be able to play the second one a whole So this clip will be skipped and an auto fill event category or default clip will be played back instead Truncate playing event AirBox will playout as much of the preceding clip as possible and when the time comes it will cut to the fixed time event see also default start tolerance below Default gap tilling category is the third section of the Fixed time event options dialog and contains several options for automatic filling of gaps in the playlist Default clip The default auto fill clip must be an MPEG2 if you re using an MPEG plug in or DV if you re using a DV plug in file Most often it is a program logo or animation etc The default auto fill clip will be 134 AIRBOX played back each time there is a gap in your playlist and you have not specified anything other to be done in order to fill it you have not set any auto fill category or the clips from this category are missing for some reason etc In brief the default auto fill clip is always there in case something goes wrong with the other filling content You can specify this file in the Settings menu Auto fill dialog see below Category from previous event sets the auto fill category of the last
153. E 64 HA7 ANAS Oo EE 64 U a E 64 Ha Io EE Een 64 WEL D a E eet See ocean se cate aeeee ee 64 II 2 18 Invert selecton cece ecc ccc cee cc cence eee ee cence ence cece asec ae esaeeeeaeeeaeeaaes 64 TV 2ZAD PUN GTRODIGCG sicasicincircsactasmecaansvaoedesshaaebbets wedesdeideanaaeisdencnieelad 64 VE GG NUN N EE 65 TT 3 1 DV SITE Eeer 65 IT 3 2 CU ee 65 11 3 3 Boc EEN 65 ITT 3 4 TIE COGS TMe EE 66 III 33 Daily playlist viewer 66 II 3 6 SNODD EE 67 IIT 3 7 ee 68 III 3 8 Ee 68 FESO E WO WS stoi tck sac E E EE 69 TIL 3 10 External video wptdow 69 TIL3 11 Show external video w tdewz 69 TTT 3 12 Arrange w tdowi eee aeeecneeeesaeeceaeeeeaneenaesegans 69 TERA SETINGS MENU eit ticecste sec dactnsevenerecdoapsecttiodateisubitenbesnaddeWactebiaeues 70 T 4 1 CET EE 70 II 4 2 CUO cress ssaonssaseneeatont ot acae seine es uecesauasnenssaeebeconeenctaciniasseccace 77 11 4 3 WA OG ee EE 78 II 4 4 D EEI NNA TE A E I E E T 94 WA LO EE 125 EE 126 III 4 7 Eege 128 TIL 4 8 TOC OG ace phase sacs eas ne Se eos e 131 Ee 132 VILGAO Fixed time CVC T ives coven vas concaxeisaecauadsescewncsedccesseniandeosebovesdeonds 133 ULAJI EE 137 TEE ER 140 VEGAS Filename EE 1485 HAJ PRAT E 151 II 4 15 Save Load Comfig cece cecccceccc eee cc tee ce eeeceneecaeeeceneceaeeeeneeenseeeees 151 Mo TOOL E EE 153 II S 1 Change file po 153 III 5 2 ee 154 II 5 3 MOr MOLE oee A edna tases 155 II 5 4 PUGS CUCCK CT savcastcsnacana
154. File name incrementing is valid only for Schedule mode for more than one capturing session daily or weekly repetition The AutoSave page allows enabling automatic storing of capture lists In it you can also define the auto save period in minutes 1 1 7 Audio Mixer This command shows the volume mixer of the available audio device 11 7 8 Exit Click it to close CaptureBox 201 CAPTUREBOX I 2 View Menu Use this menu to open some additional windows to the main CaptureBox window 11 2 1 Preview Window You can use it to monitor the video currently present on the encoder input 1 2 2 Sony transport This command shows the RS422 controller window The RS422 controller is described profoundly above in the User Interface section H12 3 Volume Meter Shows the volume amp peak meter for the currently captured audio The Volume amp peak Meter is described in more details in the User Interface section above 12 4 Timer 16 05 55 This command displays the system time window 11 2 5 CPU Monitor ceu Monitored Capturing on some hardware platforms is quite CPU intense To prevent poor encoding and frame dropping CaptureBox has an automatic protection which will stop the capture if the CPU usage goes above 85 This monitor will help you predict such pos sible situations and set your PC pnior to starting the capture A drop down menu activates on right clicking in this window In it you can select which CPU to view if
155. Gapslargerthan 000030 pa related to fixed start time clips that ee a overlap previous clips in the playlist E From catego Muse O 3 Title lt Producer M Non sequential bookmarks wth time Star e W Cate or zones Bookmarks with time zones should gt E be situated in sequential order 1 e S follo wing the normal time flow This means that bookmarks with earlier time zones should be situated up in the playlist while bookmarks with later time zones should be placed down the playlist This will ensure its correct execution M Gaps larger than when using fixed start times and there is not enough content to go before them gaps are formed in the playlist M Missing TapelD info for subtitling of clips in Category name Subtitles are shown based on the TapelID of the clip and the currently running time code Ifa Tape ID is missing in a clip s properties no subtitles will be displayed over it Therefore it is important to make sure that all TapelDs are in place Just specify the category of clips that require subtitling and check if all of them have TapeIDs in their properties M Missing Metadata in Clips this field contains settings for verify ing the availability of all metadata usually needed for Graphic rules Metadata are described in clip properties Each metadata has a name and value where the name represents a category and the value represents the information about this category Please check the Metadata
156. It won t be scaled with the video but will be present at the first row M Change Output Aspect Media Type use it to change the samples media type in the DirectShow Graph M Send Aspect Change Event provides an option that allows other programs to know when the aspect is changed For example if this check is activated each time when there is a change to the WSS type TitleBox will read this event and will automatically change the aspect of its own objects such as rolls and crawls etc Thus it represents the objects with their correct aspect NOTE This is in case AirBoxand TitleBox are working on the same machine 97 AIRBOX 11 4 4 2 Soft DV Playback xi This plug in is used for playout of DV General Logo Aspect Ratio About compressed files The setup dialog consists of Spar E E three tabs s e D PAL ip Fields In the General tab are situated the audio and video related settings you can set the SO acta video standard fields order and image position E IMPORTANT The fields of all clips will be X Cancel flipped so do not mix files with different field order in the same playlist M Use default sound renderer will output the sound on the PC audio card If this box is not ticked the Sound will be output on the audio devise specified in Windows Settings Control Panel gt Sounds and Audio Devices This setting is applicable if there is some hardware decoder on the PC and you would li
157. M B The PC Motherboard It contains the bus the microprocessor and integrated circuits used for controlling any built in peripherals such as the keyboard text and graphics display serial ports and parallel ports joystick and mouse interfaces Mini DIN A type of Multi Purpose Connector often used for S video signals MP ML Main Profile at Main Level covers broadcast television formats up to 720 pixels x 576 lines and 30 fps so includes 720 x 486 at 30 fps and 720 x 576 at 25 fps The economy of 4 2 0 sampling is used and bit rates vary from as lowas 2 Mb s on mu ltiple xed transmissions up to 9 Mb s on DVD video Synonyms 4 2 0 ML Profile a defined sub set of the entire bitstream syntax Level a defined set of constraints imposed on parameters in the bitstream For details check ISO IEC JTC1 SC29 WG1 1 Standard of the Intemational Organization for Standardization MPEG Audio File MPEG Motion Pictures Expert Group of the International Organization for Standardization ISO that has defined multiple standards for compressing audio and video sequences MPEG is also referred to as both a type of compression and a video format 361 PLAQBOX Abbreviation MPEGI The international compression standard for the conversion of analogue motion video to digital motion video that includes both video and audio data MPEG meets the needs of CD ROM and video on demand applications Actual compression over uncompressed
158. P 224 1 1 2 1234 None O UDP 192 168 10 73 1234 Nc Enter the IP address in the Sige SS Address field and the Port number Ken in the relevant field you will need Transition Type None the ports to distinguish between eet numerous instances coming from the same IP address Wl Check the Multicast box if your server is set to multicasting If you will use some transition in the beginning of the event select the Transition Type SE and Transition Duration URL UDP 224 1 1 2 1234 None 0 Events 40 AIRBOX Edit live stream Live video stream ec Oy VoOXes D Presets Live stream info Here you have to specify the relevant mesme a T H LIVE Live_1 Fade 5 information about the live source oe Duration 00 30 00 00 Live name the name of the Live source as it is entered into SG S S Transition Type Settings gt Output gt Live Input C Transition Duration 5 settings window Important The name is case sensitive If you will use some Gd transition in the beginning of the Kramer Matrix Switcher Command Time offset 0 event select the Transition Type and Transition Duration The URL field the command for AirBox is generated automatically as you type in the above fields for UDP or for Live stream You could also enter a command directly in the URL field CI Live Name Live URL UNE A4 If you use streams UDP or Live that come from the same sources you could create some pres
159. PLAQBOX g e e eger DIGITAL MEDIA TECHNOLOGIES Ltd ADVANCED USER S MANUAL Version 7 12 May 2010 This guide explains in detail all functionalities of the PlayBox software modules Current software versions AirBox 4 0 Build 964 CaptureBox 2 6 Build 386 FinishBox LE 2 7 Build 69 DataBox 2 2 Build 270 TitleBox 3 0 Build 817 ListBox 4 0 Build 955 SafeBox 1 0 Build 108 Trimmer Server 1 0 0 Build 52 Multi AirBox Manager 1 0 Build 26 Multi Backup Manager 1 0 Build 26 AlarmBox 1 0 Build 32a PLAQBOX Legal notice The information in this manual is furnished for informational use only No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical for any purpose without the prior written permission of DMT Ltd The software described in this manual is owned by DMT Ltd It is protected by Bulgarian Copyright Law as well as by international copyright treaties and may be used or copied only in accordance with the license agreement DMT Ltd provides this manual as is without any warranty either express or implied This publication may contain typographical errors or technical inaccuracies While every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this document DMT Ltd assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions Nor is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained herein Ch
160. Phase Correction Above you can choose the output Device and set the output channel type and sampling rate The left hand side of this dialog contains some basic LTC re lated settings TimeCode this string shows the currently running timecode User Bits Depending on the selected User Bits format see below you can preview and edit the output userbits here Format these options are User bits related and reflect the most widely used standards 93 AIRBOX 11 4 4 Output This window contains information about the settings of the currently active plug in and allows its fine tuning The Output Setup dialogs may vary depending on the decoders models Usually these settings are done at the factory so you do not have to adjust themunless advised by our support personnel NOTE The following descriptions are for reference only II AAT Soft MPEG Playback This dialog contains a lot of M Video Renderer after Reset or Restart I Try to use VMbP settings You do not have to change I TytouseVMPS Iv x Overlay if no YMA E v Use Uveriay if no most of them unless advised to by SE someone from our support team Most LE Reconnect Video E Oniy Once of these are for diagnostic purposes ae ONLY The Properties dialog of the P Uso GreshicLayar Auto zj Used Filters Video Renderer 0001 Default DirectSound Device software plug in is figuratively divided into several fields The f
161. S S OWN BW amp SPORT ey Groups Keywords Persons Companies E Countries Sequences Templates Expired i Q aie m E Es ES EL Scorpion King The Musicvideo MUSI 0002 Me eos MUSIC Hard Rock scorpion Godsmack Scorpion King The Trailer COMM 0001 ze aile COMMERCIAL Action scorpion Al Pacino Geot 09_Express Yourself MUSI 0010 du MUSIC 11_Like a Prayer MUSI 0011 2 MUSIC Scorpion King The Making CINE 0003 Making Trueserver ES CINEMA Action scorpion Brad Pit Mummy Returns The Trailer COMM 0004 See COMMERCIAL Action Adventure mummy Keanu Reeves Mummy returns The Makel CINE 0005 Making CINEMA Action Science Fiction death Keanu Reeves E e e Jumanji Trailer NEWS 0006 Channel ID NEWS Terrorism battle Brus Willis Jumanji Trailer2 SPOR 0007 SPORT Athletics extra terres Steven Spielbe o co 3 One wh A 2 210 DATABOX 1 1 2 Sequences node rona OO BEE e Se E H Search Clear IV Global search oe Groups jee Keywords e D Persons Agerate Companies ji s amp Countries No Title HousetD Category Location MediaType Type J en Keyword Person x Sequences H H 2 ERRAL Tom Jery Highlander The Ep 001 CINE 0013 lini Series CINEMA Action Science Fiction Templates Highlander The Ep 0
162. SU Picture Propet eS arreir gege 266 IV 5 2 Text Template Ee 267 IV 5 3 Roll Crawl PTOPCTUUCS va crencssiccnesnedscoconcscsnicerastosntsneenucladensinzens 270 IV 5 4 E Zi IV 5 5 Animation PIOPCTUCS os sccsesccssiaeiinstaassv sada aeedtent endian vee satencoiiieesse 276 IV 5 6 Create Animation Egeter ag deeg geess 279 IV 5 7 Direct Show Media Propertie neces eeeeseeeesensees 280 IV 5 8 Banner Properties ccccccccccecccccneccnecceeceeeseeceeeeeeeseeeeneeeesaeeees 282 IV 5 9 Chat note OD OCHS cece ceccccecccceecceneecceeeceececeeeeeeeeaaesenaneeaaneenaes 283 AE SOUNG OD CCIS erriren iie nnr EEEE NEEE 283 IV 5 11 Digital Clock Pronerttesg 254 PVD Plash objec iA csee ra E 285 IV 5 13 Power Point E 286 AE E D I E T E A E 286 IV 5 15 Browser Propertiesg 287 IV 5 16 Screen Capture O0 CCK sraccxiinacecercossendeacetninndiisatiNecdostnacesnivestinds 288 TVD AT COT EO E 289 Wao 010 eege 289 W came ku Ee Ce A 290 IV 6 1 EEN 290 IV 6 2 KEE 294 IV 6 3 PID MACS a a A E E A 297 P ame gt D Ee 299 IV 7 1 Scheduler Commande 299 IV 7 2 Object s Aettnge ee 299 IV 7 3 CIEE E A A N E E E A EE 300 vV SLIDE MANAGER cesis r 301 K SLIDE CONTROL EENS eeetenegen eege SE 301 V 2 PROJECT CONTROL BUI TIONS et EE ebe 301 NA EELER Ee 302 Ae ON Ce E 302 Vile CIO E E E E EE 304 10 Vde e OS aeiae aioir areo ere 306 NA SLIDE EIER e 8 RO 306 VI DATA SOURCE MANAGE R ccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccces
163. SafeBox is a flexible content management tool It allows automated content transfer from remote locations to a local storage and vice versa There is an additional facility for automated content removal from local storage when space is limited ll SOFTWARE UPDATES AND PROTECTION Software Updates Since all PlayBox modules are subject to constant development and improvement please check our web site http www playboxtv regularly for the newest versions In order to make sure there is a reason to renew your current version please check the What s New document online before downloading the new version It is not necessary to uninstall the old software versions before installing the new ones NOTE You will be able to update your software only within the Software Maintenance Period You can check the status of your software maintenance period in the About dialog of each module Just go to Help menu gt About The software installer will prevent you from installing software versions released after the end of the software maintenance period Software Protection All PlayBox modules are protected by means of hardware USB keys also referred to as dongles You have to possess such a key in order to have a fully functional PlayBox module Before installing any of the PlayBox software modules you need to download and install the currently supported WIBU driver from our website Then update your dongle if necessary Dongle updates are
164. Sys tem Clock Uses the 7 Stradis VGA Preview presentation Tamp Stamps to synchronize Use next board for Alpha Channel Stradis video and audio The audio decoder H Board HDM500e Serial Number 0732R210091 compares the audio PTS when Stradis DLL Version 1 70 0 1 20 3 2008 r encountered with the STC and corrects Stradis Driver Version 2 41 0 0 20 3 2008 r the audio if the difference between the two is more than five milliseconds The correction duplicates or skips samples periodically until the audio PTS is within the five millisecond window 113 AIRBOX None Audio and video are started within a half frame No further synchronization is performed However the audio and video clocks are locked together Gent ock MEnabling it locks the output video sync to the input video sync Output Aspect Ratio here you can define the aspect ratio of the output video 4 3 When 4 3 is selected and a stream coded as 4 3 is displayed no action is taken When 4 3 is selected and a streamcoded as 16 9 is displayed a 4 3 image in the proper aspect ratio is displayed using pan and scan information if available If no pan and scan information is in the stream the left most portion of the 16 9 image is displayed When 76 9 is selected no action is taken regardless of the stream type VITC Enable Places the SMPTE timecode in the vertical interval in accordance with SMPTE 12M 1999 As outlined
165. Video Image height in pixels This field is not visible when describing a tape Video Bit Rate the Video bitrate extracted from the stream properties This field is not visible when a tape instance is being created Sample Rate the Audio sampling rate Audio Bit Rate Audio bitrate extracted from the stream properties This field is not available when a tape instance is being created Channels The number of audio channels found in the audio stream This field is used only when describing files Frame Rate The actual video frame rate of the stream Video Compression the type of video stream compression Audio Compression the type of audio stream compression Notes Used for storing useful notes about the stream It is a text field limited to 255 symbols Part The number of the part By default this field contains a zero i e there are no parts SE DATABOX When the instance copy is not a file the Main Stream fields are not applicable except the Stream Name Stream Type Note and Part To add anew Stream right click Main Instance and select New stream from the context menu To delete a Stream you should right click it and then click Delete in the context menu e Raina_Liubo NeProsia properties xi General Instances Classification Credits Additional 1 2 2 3 Main Data E Instance 1 Main Label Video ae E E Stream 1 Main oa E Label Media
166. Voyage jpg With this example action script AirBox will send a command to TitleBox to 1 load the project called te mp late tmp 1 2 play the object called picture and replace the currently loaded picture file with the one specified in the Metadata tab of the currently playing clip under metadata category new picture LOAD_TEMPLAT E template t mpl picture MEDIA M ETADATA_new picture Where 143 AIRBOX picture is the name of the object that we want to control MEDIA means that this command contains information about a new media file to be loaded in this object META DATA_new picture This is the place from where AirBox should read the new file path for the media file to be loaded Again the format is JMETADATA_MetadataName where MetadataName is the same as in the Metadata tab of the clip properties dialog in the first column The same action script applies to sound objects LOAD_TEMPLATE template t mpl sound MEDIA M ETADATA_new sound Thus TitleBox will load project te mplate tmpl play the object called sound and replace the currently loaded file with the one specified in the Metadata tab of the currently playing clip under metadata category new sound NOTE The Metadata name is case sensitive You must type it exactly as it is in the file properties dialog You can display information about the title of an upcoming clip in the playlist The preset value descriptor has the follo
167. X 4 Integration of AirBox with TitleBox TitleBox settings 1 Run Programs gt PlayBox Technology Ltd gt TitleBox PLNetInst exe and select a folder for your TitleBox templates 2 Create your TitleBox projects 3 Export them via Network gt Export project as template giving them respective names 4 tmpl template files are exported in the templates folder 5 Go to Project Options look at Network tab Remember the Title Box channel ID and Port values Confirm any changes 6 Go to Network gt Net control Run it That s all for TitleBox Now it stays in standby mode and executes the commands coming from AirBox Please note that it is not possible to edit objects in TitleBox while in this mode AirBox settings 1 Go to Settings gt Modules then to Remote control tab Enable Title BoxNetCtrl Output setting with Yes Click Configure Enter same Channel ID and Port values as in TitleBox settings Confirm 2 Go to Events gt Add Insert event gt Title BoxNetCtrl Output 3 There are two modes for event insertion Wizard or Advanced selectable through the Advanced button You are recommended to choose the Wizard mode for now The functions are self explanatory but since this module is still under development some of them are not functioning as desired 4 In Wizard mode you can choose between Template Control and Play Project the first one is for global TitleBox control commands the second one is for pr
168. a Text Template object with background Create a Roll object vertically running text Create a Crawl object horizontally running text Create an Analogue Clock object with custom background and clock hands Create an Animation object a sequence of 32 bit tga files or animated gif files Create an Animation File Insert Direct Show Media Source Insert a Banner object Create a Chat note object Create a sound object any DirectShow supported sound formats mp3 wav Create a Digital Clock object with custom background and font Insert a flash object Insert a Power Point presentation Create a Primary shape squares ovals triangles with outline offsets Create a browser object Create a Screen capture object Create a chat line Create a chat roll 255 TITLEBOX I 4 System Bar DEER Progam gt o Preview Pyupdate Open The system bar is situated in the bottom of the interface window It contains buttons for hardware control ON AIR playout notification filed It blinks red when Title Box is on air Ge the Program driver is playing Program this is the button that controls the program output driver Pressing it will start stop the graphics frame buffer If it is not running no graphics will appear on the output Pressing the arrow to the right of it opens a drop down list that contains several items Stop Play to stop or play the program output driver Clear will erase the graphics
169. a clip related timer Its accuracy depends on the MPEG2 decoder used Right clicking over it invokes a context menu in which you can choose the timer mode time elapsed remaining If you check the VCount down item the timer will show exactly how much time remains till the end of currently playing clip The background is black and a blue progress bar indicates what part of the clip has already passed If you uncheck the VW Count down row the Clip timer will start counting up showing the elapsed time from the beginning of the clip The colors of the progress bar and the digits will reverse TIP The color of the progress bar and of the digits can be changed in Settings gt Colors gt Timersby clicking in the relevant fields there 11 3 3 Block Timer CountDown Block Timer End at Wait 60 sec This is an event related countdown timer It shows how much time remains until the selected playlist event or until the End of Wait Events z t the playlist Choose the event type to display from the drop down list Stop 26 iwat 120 sec Stop Cue Wait Wait Until etc If 27 wait 140 sec there are several uniformevents in the 65 AIRBOX playlist they are shown in a pop up list arranged by their playlist line numbers so you can choose one of them If you do not select an event the timer will show by default the time remaining till the end of the playlist A progress bar indicates how much of the time has a
170. a files are on it In the meantime the Slave AirBox huses reference paths which indicate where each physical media file is These references are generated by another SafeBox application which is responsible for copying the files to the Master Server They indicate the source from which the files are moved mostly it is the NAS storage Once the files are copied to the Slave AirBox locally they are not treated as network content anymore Thus the Slave AirBox continues playback locally Logo change For example if there are two AirBox Masters but only one Slave covering them we assume the user has copied all the logos from the Masters to the Slave However this means that Logo Preset 1 on the first Master may correspond to another Preset number on the Slave machine To avoid some confusion swapping of the logo presets is user definable Thus in the moment of switch between Master and Slave the logo Presets will be changed automatically Execute external command You can specify a directory of external plug ins such as GPI Kramer switcher etc so in case of switch a command like matrix switch GPI trigger etc can be executed 171 AIRBOX Pressing the Si button will open a context menu with all enabled external plug ins Pressing the EI button will allow you to edit the plug in settings and running delay The button deletes all settings of the relevant external command If you press the Lad button the
171. able visible clips in the network airson x Enter remote machine address and instance 192 168 10 77 1 164 You can add new Associated File D Multiplexed Monday mpg clips by pushing the Add button to include existing clips or you can activate the Watch Folder function to add new coming clips automatically in the Set D Type 0 a Duration ER A ad ID Monday Long ID Monday Info a out 2424 Sf Jf OK XM Cancel Up dialog box If you push the Add button a dialog box will open to lead you through the procedure Fill in the Associated File field the file name of the clip the D and Long ID fields are filled in automatically and so are the n Out and Duration fields values in seconds You can trim the clip fromhere using the arrows next to the relevant field The Type of a file determines which players can play it Type O means that all players can play it Pushing the Set Up button opens a setup dialog box The Watch Folder page is used for setting the automated populating of clip list Check the M Use Watch Folder box to activate this function M Process Subfolders is checked if the watched folder contains any subfolders that you would like to be watched as well M Truncate Long IDs to chars The VDCP controllers Watch Folder General geetenensesenenssrenvesesenssussenssesneeseg Revesevecsvcencncnresesensasscnsseenssensed watch Fo
172. aced animation specify the first field A or B Click Open The sequence is displayed in the animation property window The currently selected file from the sequence is shown in the preview area to the nght Export button i saves the current sequence as a file seq Add button D adds a new file to the sequence Delete button J _ deletes a selected file from the sequence Insert button Sch inserts a file into the sequence Invert alpha button bi inverts the alpha channel of the selected file Move Up Down buttons moves the selected file up down the list Reverse button reverses the files order View buttons thumbnail mode If the animation files do not have an alpha channel you can select a key color by using the Key color tool S5 EA Range Mlo i Underneath the key color setting kit are situated the Range and Penh H safo 2 Loop related boxes Select the Range of frames that will be used Tojs S pl 2 in the sequence enter the values you wish in the Fromand To fields The names of the frames that are out of this range will become red and their background gray The background of the working range will remain white If you want to loop between two frames in this working range fill in the Start and End fields and the number of loops The frames included in the loop will be highlighted in pale yellow A blue arrow to the nght of them will mark the final and the initial frame of the loop
173. age horizontally and or vertically If your picture does not have an alpha M Contrast Brightness Se a Channel you can import one separately by using Horizontal Value 4 72 Srghtness 0 m the Open mask button cae tae The Draw Alpha Only button provides a m new interesting option Push this button to create a a Picture object over other objects in the project sa xc Thus you will overlay its alpha over all underlying A objects Try to make effects this way In the right part of the window now you can adjust the object s Contrast Brightness and change its Color Balance You can choose to Blurthe object and set the blur radius using the slider below The Anti flick er option is designed for smoothing the high contrast computer graphics when overlaying it over video Change the Vertical Value to prevent flickering of the graphics edges 266 TITLEBOX IV 5 2 Text Template Properties The Text Template objects similar to rolls and crawls have three groups of settings options Embedded objects and picture background If you click once in a text object the following object specific toolbar appears in the last line of TitleBox toolbar 2 lien 2 The first button opens the Embedded Objects list This list refers to 4 pictures OLE objects inserted in the text object see the Property description below You can set an auto refresh period using t
174. ager The VDCP Manager is available as an optional license and could be purchased separately ll x ee P Name bong Name ile Name i Out Duration Tota Duration wi COM1 00 00 00 00 00 04 02 10 4 02 10 4 02 10 Discreet2002 DesignRee D mpeg2 Discreet_2002_9Mt 00 00 00 00 00 04 02 10 4 02 10 4 02 10 26 lt empty gt x Log View Players New Aix New Player Setup IV LogRet Freq mess Add Delete The number of the VDCP controllers that can be connected to the VDCP Manager depends on the available COM ports Currently one VDCP unit could maintain up to 127 players AirBox and later will also maintain up to 127 recorders CaptureBox The VDCP Manager interface is quite simple divided into three fields and a button bar below them In the first field are listed the available COM ports each with a check box in front If the COM port is Mchecked tracking of the relevant connection for availability of such a controller is activated The next field contains list of the AirBox Cancel modules connected to the VDCP Manager up to 127 as it was already mentioned This network connection is performed through AirBox network API Pushing the New AirBox button will invoke an input dialog box to specify the Machine Address on the network the IP address and the instance number the number of the AirBox The instance number is written after the colon The widest field represents a list of the avail
175. ails Details Preview Properties In this tab you can view the hierarchical structure of your project It is divided in two parts project O E TitleBoxProjects SlideManager tbd ER Master Container 3 0 IS Bess Layer 3 tree and properties o F A Roll a M Rolz V 3 1 1 Project tree 2 e E Crawl 1 Hi 3 0 E 7 Layer 4 0 The project tree part is further divided in two a EI 7 Momings 10 10 30 levels Level 1 that contains the Project line and a gt E 7 Base Layer 2 the Master container and Level 2 that contains all IR eg regular slides b e E Craw 3 aju 8 SD kl Lauer 2 0 Level 1 The Project line is situated on top It displays Te the filename of the current project The line SET different functionality as compared to the other Property lines below These buttons control the Slide FINE ar Controller that will play all slides in the project Lock False one after the other see the Slide control section PlayMode madd j E Garman for details Under the project line you will find a list of unassigned objects if any These objects mel are present in the object but do not belong to any of its slides Click on the plus sign in the beginning of the project line to view them You might need to show hide such objects manually without affecting the rest of the project The Master Container line is situated right under the project line In it you can create layers to be
176. alogue audio and video signals AVI is also the file format used by Video for Windows AVI2ZMPG AVI to MPEG Software Converter Borland Database Engine B frames Bi directional predictive frames composed by assessing the difference between the previous and the next frames in a television picture sequence As they contain only predictive information they do not make up a complete picture and so have the advantage of taking up much less data than the I frames To see the original picture one has to decode information froma whole sequence of MPEG frames that includes an I frame 355 PLAQBOX Abbreviation BNC A connector for coaxial cable such as that used for some video connections and RG58 cheapernet connections A BNC connector has a bayonet type shell with two small knobs on the female connector which lock into spiral slots in the male connector when it is twisted on Different sources expand BNC as Bayonet Navy Connector British Naval Connector Bayonet Neill Concelman or Bayonet Nut Connection CD Compact Disc A 4 72 inch disc developed by Sony and Philips that can store on the same disc still and or moving images in monochrome and or color stereo or two separate sound tracks integrated with and or separate from the images and digital program and information files Closed GOP Closed Group Of Pictures A GOP whose last B frames do not refer to the following I frame but only to the preceding P frame
177. amer device to switch between them Gitt L automatically You can also switch the channels manually via the ell 15 16 Manual Channel Switch In the Machine field enter the number of the Kramer switcher used there could be up to 8 switchers connected to the PC If you press the Advanced button the following dialog will open for you to specify the interface settings RE Model ken sg Select your Kramer switcher model fromthe drop down Model list In the Protocol field specify what is the protocol it uses Protocol ken Assign the COM port for the switcher using the drop down list of COM port NONE Jl available COM ports Baud rate 1200 I Set the Baud rate according to the Kramer switcher manual xal 11 4 GPI Config Capturing can be initiated or stopped from an external GPI device This option is valid for manual capture only You can connect up to 8 GPI devices Each of them can send up to 4 GPI commands Each device must be associated with an available COM port on the computer 15 x To assign a device select it from the list to the GPI Input left and specify to which COM port you will connect it In the Pulse Level field to the right you can specify the type of the trigger pulse Below set the GPI commands from the relevant drop down lists The pins involved in CaptureBox GPI are the same as of AirBox GPI For more information about the GPI interface and pins involved lo
178. an also be used as a production server with interactive capabilities such as Next Jump Cue etc Capture Box Sophisticated ingest round the clock CaptureBox controls V7Rs via RS 422 and automatically captures batch of scenes or programs It also allows transferring a program to a tape precisely using frame accurate timecode positioning Needless to say it also provides semi or completely automated scheduled capturing GPI interface VU peak audio meters and a number of other unique tools DataBox DataBox represents the Database for metadata management of all kinds of content either permanently available from online media or temporary available froma removable media such as videotape or DVD or archived on a tape or a DVD The metadata entered during content description is preserved and sufficient for compiling playlists even if the media itself is not available ListBox A standalone playlist editor designed for arranging previewing and trimming the available content without any hardware decoder requirements It contains useful playlist features such as text searching printing etc 15 PLAQBOX Title Box TitleBox provides fully automated or interactive graphics overlay It can also be synchronized to AirBox playout sequence It allows insertion of text and dynamic graphic information in accordance to external data sources Text information is received and rendered into high quality graphics on the fly SafeBox
179. an configure the GPI further by pressing the Configure button GPI Input The column to the left contains a list of GPI Groups four different GPI pulses per COM port The GPI 1 stands for the CST pulse input on pins 8 and 5 the GPI 2 is DSR pin 6 and 5 the GPI 3 is RI pin 9 and 5 and the GPI 4 is CD pin 1 and 5 Specify the COM port foreach group in the Com Port column In the fields to the right you can define the desired AirBox function Play Stop Pause Resume Next etc for the respective GPI If you choose Cue to or Jump to the setup window will expand for you to specify the number of play list item to cue or jump to If you choose just Cue the playback will pause on the first frame of the Pulse level High bd GPI 1 Play X GPI 2 Stop D GPI3 GPI 4 currently selected item in the playlist NOTE The GPI Input plug in and the DTMF plug in provide identical sets of commands xi GPI Output Here you have to Input Output specify the GPI groups and the respective COM ports too The Pulse Level field defines the level of the trigger pulse The Pulse duration field defines the duration of the trigger pulse in milliseconds SEN The GPI Output is performed via dedicated GPI output events in the playlist When the playback reaches a Pulse level High ad Pulse duration E ms GPI 15 16 86 AIRBOX GPI event the GPI trigger is activated for as many milliseconds as defined in
180. and Delay p el Crawl 3 56 000 000 gt 2 Clock 555 108 0 00 0 00 Here you can easily Group Ungroup gt al Humidity 5I 480 up o i p pal Temperature 53 448 0 00 0 00 objects change their Order z order and b Uil Logo 546 39 om oo gt el Background 27 48 0 00 0 00 v control their playout and visibility status IV 5 Object Properties The Object Properties dialog z boxes look different according Wo Pause to the object type All buttons k eg D have specific pictures and E a provide hints when you slide ET Cony Ctrl C the mouse pointer over them 3 Paste Ctrl V Right clicking in any object W Paste As Copy invokes a drop down menu a ae i The upper half of the menu a Add To Scheduler Ctrl H Master Container Master Base Layer ineno Shi v p contains the most common Set Fle Link Slide 2 ER Layer 3 status and editing commands Assign GPI Event Slide 3 Fo Las Send Copy To this iia esi command allows you easily 4 Assign Data Source gt Slide 5 gt create copies of the currently selected object to all slides and layers in your project The Add To Scheduler item will open the TitleBox Scheduler where you can set the scheduling for the selected object If the object has already been added to the Scheduler use the Scheduler Properties item to view the settings of all objects in the current project Set File Link select this itemto invoke a browse dialog to locate the txt file
181. anges are periodically made to the information herein they will be incorporated in new versions of the manual Please check the PlayBox website regularly for User Manual updates DMT Ltd may introduce changes or improvements in the products described in this manual at any time without any special notice Please address your comments or questions to Digital Media Technologies Ltd 49 Shipchenski prohod Blvd fl 1 Sofia 1111 Bulgaria Tel 359 2 9703050 Fax 359 2 9717700 playbox playbox tv www playbox tv PLAQBOX TABLE OF CONTENTS ADVANCED USER S MANUAL essesssssesssscsscssessescsesossossossoscessessesossoeso 1 LEGAL NOTICE siscissiscccccusvcscancancescantseescnsaveddvascascdosasssentencsscecesvaastesboeeeees 2 TABLE OF CONTENT cccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccecs 3 RN TEE 13 STYLE CONVENTIONS cccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccs 14 OO TRV UV EE 15 I PLAY BOX MODULES 4 cccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccecs 15 II SOFTWARE UPDATES AND PROTECTION ccccceees 16 IL WORKFLOW BASICS cccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccces 17 ATRD ee 19 I GETTING STARTED NN 19 Teli SIT e E EE 19 II USER INTEREA CE 1 ccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccecs 19 II bg DAT EE 19 II 2 MENG EE 19 II 3 MULTIPURPOSE ZO NE AER AE 20 E GE WE EE 20 IS e COMETS or
182. anuary below Check the clips you would like to 3 mpg Jurassic Pare add and click the Add selected clips button in the bottom of the page Pushing the Insert button will open another window similar to the one above It also contains a list of all playlists from the Insert clips to Test PC 1 at position 3 Playlists tab in the MAM Content bin EES EE Select the playlist you need from the drop down menu and then check the Unnamed playlist zl Refresh Unnamed playlist Title toming 09 05 Duration tras Finding Nemo Finding Merl le Jaen eoozeec clips you would like to insert Finally sree TE click the Insert selected clips button minatorl 03 mpg Terminator SIEEN EES 100 01 36 13 in the bottom of the page assic Park 3 mpg Jurassic Pare 00 04 16 19 spy Game mpg Spy Game 00 02 24 06 TIP If you want AirBox to JUMP to a clip immediately click on the number in front of its line 340 ALARMBOX AlarmBox is an alert messaging notification system It receives system messages from other PlayBox modules AirBox CaptureBox TitleBox and if some of these modules behaves up to predefined rule AlarmBox provides a notification message to the User The notification could be sent via e mail SMS SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol or by internal AlarmBox messaging system MonitorMessages application The AlarmBox is consisting of three main parts Input Plu
183. ar provide general te xt I Auto Wrap formatting options font font size bold italics underlined e text align ment font color I Overtide Direction P Display Ctrl Chis The last three buttons are related to inserting object links in RE the Roll Crawl Push the button to insert a still picture acne ere N ie J Context Digits IT Legacy BidiClass object link and the button to insert OLE compatible objects Use the drop down list to fix their position in the Set Defaut X Cancel Roll Crawl object Import OLE compatible objects ER 7 EN using the ge button The l Object Type standard Windows OLE dialog Create New Microsoft Equation 3 0 ae GC Microsoft Graph Chart ance box appears after pressing it C Create from File Microsoft Office Excel Chart If you choose Create Microsoft Office Excel Worksheet f Microsoft Picture New the relevant application Microsoft PowerPoint Presentation Scola Aa d ill b bl Microsoft PowerPoint Slide EE opens and you Ww e able to MIDI Sequence Ki create the desired object Any Result chang S m the relev ant OLE d Inserts a new Adobe After Effects Project object object will be visible in into your document TitheBox when saved see the Text Template Properties section above Za If you choose Create from File you Pee will be prompted to browse for it You can Se EE ETEESI _ create a link or display it as icon through Deelen RW E EEN I Display As Icon
184. are created by one Resettype Weeky user The sequential numbers are stored in the registry If you Reset now want to use such a number in the House ID select Sequential number fromthe pop up menu that appears after double clicking in the House ID fields Current value this field displays the current sequential number on a local machine Reset type By default the sequential number is never reset None If you want to reset the sequential number specify the reset period daily weekly monthly or annually Reset now button press it to reset the sequential numbering immediately DB Global a This page is used when many users work simultaneously on the re database The sequential numbers are generated according to the mo ment of creating the record i e at opening the New record _Fesetnow _ Appl value dialog box The numbers are saved in the database If you want to use such a number in the House ID select DB sequential number from the dialog boxthat appears after double clicking in the House ID fields Current value displays the sequential number in the data base Reset now and Apply value buttons are self explanatory Random number the random number features are described in this field Minimum set the minimu m value of the random nu mber By default it is zero Maximum set the maximum value of the random nu mber By default it is 10000 231 DATABOX 11 3 4 Default Values You can defin
185. are in the range between 224 0 0 0 and 239 0 0 0 TTL stands for time to live for the Internet packets This spin box is active only if the M Multicast box is checked The higher the TTL value the longer the packets will live and pass through more network routers By default TTL is set to 1 which is enough for local networks Buffer size in this spin box you can specify the size of the IP packets to be sent along the network This size should be multiple of 188 bytes which is the size of an MPEG 2 TS packet We recommend 1316 bytes buffer size which willcomply with the standard network MTU Port define which communication port will be used for the streaming By default it is 1234 Interface if there are more than one network cards in the PC specify which one should be used for the streaming in this string If you leave it empty AirBox will stream through all available interfaces Multicast check it to stream to all PCs in the network The MPEG stream settings are situated in the right side of the window There are two options for the Multiplex Type Program or Transport stream 118 AIRBOX When Transport stream is selected the TS Mux Rate spin box becomes active so you could select M Automatic of fix the Mux rate manually Audio Bit Rate is adjustable for both stream types It is 192kbit s Protocol If you choose Program stream the protocol will be switched automatically to UDP With Transpor
186. ation There are three possible SubPlug ins e WD Dialog Plug in if it is activated than only a message appear in front of the user e Relay GPI switch Plug in If it is activated than the dedicated PlayBox by pass Relay is switch on Press Setup button to enter the needed configuration of the relay e Restart Plug in if it is selected AirBox willbe restarted 84 AIRBOX Note Currently the only available AirBox event which is watching is 1 second long freezing during the playout Elpro Switcher Output The Configuration dialog for Elpro switchers contains eae two radio buttons Com port com d Local mode check it if the switcher is connected to one of the PC COM ports select it in the drop down list below l Server 192 168 20 33 Network mode check it if the Elpro switcher is connected to another AirBox server somewhere into the J x Cancel local area network specify the Server address in the string below NOTE In order to control an Elpro switcher from more that one AirBox instances you need the Elpro Switcher server The Elpro Switcher server application is an add on not included in the standard AirBox bundle Acappella switcher setup xj Acappella Switcher Output SE This configuration dialog contains only a drop down list In it you have to specify the COM port that will interface X Cancel the switcher control cable Concerto Switcher Output
187. ation in ListBox ll MENU BAR P AE The Menu Bar is situated in the upper left end of the window and contains the same menus as AirBox However some Load playlist Ctrl o i S e H d playlist Ctrl Alt I of the options are disabled as they are not relevant in playlist ae Ee preparation The following paragraphs contain description of the ee Ge differences that appear in ListBox Please check the AirBox File Save playlist as Alt 5 5 S S Save daily playlist ctrl Q menu section above for detailed information about the common Print playlist Ctrl P S ettin gs Export playlist as XLS Export capture list Alt F4 II File Menu lll 1 1 Export Capture list If there are missing files in the playlist you can create a list for CaptureBox to ingest them Select Export capture list in File menu and browse for the location to save the playlist to The resulting capture lists cap will be named after the currently loaded playlist 11 1 2 Export Logs to XLS This File menu item appears in AirBox but it is not visible in ListBox I1 1 3 Reload Graphic Rules This File menu item appears in AirBox but it is not visible in ListBox 246 IL 2 Edit Menu This menu contains commands related to playlist editing As it is identical to the AirBox Edit menu please check that section above for details II 3 View menu This menu is identical to the AirBox View menu The only difference i
188. ay Stop Pause commands for file playback control They are used when there is no VTR remote control 11 3 6 Schedule It is active only when you are working in Schedule mode Arm activates the schedule Prepare activates manual capturing fromthe currently available video source A dialog box will appear prompting for your confirmation Crash starts capturing immediately fromthe currently available source without asking any further confirmation 203 I GETTING STARTED FinishBox LE previously known as MultiMux allows multiple xing ele mentary video streams such as OpenDML MPEG2 AVIor m2v files with elementary audio streams mpa m2a uncompressed wav to standard ISO 13818 compliant MPEG2 Program Stream mpg containing MPEG Audio layer I or 2 at different bitrates NOTE FinishBox LE supports only 16 bit audio format 32 bit audio files will not be processed 1 Quick Start L Make sure that you have some content available in the input audio video folders 2 If you do not have any available export some from your NLE platform s editing software 3 Launch FinishBox LE 4 Click the top button with a folder picture 5 Select an exported AVI or m2v file and click the Open button 6 The sound file with the same name will automatically appear in the next empty box T If there is no MPA or WAV file with the same name in your audio folders you have to select manually the corresponding sound file
189. aying the logo Hide button hides the logo fromthe screen NOTE The picture format depends on the decoder The 32 bit RGBA files are most preferable but TGA JPGand PSD files are widely supported too IMPORTANT You will not have fade transition when displaying Logo and Subtitles simultaneously on the DeckLink platforms Please refer to the Subtitle Box section for more details about the subtitling options in AirBox Jf OK X Cancel AIRBOX x Iw Enable logging Il 4 6 Log g INQ Ge AirBox generates two types of log files System C Program Files Digital Media Technolo Se eo a logs and an AsRun log A Logs directory is DEE created at AirBox installation It contains a System subfolder by default Errors System Ha al jal events Events and Event type are logged in the System log regardless of your wish In the Log Options dialog box you can choose what playlist entry information will be included in the logs should they be created on a Daily basis or not and make some log management settings If M Enable logging is checked an AsRun log file will be created otherwise AirBox will not Date Time Evert ype FileName Filelnfo Title Duration Original duration Actual played time FilelD C HouselD CO Category C Performer INKS OOOO Insert date in first line of file J Column headers IV Log frames T Astun log per playlist gen
190. bal TEE File N A N A Vv uration 00 04 04 E mpeg2 Viktoria_MoliaSe mpg Viktoria_MolhaSe 00 03 50 14 File N A N A N A Loo EASafeBowi002 ampg i ENSDPANT alr A8py Gamempe g ere 00022406 Sie Commercials WA NA EI EAmpeg2 Movie_001c mpg Movie_001c mmm Fie NWA WA NA o 2 SS SES EES d Ge BEE H e KE I TEE BI Le Done Swiss E3 Local intranet A In it you can perform simple playback control and playlist editing The Selected column in the far right contains check boxes The playlist control commands such as Move Up Down and Delete are applied to the checked clips NOTE When inserting items they will be put before the uppermost checked line If there are no checked lines a dialog will remind you to select an insertion point The columns arrangement in the web interface is fixed and does not depend on the AirBox settings All missing clips that are not accessible from the relevant AirBox PC willbe colored in red The currently playing clip is colored in pink 339 Pushing the Add button will open a new window where are listed all playlists contained in the MAM content bin in the Playlist from Bm Add clips to Test PC 1 Refresh Unnamed playlist Title gaere EE Playlists tab shee TEF Select the playlist you need from the drop Ce wer e down menu Its content will be displayed 03 mpg Terminator Trailers J
191. beginning of the playlist it might be skipped as the event s duration is zero its time could be considered past after playlist loading Therefore you should set some loading tolerance to ensure the correct execution of the firs t event in the playlist Of any Usually one second should be enough but it depends on the playlist length 11 4 8 Timecode x If you are licensed to use the LTC TEN we 75 66 reader module and have a DirectSound compatible sound card you may use it to read LTC timecode dweFiene User Bits Format n a Channels j Color Lock C Mono from your transport device The setup unsssianedtitse e Stereo Left Channel Bi phase Correction Stereo Right Channel of this module is quite simple Z Oddbits e Choose your sound card device from P EES Direction the list Choose Sample rate and s i _ Channels and Start the module e ooo o l se Current timecode is shown in the TC Timer The timecode fed into the LTC reader will be used when inserting Wait TC events in the playlist Thus you can slave the playout status of AirBox to an external TC generator WARNING Do not type any values in the Sample Rate string Select only fromthe Sample Rate drop down list 131 AIRBOX 1 4 9 Auto fill xi Default auto fill clip SN as d MPEG2 NTSC Sportslllustrated S ports1 O_Miami_Florida mpg E m uto fill categories In the Auto fill
192. ber of frames for the logo fade effect Fade out frames fi i x Cancel IMPORTANT There will be no fade for the logo when using both subtitles and logo 11 4 4 14 IP H 264 Stream MPEG 2 Playback The main output dialog consists of three tabs ZZ 4x General Logo and About E The Logo tab is the same as the one in the aa d g S IP settings 7 IP Stream MPEG 2 plug in described 1n the emm Graphic Settings previous page i Video Encoder Settings In the Abouttab you can view mee Ir a information about the current plug in version Port fi234 2 Mion Seings The most important settings are in the Interface General tab vem The IP settings are the same as in the IP are I Streamer plug in described above ae IMPORTANT The fields of all clips will be SK Steed flipped so do not mix files with different field order in the same playlist Pressing the Graphic Settings button will open the properties dialog of DMT Graphic Layer filter The Property Editor tab is used for service purposes please do not change anything in it The Scale and Output tabs are described in the Soft MPEG2 playout section above Please check it for details 120 AIRBOX Pressing the Video Encoder Settings button will open the MainConcept s video codec properties dialog The H 264 standard provides a wide variety of compression techniques The most common options are situat
193. bject in the object palette is the Chat note object It can be considered as a Text template object but when you enter a text in it text is always shown as a new line coming fromthe bottom and the old text is rolling to the top This kind of objects is suitable for use together with some S MS applications You can also insert a file link Project Plugins File Link to a text and or a picture file The chat note will be updated at each save of the relevant file The object s properties are controlled as those of the other objects See the Text template properties section When you click this object once an additional object s pecific toolbar appears underneath the standard ones Specify the desired speed for changing the text lines in the chat note fi IV 5 10 Sound objects CO The sound objects are actually links to DirectShow E compatible sound files After drawing the object rectangle in the work area a browse dialog opens for you to locate the sound file When a sound object is selected the following toolbar appears under the standard toolbars in Title Box Loop 0 A Filename 09 Secret mp3 In it you can specify a number of loops for this sound and change its appearance in the work area from the color palette The sound file name is displayed to the nght If you want to change the sound or the file path double click in the object to invoke the browse dialog TIP You could apply transition effects to your sound ob
194. by their running numbers in the grid as well as some additional attributes like playlist name loop status etc III TA Save as This command saves the current playlist to a file Except for our generic playlist format ply now you can save your playlists to XML files as well NOTE The XML playlist has generic PlayBox format Therefore you cannot load any XML file as a playlist 11 1 8 Save daily playlist This menu item saves the current playlist in compliance with the naming require ments for daily play lists This Saving option is not active if you have not specified a Daily playlist folder see Settings menu StartUp gt StartUp playlist WARNING When using fixed time events in daily playlists the playlist jasave Daily Playlist 3 ll x 4 August 2005 September 2005 J Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat i tas Ge se e zB ke Ges 33 Z 8 29 AD Ar 42 AZ 4 35 bi i Ba H H 14 16 17 18 19 20 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 28 29 30 31 25 26 27 28 29 30 Today 8 15 2005 Start Time Filename D Daily Playlists 2005_08_15_00_00_00 ply 00 00 00 VW Save X Cancel L Daily Playlists Daily Playlists Folder ENER Playlists oe Existing Daily Playlists Date 2005 09 19 Playlist Name My test playlist Time 13 10 00 should start and end within the same calendar day e the daily playlist should not go bey
195. can find all the formatting fo 8 SE options as known from other windows based Charset Antialising I Underline editing applic ations ote ror 3 F seou x AV Fill 4 Outline JV Shadow Pres sing D invokes Color Color Outline Size Color Blur he P h E Ware e E the Paragraph k ME D e we e 0 al pees Ss Effect Effect Blur Offset formatting dialog emm T d SCH Zoe oe jo zf 3 each box where you can b Ge Angle Right Indent Line Spacing Space After J Contour 0 set all paragraph Be S po S fon SF Placement formatting options T Auto Wrap Width Slant Char Spacing Word Spacing Th b Script State bm Seo sm ao e two buttons to Ze Base Line omg Postion the right concern the 7 Override Direction J Display Ctrl Chrs fo 4 Normal T jNormal Digit Substitute Arabic Num Context Set Default Cancel background Press to viewa transparency background during editing in the preview area The follo wing fields in the toolbar provide general text formatting options font font size bold italics underlined text alignment font color Object Type Create New Microsoft Equation 3 0 Microsoft Graph Chart Microsoft Office Excel Chart Microsoft Office Excel Worksheet Microsoft Picture Microsoft PowerPoint Presentation Microsoft PowerPoint Slide MIDI Sequence Create from File Result Inserts a new Adobe After Effects Project object into your document
196. ceseaceciesecedecossicdcecsewedcsseccsaneveseces 342 II MONITOR SOUPCES EEN 342 II 2 MESSAGE DESTINATION 0cececcecececcccecececceccececencecececceceeenceaens 343 II 3 ECH 344 IA NAMFD VALUE EE 347 APPENDIX 1 PLAYBOX GPI _ ccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccces 348 APPENDIX 2 EVENTS OFFSET BEHAVIOR z ccccccesccccscces 351 APPENDIX 3 VDCP IMPLEMENTATION CHART 0ce00s 352 APPENDIX A INTEGRATION OF AIRBOX WITH TITLEBOX 354 GLOSSARY EE 355 MINN GE 368 12 PLAQBOX Preface Dear PlayBox customer Thank you for purchasing our product We would like to assure you that you have chosen the most cost effective and versatile TV automation system on the market As always we are trying to stay close to our customers needs making sure they all receive adequate support and satisfaction Your opinion about our product is an exceptionally valuable source of information to us The ease of working with the PlayBox products results mainly from the suggestions and comments of our current respected customers This manual is structured into several sequential chapters each aiming to ease the installation fine tuning and use of our products We hope yov Il enjoy working with it and we are anxiously looking forward to receiving your feedback Please send your questions suggestions and assistance requests to support playbox tv General feedback play box
197. ciffic symbols are all sybols into the DTMF strings different than numbers from 0 to 9 and letters A B C D Level of the signal the signal level 83 AIRBOX Into Device select field you can select froma drop down list what audio device to be used The list is created automatically accordingly of the installed on your machine devices lt Virtual driver when select this driver the DTMF tone is not sent to an audio evice but to another application which can receive tones For example such application is AirBox itself It can be set from General Output settings dialog to create DTMF tones and send them to the video output These settings are described in chapter III 4 4 AirBox MenuB ar Settings Output When you define the plug in you can go back to the DIMF Presets tab Press the Add button to create a new preset Enter the name of the preset and the DTMF string for it Relay GPI Switch Input output This plugin allows using of the PlayBox GPI Relay card The functionality is the same lake standard GPI in out plugin But here instead of the COM port of the PC is used a dedicated GPI Relay card You can use one or more relay Each Relay supports four 4 inputs outputs Watch Dog Plugin WD Dialog Plug in Relay GPI switch plugin No Cancel Restart Plugin Watch Dog pug in watches if there specific events happened into the AirBox output signal than acts up to the selected SubPlug ins and their configur
198. clip name was Capture 00 1 the next filename would be Capture 002 and so on If the filename does not end with a number but with a letter the letter will change in alphabetical order i e if the last clip name was Sofia the new filename will be Sofib then Sofi e and so on Of course there is an option to enter a new name manually Plus button increases the File name Add to List button transfers the clip data into the batch capture list on the left and most of the clip fields are cleared except Tape ID and Folder The File name increases Clear Clip button clears all clip data 189 CAPTUREBOX Il 1 3 Capturing There are three methods to start capturing Manual Capture this mode can be applied only if Tape ID File Name and Folder fields are filled in If the timecode field n is Auto Capture h Manual Capture empty pressing this button will open a window for manual start of the capturing If the n field contains timecode CaptureBox will start counting down for the same amount of time before commencing the capture Press Finish button to stop the capture Auto Capture automated single capture this mode can be started only if the Tape ID In Out File Name and Folder fields are filled in When capturing is finished the clip data is automatically moved into the batch list and marked as captured There is no need of re capturing except when a blue dot is set in front of it To stop the capturi
199. d 255 means totally solid NOTE The transparency is visible only if there is a pass through video signal in the background As in the Software plug ins and in IP Stream PlayBack plug is there is no option to have such a pass through signal this setting is not applicable for them Transparency is applicable only on hardware decoders The Motion spin box is designed to select the pattern of movement during transition from the original size to the scaled size O linear The transition from original to scaled size will be made at constant speed 1 descending The transition from original to scaled size will be made at higher speed at the beginning of transition and at lower speed towards the end of the transition 1 ascending The transition from original to scaled size will be made at lower speed at the beginning of transition and at faster speed towards the end of the transition 95 AIRBOX The number in front of the motion type represents the degree of changing the speed of transition Scale press this button to apply the scaling settings immediately Reset press this button to return to the original image dimensions and position You can create scaling Presets and view them in the list below Create a scaling preset type its name in the string and press Add to save it in the list To remove a preset from the list select it and press Del Execute when a scaling preset is selected in the list to the left press t
200. d AirBo xes in groups Thus a command sent to any AirBox in the group will apply to all other members as well To add an AirBox to a group right click in its line in the Monitoring list and select Group gt Group 1 to 10 334 ll 4 AirBox Browser This part of the interface is dedicated to global management of all AirBo xes in the Ae browser network It is divided into two smaller windows Online AirBo xes and alale eis M onitorin a mb OET Monitoring AirBoxes The Online AirBoxes list displays all AirBox channels detected over the network responding to UDP port 8080 You can show hide this list by pressing the PlShow online button Select the AirBoxes to be added to the Monitoring list and press the Add Selected button or add all of themby pressing the BY Add Allvutton You can try to connect to a PC fromthe Online AirBoxes list manually Just select the relevant line in the list and press Connect to selected Moreover you can add IP addresses manually just press the Gil R Manually add button and then describe the PC location pi e D D D ress 255 255 255 255 Enter the Instance number in the lowest spin boxif there are S SE more than one AirBoxchannels on the machine ged 2 If you wish to remove some AirBox channel fromthe monitoring Srel ES list select it and press the Delete button The Monitoring AirBoxes list contains all AirBox channels ever added for monitoring and not
201. d a mail So when AirBox stops the user will receive a mail Of course it is needed also to enable AirBox Input Plugin and Mail Output Plugin I 4 Named values Here are described TypeMessages and PriorityMessages TypeMessages are Warning Error and Info To each type is associate a rating number which appears in the notification message sent to user You can change this number Priority Messages are High Normal and Low To each value is associate a rating number which appears in the notification message sent to user You can change this number also 347 PLAQBOX APPENDIX 1 PlayBox GPI GENERAL PURPOSEINTERFA CE GPI in AirBox GPI General Purpose Interface is implemented in AirBox TitleBox and CaptureBox as a set of triggers associated to certain pins on the standard PC RS 232 Serial Ports COM1 COM2 etc In order to function the COM port should be correctly installed in the Windows environment See Device Manager gt Ports GPI IN can be used to slave AirBox TitleBox and CaptureBox to triggers from external devices or simple contact switches 4 triggers per COM port GPI OUT can be used to slave external equip ment to events taking place in AirBox or TitleBox 2 triggers per COM port GPI Pinout Each COM port accommodates 4 GPI IN pairs and 2 GPI OUT pairs but not at the same time A particular COM port can be assigned as either IN OUT or Unused GPI IN pairs are located at output pins DIR amp RTS
202. d as a number of frames For example if you enter 100 this will be interpreted as 4 seconds 00 00 04 00 Duration Its value is automatically calculated by subtracting n from Out values It is possible to type a value only in the n field and define Duration The value of Out field will be calculated automatically 188 CAPTUREBOX To the right of n Out and Duration fields are situated buttons that function as follows Pressing the black arrow pointing left will insert the current timecode from the VTR in the corresponding field Pressing the red arrow pointing down will rewind the tape exactly to the timecode written in the corresponding field Pressing the Clear button clears all values in the n Out and Duration fields In the Comment field you could enter a description or a comment concerning the particular scene sequence Your comment will be displayed in the relevant Grid column Title represents the name of the clip If left empty the field will be automatically filled in with the corresponding File name Lock button D is used for locking the Title to the File name i e any changes in the clip name will affect the file name and vice versa File Name stands for the name under which the captured clip will be saved If left empty the field will be automatically filled in with the Title For your convenience the filename is automatically increased by pressing the Plus button or Add to List button If the last
203. d correctly push the Try to connect button WARNING Always check if you can connect to the database using the new password before closing DataBox If the password is wrong you will not be able to connect to the database and you will not have access to the Database tab to recover it Please make sure to write clear secret question and answer to avoid such occasions We will NOT be able to recover your password and the database will become inaccessible 234 DATABOX CT lolx l l l 3 TA TCI l m p or t Grid HouselD Default values Export Import Database TCI import Drag and ja gt TCI watch directories This feature provides options for automated media assets insertion It uses es the TCI files generated by CaptureBox during ingest DataBox watches a number of pre defined folders When a new TCI file appears in a watch folder a new record is automatically created in the database If an already existing tci file has been modified in the watch folder DataBox checks if such a filename exists E Captured CBME in the database in the stream filename filed If not a new record is created If SCH ae yes no new record will be created in the database The fields from tci files are imported in DataBox as follows TCI field DataB ox field Stream filename Media TC In string Media TC Out string Media label NOTE The remaining tci fields are not imported in DataBo
204. d on SDI this provides real time streaming transfers It does not define the format of the signals carried but brings the possibility to create a number of packetised data formats for broadcast use There are direct mappings for SDTI to carry Sony SX HD CAM DV DIFF DVCAM DVCPRO 25 50 Digital S and MPEGTS Standard Definition Television A digital television system in which the quality is approximately equivalent to that of analogue 525 60 or 625 50 systems File Shortcut SPDIF Serial Digital Audio interface Trimming Editing a clip on a frame by frame basis or editing clips in relationship to one another 365 PLAQBOX Abbreviation on Video A means for reproducing moving visual images by representing them with an analog electronic signal The images are decomposed into aseries of horizontal scan lines In this way the signal can be stored transmitted and reproduced There are various standards that define this signal NTSC PAL SECAM RGB Referring to the NTSC composite video standard this is a widespread standard such that the video in of one machine is compatible with the video out of another Variable Bit Rate While many video compression schemes are constant bit rate designed to produce fixed data rates irrespective of the complexity of the picture VBR offers the possibility of fixing a constant picture quality by varying the bit rate according to the needs of the picture This allows the images that
205. d throughout the world almost always with the 625 50 line field system It was derived from the NTSC system but by reversing the phase of the reference color burst on alternate lines Phase Alternating Line is able to correct for hue shifts caused by phase errors in the transmission path Bandwidth for the PAL I system is typically 5 5 MHz luminance and 1 3 MHz for each of the color difference signals U and V Used from Main Profile upwards these contain only predictive information not a whole picture generated by looking at the difference between the present frame and the previous one As with B frames they hold less data than I frames and a whole GOP must be decoded to see the picture 363 PLAQBOX Abbreviation RAM Random Access Memory The most common computer O memory which can be used by programs to perform necessary tasks while the computer is on an integrated circuit me mory chip allo ws information to be stored or accessed in any order and all storage locations are equally accessible Synonyms random access memory random memory read write memory A connector for Unbalanced Audio R Read Only Memory Memory hardware that allows fast access to permanently stored data but prevents addition to or modification of the data RS 232 A standard for serial data communications defined by EIA standard RS 232 and is designed for short distances only up to 10 metres It uses single ended signalling with a conduc
206. daily playlist without playing it Precache new playlist 5 Si minutes before start Daily playlist loading tolerance H A second s If there is no current daily playlist IT Try to load last daily playlist for same weekday Jh Try to load past daily playlist from last 5 day s J Reload last daily playlist on end of the current daily playlist When reload playlist Ze Reload playlist immediately Wait for playing clip end X Cancel Choose the Last used option and the next time you start AirBox it will load the last played list In addition you can choose to MAuto start playback after loading the last used playlist Open dialog invokes a query to choose a playlist from the last used playlist location The Daily playlist folder gives an opportunity for some simple scheduling of playlists Choose a folder in which you will place the daily playlists by filling in its path or just browse for it with the e button There you will save the playlists you want to schedule They require specific naming structure in order to be played on the desired date and time An example name is 2003 11 20 14 00 00 ply 2003 stands for the year 11_ 20 is for MM_DD month_day and 14_00_00 is HH MM Ss hour_mmutes_seconds Only files with such naming structure will be played automatically when AirBox is running in this mode Now you can use the Save daily playlist feature in the AirBox File menu to achieve this
207. dd the Date Modified property of all files as a separate column in the OML file M Export Online list every xx sec here you can specify the period for exporting OM L files Below there are several sorting options Do not sort no sorting will be applied to the OML file Ascending the oldest files will appear on top of the list Descending the latest files with the most recent date modified will appear on top of the list EJ Export media info 15 xj X Cancel Push the Export media list button in the KE main SafeBox window to configure the E EAS afeBox test3 txt Scan directories you would like to scan Ci New directory ira Desktop TEST txt Clic k on the J A dd New OML file button DE E t and browse for it or type a new name in the 8 C Documents and Settings branimira Desktop TEST 01 tat S tring belo w E mpeg2 Select the OML file and Add new folder to be exported to it Use this button to add directories to the list and the 28 Delete button if you want to remove the currently selected directory from it 331 SAFEBOX Right click and select Active to enable disable the lines you would like to include exclude from the current scan Push the Gear button to check the selected directories and export the information to the specified file Beneath the Destination locations list you can view detailed information about the currently selected entry
208. ded for estimating all kinds of time values Oe end time playlist duration etc while there is no accessible frame rate of a currently played file for example AirBox is in Stop mode Missing files is the third tab in the Settings dialog box It refers to x automatic handling of missing files in the General Interface Missing files Skip zones Grid playlist J Show duration of missing files Sho Ww duration of missing files 7 Blink status bar on missing file e 7 Gs DEER if there are any missing files in the g message if missing file exists M Show warning window if there is a missing clip or stream play lis t their re al duration or zero M Check Missing Files every fio Zi sec duration can be displayed This will 7 Audio alarm if missing file exists every fo a sec affect the play list a e total duration and Mee ae Gate End time that are shown in the Status Custom category ES DI Dar in the bottom If this option 1S checked a question mark will appear after Total Length and End at in the Status Bar If it is not checked but there are missing files an exclamation mark will appear after Total Length and ees End at in the Status Bar Blink status bar on missing file in case there are missing files in the playlist the Total Length and End at cells in the status bar will become red and will start blinking Log message if missing file exists check it to include the list of missing files in the
209. default there are four IP pump plug ins there Number of instances requires restart D CPU Time Factor joo j ppm XM Cancel 117 AIRBOX CPU Time Factor in IP Pump we use the CPU clock to generate the PCRs of the Transport Stream Enter the value fromthe stream analy zer here to compensate the inaccuracy of the CPU clock frequency WARNING Consult your network administrator prior to changing the network re lated settings NOTE There is no overlay preview with this plug in 11 4 4 13 IP Stream MPEG 2 Playback The IP streamer setup dialog consists of 7 Z Z t 0 8 General Logo About three tabs S Video standard n PAL z Ee Type 7 gt The Gener al tab contains most MIP senge e Program stream Ze Transport stream i TS Mux Hate m udio Bit Rate of the settings available for this plug in o Zm I Automatt i TTL 1 e A 192 gt kbps A drop down list in the upper left corner Bee Ze beer 2 i es Streaming settings provides options for video standard EE w S election Interface R JV Multicast Below you can find the network related fe settings gs RIP Address enter the IP address of the Ze EE remote machine to receive the stream If you check Multicast i e streaming to ae multiple machines you will have to enter a special multicast address in the Address field the multicast addresses
210. delete slides using the first three buttons in the Detal Preview per upper part of the Slide Manager window When working in the Details tab you can use the next two buttons to add delete Layers Again while in the Details tab you can show hide slides thumbnails by pushing the Thumbnails button In case you need to move a slide or an object just drag n drop it to the new place you would like it to be If you want to show hide pause a slide a layer or an object manually slide the mouse pointer to the end of its row The Play Stop Pause 5 buttons will appear They are related only to the currently selected line The elements hierarchy will be observed i e when you push Play fora Slide all Layers and objects that belong to it will be played if not disabled If you push Play fora Layer only the objects in this layer will be played Respectively if you push Play for an object TitleBox wills how only this object Ifa Slide is in Stop mode it will not prevent you from playing its Layers and objects Pressing the Shortcut mode button will enable the shortcuts functionality Thus if you have assigned some shortcuts to slides in your project you will be able to control these slides using the relevant shorcuts Please check the Preview section below for details 301 TITLEBOX V 3 Project Preview area The project preview area consists of three tabs as described below Slide Manager Si aii aslo V 3 1 Det
211. deo will be left out of the screen Two thinner black bars will appear on the top and in the bottom of the screen Zoom the vertical size of the picture will be preserved The video will be cut equally at its both sides 16 x 9 it will force 16 9 aspect to all source files When 16x9 is selected you can specify the way to process files with different aspect ratio in the Aspect Conversion Type field to the right Black Bars if the source file has 4 3 aspect two vertical black bars will be added on both sides of the video to fill up the remaining part of the screen The vertical size of the video is preserved 14x9 small parts in the top and the bottom of the video will remain off the screen Thinner black bars will appear on both sides Zoom the horizontal size of the video will be preserved Equal portions will be cut off fromthe bottom and the top of the video NOTE The Aspect Conversion will not result in image deformations It just cuts certain parts of the video IMPORTANT Scaling and Aspect Conversion use the same engine for video conversion You CANNOT use scaling and output conversion simultaneously 101 AIRBOX 11 4 4 5 Decklink DV Output Ee 6 6 hCtiti There are three tabs in this setup dialog Eelst General is used for setting the video standard ae E PAL NTSC and optionally flipping of PaL D ip Image images and or fields TE Ep Check M Single field on pause to avoid the Aud
212. digital video is about 100 1 MPEG 1 was initially designed to deliver near broadcast quality video through a standard speed CD ROM Playback of M PEG 1 video requires either a software decoder coupled with a high end computer or a hardware decoder Its quality is not sufficient for TV broadcast ISO 11172 MPEG2 A family of inter and intra frame compression systems designed to cover a wide range of requirements from VHS quality all the way to HDTV through a series of compression algorithm profiles and image resolution levels W ith data rates from below 3 to 100 Mbit s the family includes the compression system that delivers digital TV to the home and that puts video onto DVDs Coding the video is very complex generally producing I P and B frames and is designed to keep the decoding at the reception end as simple and therefore cheap as possible MPEG 2 generally uses very high compression rates and can offer better quality pictures than M JPEG or DV fora given bitrate but is less editable It uses intra frame compression to remove redundancy within frames as well as inter frame compression to take advantage of the redundancy contained Over series of many pictures This creates long groups of pictures GOPs SO 13818 MPEG Program Stream File NLE Non Linear Editing Randonraccess editing of video and audio on a computer enabling edits to be processed and reprocessed at any point in the timeline at any tim
213. display information about upcoming events In such cases the script should look like this Text 1 text clip_start METADATA_Show clip_title METADATA_Show Thus AirBox will display information about the next clip in the playlist that has Metadata called Show in its properties in the first column of the Metadata tab OR Te xt1 text clip_start METADATA_Show 1 clip_title METADATA_Show 1 Thus you will display information about the second clip down the playlist that has Metadata Show in its properties Replacing 1 with 2 will display information about the 145 AIRBOX third clip down the playlist that has Metadata Show in its properties and so on NOTE Even if there is no value for this metadata in the second column of the Metadata tab it will be considered as valid and AirBox will display information about that clip IMPORTANT There should be no plus or minus signs in the Metadata name Special actions in the Graphic Rules can control other than graphics events Thus you can control the logo insertion for example The commands can be assigned as separate actions or as lines in other graphic rules actions The beginning of such an Action script is marked with The script must end with Inside the script there can be three types of commands LOGO_OFF to stop showing the logo LOGO_ON to show the last used logo or SHOW LOGO PRESET 1 16 to show one of the 16 logo presets as specifi
214. e Traditional videotape editors are linear because they require editing video sequentially from beginning to end The term is widely used in association with off line editing systems storing highly compressed pictures but on line non linear systems are increasingly available There is a wide range of systems claiming on line quality many using video compression 362 PLAQBOX NTSC Abbreviation for the National Television Standards Committee that standardized the NTSC color broadcasting system currently used in the United States This video format standard is also called composite because it combines all the video information including color into a single signal The bandwidth of the NTSC systemis 4 2 MHz for the lummance signal and 1 3 and 0 4 M Hz for the I and Q color channek O S Operating System The low level software which handles the interface to peripheral hardware schedules tasks allocates storage and presents a default interface to the user when no application program is running ODBC Open Database Connectivity In computing ODBC provides a standard software API method for using database management systems DBMS The designers of ODBC aimed to make it independent of programming languages database systems and operating systems OpenDML OpenDMLA VI DirectShow On Screen Display used for graphics overlay PAL Phase Alternating Line The color coding system for television widely used in Europe an
215. e validate Close Number of lines to skip fa Comment None D Delimiter AER METADATA wi FILENAME C TITLE C COMMENT wi BULK E A Media Re E 4 Media Re E 4 Media Re EM Media Re 15 29 22 EM Media Re 15 30 03 CLAY Mindin Des 10 97 19 FILENAME TITLE COMMENT E 4 Media Re J eu 00 00 40 20 00 00 10 02 AOFM 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 AEA AA Type the template name in the Template string If the selected templates folder already contains some template files they will be listed in the drop down list Push the Sample File button to open an example file for your template If there are some rows in the beginning of the file that you would like to skip enter their number in the Number of lines to skip string The skipped lines will be colored in red If there is a symbol in the beginning of each row in the file that you would like to skip select it fromthe Comment drop down list Then specify the Delimiter from the drop down list 186 CAPTUREBOX Now that you have set the basic rules you will have to explain the Template Builder what information each column contains Go to a column s header and click in it Then select one metadata category from the drop down list to assign it to the relevant column Once assigned this category will be checked in the METADATA list to the left
216. e A A ae M Input Info M Statistics settings designed to facilitate the user Resolution 720x576 Encoded frames e Framerate 25 00 Average speed 0 00 In the Vi deo f Or m at drop down list Picture type na Average bitrate 0 00 specify the format of the video When it GE Ri is set to Auto the video standard will be Restore defaut automatically defined from the input video The Profile and Level drop down 111 AIRBOX lists are referring to the Profile and Level of the encoder Using them the user defines the possible input signals and output settings Below you can choose among different profiles and levels and specify the picture types frame field or MBAFF Further down you can specify the fields order bottom or top first and the Pull down mode Pull down is applied for conversion when the source bitrate and the output bitrate are different Slice count defines the number of slices per picture In the Aspect Ratio field there are two options Picture AR to fix the aspect ratio of the whole picture Sample AR to fix the aspect ratio of pixels in the output picture In the Bitrate Control field there are two drop down lists and several strings Mode specifies the rate control mode Constant Variable or Constant Quantizer The Pass drop down list is used to specify the multi pass encoding mode Simple encoding without gathering statistics Analyze encoding and gathering statistics for
217. e Stretch or Center and another one for the scaling quality In it you can select the picture re scaling algorithm The faster the mode the lower CPU usage 280 TITLEBOX Enter the loop number to repeat the video as many times as you want Loop O means that the video will be repeated incessantly Loop 1 means that the video will be played once and so on Any loop number different from zero represents how many times the object will be looped M Keep Aspect check this boxto preserve the aspect ratio when resizing the object The next two spin bo xes control the image X and Y offset in relation to the object s centre Use them while in Center mode to move the video vertically or horizontally within the object boundaries When in Center mode you can the use alpha matte to fill in the space between the edges of the video and the object s borders You can select its Color fromthe palette to the left of the M Use Alpha check box In the end of the toolbar are situated the two sound controls The Audio Delay spin box allows adjusting the A V sync of the object To the right of it you can find the Volume control NOTE The audio of your DirectShow objects will be output on the Default Audio device set in Control Panel gt Sound and Audio Devices gt Audio WARNING As the playout of direct show media objects is carried out by third party filters we cannot guarantee the A V sync of these objects 281 TITLE
218. e File Link Data Provider is selected to browse for the Ba O C Documents and Settings branimiralDesktop Bookl txt bi file you need Select it and pres Open Ee Eer The dialog to the right will appear so 7 Header row C Tab C Comma you could define what the Formatting H iai C semicon other e i Group up to blank row of the linked file is and what is the T Skip blank rows X cancel Columns Delimiter Click OK when ready il Press Close to exit the plug ins list Object Text 1 Back in the Data Source Data Source FileLink FTP details txt M ana ge r win dow dra g the File Link data source from the right to a text object in the left When you release the mouse button a c a lin k fine tune dialog will open so you could select which column from the E iie should be linked to that text object Besides you can choose the period for updating the data Automatic if you choose this option the data will be updated automatically when the linked file is changed Every xx sec here you can define an exact period for updating the data displayed on the screen Data Links Update data Automatic NOTE Currently you can link only to txt and rtf files 310 TITLEBOX V1 3 ODBC Data Provider This plug in allows connecting to ODBC compatible database formats and displaying the information they contain on the screen Choose the O
219. e Settings menu you just have to log off Almost all menu items will become inaccessible at any attempt to enter password will be required The only exceptions are Colors as they will not affect playback Enable Subtitle Box but not Configure and Mirror mode Full mode Idle mode Change dongles but without configuring If you decide not to use password protection anymore just go to Change password and write the old password in the relevant field Leave the New password and Confirm password fields empty and click OK I11 4 15 Save Load Config If you need to configure several playout servers the same way you can use these two options to copy setting and apply them to other machines Thus you will avoid configuring all your machines one by one You can export the settings of all AirBox channels on the machine or only those of the currently open channel To export the settings of the current AirBox instance go to Settings menu gt Save config and select the AirBox line The resulting file has extension pb which means that it contains settings for only one AirBox channel WARNING Please make sure to name the channel setting file after the instance name so you will know for sure which channel s settings are contained in it Later when you try to load the pb1 file on another system AirBox will not be able to distinguish which channel s settings do you load therefore you need to know this by the filename
220. e Spit M UsFieSpt SpR Time B 2 Mintes Capture Audie Oriy Video Audio Codec Windows Mecha Video 9 Advanced Profile Bitrate 1000000 z Key frame at 2000 Ge m Fip helds V Use IP steaming Le Preview of OK X Cancel The MUse File Split checkbox allows splitting the video at predefined time intervals To capture the audio only when needed you will have to activate the M Capture audio only check Capture Format IP Stream Config Port fi 234 Access control r E Address Mask JV Perform IP streaming without file capturing IV Preview J OK If the input video signal is with flipped x fields you can change their order using the M Flip fields checkbox When the M Use IP streaming checkbox is ticked the P Stream Config tab will appear in the setup dialog In it you can configure the streaming address Port etc Performing an IP streaming without file capturing is possible by checking the relevant box To enable previewing use theM Preview check A Cancel 178 CAPTUREBOX 1 2 3 DeckLink H 264 TTT This plug in provides possibilities General Bum Date Time Video Standard File Split z cards The setup dialog contains the I Flip fields z min _Auido Encoder Settings follo wing settings IV Preview Multiplexer Settings I Burn Date Time Video Standard the user can choose between PAL and NTSC M Flip
221. e Text Template window press the __23Disital Media Technologies Ltd 39 www playbox ty 39 www subtitleplus com 2 button to view it __ 39149 Shipchenski Prohod Blvd fL1 You can prepare texts in advance or create them online All GE buttons in this dialog provide hints New button opens a new text template Open button You can open a previously prepared text file using the Open button Bach paragraph in the text appears as a separate line in the Text Template window Save button saves the entered text as a file Stop button stops displaying the text lines in the preview output window Play button starts displaying the text lines in the preview output window Global Time spin box defines the frequency of changing the text lines This is actually a duration applied for each new line added in the text template If you need to specify a different duration for a particular line use the spin box in the text input dialog Edit item button opens a dialog box for editing the selected text line TIP You can change the text by right clicking on a text string as well Add item button adds a text line A dialog box opens for typing the text in Insert item button inserts a text line A dialog box opens for typing the text Delete item button deletes the selected text line Moving up moves the selected text line up Moving down moves the selected text line down M Au
222. e activated when there are no objects played out in TitleBox i e a sound alarm to let the operator know that there is no graphics displayed After choosing this menu item you can select the desired COM port or None if you do not want to send out any pulses Besides you can specify the signal type RTS or DTR RTS willsend a pulse to pin 7 and DTR to pin 4 Pin 5 is the ground For more details please refer to the GPI pin out description in Appendix 1 261 TITLEBOX ISS Options Press it to open the Project Options window It contains three pages General options Network options and Output options x General Network Output gt General Options These options allow defining the colors the safe area and grid of the Work area Work space set a color for the area that surrounds the works pace Back Color set a background color for the workspace Back image you can select an image for background as well Work Area set a color for the borderline of the work area Safe Frame check it to view the safe area in the workspace You can adjust its size using the H and V percentages to the right Safe Frame color choose the color for the safe area Workspace Back Color tem zl Back Image cS E Jh Work Area re zs IV Safe Frame lv s0 34 JH 90 f Safe Frame Color ave zs MV ViewGid Ga d Snap To Grid K 15 bm S Max Undo Count J Show Objec
223. e far right of this toolbar fixes the aspect ratio of the shape object It will change your object to fit a square and will keep this shape when you resize it WARNING You will not be able to revert to your previous shape after checking the Square check box IV 5 15 Browser Properties 4 The browser object uses Internet Explorer to display web URL hus Meet abv ba zi pages as graphics on the screen XK Cancel As soon as you release the mouse key after drawing the object s rectangle the Open page dialog will appear in the work area Type in the URL you would like to browse or paste it from the clipboard Once you click OK the object specific toolbar will open under the standard toolbars ee Ja Tn it you can type another URL to be loaded in the browser object 7 The Properties 2 window will open together with AAPECK X i SASI Npexerpan konrakmnre osepr the Browser Open Dialog In it you can see the DN CH OT apyrn nown e ABB camo ce S S currently loaded web page Ifthe object s dimensions are smaller than the page itself you can ABB nosroren use the scrolls to select which part of the page to be neuzo noso 3a Te6 iy Soca shown on screen U3snpo6ean ro Browser d E IMPORTANT Ifa link in the webpage is set to open in anew window you will not be able to open it in the same bro wser object There is no practical way to grasp such a window into the same object WARNING Do not minimize TitleBo
224. e following Module Kramer Matriz Switcher Output settings in the Mirror connection set up V Synchronization window Check position every fio Gei secs R if diff i than 11 In the topmost string enter the Remote ER zf Ze whack offset 00 00 02 0 machine IP address or name J Synchronize the playlist also The BackUp can execute some external event EE on connection disconnection to the Master This is Group ID At useful for example to auto switch a video switcher J ES eee esas Se ngA Je Listen to group members for status changes to another input output when the Master unit fails Eemere or when you switch back to it I Execute external event on slave activation Fu SR this event will be executed when the current EE 155 AIRBOX AirBox is switched to BackUp mode For example if the Master has been down for some time and now it is running OK so you want to start the main play back from it again Execute External event on slave deactivation this event will be executed when the Master fails and the current BackUp takes over the playback NOTE For switcher control on connection disconnection you need the PRO option enabled on your dongle The lower half of this window concerns the synchronization between the Slave machine and the Master machine Do not forget to check the M Synchronization box if you need it Set the frequency of position enquiries to be sent by the Slave to the Master in the Check position every
225. e graphics frame buffer sila al gt Clear Buffer clears the graphics frame buffer This H GPI Manager i Active Event command helps avoiding accidental showing of remnants of an old project when loading a new one gt Scheduler Opens the scheduler window for setting up the scheduled graphics insertion gt Mix Objects This command is a duplicate of the Mix Draw Mode button It will blend the overlapping objects in the project 11 5 2 Driver Select Click it to view the list of available hardware drivers and select the one to work with If there are no hardware devices installed the list will contain the following lines Simple Preview Output Driver It is used for previewing the TitleBox project in a specially designed software preview window Mapped Memory Driver When AirBox and TitleBox are being used in the same playout system this driver is used to key the graphics over the video played in AirBox Please note that in such a setup if you stop AirBox the graphics will stop as well Dayang Driver A plug in of an obsolete platform NOTE You must not select it if you do not have a Dayang card installed on the machine 11 5 3 Driver Setup Press it to change the output settings The available options depend on the currently used driver 259 TITLEBOX I11 5 4 Plugins This item shows the list of available external plug ins gt File link Opens a list of all objects in the project
226. e is connected Switch toinput e G 2 Later when inserting the event in the playlist specify snet f Si Jearier z the Input to switch Use the ISwitch now button if you need to execute the command immediately X Cancel aol Protocol une z Port ee NetSender Output event will send any text message Meri zer xl via UDP E MPEG2 Music Payner Madonna_Sory mpg DC Thus you could control P enabled third party devices deeg All you have to do is specify the port to which the message will be broadcast and type in the text AirBox will send the message on the specified port when it reaches the event line in the playlist observing the offset if any NOTE The maximum size per message is 512K Ocelot Matrix Switcher Output Activates the Ocelot Switcher output dialog where you can GIE Ke luet ae aer Joe Ours define the switcher s commands BE Si You can schedule the device ee ear te fees ge control by adding inserting events SE DH e Refresh Input 6 into the AirBox playlist the so E r i called Offline mode or control it Mode a n Ge OFFLINE Input 3 interactively in Online mode C ONLINE CR w In the Levels field are listed Puneve 0a eater Cleorcommends Leg _ 2 Cancel the available matrix levels which refer to digital video analog audio and digital audio Right clicking overa level invokes a pop up menu that enables grouping it wi
227. e it shows the actual sound volume Right mouse clicking on the Volume Meter area opens a context menu in which you can select the direction of the green bands Vertical Horizontal or Auto as wellas the scale range in dB The next field Volume slider is designed to control the z elay ms Speed ms actual captured audio volume p ap oi Delay spin box refers to audio delaying in milliseconds It _ 4 is used to compensate the delay between what you hear and what you see on the VU meter It does not affect the audio itself just the display Speed field you can define the sampling speed in milliseconds TIP t You can show hide the Volume slider and the Delay Speed options by clicking in the line which separates them fromthe Volume Meter A hint will appear when you slide the mouse pointer over it 198 CAPTUREBOX lll MENU BAR File View C New Cla Hld4 File Menu Open Ctrl O Save Ctrl S 11 1 1 Open This command opens a previously created Capture list cap or Schedule list st You could also open playlist files ply while working in Print to Tape mode Kramer Config GPI Config DTMF Config Preferences Audio Mixer RS 422 Config S 1 1 2 Save Pres it to save the current Capture list cap or Schedule list st Il 1 3 Kram er Contig Manual Switch Machine In Schedule mode you can list up to 16 channels to be podr ben captured Use a Kr
228. e line having bandwidth of approximately 3 5 kHz DTMF was not intended to be used for data transfer it was meant to be used for sending the control signals along the telephone line With standard decoders it is possible to send 10 beeps per second Le five bits per second DTMF standard specifies 50ms tones and 600ms duration between two successive tones DTS Decoding Time Stamp _ T T 337 PLAQBOX Abbreviation DV Digital Video This digital VTR format is a co operation between Hitachi JVC Sony Matsushita Mitsubishi Philips Sanyo Sharp Thomson and Toshiba It uses quarter inch wide tape in a range of products to record 525 60 or 625 50 video for the consumer DV and professional markets Panasonic s DVCPRO and Sony s DVCAM All models use digital intra field DCT based DV compression about 5 1 to record 8 bit component digital video based on 13 5 MHz luminance sampling The consumer versions and DVCAM sample video at 4 1 1 525 60 or 4 2 0 625 50 video and provide two 16 bit 48 or 44 1 kHz or four 12 bit 32 kHz audio channels The recording rate is 25 Mb s DVB Digital Video Broadcasting the group with over 200 members in 25 countries which developed the preferred scheme for digital broadcasting in Europe The DVB Group has put together a satellite system DVB S that can be used with any transponder current or planned a matching cable system DVB C and a digital terrestrial system
229. e used for the streaming in the Multicast Output Interface Otherwise the stream will be output through all available LAN cards Multicast Output Interface NOTE UDP Streaming is an optional feature that is not included in the standard AirBox licence NOTE The settings for HD playout on Stradis hardware modules HDM 500e are similar to the settings described above 116 AIRBOX I1 4 4 12 IP Pump MPEG Program Dumper x It is an optional playback plug in Address 127 0 0 1 zl pech 2 w that streams the content that is being gl o M played out to a network IP address putter 1024 bytes 7 packs usem Type Protocol The IP Pump uses a standard UDP paverce Tine 05 3 vun wens C ATP mechanism for data transfer ee Se Pocket Diorio ty In the Address field enter the IP address of the remote machine to receive the stream If you check Multicast i e streaming to multiple machines you will have to enter a special multicast address in the Address field Usually its first three digits are in between 224 and 239 If you have more than one network connections specify which one should be used for the streaming in the nterface string If you leave it empty AirBox will stream through all available interfaces In the Port field define which communication port will be used for the streaming By default it is 1234 TTL stands for time to live for the Internet packets This spin box is acti
230. e user In the Video format drop down list specify the format of the video When it is set to Auto the video standard will be automatically defined fromthe input video The Profile and Level drop down lists are referring to the Profile and Level of the encoder Using them the user defines the possible input signals and output settings 179 CAPTUREBOX x Below you can choose among different Femur DEE profiles and levels and specify the picture Generic Bitrate Control types frame field or MBAFF AVC preset Baseline Z Mode variable strate x Further down you can specify the fields Video format auto EE a order bottom or top first and the Pull Profle Baseine profie Bi rate tsje 600000 do wn mode Pu ll down is a lied for Level Level Auto gt HS5 rate bits sec 1149952 p P Picture type Frame CPB size bits 4599936 conversion when the source bitrate and the Field order Feat tnt delay 90 ke 324000 output bitrate are different Pulldown Automode Dest delay 90 khe 0 Slice count defined the number of slices Sice count 1 D al er Structure S Aspect Ratio Max GOP length 33 a er picture H Picture AR Auto DI Max B Frames count fo In the Aspect Ratio fie ld there are two Sample AR Auto Y Scene change detection Jon optio ns Input Info Statistics J Resolution 720x576 Encoded frames 0 Picture AR to fix t
231. e values for the most used record s fields in this tab By default they are not defined Media type the default Media type set in New Record gt Instances gt Media Type Country the default Country of origin set in New Record gt General gt Country Stream name the default stream name set in New Record gt Instances gt Stream Name Instance name the default name of 15 x General Grid HouselD Default values Export Import Database TCI import 3 D Quality Expiry period Priority Properties Age Rate Total runs 0 x coe the instance set in New Record gt Instances gt Instance Name Quality the default instance Instances gt Instance Quality visual quality set in New Record gt Color coding in this cell you can define which gridcolumn will be color coded Color to AirBox defines which field s color will be transferred during drag n dropping to AirBox Auto sort by defines a field which will be used for Grid sorting by default Expiry period the number of days after an instance copy was created whereupon the instance copy will be considered expired If it is set to zero no expiration will take place It corresponds to the Kill date in New Record gt Instances gt Main Instance Priority the default priority set in New Record gt Traffic gt Priority Properties the default properties set in New Record gt Traffic gt P
232. e x typically used in a TV facility CD DVD DDta 3 Name DYD Rw DVCAM DVCPro etc BE DVCPRO SEN There is a list of predefined media types in Jeng BS the left area of the window e LocaHiDD ae ES To add new Media type right click in the e SHS es eee left area and then click New from the context E Random Access menu A dialog box appears to enter the name Archive of the new media type To rename a Media Type right click on it RER X Cancel and select Rename To delete a Media Type right click it and then click Delete When you select a Media Type from the list its properties are displayed to the right and you can edit them Name media name Prepared time the time needed to start playback from this media type This time should account for the time needed to bring it out from an archive and upload it to the online storage Color chose color for media type color coding Properties define if the media is Rewritable Random Access and or Archive When MArchive is checked the Archive field in New Record gt Instances gt Media becomes editable This field describes the physical location of the program instance When MARandom Access is checked the fields nPoint and OutPoint in New Record gt Instances gt Media become non editable NOTE DO NOT set Random access for video tapes II 5 Qualities This Main menu item allows you to define a subjective measuring of the visual quality of
233. eader line will appear in the logs MLog Frames will display the number of frames at the end of all time containing values MAs run log per playlist checking this box will create a separate ge mun log each time a new playlist is loaded in AirBox MLog metadata all metadata fields will appear as additional tab delimited entries in the row of the relevant clip 126 AIRBOX You can add new columns to the log by pressing the plus sign button This allows logging certain Metadata fields from the clip properties All you have to do is specify the name of the Metadata you want to log as it appears in the first column of the Metadata tab You can also set the periodicity of log files Daily log or aggregated files If M Daily log is selected anew AsRun Log file will be created each new day The System logs are always daily despite this setting The Day start at field determines when to start the new log This setting is necessary in case you wish to log 24 hour periods that start at your wish for example at 02 00 00 o clock instead of 00 00 00 The Log file is generated in simple Tab delimited text format It can be imported to various applications text editors etc TIP You can easily export the logs to MS Excel format from File menu gt Export logs in XLS files NOTE Regardless of the above settings AirBox will generate System logs that are saved in the program directory The minimum period for keeping the syste
234. ed clips highlighted in the playlist It is quite useful for music video channels 1 2 13 Apply Transition This command is used to apply a default transition to a select item items You can set a transition to be a default one fromclip s Properties gt Transition tab Important this feature is available for Mixed plug ins only 1 2 14 Playlist loop This command duplicates the checkbox that loops the playlist for continuous playback H1 2 15 Clip loop This button will loop the currently selected clip when AirBox reaches it This functionality is not the same as the Loop check box in the main AirBox window see the Playlist and Clip Buttons section above 1 2 16 Select all Selects the whole playlist 1 2 17 Deselect Deselects the whole playlist 1 2 18 Invert selection Inverts the selection in the playlist 1 2 19 Find Replace This is a searching replacing function in the playlist AIRBOX IL 3 View Menu View System Timer Ctrl B Clip Timer Ctrl T Block Timer Ctril k Timecode Timer Ctrl R Daily playlist viewer Ctrl F2 ShotBox Ctrl G Time Events v Log Ctrl L Plugin windows gt External video window CE 5 Arrange windows 3 H P 11 3 1 System Timer ey ee xf This is a system time clock It could be shown as a 1 1 06 32 digital or analog clock Right click it and check the 42 11 2003 r desired appearance from the context menu II 33 Clip Timer Clip H Mpeg2 PAL BetaSP MAxe This is
235. ed for the playlists are visible fromthe Safe Box PC and will be copied properly In order not to clog the Destination directory you can check M Copy only daily playlists for boxand specify the number of days in the spin box to the right Check the M Speed limit box if you wish to change the process duration Below you can either use the spin boxes to set the transfer rate or type it directly in the relevant field The values in the Mbps filed will be converted into KB s automatically and vice versa NOTE The higher you set the transfer rate values the higher CPU usage will occur 329 SAFEBOX Jjsixj In the Removal options tab you can specify the way General Removal Schedule OML SafeBox maintains file removal in the Destination Ee directories These options can be turned Off if not needed li lla If Approval needed is selected you will have to go to the EE Removal list land delete the files you want from there In E Delete files older than 30 i dx the following field you can set the expiry criteria for content and larger than 500 MB re mov al Fres space maintenance If you check the M Delete files older than box all files IT Maintain at least 5000 MB free space SE r Ce will be deleted when the period you have specified is over Se File modification date is used as a reference for the IV Move expired files to expiration date e OOOO IMPORTANT The number of days must not be less that 1
236. ed in the Main Settingstab andthe more AS EE Svenvesascntenseseresecnonsecneeavend sophisticated options can be found in Generic Bitrate Control the Advanced Setting Stab The AVC preset Baseline gt Mode variable Bitrate latter are described in the H 264 video format auto ZI Pass sngePass standard so please refer to it for Bene M T details Level Level Auto sl HS5 rate bits sec 1149952 Here is a brief description of Pature type Frame S CPB size bits 4599936 H P e Field order Top Field First 7 Init delay 90 kHz 324000 options found in the Main Settings ni tab as specified in the MainConcept Sice count 1 0 auto GOP structure SD K Aspect Ratio Max GOP length 33 Picture AR Jauto Max B frames count 0 ES Auto Scene change detection lon zl M Input Info M Statistics The AVC presets drop down list contains Advanced Video Coding Sample AR a x Resolution 720x576 Encodedframes 0 S ettings templates This S etting Framerate 25 00 Average speed 0 00 specifies the format of the output Picture type na Average bitrate 0 00 Color format RGB 32 I Overall PSNR 0 00 video elementary stream In the Video format list you can sores indicate the representation of pictures before being coded Below you can choose among different profiles and levels and specify the picture types frame field or MBAFF
237. ed in Settings menu gt Logo Here is an example of a command to stop the logo LOGO_OFF IMPORTANT The logo script is case sensitive Le it must be typed in capital locks Another couple of actions can switch the incoming triggers ON and OFF Thus the received GPI In pulses DTMF tones or Time Code will be ignored and the commands assigned to them will not be executed during a certain clip These actions are called AUTOMATION actions The possible commands are AUTOMATION_OFF to disable the incoming GPI DTMF triggers AUTOMATION_ON to enable the inco ming triggers WARNING Do not use automation rules simultaneously with s kip zones Settings menu gt General gt Skip zones to avoid conflicting logics TIP If you need to switch the AUTOMATION ON OFF manually use the Automation button in the main AirBox window If you need to switch OFF the Audio output on certain clips you can use the following Action script MUTE_ON Type MUTE_OFF in the Action script to switch the audio back ON TIP If you use the Next command in AirBox all graphic rules that would have been executed in normal playback will be executed at once This might cause an unpleasant flickering of your graphics To avoid this check M Skip this action on Next 146 AIRBOX TIP If some of the information that should be displayed in the graphics object is missing in the playlist you can skip sending the whole command by chec
238. eflected in the Assign Layer button Thus if you have assigned one layer a small dark blue square will appear in the button If you assign two layers to the slide there will be two dark blue squares in the Assign Layer button and so on 3b Mes Bselye Ty a Layer line there is no Assign Layer button as this contradicts the hierarchy However there is a Visible Invisible button This button will hide the currently selected layer from the work area so its objects will not impede you while creating another layer in the same slide After the Layer name there is always a figure in brackets It represents the number of objects contained in this layer Sisi Tn an Object line you can see only play and visibility status notifications and an icon of the object type the object name In case you need to move a slide or an object just drag n drop it to the new place you would like it to be V 3 1 2 Properties In the area below the project tree you can see the properties of the currently selected line The properties of the Project Line contain some default settings that will affect all newly created slides Default color this color will be applied in the preview thumbnails of your slides You might need it in case there are some white characters in a text object that would be impossible to see on a white background Default slide duration the time for showing the slides when playing them with the Slide Controller Default Play mode t
239. el AirBox will automatically insert information about its original duration in the Notes column in the playlist If you do not want to see this information just leave this boxun checked Copy HouselD to TapelD a convenient way to automate assigning reference information needed for subtitles insertion Show frame values in playlist check it to view the number of frames at the end of the duration value in the Duration column Color entire row by category fills the entire row in the playlist with the Category field color of the relevant clip This option refers to DataBox categories You can change the category color in DataBox Options gt Default values gt Colors to AirBox NOTE You will have to drag n drop entries from the DataBox grid into the AirBox grid to view their category color Show external event s thumbnails in the hint by default you will be able to view thumbnails of all Title Bo x templates used in the TitleBox Net Control events in the play list If you do not need them just go to this check box and uncheck it T2 AIRBOX Disable misusable aa critical shortcuts EE lt gt replaces regular Play lt A m ro Zee shortcuts of dangerous Sa EE lt Esc gt playback commands with alternative ones as lt I gt B Large status bar lt Cirl gt lt Space gt enlarges the status bar in ch lt FQ gt the bottom of the AirBox lt gt window Jump 6
240. el for it NOTE You should specify the URL of a live network stream not a link to a file The Capture Device drop down list contains all direct show compatible capture devices installed in the PC Select the one to use from the drop down list The Virtual Channel is a DMT standard that helps external programs as AirBox Graph Edit or any Direct Show compatible player to transfer video information which to be inserted in the object This option is still under development Custom Support this is and advanced option Select it to choose the filters to use in this object on your own You can add filters to the graph by clicking the Add button A list of all available filters will open for you to choose To view the properties of a filter in the graph select its line in the list and press Properties You can crop the image Width and Height using the relevant spin boxes under the preview window When a direct show object is selected in the TitleBox preview area an object specific toolbar appears under the standard ones ie Ww Alpha Dm a Mode Center Pure Fast DI Loop jo Ww Keep Aspect vlt vlt 4124 C Use Alpha Audio Delay 0 ms Zil Volume J The i Properties button opens a list of all filters used in the current graph Check M Alpha to use the video s alpha channel You can adjust it using the percentage spin box to the night In this toolbar there are two drop down lists one to select the display Mod
241. elist button to view all the subtitle files contained in the Watch directory x Start TC AiBox_ClipTrimmer sub SubtitlePlus File Bulgarian 00 00 00 00 AirBox_LogoPresets su SubtitlePlus File Bulgarian 00 00 00 00 AiBox_LogOptions sub SubtitlePlus File 00 00 00 00 AuBox_PlayCaptured sySubtitlePlus File 00 00 00 00 AiBox_TBNCtl sub SubtitlePlus File Bulgarian 00 00 00 00 AirBox_UnlimitedPLE dit SubtitlePlus File Bulgarian 00 00 00 00 Bulgarian a 00 00 00 00 TapelD RefID UB E SubtitleBox will take care of broadcasting your subtitles according to the playlist loaded in AirBox NOTE Make sure the Filename parser is set to a preset with naming structure Tape ID and SEPARATOR before you load the playlist Check the Variable length radio button In the clip s properties dialog fill in the same Tape ID as of the subtitle file Otherwise AirBox will not display the subtitles 154 AIRBOX 11 5 3 Mirror Mode The Mirror mode is another optional plug in available for AirBox The Mirror mode provides options for full redundancy of your main playout unit against system failures such as power loss broken motherboard or RAM etc In order to use this option you must have two licenses for AirBox running on two different workstations with a network connection between them For the sake of convenience these are called Master and Slave hereafter They communicate via TCP IP protoco
242. em It provides e an easy way to use information Music Lime_Biscuit The_road_to_heaver live mpg Active file parser preset included in the file name without Ier S m using a database You will make eege J I Convert all underscores to spaces Convert all 20 to spaces the most advantage of this feature P ALL CAPS 7 All First Caps if you have standard naming gt so Seu structure for your clips SEPARATOR __e SEN In this ne dialog box you aE SS have to tell AirBox how you Totallenth E i ce 0 2 characters name files so it will know what Padsymbol do certain parts of your filenames pa eh EE mean The dialog box is divided in ace three zones the uppermost zone 7 provides options to write browse X Cancel for a sample filename and to set general parsing rules presets in the middle zone you should explain the naming structure by including metadata fields and in the lower zone you can specify the properties of each metadata field Have a look at the following example to make it clear to yourself Fixed length D a a Let us pick a sample filename like BGMusic Lime_Biscuit The_road_to_heaven live mpg write it in the Filename field You could also browse for existing files or choose from the drop down list of filenames after pushing the arrow button to the right of the Filename field The drop down list contains al
243. enian iE EAEE AE 21 Hao C E 21 TT E e a E T E EE A eo eeeseuns 21 TTS TO E Ze 7 e EE Ra IA e DEN E 23 IL 5 PLAYBACK CONTROL AND LOUNTERS 24 II 6 PLAYLIST CONTROL BUTTONS ccccccececcccececececececcecsctceceesceeens 25 II 7 THE VOLUME SLIDER serrent ineert disiris t PENER EKKERT IAEN ANE NE Siei 21 II 8 TAE PLEA YUIST GRID EE 27 IT S 1 The Grid CGolunmme ccc cc ccc cccccccccccccuccuccuccccuscccecccsecceuccseuceueenecnes 27 Uo e 29 PLAQBOX WG Drag MD OD vst nsaaraasngeaveeridvianatacaateigeharsuabstaundienedinanaanadetaoisaddes 29 EE E E E ENE EE E 3 II 9 RE 31 M IVI H E 32 We P TVS car recatesentac bancamvoutae E IL II 1 1 New PlayliSl arasims AEE J2 II 1 2 Load Pryl S oerien aiii Ke II L 3 Append playlist cccccccccccccecccnscccsecauscaesesescceeceusensseseeeeeeenaes 32 WDA dnsert PID ee EE 32 E EE 32 III 1 6 BV CPI IS OPENER ENE E I 36 II 1 7 Ee 36 III 1 6 EE 36 III 1 9 E 37 PLDI Export playlist as d seacerrnasecarconssndoadetsjnss uanadhnearesenceiltcosiseaes 38 WA EE Expor Logs IAL FCG en 38 ULIA EE 38 ALIAS Reload graphic Rules eseu Eden 38 E Rescan EE 38 IS EDN EE 39 II 2 1 eendeitege 39 TT 2 2 eeleren 39 IT 2 3 OY E 39 ITT 2 4 EE 39 UE a A 39 II 2 6 EE 58 TZ 7 Delete current from MIS cxsniscrscanesusnsscnsacnsiworayusaanenraceocseairctatanads 58 III 75 Delete Unsupported clips 58 II 2 9 ee 58 STE EE er a ee EE ee Rn ee nner nee ere 58 EE Ee 58 EE 64 TT E
244. ent TitleBox Command lt CLEAR SCREEN gt 15 17 11 33 00 00 00 Ext event Crawl 1 football tmpl L def1711 33 00 00 00 Es event Roll 1 football tmpl 922 gt 138Eah es L 20171415 2 EE 17 15 55 17 15 55 00 00 0 ES A 00 01 39 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 31 0 Ext event MPG2 48 kHz MPG2 48 kHz Ext event Ext event MPG2 48 kHz Closing Ceremo TitleBox Command lt START gt Dis nal del Testimonial Meth Jumanii TitleBox Command lt STOP gt TitleBox Command lt CLEAR SCREEN gt Trailer2 53 H AMpegaSPALSM AIRBOX Video Resize Control Output 3 This option allows resizing the video output using ii 2B pre defined presets E S Offset IMPORTANT The Video Resize option is Drone 2 eater available only on AirBox systems based on Setup X Cancel Black Magic Deck Link and on the software playback module with MPEG file formats The Video Resize Presets drop down list contains all previously created presets in Settings gt Modules gt Remote control gt VideoResizeCtrl Output window When you activate this function for the first time this list will be empty If you don t have any previously prepared preset you can make it now fromcurrent window just vere press the Setup button A Top 0 set up form will open ai The largest area
245. ent parts Select which of them to export by checking the checkboxes in front the relevant section Besides you can change their order using the up and down arrows If you choose to export several parts at a time you have to specify the way they should be exported as separate files Export selection s as multiple files or as a single file Export selections as a single file Pressing the Export button in this dialog opens another dialog box for you to specify the file name and store location and to begin the export opens a dialog box for exporting the To delete a clip section select it and press lt Ctrl gt lt D gt To reset the original clip length press lt Ctrl gt lt BkSp gt Add Zone button marks the beginning of a zone A yellow point appears in the EE x Export Selection s as single file Ze Export Selections as multiple files Part s Select Al Invert Part 3 In 00 01 17 03 Out 00 02 31 06 4 wb Part 4 In 00 02 31 06 4 Out 00 02 59 15 Part 6 In 00 03 26 16 Vee Wee Out 0003 41 03 y HDTAIT AGAR TRARAAD CTT Throttle Low Normal High m The Throttle has three levels Low Normal and High Each of them tells the CPU what priority to give to the export process The higher the priority the slower the other simultaneously running processes on the machine and the quicker the export made 320 3 Volume Control You can change t
246. ently used output module 1 3 10 External video wndow v Check it to move the video window outside the main AirBox window You can resize the video window both by pulling its edges with the mouse pointer or by right clicking in it a dropdown menu will suggest several zooming options 11 3 11 Show external video window If you have closed the external video window you can view it again by v checking this line Pressing it once again will hide the window 1 3 12 Arrange windows Clic king in this line will align all open timers around the main AirBox window 69 AIRBOX Settings Tools Commands General Colors Modules Output Logo Logging StartUp Timecode Suto fill Fixed time events Complex items Graphic rules Filename parser Admin D Save settings Load settings II 4 Settings Menu The Settings menu contains the most important settings of the AirBox module III AT General This Settings dialog box is divided into three tabs The uppermost part in the General tab contains general functionality options Use Clip Trimmer if checked AirBox will open the Clip Trimmer on double clicking over a clip If this flag is not checked the Clip Properties dialog will open instead Disable trimming while playing to restrict changes in the currently playing list ow Enable IP Remote Control enables or i disables AirBox LAN remote control us
247. er ES Input select the number of the desired switcher input Run event fill in the number of frames for earlier or later command to the switcher see the GPI section NOTE This switcher control plug in works with the old control protocol Most of the latest Kramer switchers are Protocol 2000 comp liant so you should use the Kramer Matrix Switcher Control module even if your switcher is not a matrix switcher IMPORTANT The Play Box modules DO NOT support the Deck Control connector supplied on the DeckLink breakout cable Kramer Matrix Switcher Output for all Kramer switchers that use Protocol 2000 This event activates the Kramer Matrix Switcher Output A dialog box appears to define the Kramer Matrix Switcher commands There are two main modes Command and Online In Online mode the user can switch Inputs Outputs in real time just by pressing the desired In Out fl Kramer Matrix Switcher on AirBox 1 lol xj Devices 6 NONE 7 NONE 8 NONE Save Load Video Audio Audio follow Video Mode J Ce Command C Online Int In2 Bai ow ous ows ows Jous Run event jo ms earlier DI Clear commands x Conc combination field in the grid the right part of window area In Command mode the user selects the desired combination for the Matrix and after pressing OK the event is added to AirBox playlist The attached devices a
248. er D Tests possible to include the clip in the batch capture list if you Free disk space 7697 MB have not specified the clip location on the hard drive the Tape ID News_07 tape ID the initial and the final timecode as well as the clip name Folder this field describes the folder in which files will be captured Pressing the browse button klamm d next to it opens a browse dialog box where you can 2 Qut oo07 0000 4 specify a hard disk and a folder for storing the Duration 00 02 10 00 Clear captured clip wem Under the field you can see information about the free disk space at the selected disk Title Event_005 A Tape ID In this field you must type the ID of the FleName Evert005 S S YS source tape from which will be captured the footage This is very important if you work with _Addtobist e _ xci more than one tape or the tape timecode is not continuous Later during the batch capture session you will be asked for tapes by their IDs In and Out fields specify the initial and the final timecode respectively If you choose to fill in the information manually you could use either of the following separators colon semi colon dot or comma Of course you do not need to enter the leading zeros in any field For example if you enter 1 2 3 this will be translated to 00 01 02 03 If you don t enter any disjunctive symbols in the timecode this will be interprete
249. er AB configuration field opens a contextual menu providing the following settings Add Master AB Click it for adding a new AirBox Master to the list Assign Alarm event These assign an alarm event to a particular AirBox Currently only the TitleBox Alarm Plug inis supported This plug in works when TitleBox is in Net Control mode It monitors a predefined TitleBox application In case the connection with TitleBox is lost the alarm is triggered and MBM initiates a switch from the Master AirBox to the Slave This is intended fora safety s sake in case the Master application to which this alarm is assigned failures For adjusting the TitleBox Alarm Plug in you have to select a Master fromthe Master AB field Then right click it gt Assign Add master 4B Assign alarm event E TitleBox Alarm Plugin Edit Delete 173 AIRBOX Alarm Event Title Box Alarm Plug in A dialog window will appear for you to specify the address of the TitleBox machine or its name in the network Port and TitleBox channel e Edit is a setting which provides possibilities for editing the alarm events which are assigned to a defined Master e Delete use it if you want to delete an alarm event assigned to a master AirBox V 2 2 2 The Slave AB configuration field Here are situated all AirBo xes added as Slaves V 2 2 3 The Online AB configuration field You can specify whether an AirBox is Master or Slave by selecting some
250. er is specified in the spin box For example Slide show Play 2 would mean start showing slides from slide 2 Slide show Stop 3 would mean stop slide 3 but the slide controller will continue showing the other slides in the project If you need to stop the slide controller please insert a Project Stop command Text Property area When you select a command it appears in the mid window field To activate a command check the box in front of its name After selecting the command press the OK button The TitleBox command event will appear in AirBox playlist When you select a TitleBox project its objects appear in the lower property window You can select one or all of them to be controlled from AirBox by checking the boxes in front the objects Choose the Command field Play Stop or Update The Update command is used for text items that have been changed after their recent use in AirBox In the following fields to the right you can see the object s properties duration offset effects etc Offset field allows setting the time for earlier or later start of the object according to the next video clip After selecting the object s press the OK button The TitleBox object event will appear in AirBox playlist Channels These correspond to TitleBox channel ID set in TitleBox Project gt Options gt Network Text Property area you can type new texts of text objects in it IMPORTANT To use TitleBox Net Control out
251. erate as run logs When you first check this GE box browse for a folder to save your AsRun logs v Daily log f oe stat at Jean to If not a subfolder AsRun is created in the 7 AirBox Logs directory Your AsRun log files will X corea be saved there Delete system logs older than days this option will help you to manage your system log files by deleting the ones older than the number of days set in the spin box You can choose between 14 and 100 days Delete as run logs older than 7 days acts the same as above but for the AsRun logs You can add info fields in the log by checking the relevant check boxes in the list Use the red arrows to change the position of the currently selected item in the Log file Some third party applications require an exact number and content of the columns in the log file Therefore we have created several empty fields that can be inserted in the log to comply with such specific requirements Below the list of info fields there are several selectable options M nsert date in first line of file is used in daily logs if you want to view the date in the first line of the log as well When unchecked the date is contained only in the filename and the log itself contains only time entries M Column headers represent a line in the log that displays the log configuration under it Thus any time you change the log configuration through the check boxes and red arrows and click OK a new column h
252. erated timecode red RecInh arecord protected tape is inserted in the VTR Loca indicates that the VTR is in local control mode and the remote control is not possible Tape indicates that there is a tape in the VTR EOT End Of Tape alarms that the tape is about to end or that the tape end has actually been reached Indicator gt gt or lt lt shows the tape roll direction Preroll indicator informs that the VTR is executing a preroll command Servo indicator shows that playback is running stable CueUp indicator shows that the timecode positioning command has been success fully completed Tape AutoEE and Full EE depending on VTR s model and its settings a combination of these keys opens the E E Cone ae EE circuitry Com port IV Always on top Config button opens a configuration dialog Timecode ype LTC z M Editing VCR box where you can define Saber H Zoe Com port the port to which the REC Delay 0 C Assemble Mode e REC Latency fo recorder is connected Timecode type the type of the 7 timecode LTC VITC etc e ETT Play Delay the delay in frames of the video recorder start towards the capturing start This setting refers to the Capture mode REC Delay the delay in frames of the clip start towards the video recording start This setting refers to the Print to tape mode REC Latency the frame offset of the
253. ers from the preset E OEY The sign marks filters that are included in the preset but do not participate in executing the current particular file There is a Property button right under the tab name Pushing it will open the property page if any of the selected filter You could change the filter s setting there gr Preferred cP Not Used 326 SAFEBOX SafeBox is another module from the PlayBox suite which serves as utility for file management SafeBox takes care of moving copying or deleting your files automatically or manually This is done following a number of pre definable locations priorities and rules The user interface is quite simple it is divided into two major parts your Source and Destination locations g SafeBox NOT FOR RESALE sell xj Hales eil sleju aE lx Lt Source location Destination lacations AC Yoda MP3S 0 B 1 y D Brani Playplists 270 57 KB 1 E mpeg2 g2 3 66 GB 1 E Awork Current location J JE mpeg2 H 2 zl C BetaSP Folder 0B Discreet_2002_SMbit Folder 1 56 GB 3 Improper Folder 861 66 MB Storage info Used space 22 47 GB Needed space 14 49 GB Free space 210 42 GB After transfer 195 92 GB Log 5 15 08 2005 11 35 52 Transfering D Camtazia Monday1 avi 15 08 2005 11 35 52 Transfer of D Camtazia Monday1 at completed 15 08 2005 11 35 52 Transfering D Camtazia Monday2
254. essages coming from third party r applications to a linked text file The only difference is that it 2 displays the saved text as Roll ticker To create a Chat roll object Press the tl button in the object palette Then right click in the object to set the File link The object specific toolbar is identical to the Chat line s Please check the Chat line section above for details 289 TITLEBOX IV 6 TitleBox 3D Title Box 3D is a variety of Title Box which supports 3D objects Activating TitleBo x 3D is a matter of separate license There are three 3D objects available in TileBo x 3D Text 3D Picture and 3D Mesh IV 6 1 3D Text This object allows creating a rotated and animated text Select the object and draw a rectangle into the Title Box work area The following properties window will appear s af 0 ce At the top of the window there are three spin boxes Alpha Scale and Aspect for changing respectively transparency of the object scaling of the object and aspect The aspect here is a correlation between horizontal X and vertical Y size of the object as it is draw in TitleBox By default the aspect is one It is accepted that the Y size of the drawn area is equal to the Y size of the selected font This means that when you change the aspect Y size doesn t change and only the X size is changed See the example below The first picture shows Aspect 1 290 TITLEBOX ls
255. est duration is through then will go to the next slide m the list Enabled it is equal to the M Enable check box in the slide s row Lock reflects the padlock status in the slide s row Play mode how should TitleBox treat the previous slide on starting the currently selected one Please check the project properties above for details View Name click in this line to change the slide name at your will Ifa Layer Line is selected you will see Enabled shows the status of the M Enable check box of the currently selected layer Lock reflects the padlock status in the layer s row Visible shows the status of the Visible Invisible button ails Preview Properties Add Slide Ins Add Layer Ctrl Ins Delete Play Control Play Mode Shift e M Visible iv Enabled Locked Global Layer Links gt Slide Actions None Assign Shortcut Stop Playing vw JumptTo Wait Key Press Shift L Prop Back Mornings 10 30 11 Durat Y News 12 Enab Lock Slide 5 Slide 6 Mornings 10 10 30 Viewh Neshto si KukuRigu When an object is selected you will see below all its properties that can be adjusted in the main TitleBox interface These properties are different for the different objects and have already been described in the Object Properties section III 4 3 of the TitleBox chapter above V 3 2 Preview In this tab you can see thumbnails of all Sl
256. et that will be applied to the time code which is broadcast over the network see Settings menu gt General section Clip Loop If the M Lock playlist box is checked it will prevent you from editing the currently loaded playlist as well as from loading another playlist Use it to protect accidental changes of the playlist during playout M Playlist Loop if checked when the playback of the last clip in the playlist is complete playback will continue from the beginning of the playlist again M Clip Loop if checked the currently playing clip will continue playing until unchecked When AirBox is in stop mode this check will loop the first clip to be played after resuming the playout ie the last played before pushing the Stop button I1 3 4 Playlists In this tab you can view all playlists that are found in the currently selected playlist folder displayed in the string To change the folder click on the BrowS button to the right of the string TIP t Double click in a playlist line to load the relevant playlist in AirBox Please note that this will interrupt the playback 21 AIRBOX 11 3 5 Log view This tab displays a list of all events that have occurred during AirBox operation I1 3 6 ShotBox This tab accommodates the live show clipboard In it you can view and operate with the custom command buttons It duplicates the live show clipboard window that opens fromthe View menu Please check the Sho
257. ets Thus the next time you need the stream you can just insert the relevant preset instead of setting up the whole information again When you are ready with settings for press the 241 Add current as preset button this will save the current configuration as a preset for later use You can edit your presets later Select the one you d like to edit from the Presets list correct it at your will and then press the Update button to the right of the Star button To delete a preset select it in the Presets list and press the Delete Preset button Now you can add some events such as Switcher events TitleBox Net control Video Resizing and Logo in your live stream presets Press the Add new event button and select the event you need from the drop down list The relevant dialog will open to configure the event s commands Allevents associated with the current live stream will be listed in the Events field You can edit these events later Select the event you d like to change from the Events list and press the Edit selected event button A dialog will open for you to apply the changes at your will 41 AIRBOX To delete an event select it in the Events list and press the x Delete event button above If you need to do some fine tuning of some of the events prior to inserting themin the playlist press the 1 Toggle auto config button while an event is selected Thus each time you insert this preset in the playlist you wil
258. example 295 TITLEBOX is ee Ps pel EE Segel hx Aspect 29 E Arika ut EE Bea 33 y 0 00 sl zow sat Armadan Vestices Vertex colors Bea Geert EE S Ge Mee hytit uE d i dee 296 TITLEBOX IV 6 3 3D Mesh This object allows you to insert a Direct3D model x file prepared previously with some external 3D modeling application like 3DStudio Max Maya Blender etc la x xi 3 d Arhat Ig Bew Important You have to export your 3D model into x file in order to can open it in Title Box Note Iorder To be sure that your x file is correctly created you can check and preview it first with DirectX Viewer If DirectX Viewer opens and plays your file than TitleBox will play it too If DirectX Viewer cannot open or play your file than you have to re create it Select the 3D Mesh object and draw a rectangle in the TitleBox working area The Properties window will open Press the Open X file button to select a x file You can change Background Alpha and Scaling of the file as it is already described for previous 3D Text object There is an additional Speed spin box for changing the speed of motion of the 3D scene Leave the Zero 0 value here if you don t want to change the original speed If you want to speed up the scene increase the value to be bigger than zero 20 for ex If you want to slow down the scene set the speed to be less than zero
259. f the Wizard the Configuration dialog box will open There you can define more sophisticated settings of the event offset duration color or even the text of the text objects BER Configuration dialog box _ Z i Template area Here you can see the wt 567 8 General Commands and a list of lt n aad Select AB Unselect All available projects Only projects that have been previously saved as templates in TitleBox Network menu Export project as Template could be managed from AirBox IS KE gt General Commands o Start starts the project in TitleBox wei Lv ox LS Stop stops freezes the object s on the screen because of ceasing the exchange of information with the graphics buffer Clear screen clears the graphics frame buffer and hides all objects from the screen Reset This command will stop and hide all previously displayed objects This function would be useful if there have been other TitleBox events before the one you d like to insert but you re not quite sure about the display status of some object s NEW Slide show this command triggers the Slide Controller in TitleBox You can choose between Play Stop Pause or Next in the drop down list to the nght Use the spin box next to it to specify which slide you would like to control 000000 40000 S 000000 0 000000 0 51 AIRBOX NOTE The play and stop commands will be applied to the slide whose numb
260. f the matrix via TCP IP protocol The configuration window is divided into three areas one per each mode x For the COM port mode you should set See COM Port the COM port you will use for cer SR connecting to the switcher All available COM ports See are listed in the drop down list Baud rate set the information carrying capacity of the port measured in bits s Read delay the delay between the command given to the matrix switcher and its execution By User default it is 50 ms and it is not recommended to Password leitch change this value Read timeout the time for which the fe Internal server mode S Ip address 192 168 50 36 switcher reports status ix Vi a as a If you choose to control the matrix via the TCP IP o B protocol check Telnet mode and enter the SES X coca relevant P Address in the bottomof the configuration dialog Check the factory provided User name and Password and type them in the relevant strings TIP t The default user pass word for Leitch Integrator are Leitch Leitch For the Panacea series these are Leitch Leitchadmin respectively The nternal server mode is used to send commands to the Leitch Matrix Server The Matrix Server is an add on application which provides possibilities to control one matrix switcher from several AirBox channels 88 AIRBOX simultaneously In the P address field type the address of the
261. file name using the browse button next to the field or by typing the file name manually After typing the file name you have to press lt Enters gt in order to save the changes Audio Level describes the absolute audio level of an audio stream Currently this value should be entered manually Defining it helps AirBox to determine the average audio level of each program in order to avoid annoying audio level discrepancies when s witching from one program to another while on air IN Point By default it is 00 00 00 00 It can be changed by pressing the button in the right of the field It invokes the Clip Trimmer and a new IN Point can be defined 22a DATABOX TIP t You can use the Clip Trimmer to split your media files in several parts Press the n Point clock to invoke the Clip Trimmer In it use the cursor to locate the out point for a part and mark it using the Split button x General Instances Classification Credits Additional Trim Window DataBox d EIES Filters l Stream Extra a Instance Main Name Stream 1 Zones Shots Part 1 Stream Type Program X 7 SS Stream 1 Main lie Name E mpeg2 0023a mpq L7 n LocalHDD Media Audio Level 0 00 dB SKS IN Point 00 00 00 0 E B E Steam1 Main OUT Point 00 01 23 24 K ideo streams 1 i amp LocaHDD Media hath 720 pixels Video stream found EI Part 3 Height 576 pixels 720x576 25 00 fps CG SS Stream 1 Main eo
262. for copying and pasting the object s settings Here is an Example If you want to Start object picturel at 70 o clock on November 18th and put it on schedule till December 31st Display it for 15 minutes every hour Display the object on Tuesdays and Saturdays i e an advanced displaying The schedule settings for this object will look like this Schedule E Activate Leg Pie jj Defaut a Del M Date M Type C Once C Daily Weekly Monthly Ze Advanced IV Stat 19 11 2005 r M Stop 3112 2005r U E E Is m Cycling IV Every eo min Until 00 00 00 SCH jp Clone Reset mena Ort e Time Jusen S loop fitimes y Stop Time pasa H C Event GP Si S e Duration 00 15 00 Ertem CMD E 1 E Loop Until E 1 Event z m Advanced GG All Monf Tue wed Thu Fri Sat Sun Weekdays pen 1 2 3 4 5 Week Of Month Last From 27 z to 27 Date Of Month Last Day Of The Month O Digital Clock 1 27 12 2004 O Sequence 27 12 2004 Picture 1 18 11 2005 O Digital Clock 1 27 12 2004 MI Dinital Clack 1 2771222004 09 44 31 00 01 00 09 4 Advanced 09 48 01 1 time s Advanced 10 00 00 00 15 00 10 1 09 44 31 00 01 00 09 4 Advanced n9 4F41 nna ni nn MA4 Niner 300 TITLEBOX V SLIDE MANAGER In the past you could create your TitleBox projects in a single layout If you had to open a new
263. forehand Option s gt Housel D gt M Automatic generation Use it if you want to regenerate a House ID Sequence this string is designed for description of content that participates in certain types of sequences music album TV series Mini Series etc You can define the sequence properties in advance from the Tree View Episode a unique number of the entry in the selected sequence This field is not active when there is no sequence selected Season Many TV Series usually are made in batches called Seasons For example a typical TV series is made of up to 20 seasons each containing up to 20 episodes This field is not active when there is no sequence selected Duration displays the total duration of the entry It is calculated automatically Star Usually this is the name of the main talent of the program It corresponds to the Star category in New Record gt Credits gt People Creator Usually this is the main producing company It corresponds to the Creator category in New Record gt Credits gt Company Country As a rule it should contain the Country of Origin It corresponds to Country of origin in New Record gt Credits gt Countries Locations Language Describes the original language of the entry 220 DATABOX Group Generally used to classify a program in a group other than the standard classification scheme Type Category Genre To choose a group select it
264. frame buffer so there will be no remnants from any previously loaded projects Program Driver SetUp opens the settings options of the currently selected Program driver Driver manager opens the list of available drivers so you could choose the one to use for outputting the graphics or a driver to preview it Preview this is the button to control the selected preview driver While the preview driver is playing the bar under the work area will turn blue A text message in it will notify you that the Preview driver is running seat ici The preview mode allows you to make changes in your project and view them in a preview window without actually applying them on the output When the preview driver is stopped all changes you make in the project will be applied real time on the output Pressing the arrow to the right of the Preview button opens a drop down menu It contains the same items as the ones of the program driver NOTE You cannot create new objects while in preview mode You can just edit already existing objects NOTE Some objects might not appear properly in the simple preview window Update While in preview mode press this button to apply the changes to the program output es owi Overlay Use it to play a video file in the background of the work L G area Press Setup first and browse for the file you need Then control it using the Play and Stop commands NOTE Currently it is not possible to unload the background fi
265. from the list To add a new group choose Add new group from the list and enter a new group name RecDate stands for the date when the entry was recorded in the database or received at the TV facility By default this field is filled in with the current date ProdDate usually stands for the program production date or year By default this field is set to current date Notes Used for storing useful notes about the program It is a text field limited to 255 symbols including spaces and punctuation ee SONY1 properties x General Instances Classification Credits Additional 112 2 Instances Here are described the separate instances Seer layout HDD Main Name Playout HDD E Part 1 f Quality Excellent DI copies of each entry It is possible to have cs s Man Yet mro uration UU 3 several copies of the same program Each ES Eats Kill date Not defined T Notes CSS Tape 153 Main DYCPRO Media 1 E New Instance Stream 1 Main ed DVD R Media 1 copy might contain several streams video audio text and they could be recorded or split on separate media 1 2 2 1 Main Istance It is the default name of the first original copy Its description appears in the right half of the window Name name of the instance By default the name is main Quality subjective measurement Of TE App changes when Previous or Next butions are clicked the mstance s qual
266. ge depending on the currently selected object If no object is selected this toolbar allows changing the work area and the grid iol Work Space O Cream Back D Red D JW ViewGrd D Snap To Grid C Documents Sunset jpg D 4 Push the Token button ul work area if you need to be more precise while drawing the objects in the You can change the colour of the drawing canvas fromthe Work Space drop down palette To change the colour of the surrounding area use the Back palette M View grid is checked by default If you do not want to view the grid dots uncheck it TIP You can adjust the distance between the dots in Project menu gt Options gt General tab M Snap To Grid if this box is checked all objects in the project will be aligned to the nearest grid point If you want to load a picture as a background in the work area you can browse for it after pressing the button NEW TIP You can take a snapshot of the current output fill and key from TitleBox by pressing lt Ctrl gt lt F12 gt keys on your keyboard Then you can paste the shot into a picture editor and save it to a file 254 TITLEBOX I 3 Object Palette The Object palette contains buttons for all supported graphics objects Click on the object you need and draw a rectangle in the work area to create it Press this button to select EEO T e mi object s by dragging a rectangle around them Create a Still picture object Create
267. gins Distribution Manager and Output Plugins The Input Plugins correspond to PlayBox modules which are under monitoring AirBox CaptureBox TitleBox Each Input Plugin communicates with the related module and builds up a communication XML messages Further these messages are sent to the User The Output Plugins correspond to the methods of sending the notification to the User via e mail via sms via SNMP or via internal messaging For each method there is a different plug in The Distribution Manager is the Core of the AlarmBox It provides the distribution of the incoming from Input Plugins messages to one or all of the Output Plugins in order the User to be notified The message is sent only if it corresponds to a specific predefined condition Rule For example you can create a rule to receive messages only if AirBox stops or only if a specific file from playlist is played etc I GETTING STARTED 1 Installation Where to Install it AlarmBox is usually installed under folder C Program Files PlayBox Technology Ltd Alar mB ox 341 ALARMBOX By default AlarmBox is installed as service with manual start up type You can change this to be automatic if you need AlarmBox icon appears in Toolbar Ea ll USER INTERFACE The AlarmBox main window contains the following sections Monitor sources Message Destinations Rules Named Values II Monitor Sources Into Monitor Sources window the
268. gle complete image of motion picture film the area occupied by one such image Full DI Standard Definition with 720 h x 576 v pixels resolution Genlock Synchronizing of the video signal clock of a devise with that of an external device in order to achieve equal frequencies and phases of the clock signals 359 PLAQBOX Abbreviation GOP Group Of Pictures In an MPEG signal the GOP is a group of pictures or frames between successive I frames the others being P and or B frames In the widest application television transmission the GOP is typically 12 frames in a 25 fps signal and 15 frames in a 30 fps signal i e about half a second but this can vary General Purpose Interface The generation of electrical pulses to act as triggers for something The generation may vary from simple contact closure to electronically generated pulses i nl Hardware A computer and the associated physical equipment directly involved in the performance of data processing or communications functions at DI Standard Definition with 352 h x 576 v Standard Definition with 352 h x 576 v pixels resolution resolution CE eee eae Disk Drive A disk drive used to read and write hard CE eee eae HDTV High Definition Television A television format with higher definition than SDTV While DTV at 625 or 525 lines is usually superior to PAL and NTSC it is generally accepted that 720 line and upward is HD This als
269. gt Next 59 AIRBOX When using fixed start times you always have to account for the other fixed times in the playlist Therefore the first two lines in this tab contain information about the preceding fixed time event and its duration and the fourth line prompts the start time of the follo wing fixed event if any If you try to set a start time which is in conflict with the surrounding events the time picker background will become red A warning message will appear on clicking OK and will prompt the allowable start time until you set it Between the Previous and Next fixed event rows are situated the two spin boxes describing the current fixed time event Check the M Use fixed Start time boxand enter the time In the Day offset spin box enter the number of days to go prior to executing the fixed time event Day offset zero means the date of AirBox startup When using fixed start times two types of time conflict might occur overlapping of playlist items or gap in the playlist In the first situation there is not enough time to playout all clips in the playlist before the fixed time event starts Therefore you can choose between two M Custom overlap resolving options Skip currently running event when this one is selected AirBox will skip all clips that cannot be played out as a whole Let us assume that the time remaining till the fixed start is 2 minutes and all the clips before it are longer AirBox will skip themand the 2
270. hange X Cancel Selection j only files that exist in new folder only the files that are available in the New folder will be displayed in the list underneath Show only missing files displays only those files from the playlist that are Missing The Selection modes are self explanatory and give opportunity for fast selecting deselecting of all items inverse and missing only selection When the Change button is pressed the file paths are relocated and this is reflected in the playlist immediately 153 AIRBOX 11 5 2 SubtitleBox Subtitle Box is an optional plug in to the AirBox module It enables using subtitles together with your running clips SubtitleBox does not provide any editing options it just shows your subtitles synchronized with your clips The supported subtitle formats are the ones created by our own subtitling software Subtitle Plus www subtitleplus com sub Screen Subtitling Win2020 pac and EBU t3264 stl It is best to use SubtitleBox with Subtitle Plus native files They contain the TapeID the reference to the corresponding media files so SubtitleBox could know when to load and display the subtitles for each clip WEE configure it The only Server Language Bulgarian BGR x Cancel specify in the Configure dialog boxare the folder where Video Resolution 7204576 D your subtitles are Watch directory and the language you are using Press the Show fil
271. hange the priority order just use the Up and Down buttons SS The Open button allows you to browse for already created rules xml files and to load them And the Safe button provides an option to save the modified rules To modify a rule select it and press the Modify button Into the opened dialog there are three sections Conditional operations Operations and Output Plugins Modify new rule conditions Conditional operations enum AirBoxRunningStatus AirBoxRunningStatus equalto Play Play Resume string AirBoxOutputMedia contain cocaco s Logical e And COR Operations G GE ilPlugin Add Copy to destinations ServerDistributeMessagesOutPlugin Stop message processing Remove Properties Conditional operations Here is a list of the specified rules conditions To add a new condition for the rule press the Add button The Modify and Remove buttons are self explanatory Logical radio buttons And OR are related to the logical Boolean operands connected to the conditions list If the And radio button is pressed all the requested conditions must be realized in order AlarmBox to execute a defined operation 344 ALARMBOX If the Or radio button is pressed it is enough only one of the conditions to be performed Pressing the Add button will open a dialog window where to specify the condition operations Add condition Property Condition riorityMessage equalto e
272. he Peere arrows Press the clock button in the upper left corner to activate this sage function Thus if you update the original file picture OLB it will soa be refreshed automatically in your Title Box project In addition Invert Aplha clicking the right mouse button on an object in the list will invoke a context menu containing several useful options Update OLE only Size you can set custom size to your embedded object Full size display the original size of the object Invert Al pha inverts object s alpha channel Update from file for picture objects only If you want to open an image as a background push the Open image button Use the drop down list to the right to fix its layout in the object Normal Stretch Tile or Center Delete the background image by pushing the button Update From File Text and Background Properties You can edit the common text attributes such as font selection size color blur shadow etc and background attributes from another object specific toolbar It appears in the last row of the TitleBox toolbar when you double click a Text template object Another way to invoke it is by pressing the Property button E in the second row of the toolbar while a Text object is selected single click Write the new texts directly in the object 267 TITLEBOX Pressing EI invokes the Font formatting SG g i Besten window Here you
273. he Sequence drop down list provides two options for video scanning Interlace each frame divided into two fields and Progressive 25 29 97 whole frames per second Belo w you can choose the encoding profile and level To the right is situated the Bit Rate Control field In it you can specify the MPEG Type mpeG 2 7 Video Format PaL DI Sequence interlace Profile and Level Main Profile Main Level DI GOP structure I I Distance N 12 m Bit Rate Control Mode T Max rate Kb s Jeng Avg rate Kb s Jeng Min rate kb s Joe I P Distance M 3 Input info Size 720 x 576 Framerate 25 00 fps Statistics Encoded Frames 0 Avarage fps 0 00 Restore default Cancel bit rate mode Constant Variable or Constant Quantization Below are the specific bitrate values strings In the GOP structure area you can specify the GOP size N and the reference period M The Advanced Settings page contains more sophisticated options that should not be changed unless advised by our support team Pressing the Graphic Settings button will open the setup dialog of the DMT graphic layer filter This dialog contains four tabs Graphic Layer Scale Output and WSS All settings in it require AirBox restart or at least pressing the Reset Hardware button in the main AirBox window to apply The Graphic layer tab is used for service purposes so p
274. he aspect ratio of Framerate 25 00 Average speed 0 00 th e wh ole icture Picture type na Average bitrate 0 00 H Color format RGB 32 I Overall PSNR 0 00 Sample AR to fix the aspect ratio of SS estore derau pixels in the output picture In the Bitrate Control field there are two Geet drop down lists and several strings Mode specifies the rate control mode Constant Variable or Constant Quantizer The Pass drop down list is used to specify the multi pass encoding mode Simple encoding without gathering statistics Analyze encoding and gathering statistics for next pass Encode encoding using the gathered statistics and updating it Bit rate bits sec specifies the average bit rate bits sec of the encoded video elementary stream HSS rate bits sec specifies the hypothetical stream scheduler rate bits sec of the encoded video elementary stream CPB size bits specifies the size of coded picture buffer in bits Init Delay 90 k Hz specifies the initial CPB removal delay in 90 kHz clock units Dest Delay 90 kHz specifies the destination CPB removal delay in 90 kHz clock units In the GOP Structure field you can set Macro Block Adaptive Frame Field coding Max GOP length the maximum length of any Group Of Pictures Larger numbers frequently provide better compression Smaller numbers provide better error recovery and better access to the frames for editing Max B f
275. he audio volume and audio balance of the clip using the relevant sliders in the Clip Trimmer The new values will not take effect in AirBox playback These sliders are used for convenience during the trimming process es Volume box shows the volume level of the clip SIS e playback There is a reset button beside the slider to restore the Balance S default value Balance box shows the clip playback L R balance There is a reset button beside the slider to restore the default value 1 4 Status Bar It is located along the lowest part of Trimmer window Position 00 01 39 16 Zoom Frame 1 7 63 W 2 1 1 9 H Mpeg2 PAL Movie Goodies 4 3 ShrekiTrailer mpg The first field Position shows the current timecode when dragging over the trim bar The second field Zoom Frame shows the scale of the Zoom zone The third field Version displays the current Trimmer version The last field shows the clip s filename and location 321 ll TRIMMER PAGES There are six pages on the right side of the Trimmer Window Info Zones Shots Filters Stream and Extra Fites Steam Esa INN e Video Cl l D Info We TI Zones Shots Info of This page shows important system stream information 9 ss Mmps A A Type MPEG2 extracted fromthe file It contains D Video streams 1 Filen ame Video stream found 720x576 25 00 fps Video compression type VideoBitRate 9000000 bps
276. he list is done in much the same manner as adding using the left arrow lt lt button or double clicking To add delete a Genre from the list right click it and choose Add Delete from the context menu Keywords any keywords for the entry They are managed i in the same way as Genres xi r 2 r 4 Cr e di t S General neal Classification Credits Additional Countries Locations Companies People These are the program creation factors County of ogi Bulga Countries Locations Companies and People This tab contains three pages with identical structure each of them consists of two fields In the left field are described some activities For example the activities for Countries might be country of origin target country etc the activities for People can be star director editor etc In the right field are listed the names of credits For Coun tries _ countries names for I Apply changes when Previous or Next buttons are clicked Companies companies names etc rons Fe ES gt e To make a choice you have to drag and drop a credit s name to some activity Le fromright to left 223 DATABOX To create a new element activity or name right click and choose Add new from the context menu To change delete an element right click it and choose Properties Delete from the context menu It is also possible to create lists of activities and names in advance just open the
277. he original untrimmed duration of the clip Details box it shows the part of the clip enclosed in the zoom frame The Trim barvisualizes the clip length and the clip markers The Zoom frame is a yellow square in the trim RE Sep It defines what part of the clip is being shown in the Detail View It is quite useful for long clips You can move or resize the zoom frame by mouse dragging You can define a new Zoom area by drawing a rectangle through dragging the mouse while holding its nght button 318 SPLIT button gt splits the clip and thus defines separate sections in the clip After splitting the clip each new clip section appears as aseparate row in the play list You can play them separately change their order insert other clips between them etc You can define n Out points for each section of the split clip The n Out and Duration bo xes display information about the selected section Multiple In Out definitions are used for skipping some parts of the clip during its playback Thus you can exclude existing commercials titles etc from the original clip You can create separate sections also by pressing repeatedly the In Out buttons Pressing the N button after an existing Out point creates a new section after the existing one Pressing the Out button before an existing IN point creates a new section before the existing one e INbutton marks the In point for start of playback in AirBox The IN point mar
278. he usage of 2 i See subtitles b C Use Subtitles M Logo on top you can use it to avoid eventual chi Fade In frames 1 EA overlapping of the logo and subtitles Stage i To adjust the duration of the Fade In and Fade Out effects when showing hiding the logo use the relevant spin boxes situated in the Fade field gt Advanced tab it contains two fields In case the source file has different resolution then Settings the output resolution there might be some Rescaling of the video gt adie a Live BS No Rescaling if chosen there won t be ees So a rescaling O Crop O Repeat Skip Crop if the source file is with higher resolution Standard Standard than the output resolution only the middle part of O Custom Pu Custom BEEM v the video will be visible If the input video is with lower resolution the rest part of the output picture is filled with a black color 104 AIRBOX Standard this setting corresponds to the sgLowone fromthe Custom radio button Custom if pressed the user has to choose type of quality fromthe drop down list near the relevant radio button NOTE Working with higher video quality requires more CPU power In case the source video has a different frame rate then the output one the following Resampling options are provided No Resampling there will be no resampling Repeat Sk ip for example if the output video s
279. he way of showing the slide on the screen Cross Play if the previous slide has an out transition the following slide will appear as soon as the out transition starts Stop Previous if the previous slide has an out transition the following slide will wait for this transition to end and only then will appear on the screen Add the previous Slide will remain on the screen and the following will be overlaid on top of it Currently there is a known limitation related to this type of play mode once you pile up a slide on top of another one the first slide will remain on the screen even if the second one is Stopped Thus if you want to stop the first slide you will have to do it manually Clear Previous the previous slide will be removed immediately off the screen its out transitions if any will not be executed 303 TITLEBOX Loop specifies how many times the Slide Controller should play all slides in the project The default value zero means endless loop the Slide Controller will play all slides one by one repeatedly If a Slide Line is selected you will see the following properties Duration this is the time in seconds for showing the selected slide with Slide Controller If you decrease this value to zero the duration will be set to Auto Auto duration is applicable when there are objects with different duration in the slide In sucha case the Slide Controller will show the slide until the long
280. hem in the relevant AirBox control panel Instead of drag n dropping you can use the BASSE Add selected buttons 337 1 4 Menu Bar The menu bar is still under development Currently there are three items in the Options menu Show Online AirBoxes check this item if you want to view the AirBox browser Web Users this is the tool for creating and managing users accounts These are needed when accessing the Multi AirBox Manager froma remote location see the web interface xi Name Program Password neen M Disable lists for this user Airboxes Bin playlists x Name Broad coos IT Has Playback rights X Cancel x LJ airbox 1 JV Has Playlist editing rights description below The following dialog opens at selecting this Options menu item Click the Add new button in the upper left comer and enter the user name It will be displayed in the Name string after clicking OK Type the password for this user in the Password string Then define his access rights in the field below There are two tabs and two check boxes in it Use the check boxes to define the playback and playlist editing rights Then create a list of restricted AirBox channelk playlists in the two tabs AirBoxes create a list of AirBox channels that must be inaccessible to this user You can add them fromthe drop down list that appears on clicking the x Add AirBox to disable list button Use the
281. highlights those files in the playlist that are missing invalid not supported fromthe currently installed hardware The playback skips such files and plays the next available clip If the file is missing you can set the time interval for automatic check for missing files Settings General gt Missing Files gt Check Missing files every sec e Light cyan row outlines the playlist events when selected NOTE You can change these colors to fit your personal preferences in Settings Colors gt Playlist tab I1 8 3 Drag n Drop One of the main features of the grid is the drag n drop functionality It allows dragging clips within the playlist and from one grid to another from DataBox ListBox to AirBox or from any folder to AirBox If lt Ctrl gt is being held while dragging a clip in the playlist the executed operation will be Copy By default each internal in the grid dragging means Move and dragging between two windows similar to Windows Explorer is Copy Clips that have already been played back are grey and cannot be moved but can be copied Pointing with the mouse cursor at a playlist s row displays a hint containing the clip s file name and IN OUT timecode values Double click over a clip invokes the Clip Trimmer if it is enabled from Settings gt General gt General gt MUse clip trimmer If you trima clip in the playlist the change will not be permanent but valid ONLY for 29 AIRBOX this playlist If yo
282. hing a rule concerning a particular AirBox If ALL is selected all currently available rules will be shown in the grid Double click a rule to modify it or click the button to create a new rule If ypu do so the Create new switch option dialog opens This dialog varies according to the option you have chosen 170 AIRBOX Path change each playlist Gh Create new sacra zj contains paths indicating where CEE fise cesoora SSCS its local files are For the playlist to be valid for the Oo H Backup AirBox you have to en oe create a rule for path changing Meda 0 For example assume your a AirBox Master is playing out Keren from D Media but the content WNAS D iPlaylists 01 01 2009 a for the Backup machine is on E D Masterl Media Thus after X conen transferring the playlist AirBox Slave will not be able to locate media files containing a different file path For this case create a rule for one particular AirBox and one Backup This way in case of switch between those AirBox machines the Backup has a valid playlist When the Save playlist to file option is used a browse dialog opens for saving the Master s playlist to a predefined folder In fact this is one folder which is a source location for a SafeBox module working in Playlist mode It is intended for moving the already saved by MBM playlist along with the media files contained in it to the Backup server in case none of the medi
283. his button to apply it to the output video The Source Rect field contains several spin boxes to be used for cropping the original video The transition settings will be applied to the cropped image if any crop has been set Left how many pixels should be removed from the left side of the image Top how many pixels should be removed fromthe top side of the image Width to setup the horizontal size of the output video Height to setup the vertical size of the video Set Source Rect this button will apply the above set cropping immediately The Scale Quality drop down list contains several presets for the speed of scale rendering Currently Low has proved to be the most efficient value for this setting so please do not change it to other The Antialising spin boxcan be used to sharpen or blur the video Using the Multiprocess parts spin box you can divide the scaling process into several parts each one of them assigned to a processor this is depending on the number of the processors in your machine The Output tab is designed for setting the output video format and converting the source video formats Select which source formats will be processed in the Transform field Same Inout Format only videos that have resolution as the one set in the Output Format field will be converted Format Fractions only videos with height similar to the Output Format will be transformed for example if the output format is
284. hould be entered at a new line in the Export dialog box Enter new line by pressing the PIUS button To delete a line select it and press the Minus button If you want to export only the selected records fromthe DataBox grid you have to check the Export Selection only box Press the Export button to start exporting the records WARNING If you haven t entered a Start cell the exported data will overwrite any existing data in the Excel sheet as the default start cellis Al IMPORTANT In order to be able to export to Excel files you need MS Excel installed on the DataBox machine 218 DATABOX lll MENU BAR DataBox NOT FOR RESALE Grid New record Options Media Types Qualities Classification Credits Print Media Folders PB Doctor Preview IL Grid Pressing this icon invokes the database grid It has already been described in details above See Section II 3 1 2 New Record A new record can be created either by drag n dropping a file from local or network devices or by invoking and filling up New Record dialog box You can drag n drop several files simultaneously and create records for them m H Mpeg2SPAL Madonna_Immac During drag n dropping a Multi Drag B ike a Piver mog F Mpsc PAl Madonna Inman SAVED H Mpeg2 PAL Madonna mmac window will appear to confirmentering and 11_0hFathermpg HAMpeg2 PAL Madonna_immac NOT SAVED describing of each file There are three columns in CHE HAMpeg2 PAL Maderma EE
285. ialog box 216 DATABOX NOTE If a specific classification element or credit fromthe Tree View is selected at the Same time the new record will be automatically added to this element The relevant fields in the New Record dialog box will be automatically filled in with the corresponding information Delete Record deletes the selected record Edit Record opens the selected record s properties for editing Options opens the Options menu Update updates the database Thus the changes you ve made will take effect Print current table opens a dialog box for printing the database Preview invokes the Clip Trimmer for clip preview if there is an MPEG file connected to the record Search shows hides the search area in the GRID Check files starts checking the availability of the files connected to the records This procedure updates the information on missing files Export to Import from XML These features will allow you to exchange metadata with other applications NOTE Export to XML applies only to the current selection in the grid If you need to export the entire database please select all lines first Ctrl A in your keyboard Export to MS Excel opens a dialog box for exporting records to MS Excel SIS Target fle Cl MV Export selection only Export Sheet name E H Export layout presets Default preset DI ol KI DataBox Text i Symbol Text Symbol Number Number Text Symbol
286. iation Convenient shorthand commonly but incorrectly used to describe the analogue luminance and color difference signals in component video systems Y is correct for lu minance but U and V are in fact the two sub carrier modulation axes used in the PAL color coding system Scaled and filtered versions of the B Y and R Y color difference signals are used to modulate the PAL sub carrier in the U and V axes respectively The confusion arises because U and V are associated with the color difference signals but clearly they are not the same thing 367 AIRBOX Admin rights 129 ASI output 91 Auto Fill 114 Big timer 56 Block Timer 56 Bookmark 38 Clip Properties Fixed time 52 Clip Properties Metadata 54 Clip Timer 56 Clipboard 58 Color settings 66 Commands menu Daily Viewer 57 DTMF readers 69 Events GPI 40 Events Inday Switcher 43 Events Kramer Matrix Switcher Events Leitch Matrix Switcher Events Logo 39 Events Net Sender Events Ocelot Matrix Switcher Events Quartz Matrix Switcher Events Return 40 PLAQBOX INDEX Events Title Box net control 45 EE isiscsnvansns 48 Events VIR Control 49 Events VikinX Matrix Switcher ieee eee 44 File Men 28 Graphic rules 120 Help menu 138 IP Pump
287. ible lll 1 13 Reload graphic Rules The graphic rules are saved in a dat file in the AirBox program directory The graphic rules of the first AirBox instance channel are saved in the GraphRules 1 dat file The rules for the second AirBox instance are saved in GraphRules2 dat file and so on This dat file is loaded at AirBox startup If you want to change the graphic rules without stopping the program overwrite the relevant Graphrules dat file first Then click in File menu gt Reload graphic rules I1 1 14 Rescan file duration Use this command to rescan the durations of all files in the playlist 38 AIRBOX 2 Ed it M e n u view Settings Tools Commands This menu contains all playlist and clip editing Cut Cie commands available in AirBox You can find the ah E most important of them also in the drop down EZ r menu that appears on right clicking m the playlist Insert 5 S Delete current From list Del grid Delete unsupported clips Alt Del Clear list Ctrl Del Clip Trimmer Alt Enter III 2 1 Undo Properties Ctrl Enter Use it to cancel up to five recent actions Randomize Apply transition Chr I i 2 2 C ut Playlist loop Shift 2 Clip Loop Shift Alt 2 Removes the selected object s and keeps it in the SE Hives buffer me mory Deselect Ctrl D Invert selection Shift Ctrl I III 2 3 Copy Find Replace Ctrl F Saves a copy of the selected object s 11 2 4 Paste Pastes the buffer content 11 2 5
288. ich columns to be visible in Options gt Grid double click on the relevant column visibility status to change it The column position in the grid could be changed by drag n dropping the column name Right mouse clicking on a column s name will resize the column The records are arranged in order of their registration in the database You can define a default field to serve as asorting filter for the entries in Options gt Default values gt AutoSort by Clicking on any column name will arrange the records according to the relevant feature Clicking the same name once again will invert the arrangement Thus clicking on Title will arrange the records in alphabetical order and clicking it once again will rearrange them in reverse order If you click a field that contains figures once the records will be arranged in descending order If you click it twice they will be arranged in ascending order A Black bar marks the currently selected entry Clicking twice over it invokes the entry properties The database grid supports the following functionalities 215 DATABOX 3 1 Drag and drop You can drag clips from one grid to another from DataBox to AirBox or from DataBox to ListBox or fromthe Grid to a specific Tree View node I1 3 2 Multi selection You can manipulate many clips simultaneously move delete edit etc To add more clips to the selection hold down lt Shift gt or lt Ctrl gt key while clicking on the clips to add
289. ides in the current project Double clicking in a slide s thumbnail will load it in the work area for editing If you select an object in the work area its properties will be displayed in the Details area below Right clicking in a slide will open a context menu It contains basic slide controls The Play Mode represents the way of showing the slide on the screen in relation to the previously played slide Please check the project properties section above for further details Sliding the mouse over the Global Layer Links line will open a drop down list of all Layers available in the Master container 304 TITLEBOX The Slide Actions list contains four commands related to the Slide Controller They will be executed when the duration of the current slide is over None is the default slide action no command will be sent to the Slide Controller when the Slide duration is over Stop Playing when the duration of the currently selected slide is over it will sent a stop command to the Slide Controller A small sign T yin appear in the lo wer right corner of the slide thumbnail to notify the operator about the assigned action A Jump To action will make the Slide Controller loop between the current slide and the specified Jump To slide Ce A fa resume at any key stroke The following sign will appear in the thumbnail to notify the operator ci x Selecting Assign Shortcut will open a shortcut defining dialog
290. if you select 50 the result would be like Best Fit Aspect Size relation 100 the result will be like Full screen Zoom 0 the result will be like Balanced Letterbox 103 AIRBOX gt Audio tab Here you can see the information about audio output number of audio channels Sample rate and sample bit rate x xi Video Audio Logo Advanced AUX Source 4 gt DTMF Settings Audio Channels DTMF E zj DTMF Settings Diet Settings DTMF Settings Frequency Hz Symbol Lenath ms Sid 50 Bits per Sample 416 v Pause Length ms 50 Mono Channels E 7 Spec Symb Len ms 50 Samples Per Second f Bits Per Sample 16 Channels Mask fl Signal Level 50 of OK A Cancel i Working Mode Mix Generate Also here you can define an output DTMF signal which to be generate Cancel and sent from AirBox The settings for the DTMF are the same like in DTMG output plug in described above There is one additional field Working Mode where you can define wether the DTMF to be Mixed with the output audio or to Replace the output audio gt Logo tab this tab contains two fields General and Fade The first one contains the following check bo xes A Settings M Use Logo if not checked the user won t be able to use lo go General Logo Advanced AUX Source Live H p General MUse Subtitles check it to enable t
291. ignals coming from AirBox and AirBox 3 The signal of Slave 2 that substitutes AirBo x 2 will be output on the SlaveOut device In order to have all signals output on one device we have to start the playout on Slave 1 and Slave 3 and switch from MasterOut to Slave Out Therefore we have implemented the option for grouping Salve machines Thus in case one of the slaves in the group starts playing it will tell the others to start playing too and the switcher will be switched automatically from MasterOut to SlaveOut Now you have the three signals output together again 156 AIRBOX Back in the Mirror connection dialog there are three fields to setup Grouping Group ID fill in the name of the group of Slaves This name should be the same in all Slave machines that belong to this group so you have to fill it in each Salve s Mirror connection dialog M Notify group members on status change enable this so the current Slave will report its status to all other Slaves in the group If you do not want this Slave to control the whole group leave this check unchecked M Listen to group members for status changes check it if you want the current Slave to start stop playing when any Slave in the group starts stops If you do not want this Slave to be affected by the status of other Slaves in the group leave this check unchecked M This Airbox is a master for following group check it to define a current AirBox as a master of the grou
292. ill be displayed at the selected speed change point is enclosed in a frame By default the first point is in the beginning of the graphics A new point is added by pressing the Add button or by double clicking in the yellow squared area When you select a position to change its speed a green point will appear at the grid and its properties Speed and position will be displayed in the Point Properties area to the right The position s coordinates are also displayed in the status bar If you set a speed 0 for any position then you will have to define a delay period This is the period in seconds during which the object will remain stopped The wait time appears in a red square under the zero point All points are shown in the Point list to the right of the graphics Their names are Point where the stands for the sequential number of the point Align buttons 7 e allow aligning the selected point toward the previous the next or the first point in the graphics The Default speed field shows the default speed as it was defined in the main TitleBox window see Toolbar In the Point Properties area are shown the properties of the selected point speed position and time for zero speed points only Point list shows the list of all speed change points in the object Add button PR adds a new speed change point in the object s graphics Delete button deletes the selected speed change point
293. ill be updated accordingly Restart playback after resets the hardware counter which is displayed at the Master green counter This option is necessary due to various platform and format limitations For example MPEG2 stream duration is limited to approx 26 hours so you must reset the counter at least once every 26 th hour NOTE Decoder restarting may cause a few black frames in playback 70 AIRBOX Cue delay this option concerns the Cue function freeze at a first clip frame It defines the delay in milliseconds before pausing on the first frame since different decoders have different behavior regarding the first clip frame This function is both decoder and computer dependent You Il have to find the most suitable one for your setup by testing Audio Streams depending on the hardware platform used AirBox can play out more than one audio stream Default Offset this is a general offset measured in milliseconds that will apply to all newly inserted external events The positive values mean later execution of the events the negative values mean earlier execution This offset will appear in the Notes column in the playlist at inserting an external event Pre roll event time The command reaction times for external events is different for the different devices Still if you find out an acceptable compromise value that will serve your needs you can set a general offset value to be applied in run time to each ex
294. important when you use Objects list window where only names and properties are displayed Delay field you can specify a delay for each individual object A three second delay means that the object would start three seconds after you have pressed the Show object button Duration field here you can specify duration for an object if needed The duration determines how long the object will be displayed after pressing the Show object button Order buttons allow defining the objects order in case they overlap Overlapping dynamic objects is not desirable Alignment buttons allow aligning objects to each other Those buttons work when more than one object is selected Lock buttons used for locking the horizontal or vertical or both sizes of the object X and Y numeric fields stand for X and Y positions of the selected object in the 2D space W and Hnumeric fields stand for Width and Height of the selected object NOTE You cannot change some objects size during their running on air The transitions toolbar will help you in setting your objects In and Out transition effects In Fly From Left vif 00 sec Gu fo Normal E Dut Wipe To Top lh 00 sec a Ga fo Normal First select the transition effect fromthe N and OUT drop down list The available types are Cut None Cross Fade Fly and Wipe They are not active for Analog clock objects 253 TITLEBOX In the spin boxes next to the IN OUT
295. importing such information M Multi file export When you have selected more than one file for export at the same time this feature will create a separate xml file for each instance exported If the boxis not checked O the metadata for all exported instances will be saved in one xml file Thus the recipient will not be able to forward or process these files independently from each other without losing their metadata When importing existing record There are several ways to proceed if there are some duplicate entries in the current database and in the database you re importing You can choose one of the following Skip the duplicate entry will not be imported at all Overwrite the duplicate entry will replace the currently existing record Rename the duplicate entry of the imported database will be entered in the grid as a separate row its house ID will be incremented with a grave accent character and a number 2 for the first duplicate Prompt a dialog will pop up informing you that a duplicate entry was detected during import You will have to choose the way to proceed manually NOTE Export to xml is valid only for the currently selected row s in the grid If you need to export the entire database please select all lines first Ctrl A on your keyboard 230 DATABOX I I 3 6 D atabase General Grid HouselD Default values Export Import Database Tc import _4 D In the
296. in DataBox Person and map it to AirBox Producer that information will be transferred automatically when you drag clips from DataBox to the playlist grid gt Field Order Rescale Type Rescale Value Resample Type Resample Yalue AFD Type AFD Value Field Order ltem Input Aspect 4 3 e Previous X Cancel gt Next 61 AIRBOX You can use these fields in graphic rules to present information that does not appear in the playlist columns Click in the Metadata name cell to enter the name that will be used as reference in the graphic rules In the Metadata value cell enter the additional information that should be presented in the graphics while this clip is on air Please refer to the Graphic rules section for detailed exp lanation on the metadata implementation Except for showing information about the currently playing clip metadata categories can be used for changing the links to picture and sound objects in TitleBox Thus you can change the image shown in a picture object or the sound that is played in a sound object All you have to do here is 1 Specify the Metadata name in the left column For example new picture 2 Specify the file path to the new media to load in the column to the right For example E Pictures pic A Dark Night jpg NOTE The file path should be local for the TitleBox machine Thus you will have new picture E Pictures pic A Fantastic Voyage jpg in one of the
297. in SMPTE RP 164 VITC is placed on lines 14 and 16 when in NTSC and lines 19 and 21 when in PAL Single Field In Pause Using this option will eliminate interlace artifacts when paused Check it to avoid possible flickering of the paused frame End in Black to show a black frame on stop Overlay preview to enable the video overlay window CC Pass Through Closed Captions are decoded assuming that they were placed in the stream sequentially without regard to the actual frame with which they were originally associated In this mode the decoder simply passes the Closed Caption data as it is received and does not re order them m TS Output use it when streaming If left un tic ked the output stream will be MPEG2 Program stream Limit Buffer this setting affects the decoder buffer The bigger the buffer the more reliable playback is but the response time will grow proportionally WSS Enable to activate the Wide Screen Signalling Thus if the files contain WSS information it will pass along with the output signal Thus receiving devices that support WSS will be able to recognize it and adjust the video aspect accordingly Overlay Preview to enable the video overlay window The Video tab contains specific settings for video calibration Used to control contrast brightness saturation gamma and hue of the video output that might be needed on certain occasions Controls both SMPTE 259M SDD digital video out
298. in another position in the playlist just drag n drop the relevant button to the line in which you would like to insert it TIP t Hold down the Alt key while clicking on a button to toggle the current mode of operation Thus you will switch between Execute Insert modes for this particular command 4 To change the buttons number and appearance press the gear wheel buttoned The buttons setup dialog will pop up Define the dimensions at your Button count 16 Button matri will 1 1 ft J to playlist tem NOTE If the matrix settings cannot E Se accommodate all the buttons a L AA warning dialog will appear and you will not be able to GE Name Commercials apply the changes NEW For emergency execution of certain items in the playlist you can assign a Jump shortcut to a button wil EE 67 AIRBOX The jump to target can be a playlist item number or a bookmark name NOTE You cannot drag these shortcuts to the playlist They work only in execute mode TIP Instead of going to View menu you can press Ctrl G to open the Clipboard window TIP Instead of pushing a button you can press Ctrl number key to execute the command assigned to the relevant button 11 3 7 Time Events This is used for preparing time schedules for executing the events In Time Events window firstly you have to enable time events by checking the relevant check box in the bottom of the w
299. in the list and press the Up Down arrows to move it NOTE If you have set Default duration of the complex event its execution will result in holding the AirBox playback during it as in a wait event Besides the offsets of the included external events will be calculated in relation to the complexevent s start and stop points look at the example below Let us assume that we have created a complexevent with 15 seconds duration It includes 2 beginning events Event A with 3 seconds earlier offset and Event B with 2 seconds later offset And an Ending event C with 5 seconds earlier offset The Complex event described above will be executed as follows AirBox is playing the clip situated before the complex event in the playlist 3 seconds before its end Event A will be executed 3 seconds later this clip will end and a 15 seconds hold of the playback will start the complex event duration has begun 2 seconds later Event B will be executed Event C will be executed after 8 seconds 5 seconds before the end of the complex event The next clip in the playlist will start playing 5 seconds later the 15 second duration of the complex event has expired NOTE When the complex event duration is zero the included events offsets will be calculated in relation to the surrounding clips the AirBox playlist and playback will not be paused see the example below 138 AIRBOX Let us assume that that we have created the same comp lex e
300. in the object s graphics 274 TITLEBOX IV 5 4 Analog Clock Properties The Analog Clock properties dialog box looks like the one to the nght New button opens an empty clock property object Open button loads a previously created clock object clc Save button saves the current clock image into a file clc There are different pages for each clock layer BE SS gt Load Image J Enabled x Caneel Key Color O Fuchsia O ko SS M Loch P 0 M Loc Center Transparency 255 background clock plate hour minute and second hands as well as a preview page of the overall clock layout All pages have identical structure a settings area and a preview area Settings Load Image loads the relevant image for the background hour minute or second hands M O Enable enables prohibits displaying the relevant element W O Key Color key color for the image If the image does not have a mask you can select the key color M Lock position locks the X Y position of the image Transparency set the image transparency Preview area It is used for previewing the relevant clock element TIP To achieve most satisfactory result use a picture editing application to create four Square images with equal dimensions Save them in separate files one per each element of the clock background hour hand minute hand and
301. in the playlist delete add etc AirBo xRunningStatus AirBox running status play stop pause etc Operations The OperationSsection provides you a choice to select what AlarmBox will do in case the conditions are true If Copy to Out Plugins is pressed the message comming fromthe input Plugin will be sent to all the Plugins you have set in the Out PluginSsection When the Stop Message Processing is pressed the generated from the Input Plugin message won t be transferred to the selected Output Plugins in case the specified conditions are true Out Plugins here you have to select by which method you will send the notification message to the user if a rule is true Press Add button and select as many of the available Plugins as you want Example If you want to create a rule for receiving a mail whenever AirBox stops you have to make the following l 2 S 4 In Rules section press Add button and enter the name of the rule e g stop to create a new rule Select this new rule and press Modify button In Modify condition window press Add button to open a new condition window In Property field select AirBoxRunningStatus in Condition field select equalto and in Value field select stop Press ok and go back to the Modify rule condition window In Send to area press Add button Select SendMailPlugin 346 ALARMBOX Now you have a rule fAirBox stops sen
302. indow Select the Execution Period Hourly Daily or Weekly and Time for executing the event Press Add button a list of all available events will appear Select the needed event and define it as it is made in Addi Insert event dialog Ei Time Events Event Name Plugin Name Exec Period Exec Time Kramer Switcher P S Daily 13 1 2010 r 15 00 00 Kramer Switcher P 5 Daily 13 1 2010 r 18 00 00 Show Logo Preset 1 Daily 13 1 2010 r 19 00 00 gt lt Remove All Execution Period Days O Hourly Daily O weekly Time 13 30 28 Enable time events In the example above a Kramer switcher event will be executed each day at 15 00 h and at 18 00 h Also a Logo preset will be started each day at 19 00h If you want to edit an entry select it and press the Edit button If you want to remove the entry select it and press the Remove button 11 3 8 Log Choosing this item in the View menu will open a Log View window It is used to show the events that have occurred during the AirBox operation 68 AIRBOX TIP All windows can be freely resized and moved around the screen staying on top of other windows lt Ctrl gt click on a Timer window will change its appearance Check it out Right clicking on any timer window opens a dropdown menu Select Can Snap in it to lock the timer position to the main window 1 3 9 Plug in windows Select this itemto display the additional windows available with the curr
303. ine In Online mode Inputs and Outputs can be switched in real time just by pressing the desired n Out combination field in the grid In Command mode you have to insert the desired n Out configuration and add or insert it as event in the playlist GPI Output Inserts a line in the playlist to ll x activate the GPI Output A dialog box appears to define Output GPI 2 COM the output GPI commands You can have up to two commands on each COM port GPI 1 means DTR tone pulse on pin 4 and 5 GPI 2 means RTS tone pulse on pin 7 and 5 You can select the COM port from the available COM DI ER ports listed in the main window area To configure them x Cancel go to Settings gt Modules gt Remote Control tab Select the GPI Output and press the Configure button The time for execution of a GPI event is defined through the surrounding items in the playlist Therefore you could correlate an event offset using the end ofthe previous clip earlier execution or the beginning of the following one later execution Just fill the number of frames in the Run event field and choose earlier or later in the next field 46 Kramer Switcher Output Activates a Kramer Switch Output A dialog box appears to define the Kramer Switcher commands Machine select the number of the device connected to the COM port RS 232 Up to 8 devices can be connected Machine i tet Input 1 Run event 0 ail W earli
304. info later in the graphic rules functionality Check the Properties dialog description for details on Metadata description e Incomplete Clip Usually this clip is still being captured at the moment of playback You create such an ncomplete clip entry in the playlist and check Live delayed file At a given time you start capturing this clip to the specified location and once there are a few seconds of it available on the storage AirBox marks it as valid clip and it can be played immediately Thus capturing and playback proceed simultaneously If you want to predefine the file length despite its real length just check M Set out point of live item W ith this setting the file will be played to the exact time you had specified even if it is longer NOTE The TDIR option is hardware dependant See also Using TDIR option in the Capture Mode section below e Live Stream Live event could be either an UDP stream ora live video stream The live video stream comes from a video source defined in Live Input from Settings menu gt Output settings window Into Live stream info area select the Stream type fromthe available one set the Duration of the live stream connection and enter Category for the event this is a free text custom category not mandatory Add live stream UDP stream SO vd O Presets Live stream info Here you have to specify the relevant information about the stream Type v Category Duration 00 50 00 00 UD
305. ing IP SE ler D M S isable trimming while playing address and the Multi AirBox Manager SE Transmit actual file timecode AirBox E Transmit actual fie timecode IV Broadcast timecode over network transmits the actual file timecode embedded in the io file Thi d b d b 1 I Auto save playlist fo Z min clip file This timecode can be used by externa FZ Auto update duration of marked fles 1 2 applications such as Sub Title Plus 7 Restart playback after 24 Z hours www subtitleplus com Cuedely 0 1 Audiostreams N Broadcast timecode over network If this Default offset 0 2 Pretolleventtime 0 2 one is checked AirBox will broadcast the playlist eS ae time code the current clip timecode and the Wam relative timecode from the beginning of the Los playout session over the network via UDP e Auto save playlist saves the playlist es automatically at predefined intervals Auto update duration of marked files check it to enable automatic updating of clips duration in case of file change If not checked AirBox will remember the duration of the original file and if you change this file with a longer one it will be truncated After you have checked this box go to the playlist and highlight the files you would like to update you can use multi selection Right click and choose Auto update Thus all auto update files will be checked according to the set interval and their durations w
306. ing structure Tape ID and SEPARATOR and the fields length should be set to Variable In the clip s properties dialog fill in the same Tape D as of the subtitle file NOTE In order to use the potentialities of the Filename parser module you must set it first and then add files to the playlist THE MODULE CANNOT PARSE AN ALREADY LOADED PLA YLIST because it already contains all the metadata for the relevant clips included in it WARNING If in the newly loaded playlist there is any information in the fields that are also used by the Filename Parser preset this information will be overwritten 150 AIRBOX 1 4 14 Admin A brand new menu item the Admin aims at raising the security of AirBox The idea for pass word protection of some settings that might be crucial to playback performance is already a fact The first time you enter this menu item you will have to go to the Change pass word row Clicking in it will open a dialog box containing three cells Old pass word New password and Confirm password As this is the first time you enter this menu item leave zj R 7 nter passwor k the first cell empty then write your password twice e Old password in the second and in the third cell in case you are interested your password can contain up to 256 O symbols Click OK 7 WARNING Make sure not to forget the pass word Now you are already logged on To restrict the access of all other users to th
307. ings Send getstatus messages on every miksac 1000 Zem messages on every sec ep IL3 Message Destination Here are described the Output Plugins Le the methods for sending the messages to the Manage message destinations Us ers ok These methods are GM out n a No conc Server distribute Messages SendMaiPugn TT e O utp ut P l u g in th e intern al e messaging application GSM SMS E Mail SNMP Simple Network Management protocol Select the desired method of notification and make it Enable Than press the Setup button to make the needed settings for each method The setup window is different for each method You can select more than one method for notification Important To use Server distribute Messages Output Plugin you have to start MonitorMessage s exe which is available under AlarmBox installation folder 343 ALARMBOX I 3 Rules In the Rules section are defined all rules as per which the notification for the users is performing Press the Add button to add a new rule Enter the name of a rule into appearing box Then select this rule and press Modify button to specify the condition If you want to remove a rule press the Remove button If you want to rename a rule press the Rename button Each rule has a priority AlarmBox checks and executes the rules as per their priority The higher Mes is the priority of the rule the upper is it position in the list If you want to c
308. input Launch CaptureBox Select the media folder you wish to capture to Fill in the Tape Dor Channel field Type the file name you want to capture the content to Click the Manual Capture button When required stop the capturing by pressing the Abort button ao Se YS Congratulations You have just captured your first CaptureBo x clip 175 CAPTUREBOX 2 Capture Settings 2 1 DeckLink You can make the preferred capture GE x Capture Format IF Stream Config Burn Date Time settings for your DeckLink platform in ees z SE 1 1 S PAL DI MPEG Type Multiplex Type this dialog MPEG 1 e Program stream Beets po aay Ze MPEG 2 Transport stream In the first field you can choose the FAV Format Bittate yoe jp Video Bitrate Seier P Dy Constant Bitrat P Mb Video Standard here are listed the Uncompressed A eae Pel T324 sl kbps MPEG Variable most popular PAL NTSC and HD ae 4 a k ES Interleaved M Color Sampling Aspect Ratio r File Split standards Then set the file format it C Norintereaved 420 ieg Use Fie Spit can be MPEG or AVI Pee Format E Is Split Time fi E min JEEG SH B Use WSS 1 C Hono For A VI capturing you can define Gel Bette the AVI format DV or uncompressed 2 Cramer ell A f and the audio format interleaved or WI RE non interleaved Capture aud
309. io Output Format Bo ices flickering of the output image while in pause 2 Channels 48 kHz 16bi Z Cue delay 650 Ze mode i XM Cancel If you have purchased the multi audio option specify the Audio Output Format here The multiple audio channels will be embedded in the SDI output of the decoder Pressing the Decoder Setup button will invoke the Moonlight Elecard decoder setting dialog you do not have to change anything there unless advised by someone from our support team In the Logo tab you can set the logo fade in out duration in frames and thus to adjust the logo transition effect Fade In frames 1 Zei You can adjust the Aspect Ratio of the Fade Out frames 1 E output in the corresponding tab Please check the previous page for details X Cancel Aboutis a standard tab containing copyright and version information IMPORTANT The Play Box modules DO NOT support the Deck Control connector supplied on the DeckLink breakout cable 102 AIRBOX II A AG DeckLink Mixed Output While other plug ins are MPEG 2 only or DV only compliant the Mixed playout plug in allows mixing files of different compressions and frame rates in the same playlist The output settings for this plug in are separated in a few tabs The settings are situated in several tabs Video Audio Logo Advanced AUX source Live sources x gt Vi deo tab Video Audio Logo Advanced AUX Source dr Here you can
310. io only 7 Capture closed caption IV Preview X Cancel CaptureBox supports encoding to both MPEG 1 and MPEG 2 files So when you capture in MPEG format point whether it should be MPEG 1 or MPEG 2 e For MPEG 1 you can set the bitrate value e For MPEG 2 you set the bitrate type constant or variable the audio and video bitrate values the color sampling and the aspect ratio Determine the file structure by setting the GOP size and the reference period If you want to divide your file into parts check Use File Split and set the Split time in minutes If you have purchased the multi audio option use the Audio Channels drop down list below to specify the number of audio channels to be captured If you select Flip fields the fields of the captured material will be flipped M Use WSS use this boxto capture WSS information NOTE This check is not available when working with AVI DV or A VI Uncompressed type of video M Use IP streaming This box is active when capturing to MPEG 2 format A second tab appears in the settings dialog so you can setup the output stream Please check the next page for details NOTE Streaming is optional functionality not included in the standard CaptureBox M Burn Date Time check this box to burn the current system date and time in the produced files Please check the next page for details 176 CAPTUREBOX When capturing non interleaved audio the M Capture audio only check b
311. irst frame of the follo wing clip Wait event stops the playback temporary A dialog box appears to specify the type of waiting 43 AIRBOX Wait means that playback will stop and standby for a certain period hh mm ss For example 00 01 00 the playback will wait for 1 minute Wait Until means that playback will stop and automatically resume at a definite time hh mm ss For example 14 00 00 the playback will start at 14 00 00 o clock Wait TC Event stops the playback E automatically and resumes it at reaching the The program will start at OO 19 00 00 specified time code e g coming froman NOT RUNNING external timecode generator The message to the right will be displayed on the AirBox window and the Master counter will continue running See the LTC reader description in the Settings menu gt Timecode section further in this chapter Logo On Starts displaying the logo set in the E preceding Logo Preset event If there is no preceding C Loson Logo Preset event the first logo preset fromthe list in C Loge Off Settings Logo gt Logo Presets willbe SetPreset 1 2 E Activate now dis play ed Bun event fo ms later DI x Carce Logo On Stops displaying the logo Logo preset Sets a logo preset which will be displayed after initiating the Logo On event The preset number corresponds to its number in the preset list in Settings Logo gt Logo Presets If
312. irst one is dedicated to Video Renderer settings after Reset or Restart M Use overlay if no VMR should be checked if you re going to output TV signal through the VGA card Check Try to Use VMR9 for HD After Stop define the behavior of the plug in at AirBox Stop command in this field Direct Show related M Reconnect Video video pin will be reconnected at each stopping of AirBox M Only once the video pin will be reconnected only at the first Stop instead of after each stop command Belo w are situated three check boxes for additional settings of the software plug in M Use Default DSound Device if you have more than one audio devices and you do not want to output the sound coming from AirBox to all of them check this boxand it will be heard only on the default device M Use Video Resize check it to enable video resizing M Use Graphic Layer check it if you are going to insert graphics over the video The T V system drop down list contains all supported TV standards Select the one you use there All filters used in the application graph are listed in the Used Filters section Overlay Mixer Video Renderer Mapped Graphic Layer MPEG Audio Decoder Elecard MPEG Video Decoder MPFG Nemuiltiniever EI FieMuxer Logo Filter Config Quality Audio Renderer Advanced Quality DirectDr gt Number of buffers 4 Buffer Size 2 z KB 94 AIRBOX IMPORTANT Any changes to
313. is displayed in the Video File field To change PEPDREPDEFDEEEBE ERERET the file press the DrowSe button next to it To clear the field press the C button fi as LL 00 00 00 00 If there is an audio file WAV corresponding to the video file its name is automatically entered in the Audio File field The Tape In field shows where the tape recording will start You can fill the field in either by entering a timecode value or by pressing the black arrow button on the right Pressing the latter will enter the current timecode fromthe VTR If the tape is blank enter 00 00 00 00 in this field To preserve a record that already exists on the tape and to continue recording froma particular tape position enter the timecode of this position in the field and press the red arrow button The VTR will automatically rewind the tape to the corresponding position To enter a timecode value manually you could use either of the follo wing separators colon semi colon a period ora comma You do not need to enter the leading zeroes in any field For example typing 15 will automatically be translated to 00 15 00 00 Tape Out field shows where the tape recording will end The REC button starts simultaneously the file playback and VIR recording If the Tape In field is empty recording will start fromthe current VIR position The Play Stilland Stop buttons at the bottomare used for file playback control preview or start p
314. ist Template Builder Ses f Pick Folder Template test template E Load Save Pick SampleFile Validate Meta Data Close zl I Number of lines to skip o Comment x ClearSample Change Font Date format dd MM yyyy Time format HH mm ss Filter Delimited Fixed H Delimiter Tab METADATA _ House ID IN TimeCode OUT TimeCode V Duration 7 Start Time Start Time Duration Clear Column ategory Title File Name Start time Duration Clear All ategory Title Filename House ID 01 00 00 IN TimeCode Typo P P wl Category 22 00 00 Title Star OUT TimeCode Duration Start Time Type Category Title Star Notes File Name Tape ID List ID TC IN TC OUT Date Time BULK 33 20 00 00 01 00 00 Counter IBP 8Mbit D _test filesi M 21 00 00 01 00 00 Dante s Peak Tr D _test Files M For the Birds D L test Files M AIRBOX In the Template Field enter the template name Use the Sample File button to select an example of the text file that will be imported with this template In the Number of lines to be skipped cell enter the relevant figure for example 1 The skipped lines will be colored in red Comment fill in a symbol that might appear in the beginning of a row to be skipped from the playlist Delimiter how are separated the columns in the file to be imported tabs semi co lons etc Go to the upper
315. it is being captured check the Live delayed file check box If necessary specify the Duration of this live playback and then check the Set out point of live item box Most of the properties in this window will be displayed in the playlist grid If you save the playlist these values will be saved as well NOTE Clicking Previous OK or x Next will app ly all chang SS L t have General Fixed time Transition Metadata made to the current clip properties If you SE want to discard them please click Previous fixed time event duration N A C ance J V Use fixed start time 16 00 00 Day offset fo Zi Next fixed event NAA Custom tolerances J Custom overlap resolving Start earlier 10 Z sec C Skip currently running event The Fixed time tab allows setting an exact start time for the particular clip IMPORTANT If you do not choose any See ren zl of the Custom settings for the fixed time i ene event the Default settings will apply A detailed description of the default settings is available in the Fixed Time event Settings section further in the manual WARNING When using fixed time events the playlist should start and end within the same calendar day ie the playlist should not go beyond midnight Otherwise we cannot guarantee the proper operation of the fixed time logics Start later SS sec Te Truncate currently running event Sa rT e Previous X Cancel
316. ity It can be chosen R Es a Se from a list previously prepared in the Ee ss Qualities Manager from the Main Menu Main Determines whether the instance is the main one or not Only one program instance could be main instance If there is only one instance it will be named main by default The main instance is used in calculating the program duration displayed in the Grid and in New Record gt General When you have more than one instances the main one is transferred to AirBox via drag and dropping the clip Duration contains the Program duration If the instance consists of several parts their durations are cumulated Kill date The expiration date when the particular instance copy has to be deleted It appears if an Expiry period has been defined beforehand in Options gt Default Values You can change the Kill date later When the Kill date comes there are two possibilities definable in Options gt General deleting the instance without notification or notifying for expired instances and showing themin Expired node in the Tree View 221 DATABOX Notes Used for storing useful notes about the instance It is a text field limited to 255 symbols To add a new Instance right click in the left window and select New instance fromthe context menu To delete an Instance right click it and then click Delete x General Instances Classification Credits Additional Part It a
317. ixed time already inserted in the playlist If you try to enter a conflicting start time the Use fixed start time field will become red and pressing OK will invoke a warning dialog Conflict situations could also be caused by applying offset values to these items When using fixed time events in the playlist one can always come across some conflicts with the ordinary content i e without fixed start times There can be two major conflict types 1 the content to be played till the fixed start is more than the time allows for examp le there are 15 minutes of clips and only 10 minutes till the fixed time so there is overlapping and 2 there is not enough content to be shown till the fixed start let us say that there are 5 more minutes of clips in the playlist before the fixed time row and the fixed time itself will go on air after 15 minutes a gapis formed The follo wing two fields in this set up dialog are dedicated to automatic solving of such conflicts Default behavior when overlapping preceding events Again it is up to you to precise the rule for auto matic settling of this conflict Skip playing event and do an auto fill all preceding clips that cannot be played as a whole i e from the beginning to the end before the beginning of the fixed time clip will be skipped A gap will appear in the playlist as a result of this skipping This gap will be filled according to the auto fill rules set by you see
318. jects an n and Out transition toolbar is situated above the object specific toolbar It contains two drop down lists of transition effects and two spin boxes for the N and Out transition duration Select Cross Fade fromthe n drop down list and enter some figure in the spin box next to it Thus the sound volume will increase gradually according to the time set the more time the slower increase Select Cross Fade fromthe Out drop down list and enter a figure in the spin box to the right of it Thus the sound volume will decrease gradually at the end of the sound file WARNING Be careful when moving TitleBox projects containing sound files If the sound file is not available at the new location its file path is not the same as the one saved in the project the sound object will not be executed NOTE The sound objects are quite heavy Inserting more than three sound objects per project could slow down the rendering of TitleBox objects NOTE This object s sound will be output through the Default Audio Device set in Windows Control Panel gt Sounds and Audio Devices gt Audio tab 283 TITLEBOX IV 5 11 Digital Clock Properties The default Digital Clock object looks like the one to the right It displays the current system time You can change it by using the Time Offset spin box see the bottom of this page A text formatting toolbar appears at double clicking in the digital clock object F P FME Arial sllan s
319. k is distorted so badly that normal PLA Yand STOP commands cannot help use this button to reset the hardware decoder NOTE This button is not visible by default To show it go to Settings menu gt General gt Interface tab and un tick M Hide reset hardware button WARNING Pressing the Hardware rest button will interrupt the playback L Rss Control Buttons Most of these buttons actually duplicate the commands found in File menu and Edit menu All buttons provide hints Here is a description of the playlist control commands New playlist open ListBox Open existing playlist A Save play list Save playlist aS Save playlist aS Daily This button will be greyed out if you have not specified a daily playlist folder in Option menu gt StartUp zz Add clip at the end of the playlist Insert a clip above the currently selected line 2 Delete the currently selected clip from the playlist D Clear playlist remove all lines from the playlist SE Use these buttons to MOVE the currently selected clip s up before the previous clip or down after the next clip the playlist even during playback NOTE You cannot move a clip above the currently playing one ei Reset playlist position If the current playlist has been started and then stopped the already played clips are colored in grey and their order cannot be changed Moreover next time you hit the PLA Y button playback will start from the first black not pla
320. ke to output the sound through it The Logo tab contains two spin boxes for setting the fade effect on showing and hiding the logo off the screen The Aspect Ratio tab contains settings about x the output aspect ratio It provides the following Bo a aieat E Auto e Black Bars C 4x3 Auto this will preserve the original aspect of 8 16 9 the source file L 4 x 3 it will force 4 3 aspect to all source files Whe 4x3 is selected you can choose the Aspect Conversion Type how to process files that have e SE different aspect ratio at the nght Aone Letter Box if the source file has aspect 16 9 two horizontal black bars will be added above and under the video to fill up the remaining part of the screen The horizontal size of the video is preserved 14x9 small parts on the two sides of the video will be left out of the screen Two thinner black bars will appear on the top and in the bottom of the screen Zoom the vertical size of the picture will be preserved The video will be cut equally at its both sides 16 x 9 it will force 16 9 aspect to all source files You can specify the way to process files with different aspect ratio in the Aspect Conversion Type field to the right Black Bars if the source file has 4 3 aspect two vertical black bars will be added on both sides of the video to fill up the remain ing part of the screen The vertical size of the video is preserved 9 1489
321. ker is colored green and by default it is at the beginning of the clip OUT button marks the Out point for end of playback in AirBox The OUT point marker is colored red and by default it is at the end of the clip You can set an n Out point by dragging the IN OUT marker on the trim bar or by entering timecode directly into the IN OUT box The IN OUT markers show the frame before after i e if the marker is on the Out point you actually see the next frame but not the last frame of the trimmed part Play button P starts playing the clip Then it transforms to pause resume If you want to play only the trimmed part i e between the NVand OUT points press lt Shift gt Play Stop button Q stops the playback and rewinds the clip to its beginning Pause 7 Resume P button It stops and resumes the clip playback from the same timecode position Button WM skips one frame forward i Button reverts to one frame backward Button fast forward if it is possible Button ep rewind if possible Button moves to the next mark point in out bookmark Button TT moves to the previous mark point in out bookmark 319 trim bar Delete Zone button deletes the selected zone point Open button will load a clip in the Trimmer window Export button ge trimmed clip as a file If you have divided the clip into several sections they will appear in the Export list as differ
322. kes a dialog box for Sta zl choosing a field Insert separator inserts a separator The Default separator is hyphen Delete field deletes the selected field 229 DATABOX To change a House ID field double click on it A list of possible fields a text containing field from entry s description a separator or a number will appear o Choosing a text containing field opens the following property window Field type shows the field name Crop at check it M if you want to use DIE only a part of the field s content in the House fiedype Tye SG Crop at 4 2 symbols ID number Define the number of symbols H Padto E 2 symbols to be included For example Field type Title crop at 3 means that only the first three symbols from the field Title will be included in the House ID number Pad to check it if you want to fill the missing symbols from field s content with a specific symbol This option is applied when the number of symbols in the text field is less than the number in the Crop at box For example if you define Crop at 4 symbols but the concrete entry s field contains only 3 symbols it is one symbol short The missing symbol could be filled up with a specific symbol or left empty depending on the M O status of the Pad to box The padding symbol is the same for all fields and is defined in Option s gt HouselD gt Text padding symbol o Choosing a_number containing _ field
323. king M Skip this action if there is an empty field TIP To enable disable a Graphic rule or an entire Rules group select it and press the Enable disable button If you want to disable the use of all graphic rules just un check O Use graphic rules for current AirBox in the top of the Graphic rules window TIP You can rename a group or a rule by clicking in it while it is selected To move rules fromone group to another just drag n drop them If you need to assign some events to be executed instead of the above actions you can do that in the External eventstab Like in other set up dialogs you can choose the event type after pressing the New event button The event settings dialog varies according to the event type you choose Please check the events descriptions in the Edit menu section above NOTE the list of available events will contain only the plug ins that have been enabled in Settings menu gt Modules gt Remote Please note that by default all events will be executed simultaneously If you want to execute some of them later please specify the required positive offsets NOTE Negative offsets will not be executed ees EE make sure not to overlap WERT later offsets with other clips graphics rules Actions External events w OK X Cancel 147 AIRBOX 11 4 13 Filename Parser This module will allow AirBox EI to Parse names of files and get IT Use File name parser information fromth
324. king on it and selecting the Show item from the pop up menu 207 will invoke the following window RE Watching Be Watching C Program Files Digital Media Technologies Ltd The tray icon becomes a thermometer when FinishBox LE is processing The Throttle slider is used for accelerating slowing the multiplexing process Note that mu Itiple xing is quite CPU intense so it could slowdown other applications running on the machine the higher the multiple xing speed the higher CPU capacity needed While in Folder Watch mode you will not be able to see the Standard interface window When starting FinishBox LE it will appear in the last used mode 208 DATABOX I GETTING STARTED DataBox is an SQL based database for media amp content management Content is classified using many indices such as type category genres keywords credits media etc The Other PlayBox modules AirBox and ListBox obtain information about the visual content from DataBox NOTE The following chapter contains description of the full DataBox version Please note that some of these functionalities are not available in DataBox LE and in DataBox Reader In DataBox LE you can have up to 5 000 records a single instance stream part amp media per record no Advanced Boolean Search engine no Sequence description no grouping amp lin king no advanced credits no Additional info description rating trivia etc In DataB
325. l Failure actions There are two possibilities to backup your AirBox in case an unrecoverable failure of the Master AirBox occurs the master AirBox server is down fora long period faulty motherboard CPU RAM etc 1 When there are two fully functional AirBoxes on both machines plus one AirBox backup license on your Slave machine In this scenario you just have to uncheck the Mirror mode on the Slave machine and continue working with the full AirBox functionality 2 When there is one fully functional AirBox installed on the Master machine and one AirBox backup with limited functionality on the Slave machine In this scenario you will have to attach the full AirBox dongle to the Slave AirBox server and use the Change Dongles menu command in order to operate the full functionality on the Slave machine Obviously the master machine does not need a dongle while faulty NOTE When AirBox backup is a stand alone license AirBox will start in Mirror Mode automatically No full functionality available To set the Master start AirBox and check M EF Enable IP remote control in Settings gt Enter remote machine name and instance General gt General Otherwise the Slave 192 168 10 73 1 machine will not be able to connect to the Master geen GE a lu ramer Matrix Switcher Qutput v To set the Slave go to Tools Mirror ge Ze secute external event on slave deactivation Mode gt Configure and do th
326. l AirBox what the different columns of the imported file Save to Folder pow Playlists start time 16 00 00 a contain The dialog to the right appears e at selecting this menu item The OK 32 AIRBOX button will not be active until you fill in all the strings The Tab delimited importer operates using playlist structure templates previously created by you Use the browse button to the right of the Templates folder string to specify the location for saving your templates The Template preset drop down list contains all templates saved in this folder When opening it for the first time there will be no templates to load You will have to create them first see next page The Start time tolerance spin box is designated for use when the playlist to import contains fixed start time entries It means that if there are some conflicting start times that are out of the allowable tolerance no fixed Start time events will be created during the playlist import This value is valid both for earlier and later start tolerances Le if you enter 10 seconds here it will mean 10 seconds In the Action drop down list choose whether to load insert or append playlist If you check the M Save daily playlists box the dialog will become extended for specifying a folder and Playlists start time Push the More button to create modify your playlist template The following dialog opens Et Playl
327. l B Z U Center le Gal G fcene F Use it to edit its common text attributes such as font size color blur shadow etc and background attributes This toolbar has already been described in the Text template properties section above More options will become available via an additional toolbar which appears beneath the standard ones If you do not see it just click on the Digital clock object and it will appear o a FE al B E Mi LongDate v Initial Jam i Stop oo 00 0 k re Cloc 15 0249 zl Re Time Offset 00 00 00 0 Mask MEE You can select among four modes for the Digital clock to run it as a clock or a counter or to display Long or Short Date While in clock mode it runs as an ordinary digital clock You can choose the time format F through the 12 24 hours clock button Li The twelve hour time format is active when the button is pressed and the twenty four hours format when it is not pressed The background color is changeable through the Palettes anal button Select a mask for the clock in the Mask box Update the mask using the green arrows button If you have changed the mask you will have to press this button to show it on the display In the counter mode some additional options are available select the type of your counter Countdown or Re gular through the D button If pushed the counter will count froman Initial time to a Stop time if Stop checked
328. l be prompted to make the final touches of this event e Bookmark this is a special virtual item that can be used er as a target point for incoming triggers GPI input or DTMF oa input or alone It will cause AirBox Jump to the follo wing man item in the playlist according to several additional conditions To fess as described below K See eee The bookmark properties dialog contains a Name string and a Ss Time zone area When inserting bookmarks you must enter a Name and optionally a Time zone depending on your needs The time zone represents a validity period of the relevant bookmark It can act as a target for GPI or DTMF input when Jump to bookmark in time range is selected as a command in the relevant setup dialog When M Force jump on time is checked the bookmark will act as a fixed time event and AirBox will jump to it when its time is through This can happen in two cases if the expected trigger does not arrive until the time specified in the To string or when you are using bookmarks alone in the playlist For example a jump operation will be executed to the bookmark in the screenshot at 16 36 32 o clock if the expected trigger has not arrived by that time WARNING Please note that the To string will force AirBox to jump and execute the following items in the playlist This might interrupt the playback order so be careful when checking M Force jump on time in bookmarks There are several possible
329. l filenames of the currently loaded playlist This is a possible way to name music files create a preset let us call it Music Push the Plus button situated to the right of the Active file parser preset Field ISI A dialog will prompt you to name the new preset You can rename it later on by pushing the Recycle button or delete it by pushing the Minus button xi Once you have entered the preset name you can Enter name start explaining the naming rules Let us go Med back to the sample filename you can see that _ Cancel its structure contains in order of appearance an abbreviation BG a category name Music a separator a name of a performer star Lime_Biscuit another separator a title The_road_to_heaven one more separator and a note live follo wed of course by the file format This is what you have to tell AirBox Here is how 148 AIRBOX In the Metadata options area use the Plus and Minus buttons to add remove parser fields You can select from the available types of fields In our example you have to enter one by one Note it will stand for the abbreviation BG Category SEPARATOR Star SEPARATOR Title SEPARATOR and Note If you want to skip some information in the filename select NONE in the relevant position Do not forget to set which symbols are cy Category Star Tot Note TapeID regarded as separators check the relevant boxes in the lower left Sep
330. layback to tape when there is no VTR remote control 192 CAPTUREBOX The Compensation button invokes the Capturing Delay Compensation dialog box Usually there is some delay between a command start or stop and its actual execution It depends on both the platform and the system configuration Besides different file types can cause different delays These settings should be determined after the Trial And Error method and are expressed in frames The Setup button invokes different setting windows for the different devices e In the DeckLink settings dialog you can select the SE Video standard as well as whether to Flip image eae and or Fields Pressing the Decoder Setup button Sec invokes a dialog for specifying the recording quality by GC Flip Fields setting the Decoding resolution full half quarter or DC PAL NTSC formats Decoder Setup A Cancel 193 CAPTUREBOX I 3 Schedule When the Schedule page is active the module is in schedule mode In this mode you can define a capturing schedule and start capturing later The captureBox 08122004 Ist Not For Resale R D Sj xi File View Capture Help Capture Printto Tape Schedule Type Channel Date Start End Mode Ti Folder C Program Fies Digital Media T Ss 18 00 00 20 00 00 MA Moovies_002 Free disk space 8712 MB 3 Mar 2005 Thurs 13 00 00 13 30 00 VA Afternoon news pr 2005 Frida 08 00 00 03 00 00 VA Good_Morni
331. layout you were to load a new project It was like having a single sheet of paper per project With the Slide Manager your project turns into a sketchpad allowing you to organize your projects in a multi slide layout Each sheet of this pad is called Slide below In each Slide you can have numerous groups of objects called Layers Finally in each Layer you can have as many objects as your systemcan handle You can control your slides layers objects manually or playout the slides consecutively or simultaneously using the Slide Controller The Slide Manager is locked to the right of the work area You can open and close it using the Slide Manager button situated in the lower right comer of the TitleBox interface You can also drag it out of the main TitleBox window VI Slide control buttons These buttons 2 3 are situated in the lower right corner of the Title Box interface They provide simp le slide control options The numbers in the middle represent information about the currently selected slide e slide 2 of 3 in the screen shot above The main Slide Manager window consists of three logical parts control buttons above slides thumbnails and project structure in the predominant part in the middle this part is further divided into three tabs and properties area where you can find detailed description of the currently selected element in the list above V 2 Project control buttons si ri You can add insert and
332. lder Settings Watch Folder Ei Refresh Time jis E Sec Jh Add Only Clilps With Audio V Process Subfolders IT Truncate Long IDs to o SS chars IT Only clips longer than e a secs X Cancel usually support clip names of 8 standard short IDs or 32 long IDs chars This function is used for controllers that support limited length of long IDs so you have to truncate them Some controllers get confused by short duration clips therefore you might need the M Only clips longer than sec function Watch Folder General M Frame Rate Pesveneeseneney 29 97 fps C 30 fps Video Outputs Off IT Composite S Video Eo IV DI xi The General page contains some additional settings The set Frame Rate will determine the TC frame rate The Video Outputs field contains a list of all possible outputs Check the available ones AIRBOX The Log button will show the log of the VDCP communication M Log Ret will log the responses to the VDCP commands M Freq mess If not checked will filter out some frequent VDCP messages f xi The View Players button will show E all active AirBox controller windows Each Hulglsl E Machine AirBox controller window caption contains EE H the AirBox number 1 to 127 In it you can BREA A eR see the communication log of the relevant EE ee AirBox The Execute button the text field next to it and the playback control but
333. le unless you close TitleBox You can just change it This feature is still under development 1 5 Status Bar The status bar displays information about the currently selected driver and the X Y position of the pointer in the work area RE EE 256 TITLEBOX lll MENU BAR IL File Menu meles Object ze This menu contains commands related to the project s file L New New allows creating a new project 3 seg _ Open opens an existing project tbd 5 Merge Reopen shows a list of the ten recently open projects ss mes NOTE If you reopen a file while working on another project the latter will SS we be closed without preserving any unsaved changes Merge merges the current project with another one NOTE Global layer links might not operate properly because the Master container of the second project will appear as a simple slide in the merged project You will have to drag its layers to the merged Master Container and set the layer links again Save saves the current project to the open file tbd Save as saves the current project to a specified file tbd II 2 Edit Menu Edt Object Project Hep The Edit menu contains object related commands I undo mi Undo undoes Move Size and Create Please note that there is no d Cut Cie pj coy ane undo for deleting objects Cut removes the selected object s and keeps them in the buffer Cy Paste Chr K De
334. lease do not change anything there The Scale and Output tabs are described in the Soft MPEG2 plug in description above gt In the Logo tab there are several settings related to the logo and subtitle insertion in the output In the General filed above you can enable using logo and subtitles When both logo and subtitles are enabled a third check bo x becomes active Check M Logo on top to make sure the logo will not stay beneath the 109 General Logo About ST E EI J Use subtitles JV Use logo J Logo ontop Fade Fade in frames fi SS Fade out frames fi x Cancel AIRBOX subtitles in case they overlap Belo w you can set the number of frames for the logo fade effect IMPORTANT There will be no fade for the logo when using both subtitles and logo 11 4 4 9 Deltacast ASI MPTS Output This plug in uses Multi xi Program Transport Stream oard 1 Channel 1 StreamMaster SDK v4 01 source files and outputs them Se Delta ASI driver v4 01 in ASI interface without any OOUE SCR E alteration In the dialog to the Active right you have to specify a Channel in case there is more than one board and or channels on the machine The Output Bitrate spin boxis designed for indication of the output bit rate It is automatically defined fromthe source file and it is not editable WARNING If the source files are with different bitrates the point of swi
335. log window 74 AIRBOX Show warning window if there is a missing clip or stream checking this box will ensure that a warning dialog will pop up to prompt the operator that there is a missing clip stream in the playlist Check Missing Files every sec When you prepare your playlist you can add to it files that are not available at the online storage yet They appear in AirBox as red colored lines Check this box to let AirBox auto check whether the missing files are already available or not Audio alarm if missing file exists every sec use this option to enable audio alarm if there are missing files in the playlist Thus you will be alerted if there are missing files or if you accidentally delete a clip related to the current playlist NOTE The alarm is output on the PC speaker Auto fill missing files and live streams AirBox will look for the auto fill category according to your preferences Use category of the clip AirBox will use the auto fill category as specified in the missing file s properties In case there is no such category the default auto fill clip will be played out Custom category here you can choose among your own categories prepared in advance in Settings menu gt Auto fill dialog The Skip Zonestab is related to incoming external triggers such as GPI input DTMF tones or LTC input Settings E xi In it you can list the time zones to disable General Interface Missing
336. lready passed The color of the progress bar and of the numbers can be set from Settings gt Colors gt Timers 11 3 4 Timecode Timer The timecode timer displays the timecode received from the LTC Reader plug in if available The incoming LTC should be connected to the sound card of the playout server 1 3 5 Daily playlist viewer The Daily Viewer is a tool that will help you in managing your daily playlists In the area above you can view all daily playlists The number in the brackets in front of the start time represents the number n eewer of days remaining till the Ss Greter SC start For example if there is a two in the brackets and then 12 00 00 this means that the playlist will start in two days twelve hours When you click once in a daily playlist row its items will be displayed in the grid below Double click in a daily playlist line will load it immediately Please note that this will interrupt the playback MPEG2 48 kHz MPEG 48 kHz WARNING Starting a daily play list before its scheduled start time while in Daily playlist mode Settings gt StartUp gt M Auto load daily playlist may cause playback jams at the time when a daily playlist should start according to the schedule AirBox will load it and start playing it from the beginning again 66 AIRBOX 11 3 6 ShotBox x A d nd 1 Resize Up Left Selecting this View menu item will show hide an additional window with butt
337. lte Pel memory Gasen n_ Copy saves a copy of the selected object in the buffer me mory Paste pastes the buffer content into the project Delete deletes the selected object Select All selects all objects in the preview area IL 3 Network Menu This menu concerns the connection between AirBox and ee TitleBox It is a feature of the full version only it is not E Eross available in the light TitleBox version Ee For detailed step by step guide how to integrate TitleBox with AirBox look up in APPENDIX 4 Integration of AirBox with Title Box PLBOX_CMD Export Project as Template exports the currently CHANNEL 1D 1 PROJECT START open project as a template It will be saved in the speciafied Temp late folder You have to specify this folder during TitleBox Net Control activation see Appendix 4 for details IMPORTANT The project must be exported as a template so that it could be controlled through AirBox Net control shows the connection status between AirBox and TitleBox IMPORTANT The Net control function must be started to perform the network control 257 TITLEBOX 1 4 Object Menu This menu contains object related commands Play shows and runs the selected object on the graphics frame buffer Pause freezes the object but it remains displayed on the graphics Object Project Help P Play i Pause TI frame buffer a Add To Schedule
338. lude Packet iting RE e sl ieee MPEG2 TS or PS in CaptureBox Last Seen Outputs CaptureBox will capture the stream TEE x to an MPEG2 file without de ne E mu Itiplexing it i e if you have a TS lke 2 input the resulting file will also be 0011 0020 MPEG2 Transport Stream On a PMT pressing the Setup button under spe Si the batch capturing grid the Be S following dialog will open for you Jv Usa series to adjust the ASI capture plug in Pee In the middle of this dialog you can EON e SI find a list of all Programs and e ER io Streams that were present in the Eire incoming stream at the time of S pressing the SetUpbutton eee To the right of it there are several buttons that are activated depending on the selected Filtering method You can choose it in the area above Split Time jeo seconds f Splitting Settings 181 CAPTUREBOX None there will be no filtering CaptureBox will capture the incoming stream as is Remove Null Packets as some interfaces need constant bitrates to operate properly Null packets are included to stuff up the gap between the real bit rate and the required bit rate These packets do not carry any information and can be removed in order to reduce the bit rate of the captured files thus saving storage space Simple Include Packet Filtering Check this radio button and select which streams to be included in the Output Use the Add button to add the current
339. ly selected line in the left to the Outputs list in be right Use the Add Custom button to type manually the PID you would like to add to the Outputs list Si If you want to remove an already added stream select it in the Outputs list and press the Delete button Simple Exclude Packet Filtering Check it and select the PIDs you do not want to include in the Output file stream Use the Add Add Custom button to create a list of PIDs to be excluded from the output Ai Programs Reordering in this mode you can create several outputs by pressing the Create Output button Then you can assign the programs to go to each output Press the Create output button as many times as necessary Then select the output in the list to the right and click on the program line to the left Press Add to assign it to the relevant output Then check M Use IP streaming if you want to send the selected output to the network or leave it unchecked if you only want to capture the stream to an MPEG2 Transport Stream file When there is more than one output the endings of the resulting files names will indicate the number of the output zero based Check M Use IP streaming to send the incoming signal to the network In the IP streaming settings area specify the Host IP address and the Port to which you would like to send the stream Check Multicast if you need to send the stream to numerous machines In the TTL spin box specify the number of switcher
340. m 1 eS 6 Quick Start Launch ListBox Right click in the grid Select Add gt Media file Browse for the files you want to insert in the playlist and click the Open button Go to File menu gt Save playlist as and browse for the location to save your playlist to Type some name for the playlist and press Save Congratulations You have just created your first PlayBox playlist 243 ll USER INTERFACE II 1 Toolbar BS 2IHABIZEfEO SF7 O82 F2 9 The Toolbar has a set of buttons that provide access to the most commonly used playlist functions All commands fromthe Toolbar can also be found in the Menu Bar Some particular buttons on the Toolbar will appear enabled or disabled depending on the selection made The toolbar contains the following command buttons New Open Save Save as Save as daily Append Element Insert Element Delete Selection Clear Playlist Move Up Move Down Reset playlist Randomize Properties Trim and Undo Their functions are described below in the relevant menu sections I 2 Playlist Grid This area is dedicated to playlist visualization It looks the same as the AirBox Playlist Grid but the grid headers are coloured so you can easily distinguish between AirBox and ListBox The order of grid columns can be changed by drag n dropping them to the left or to the right You can control the columns to appear and their order in the grid from Settings menu gt General gt Grid
341. m logs is 14 days see above 127 AIRBOX lll 4 7 StartUp Here you can find useful options for setting the AirBox behavior on module start up StartUp Playlist various Playback recovery options how playlists will be reloaded and two system options In the top of the StartUp window you can choose between two system options Launch AirBox on Windows Start delay sec you could need some delay as the system might take some time to initialize the installed decoder If AirBox starts before that it will not be able to perform normally as the decoder will be missing Increase the delay to ensure that AirBox will not start before the hardware initialization Start minimized StartUp playlist In this section you can choose a playlist to be loaded at AirBox start up New loads a blank playlist StartUp Options l E x AirBox startup JV Launch Airbox on Windows start delay fis SS sec J Start minimized StartUp Playlist New Ze Last used E Auto start playback aft Open dialog er plavlist loading Daily playlist folder Playback recovery options IT Last playback status Play Pause Stop J Last played item from the last playlist I Last played position in the last played item J Catch up with schedule according ta system clock w Save last positioninteryal 410 zj seconds Reload playlist IV Reload playlist on file change IT Reload
342. m via selected sup plugin 8 eee Select the DTMF Output Plug in row and press the Configure button The dialog to the right will appear Go to the Sub Pluginstab first to select the output audio device Press Toggle button to activate it Currently there are two options DTMF Output Sound Device and DTMF Output Virtual Driver Toggle DTMF Output Sound Device DTMF Output Virtual Driver lt Sound device when you x activate this plug in the DTMF tone is sent ee ern El ee el S H 18 g R Frequency Hz DI Symbol Length ms s0 to a device defined into the plugin Bits per Sample IS 7 Pause Length ms 50 configuration Select the plug in and press Mono channels 2 Spec Symb Len ms 50 the Setup button the configuration window caries a E will open M Device Select J e efault DirectSound Device e In Output settings area you can define SE the parameters of the DTMF tone Frequency Bits per sample number of Mono Channels and Channel Mask Depending on the channel Mask the DTMF tone is sent to a specific audio channel It Channel Mask is zero 0 the DTMF is not sent If it is one 1 DTMF is sent to the 1 mono channel If it is two 2 DTMF is sent to the 2 mono channel Into DTMF setting you can define Length of the standard Symbol in DTMF sequence numbers from 0 to 9 and letters A B C D Pause Length lenth of the pause between symbols Speciffic symbols length Spe
343. mClosePort 2021 e e cmSelectPort 2022 e A cmRecordInit 2023 e e A cmPlayCue 2024 O V cmCueWithData 2025 V cmDeletelD 2026 e cmGetFromArchive 2027 cmClear 2029 cmSendT oArchive 202A cmPercT oSignal Full 202B cmRecordinitWithData 202C cmSelectLogicalDrive 202D e cmSystemDeleteID 202E e cmPreset 2030 cmVidComprRate 2031 cmAudSampleRate 2032 cmAudComprRate 2033 cmAudiolnLevel 2034 cmAudioOutLevel 2035 cmVidComprParam 2037 cmSelectOutput 2038 cmSelectInput 2039 cmRecordMode 203A 332 PLAQBOX Command Code Req Port Implemented cmSCAdjust 2041 cmHPosAdjust 2042 e cmDiskPreroll 2043 cmCopyFileTo 2050 cmDeletefFileFrom 2051 cmAbortCopyFileT o 2052 e Sense Request cmOpenPort 3001 cmNext 3002 V cmLast 3003 cmPortStatusRequest 3005 cmPositionRequest 3006 cmActivelDRequest 3007 V cmDeviceT yoeRequest 3008 cmSystStatusReque st 3010 e A cmIDList 3011 e V cmIDSize Request 3014 V cm IDsAddedT oArch 3015 cm IDRequest 3016 e V cmComprSettRequest 3017 cm DsAddedList 3018 e V cm IDsDeletedList 3019 O V cmMultiPortStatusReq 3025 Macro cmAbortMacroNum 5060 cmActiveMacroList 5061 cmMacroStatus 5062 cmCopyFile ToMacro 5063 cmGetFromArchiveMacro 5064 cmSendT oArchiveMacro 5065 cmPreparelDT oPlay 5066 cmCloselDFromPlay 5067 Key Imple mented v Imple mented Long ID also VAR commands 353 PLAQBOX APPENDI
344. machine where the Switcher server is Below enter the Port you will use to connect the switcher NetSender Output a plug in that allows you to sent any text message via UDP The parameters of this plug in are set during event insertion Please check the relevant Edit menu Add section for further details Ocelot Switcher Output x Another make of switchers supported by AirBox are the EE Ocelot switchers The only thing you can set in their configuration window is the COM port used for BER x Cancel connecting to the switcher You will find the available o COM ports in the drop down list IMPORTANT The Play Box modules DO NOT support the Deck Control connector supplied on the DeckLink breakout cable x TitleBox Net Control output T a Dtme This function allows managing the Title Box E EE 2 objects from AirBox This is done by TB Server 255 255 255 255 567 8 inserting external events TitleBox ees i S 13 Aa AS Ab NetControl Output events in the playlist ee Press the Configure button to Unselect Al configure further the TitleBox control You Jee can set the connection port for this UDP X Cancel communication it is set to 8012 by default If in your network there is more than one TitleBox controlled through AirBox set the TitleBox channel to which AirBox commands should refer If you check Broadcast the commands will be sent throughout the entire network If unchecked the commands will be sent onl
345. mark s properties and the tone arrives within the time range AirBox will jump to this bookmark trigger arrives outside the time range AirBox will ignore the command Thus you can have more than one bookmark in the playlist that is assigned for the same time range b If there is no Time range specified in the bookmark s properties AirBox will jump to that bookmark unconditionally at receiving the trigger tone Please check the Bookmarks description in the Edit menu section above for more details Offset use this spin box to postpone the execution of the specified command The value here is in milliseconds NOTE This string can contain only positive values WARNING All DTMF sequences strings must be the same length Otherwise make sure that longer sequences do not comprise some of the shorter sequences Otherwise we cannot guarantee the correct execution of the assigned commands 82 AIRBOX TIP t You can save your DTMF commands settings in a file Thus you can load them on other servers without having to configure the same settings numerous times To save the settings press the RI Save button To load themon another server copy the settings file dts to it Then open Settings gt Modules gt Remote gt DTMF Plug ins configuration and press the 2 Load settings button Browse for the dts file and click Open DTMF Output Plug ins These plug ins generate the DTMF tones and EE send the
346. minutes gap will be filled with the M Custom auto fill category see below Truncate currently running event AirBox will playout as many clips before the fixed time event as possible The currently playing clip will be truncated when the fixed time comes In the second situation when there is a gap in the playlist either because the content is not enough or you have selected to skip the currently running events you will need a M Custom auto fill category This drop down list contains all auto fill categories previously prepared by you and a Default Clip entry Check the Auto fill settings section to learn how to create these categories In case you can accept some deviation of the fixed time check the relevant Custom tolerances boxand describe it Thus you can ease the complex operations when it comes to a few seconds differences M Everyday fixed time is needed in case you loop your playlists If you leave this check box empty the fixed time will be executed only during the first loop NOTE Please note that you cannot use simultaneously Day offsets and Everyday fixed time WARNING DO NOT use fixed time events within a bookmark s time range 60 The Transition tab accommodates settings related to transitions between clips in the playlist The transition settings are applied to the beginning of the currently selected clip Check M Set transition to enable the transition Specify the transition Duration in frames i
347. most cell of each column click once in it and tell the Template Builder what does it contain select from the drop down list Use BULK for the fields to be skipped such as duration etc to comply with the AirBox playlist structure When you re ready press Save Pick press it to use the current template for the file you are going to import If you already have some templates and you select one of them from the drop down list push the Load button to load it its settings will be displayed in the grid Validation press it if you d like to be sure that your template is compatible with the file you re going to import a browse dialog will open for you to pint to that file If you need to use another sample file push the Clear Sample button and then load the new sample If you do not clear the old sample first the new file will be appended to the end of the old one The third uppermost row of this dialog is dedicated to the daily playlists There you can see the date and time format for such lists represented In case you have to import playlists longer than 12 hours use the Filter button to split them Pressing it the following dialog opens RW Filter Editor In it you can indicate Logical operator Column Operator Value Steg values of the clip OR v Start Time kl gt v 12 00 00 which will be used as a en dd MM yyyy split point for example w 11 we Remove House ID In and Out TC Catego
348. mum length of any Group Of Pictures Larger numbers frequently provide better compression Smaller numbers provide better error recovery and better access to the frames for editing Max B frames count the maximu m nu mber of B frames in a GOP Some decoding situations such as video conferencing may require no B frames for providing low communication delay Scene change detection enables disables the scene change detection In the lower right comer of the Statistics filed is situated the M Overall PSNR check box It enables disables wae the Peak Signal to leas ise Ratio This requires some CPU resources x Settings oul so check it only if you need this statistics SE al EE l D pa a e La Complexity Pressing the Audio Encoder me ve HEAACM e HE AAC v2 Setting button will open the SE MainConcept s AAC Encoder properties C MPEG 2 C Raw dialog MPEG 4 Ze ADTS The Bitrate Control specifies the Hoh tena ta ee average output audio bitrate the Profile sets the object type and the Header type sets the output bit stream format raw or with ADTS headers Check M High frequency cut off to reduce the encoded data Cancel Pressing the Audio Encoder Settings button will open the MainConcept s audio codec properties dialog Pressing the Multiplexer Settings button will open the MainConcept Multiplexer properties dialog You can view the parameters of the output MPEG
349. n audio object When you select EAS dataprovider froma list of dataproviders the following setup win IP Access Filter Service Settings Service listening port Do not show test events Service Access Username playbox Service Access Password easplaybox Advanced Default data port PASV Bound Port Min PASY Bound Port Max External Server IP For PASY mode transfers l x Service is not running amp Close Here you have to enter the IP address of the EAS unit as well as some advanced details of the connection If there is connection username and password defined you have to enter themalso 315 TITLEBOX When you are ready press the Play button to start the service Note It is very important to set the proper time zone to the system and the system clock to be accurate in order the service to work correctly Important TitleBox works with decoders produced of Digital Alert Systems LLC with FCC ID R8VDASDEC 1EN 316 CLIP TRIMMER The Clip Trimmer is used for previewing and trimming clips in ListBox DataBox and AirBox modules You can preview clips even during the on air playback in AirBox NOTE MPEG trimming is GOP accurate IN points can be positioned only on I frames while OUT points can be positioned on I or P frames Depending on the stream s GOP size this may lead to a slight inaccuracy limited to half a GOP for the N points and a couple
350. n box you can specify the size of the IP packets to be sent along the network This size should be multiple of 188 bytes which is the size of an MPEG 2 TS packet We recommend 1316 bytes buffer size which willcomply with the standard network MTU Port define which communication port will be used for the streaming By default itis 1234 Interface if there are more than one network cards in the PC specify which one should be used for the streaming in this string If you leave it empty AirBox will stream through all available interfaces Multicast check it to stream to all PCs in the network When the 7S Mux Rate spin box becomes active you could select M Automatic of fixthe Mux rate manually Audio Bit Rate is adjustable for both stream types It is 192kbit s Protocol you can choose between UDP and RTP M Flip fields if for some reason the fields order of your content is wrong check this dialog to rectify the output w OK X Cancel IMPORTANT The fields ofall clips will be flipped so do not mix files with different field order in the same playlist 108 AIRBOX Pressing the Encoder Settings button will open the setup dialog of the MainConcept MPEG 2 Video Encoder It consists of three tabs About Main Settings and Advanced Setting The Main Settings page contains basic stream settings In the MPEG Type drop down list are listed all MPEG video compression types available in the Main Concept encoder T
351. n check your current system date settings and change themat your will IV 5 12 Flash objects Xe a H j e R S ACO 7 Flash objects similar to sound objects are actually links to flash fm reine we i files To create a flash object press the flash button in the Object palette and draw a rectangle Two windows will open Bees as soon as you release the mouse button a standard browse dialog to locate the flash file and an interactive properties window The name of the Flash object is displayed in the caption of the properties window When a flash object is selected in the work area the following toolbar appears underneath the standard Title Bo x toolbars hE Showa High JE UseKeyColor I Background Corect Aspect Ratio flecht It provides the following options Press the Pointer button to show your mouse pointer on the output Thus the operator s actions will be shown on the monitor Use the Invert button to change the color of the pointer that is displayed on the output Select the way your flash should display from the first drop down list to the left It contains all standard flash settings The first drop down list contains options for image scaling select it according to your needs and the system capabilities of your PC Use the second drop down list to set the quality of your flash image Practically this is an anti aliasing setting of the flash object You could select a col
352. n of the tape frames per second If you would like to play a tape from one point to another check M Play from TC and Play to TC and specify the initial and the final timecode In this case you will have to specify the maximum Rewind time in milliseconds x VTR VTR 1 y Command Play X M Play options Used FPS 25 Play from TC 00 00 00 00 l Play toT 100 00 00 00 Preroll time 00 00 00 00 T Remind me to insert a cassete 7 Label J Check user bits first Rewind time a o0 00 00 00 fo a ms Notification offset Time offset x Cancel Make sure not to insert another VTR control event for this particular VTR within the framework of this period here 60000 ms Otherwise a tape position conflict might occur and the earlier event will not be executed properly When checking the M Remind me to insert a cassette box you will be prompted to insert a cassette Enter a note in the string to the right Use the M Check user bits checkbox to define the user bits of the cassette You can also browse for them by pressing the button to ensure that the right cassette has been inserted In the Notification offset string specify how much time before the event AirBox will remind for the cassette insertion Different VTR brands have different command reaction times Find out how many milliseconds it takes your VTR to react to the command sent from AirBox and enter this value in the Time offset spin
353. n the currently open tab You can change the name of the currently selected playlist after pushing the al Rename button To delete a tab from the bin press the x Delete playlist button To save the playlist in the current tab a new file press the Esl S veAS button If you want to add clips to the currently open playlist in the bin press the BI Add Clips button To delete the currently selected clip from the playlist press the i Delete Clip button Instead of drag n dropping clips from the bin to the AirBox control panels you could use the relevant BB Add selected button Thus if you press the A button MAM aaa rae BE E GEN selected clip to irBox channel A above olx H gelede E mpeg2 lmproper E mpegiBTv News4 l gt I In the Foldersbin you can bookmark your content containing directories and view the files in them The content of 00 03 28 00 00 00 30 00 00 04 04 03 each directory will be displayed in a separate tab You can rename the caption of each tab after pushing the Gil Rename button Use the El Set file mask button to view only certain file types In the Change file mask dialog specify which file types you would like to see in the Folders bin You can list more than one file extensions dividing them by semi colons If you add ply to your file mask you will be able to view the native AirBoxplaylist format in the folders bin Then you can drag n drop whole playlists and append or insert t
354. n the playlist it might conflict with other fixed starting times this can happen if you insert append a playlist containing fixed time events to the current playlist also containing fixed time events in it The first section in this dialog is designed for setting the rules for automated resolving of such conflicts between consecutive fixed time events Default start time conflicts resolving Let us assume that there are two fixed time events already inserted in the playlist but the one that is programmed for later playback called hereafter the second has an earlier Start time than the preceding fixed time item called hereafter the first In other words the first has a later start time than the second This dialog provides four possible actions if there is such a case in the playlist Fixed time event options Default start time conflicts resolving D te e eege deg Geen Both start times are swapped The first conflicting event will have its start time removed The second conflicting event will have its start time removed L M Default behavior when overlapping preceding events Ze Skip playing event and do an auto fill Truncate playing event Default gap filling category Ce Default clip Category from previous event Category from fixed time event C Custom category Music fill category DI Default start tolerance Event can start earlier fio Sl seconds Event can start late
355. n the spin box below The Type drop down list contains all currently supported transitions Choose the one you need from there M Trim the source clip with the transition duration if you check this AIRBOX The Saint Properties x General Fixed time Transition Metadata Jh Set transition Duration zz frames Set as default Type EH Crossfade J Trim the source clip with the transition duration e Previous AN Cancel Next box the whole transition will be applied to the last still frame of the previous clip in the playlist If you want to keep these settings for other transitions in the playlist press Set as default NOTE Transitions are supported only on the new mixed playout plug ins The Metadata tab provides room for additional information fields related to the currently selected clip In the upper part of a window you can add additional metadata connected 04 my eyes Properties i x General Fixed time Transition Metadata Hi H Value BMK 18 Name Producer Age Limitation New alue to the content of the clip This information can be entered manually or through dragging from DataBox In all cases you need to specify some metadata categories that will accommodate the relevant metadata values For example the Name ofa metadata category is Producer and the Value is a person a company Thus if you have the producer name
356. ne xt pass Encode encoding using the gathered statistics and updating them Bit rate bits sec specifies the average bit rate bits sec of the encoded video elementary stream Macro Block Adaptive Fram e Field coding HSS rate bits sec specifies the hypothetical stream scheduler rate bits sec of the encoded video elementary stream CPB size bits specifies the size of coded picture buffer in bits Init Delay 90 kHz specifies the initial CPB removal delay in 90 kHz clock units Dest Delay 90 kHz specifies the destination CPB removal delay in 90 kHzclock units In the GOP Structure field you can set Max GOP length the maximum length of any Group Of Pictures Larger numbers frequently provide better compression Smaller numbers provide better error recovery and better access to the frames for editing Max B frames count the maximu m nu mber of B frames in a GOP Some decoding situations such as video conferencing may require no B frames for providing low communication delay Scene change detection enables disables the scene change detection The M Overall PSNR check box is situated in the lower right comer of the Statistics filed It enables disables measuring the Peak Signal to Noise 112 AIRBOX Ratio This requires some CPU resources so check it only if you need these Statistics The Advanced Settings tab refers to the xj AVC H 264 standard specifications It Se
357. nes the smoothness of the font characters The Aspect Ratio 43 S bigger the value is the smoother the font i TT None Normal Max MRectangle rendering is recommended for more powerful systems It changes the algorithm of graphics rendering for optimizing the performance Do not use it on single CPU machines as it increases the CPU load Rectangular rendering gt 2 CPU IMPORTANT In order to be able to control TitleBox through Net Control output events from AirBox you have to switch TitleBox in Net Control mode TitleBox Network menus Net Control If you want to control a Title Box project and its separate objects from AirBox you have to export it as a template TitleBox Network menu Export project as template The template folder will open automatically so you do not have to browse for it Just type a name and press Save 263 TITLEBOX IV CREATING OBJECTS IV 1 Step By Step All objects are created in a similar way 1 Select the appropriate object button fromthe Object Palette 2 Draw a rectangle in the Preview Area where you wish to place it 3 A Properties dialog box will appear allo wing fine tuning of non text objects Still picture Analog clock Animation Digital Clock DirectShow media Banner etc 4 Pressing OK inserts the created object in the project You can edit the properties of text containing objects either by using the special toolbars that appear when double clicking the relevant
358. ng End foo 00 00 23 Dec 2004 uration 00 00 00 Clear T One Daly C Weeki Comment Title al File Name E Eompensation Setup Device lei x1 00 S 00 x 00 00 Dd Abort Crash Capture WC Prepare Capture Sample Driver video Standard PAL Schedule mode interface is similar to the Capture mode interface There are several differences in Clip description and Grid buttons I1 3 1 Schedule Grid The grid occupies a large part of the window In it you can create a list of scenes that will be captured after activating the scheduling This feature is used mainly for capturing TV and satellite signals but of course you can capture VTR signals as well Grid Columns Type shows the schedule type daily weekly etc Channel the TV channel which will be captured Date the starting date of each capture item Start shows the initial time when clip capturing will start End shows the time when clip capturing will end If you click on the grey bar named End it will change to Duration and the column will display clip durations M ode shows what will be captured for the particular clip video V audio A or both VA 194 CAPTUREBOX Clip Name contains clip names If you click the grey bar called Clip Name it will change to File Name and the column will display the destination pull path where the clip will be stored hard disk name folder and file Comments
359. ng c in the Name Mask field P Action Play Left Right Group and Ungroup buttons na ii are intended for grouping and ungrouping a selection of objects Lock and Visible buttons K define the object status It could be locked for moving and resizing or not It could also be visible in the preview area or not 252 TITLEBOX Schedule buttons D CS concern project scheduling The scheduling function allows starting each object in a project at a specific time day of week with specific parameters Schedule window button opens the scheduler Add to Schedule button adds the selected object to the schedule Remove from Schedule button removes the selected object from the schedule list Show Events List button will open a list of all events assigned to the currently selected object See also the Events Manager description further in this chapter Mix object button WT E ine object If the button is pushed two or more overlapping objects will be blended TIP When in Mix object mode you can switch between the overlapping objects using the lt Alt gt click combination The name of the currently selected object will appear in the Name field and will be highlighted in the Object list window You can activate this window from within the Object menu Name field contains the name of the object The default names are Type _ i e Crawl 1 Roll 3 etc You can change them at your will Names are most
360. ng Picture in picture PiP To allow the PiP functionality you have to check the M Use PIP wth Video Rescale Events box The video files from the playlist will be treated as a background video The live source video will be resized according to the settings made within the Video Resize Control event for more information please check the Video Resize Control Output description NOTE Keep in mind that when creating the resize control event you have to specify offset at least 1 sec 1000ms Check the M Use Second Source Audio box if you want the output audio to be the one coming from the AUX source IMPORTANT It is recommended the live stream video standard and fields order to be similar to the playlist input video NOTE This plug in supports transition between clips in the playlist Please check the clip properties description for details 106 AIRBOX I1 4 4 7 Deltacast ASI Pump Output x This plug in uses MPEG2 d D Channel oard 1 Channel 2 StreamMaster SDK v4 01 source files and directly pumps the Delta ASI driver v4 01 D Bitrate 10 00 i A content without recompression It Eoo S w ee is outputting a Transport Stream M Enable UDP Streaming carried in ASI interface with a Address Port TTL Multicast Output Interface 192 168 50 57 2002 fi Multicast 192 168 50 212 constant bitrate The available settings of this IT Active Bytes Written 0 X Cancel plug in are as follows
361. ng manually press the Abort button Clip data will be moved to the batch list but the clip will be marked as not fully captured The Batch Capture is in fact automated capturing of a series of scenes Activate it with the Capture button which is situated under the clip list All the clips fromthe list that are marked with a blue dot will be captured in ascending sequence of the timecodes and tape IDs During this process no special attendance is necessary one should only take care of changing the tapes when prompted TIP t You can adjust the preview window size by right clicking in the preview window IMPORTANT The Play Box modules DO NOT support the Deck Control connector supplied on the DeckLink breakout cable 190 CAPTUREBOX I1 1 4 Using the Time Delay Instant Replay option TDIR TDIR functionality is available only for mpg files i e for plug ins where mpg files are supported To use the TDIR option launch AirBox and right click over the grid Choose Add Insert Incomplete clip from the context menu You can also Add Insert Incomplete clips fromthe Edit menu In the Clip Properties dialog browse and point the location where the clip will be captured Type the Filename and copy it lt Ctrl C gt you will need it later in Capture Box Start the playback Next run CaptureBox and prepare for capturing make the necessary settings and fill in the Clip Data fields Use lt Ctrl V gt to paste the filename you c
362. ngths is a little bit trickier Check the Variable length flag in the lower right field and then specify minimum and or maximum characters to be included in the relevant metadata field If you have set a Minimum value but the relevant metadata field contains fewer characters you will need some Pad symbol to fill in the gab If you have set a Maximum value but the relevant metadata field contains more characters you will have to insert a NONE field before the SEPARATOR field thus telling AirBox to ignore the remaining symbols to the separator Back to our example Lime_Biscuit contains 12 symbols If we set minimum value 15 and Pad symbol for the Star field the Filename 149 AIRBOX Parser will display Lime Biscuit in the playlist grid If we set a maximum of 9 symbols for the Star field the Metadata fields list should contain Star NONE SEPARATOR instead of Star SEPARATOR You can change the positions of the metadata fields by drag n dropping them Append at end field gives an opportunity to add character s to the end of a metadata field Some fields like Title Category etc are displayed directly in the AirBox grid Others like Tape ID for example may provide information to Sub Title Plus www subtitleplus com or SubtitleBox see below for proper display of corresponding subtitles When you use the filename parser to display subtitles you have to create a preset with nam
363. nt resize preset Alpha Use it to set transparency to the video in percents Motion Choose the transition effect for the current resize preset from the drop down list This is the way the video will move while resizing The available options are ascending effect positive digits descending negative digits and linear appearance the zero value Color Set the color for the surrounding area of the scaled video Usually this part is used as a background for graphics insertion De in info channels Reset use this button to go back to the original settings while creating editing a preset This button practically acts as an undo function to all unsaved changes in the Scale Transition field Scale quality This is an obsolete selection box please leave it to the default Low setting as it is the one which is producing the best results currently NOTE This setting will apply to all resize events once you select it from the drop down list Crop You can crop the original video by percentage from Left Right Top and Bottom NOTE The crop will be executed right after you press the Set Crop button This functionality is not preset dependant Video Server This option is used when you want to have a Picture in Picture functionality The second picture comes from AUX source as it is defined into Output settings window Usually the background picture is the output of AirBox and the overcome picture is the resized
364. o String the pos ition of the burnt date and time oo a eg and its font size Y Position 0 2 Y Position 500 2 The X Position represents the up most TextSize 13 2 TextSie s 3 pixel of the te xt Snap Info String Info String new content Y Position represents the far left pixel of the text If you want to add some comments in the captured video type them in the Info String You can adjust the text position and size using the spin boxes above If you want to stick the note to the KS time and date info check M Snap Info String i 3 Cancel 177 CAPTUREBOX NOTE If the date time of info string text is likely to fall off the screen it will be adjusted automatically to the nearest possible position so no characters will be left out 1 2 2 DeckLink WMV This driver is used for capturing and streaming of Windows Media Video on DeckLink I O hardware modules It encodes the input signal SDI composite or component to Windows Media Video In the setup dialog to the right there are some settings concerning the resulting captured files The Video Standard drop down menu is used for choosing the video standard PAL or NTSC If the multi channel audio capturing option is enabled on the dongle the user can specify how many audio channels to be captured in the Audio channels drop down list x Capture Format iP Steam Config Video Standard Audio Channels PAL ind Char 48 Fil
365. o has a picture aspect ratio of 16 9 There are many picture formats proposed and several in use but there is increasing consensus that 1080 x 1920 24P is a practical standard for global exchange IDE Integrated Drive Electronics presently ATA A disk drive interface standard based on the IBM PC ISA 16 bit bus but also used on other personal computers The ATA specification deals with the power and data signal interfaces between the motherboard and the integrated disk controller and drive The ATA bus only supports two devices master and slave Synonyms ATA AT Attachment 360 PLAQBOX Abbreviation IEEE 1394 A standard for a peer to peer serial digital interface which can operate at 100 200 or 400 Mb s IEEE 1394 is recognized by SMPTE and EBU as networking technology for transport of packetized video and audio Its isochronous data channel can provide guaranteed bandwidth for frame accurate real time and faster transfers of video and audio and its asynchronous mode can carry metadata and support I P Both modes can be run simultaneously Synonyms Fire Wire I Link I frames Intra frames these contain all required data to reconstruct a whole picture very similar to JPEG LAN Local Area Network A system that links together electronic office equip ment such as computers and word processors and forms a network within an office or building performance of a machine or the progress of an undertaking
366. object or the Properties buttons zy For details see the relevant sections below IV 2 Editing Objects You can edit objects by invoking the object properties dialog box for non text objects or using the special toolbars for text objects Do this by double clicking on the object or by clicking on the Properties buttons Animations and Clocks can not be resized in TitleBox whereas Pictures and Text templates with graphics background can Crawls Rolls and Text Templates without graphics background can be resized even while on air You can resize all dimensions of Text objects Crawl s width and text size and Roll s height and text size However resizing Crawl s height and Roll s width should be done while the objects are stopped IV 3 Deleting Objects An object can be deleted by selecting it and clicking the Delete button from the Main Toolbar It can also be deleted by using the lt Delete gt key on your keyboard All objects can be deleted by clicking on the New Project button A dialog box will appear asking for confirmation 264 TITLEBOX IV 4 Object List po alele SE IER The Object list is intended for fast c Ab Bundetishka 6 5 am oa i S b Ab Weather_Plato 87 446 0 00 0 00 switching and reviewing of objects and c Atl Weather Shiigernika e 446 um om V O op Weather_Todorka 87 446 0 00 0 00 their properties such E Left and Top O Ah Weather_Bunderishla 87 446 0 00 0 00 side positions Duration
367. oject objects control commands 5 If you have entered Play Project mode further you can select your project by list all exported template projects should appear in this list Select a whole project or some objects from it 6 Click Finish That s it Run AirBox When the time for a TitleBox event approaches respective commands are being sent to Tit leBox and it runs the appropriate objects 354 PLAQBOX GLOSSARY 4 2 2 ML 4 2 2 Profile at Main Level High quality higher bit rate encoding used in professional video It has more chro ma information than 4 2 0 the color sampling is in 4 2 2 format a constrained version of which is used by BetacamS X using a 2 frame IB GOP producing a bitstream of 18 Mb s and I frame only IMX VTRs with 50 Mb s It is a fully editable profile Synonyms SP ML A Audio Relating to sound or its reproduction used in the transmission or reception of sound AES EBU The Audio Engineering Society A ES and the EBU European Broadcasting Union together have defined a standard for Digital Audio now adopted by ANSI American National Standards Institute Commonly referred to as AES EBU this digital audio standard permits a variety of samp ling frequencies for example CDs at 44 1 kHz or digital VTRs at 48 kHz 48 kHz is widely used in broadcast TV production Abbreviation for Audio Video Interleaved the algorithm created by Microsoft for synchronizing and compressing an
368. ok zs up in Appendix 1 further in this manual Pulse Level hn zl GPI1 None zl GPI2 None zl GPI3 None zl GPI4 None zl 199 CAPTUREBOX II 1 5 DTMF Contig Commands Plugin 215 x Use selected device to read DTMF signals Realtek HD Audio input d Source audio channel Mono Ze Lett C Right i A Cancel carrying the DMTF tones In the Commandstab create a list of commands to be executed at receiving certain combination of tones First enter the command s Name in the string above Then specify the sequence of tones that will trigger this command Finally select the Command in the drop down list Press the H Save Preset button in the upper left to save the command parameters The DTMF reader allows the user to slave Capture Box to external DTMF tones that arrive on the sound card of the PC Currently it works only in Capture mode and the supported commands are Start and Finish A two tab dialog will open on selecting this menu item In the Plugin tab specify the device to which is connected the DTMF carry ing cable In the Source audio channel field below select which channel is Biers Commands Plugin Lil Start Capture DTMF properties Name Stop Capture DTMF string 58423 Command Finish xi Finis h w OK A Cancel Repeat the procedure to add commands to the list in the right To delete a command select it and press the Delete b
369. older E Same as Video cerce button e or type the path in the field SE Audio Folder select the folder to be Output Folder C Program Files Digital Media Tec el watched over for audio files T Process Sub Folders VI Same as Video check it when the Beet audio stream is located in the same folder as Alter Processing the video stream Se M Process Sub Folders if the selected C Moveto E Program Fies Digtal Media Teo source folder contains any sub folders they E EE will also be watched Le if the subfolders Add contain any stream files they will also be processed and sent to the destination folder M Recreate Subfolder Structure will keep the directory structure of the Source location in the Destination location Output folder select an output folder for the mu Itiple xed file s After processing select how to proceed with the source files after the multiple xing Delete deletes the source files Rename renames the source files by adding an extension done for example sofia avi is renamed to sofia avi done Move in moves the source files to the folder specified in the corresponding path field Additional Folders folders to be watched in addition to the source streams NOTE The video and audio streams for additional watch should be in ONE folder When you press the M button FinishBox LE will minimize and will appear as an icon in the system tray Right clic
370. ond midnight Other wise we cannot guarantee the proper operation of the fixed time logics and the daily playlist logics WARNING We strongly DO NOT recommend using stop events and live streams without duration in daily playlists The reason is that in case of accidental shut down there is no way to calculate the duration of these items and thus to determine the insertion point So AirBox will not be able to catch 36 AIRBOX up with the schedule You can still use them in daily playlist but on your own risk 11 1 9 Print Playlist BEE sectretany aen DM COD le ASIDOv e e gt 18 B Start time Duration Unnamed playlist IN some Duration Tyne keem Title Mike s New Car Ext event Vitleo Scale UL MPEG2 48 kHz Sports1 Mike s Ext event MPEG2 48 kHz i ookmark Mike s New Car LiubovNeProsia Raina Sony2 13 00 00 Show Logo Pre For the Birds For the Birds Logo Off aina Nice Title aina Both AirBox and ListBox provide the option of printing the current playlist After choosing the Print command a Print Preview window opens and displays the current playlist The columns and their order of appearance are the same as in the grid In the print preview dialog you can change the columns size and adjust the following settings The drop down list in the left contains all currently connected printers You can choose which printer to use from here To the right of it you can cho
371. ons for Loge E 4 Resize Up Right Live stream H Assign event See TET Edit event Set title 5 Kramerto YTR 1 ER 8 Kramer to AirBox i Jump shortcut e Set hint vn nice NetSender Output fas ts witchin g ins ertin g 3 Show Logo 1 10 Cam TitleBoxNetCtrl Output 12 Resize 100 VideoResizeCtrl Output of cu S to m ev ent S YTR Control plugin 13 Show Logo 2 14 Cam2 16 Logo OFF All clipboard buttons can operate in two modes Execute mode pressing a button while in this mode will execute the event assigned to it immediately In case a live stream is assigned to this button a live stream row will be inserted in the playlist and the playback will jump to it NOTE No offsets will be applied to the events while in this mode NOTE In execute mode a complex item is treated as an events container Allevents assigned to it will be executed immediately with no offsets Insert mode pressing the relevant button will insert the event assigned to it in the playlist You can specify the point of insertion using the location toggle button Insert as next gt will insert the event after the currently playing clip If AirBox is in Stop or Pause mode the event line will be inserted as the next line to be executed after resuming the playback Append at playlist end E will add the selected command to the end of the playlist TIP Ifyou need to insert an event line
372. op of the currently selected object TIP You can invoke the Assign Event dialog of an object by right clicking in it and selecting the item fromthe drop down menu View Events select it to view all tasks assigned to the currently selected object This menu item corresponds to the View Events List button in the toolbar 7 Object list shows a window with a list of all objects available in the current TitleBox project see its description further in this chapter Property opens the properties window of the currently selected object Property Tools opens additional properties windows for objects text rolls and crawls The commands from this menu except Assign Task are also displayed in the second uppermost row of the toolbar 258 TITLEBOX 1 5 Project Menu This menu contains project related commands Some of them Play Pause etc are also operated through buttons situated along the bottom of the window Project Hep i lll 5 1 Project playout commands We we gt Play starts the driver of the graphics frame buffer If G Stop F12 this button or command is not triggered you will not be 7 Clear Buffer F2 able to show any graphics on the screen o Scheduler Shift Ctrl Sr gt Pause stops all objects movement but they remain ix Objec a Driver Select still on the screen Driver Setup gt Stop hides all objects fromthe screen but they DS gek remain loaded in th
373. opied from AirBox There should be at least 5 seconds between the capture start and the start of the incomplete file s playback Here is an example of setting this function In it a clip that is still being captured will be played back in AirBox for 20 seconds 1 Open AirBox 2 Inthe Settings menu gt Settings dialog set Check Missing every 3 seconds and click OK Load a playlist right click and select Insert Incomplete clip In the Clip Properties dialog type in the title and the filename Use lt Ctrl C gt to copy the file name you will need it later Browse for the location to which the clip will be captured Then set the Duration to 20 seconds In the bottom of the Clip Properties dialog check M Live delayed file and clip and set duration Push Play The incomplete file is marked Missing as it still does not exist Open Capture Box and specify the Folder you will capture to the clip name and the filename Use Ctrl V to paste from AirBox 0 Start manual capturing 1 A few seconds later the incomplete clip will become available but it will still be marked as missing as it was inserted before it was created 12 It willbe played for 20 seconds as specified in its properties 13 When AirBox starts playing the next clip you can go to CaptureBox and stop capturing if needed Nn Ww Vp NX 1 TIP You could fully automate this process using the CaptureBox scheduler Prepare your schedule capturing list and inse
374. or each row Just change the different points and there it is e The Editbutton allows changes in the description of a clip The clip data are loaded into the Data Fields and you can edit them During editing the Edit button transforms to Cancel and the Add to List button transforms to Apply By pressing the Apply button your changes are applied in the list You can also edit a clip by double clicking it e The Delete button removes the selected clip from the list e The Compensation button invokes a dialog box for defining the capturing delay compensation in frames when you capture from video recorder On some stations you must manually compensate for some delays when capturing to different formats DV MPEG2 A VI MPG e The Setup button shows a window for setting up Inputs Outputs of device capturing format and specific settings NOTE The setup dialog box may vary according to the platform type See the Capture Settings section above for description of some platforms setting dialog boxes 187 CAPTUREBOX The Device select button allows choosing the capture device or software simulation of capturing Sample Driver The Abort button it activates during the capture preparing only Press it to stop the capture The Speed field x1 shows the speed of capturing The Timecode field shows the timecode during capturing UL 1 3 Clip Data fields This field is designated for clip description It is not Fold
375. or fromthe last drop down list to the right and make it transparent by checking the M Use Key Color box The last check box to the right is related to aspect ratio incompatibility If your flash is 4 3 and the output in Project menu gt Option s gt Output is set to some other aspect ratio such as 16 9 for example checking this box will ensure the correct displaying of your flashes in the working area NOTE You must have a Flash Player installed on your PC in order to play these objects 285 TITLEBOX IV 5 13 Power Point Objects Now you can insert Power Point presentations in your Ee TitleBox projects Just pick the Power Point fromthe object a palette and draw a rectangle in the work area Then browse for the file location You can change the file later by double clicking in the Power Point object or by pushing the Properties 0 6 button in the toolbar If you Right click in a Power Point object or push the Properties 2 2 button the power point properties window will open It is interactive and allows you to control your slide shows The name of the currently selected object is written in the window caption WARNING Do not minimize the TitleBox window while displaying a power point presentation this will hide it fromthe output NOTE You must have a full Power Point version installed on the TitleBox PC in order to run these objects IV 5 14 Primary Shapes i Deg z i SE You can crea
376. ose the Font type and Font size for the i i I printed document aia sl Print button press this button to start printing the playlist Page Orientation buttons you can choose between Portrait or Landscape al kel Button v Selection push it to print only the rows that have been previously selected in the grid The Name of the printer it may be a local or network connected printer Reset Columns button resets the columns width to developer defined values Restore Settings button press it to discard all recent changes First page mj go to the first page Last page gt go to the last page E Go to previous page H Go to next page SR AIRBOX 3 Iretresh Table press it to update the view Auto size Columns button press it to fit the columns width to their content 1 1 10 Export playlist as XLS Use this option to export your playlists to coma separated value CSV xls files 1 1 11 Export Logs in XLS files If you need to convert the tab delimited log files to XLS format click in this menu item A browse dialog will open for you to select which log to export just select it and click Open The resulting x s file will be saved to the Same directory lll 1 12 Export capture list If there are missing files into the playlist invoking this command will create a list of missing clips for capturing in cap file Exported cap file is CaptureBo x compat
377. ou can choose Default options for describing the inserted files as well as a template record Date format defines a format for entering and viewing dates General Check the preferred format year year month year month day year day month day month year month day year month year and define the separator sign By default the date format is DD MM YYYY and the separator is a dot Production date You can define a separate format for the Production date which can differ from the other dates By default the production date format is YYYY Settings You can import export all settings applied in the Options dialog The Export button will save the settings into a dbs file The Import button will open an already created dbs file and apply the settings to the current DataBox instance After kill date expired determines how DataBox should proceed with expired instances There are two possibilities delete the instances if these are files without notification notify for expired instances and show their records in Expired node in the Tree View 22 DATABOX Fields to AirBox Notes here you can define which fields should appear in the Notes field in AirBox To add a field press the P US button to the right of the window and choose a field fromthe list To delete a field select it and press the Minus button II 32 Grid Options General Grid HouselD Default values Export Import Database
378. oval lists in csv file format Put your csv removal files in a folder and browse for it in the WIPE file directory string At detecting such a file in the WIPE directory SafeBox will check whether the files listed in it are used in non expired play lists If yes the files will not be deleted If not SafeBox will delete them automatically 330 SAFEBOX General Removal Schedule OML i ian You can control the time for file transfer according to SE your daily network traffic This will help you to avoid 09 00 00 10 00 00 network overload In the Schedule tab define the time slots when SafeBox should not perform file transfers Do not forget to check the M Use schedule box SafeBox can export OML files Thus you will be able to export information about the media stored on selected directories into a file OML file The OML file format can be either txt or ply the AirBox native playlist format Thus you can open the exported ply files directly in Im Im ListBox and build playlists via drag n dropping to another ml nl sl ListBox or directly to AirBox X Cancel The last Options page is F Add last write fle tne to OML entry called OML It is designed T Export Online isteveyy 60 Ss for automated export of such online media library files Ce ee It contains several settings C Asceding M Aad last write file time to OML entry when this box C Descending is ticked SafeBox will a
379. oving the selected item from Batch list back to Source streams fields and edit their order or number Removeremoves the SELECTED item fromthe Batch list Clear removes ALL items from the Batch list Run Batch starts multiplexing the items in the Batch list They will be processed one by one following their order in the list Folder Watch pressing this button will open a dialog box to specify the relevant locations for automatic multiple xing See the Folder Watch section further in this manual Auto Muxrate It often happens that the declared bitrate of a file differs from the actual one This function will command the program to detect the actual bitrate and hence to determine automatically the Muxrate of the multiple xed program stream Force Mux Rate check this box if you want to define a specific mux rate for all mu Itiplexed files and select the mux rate value Kbits s in the next field This option comes handy when the declared video bitrate is not the same as the actual bitrate This is usually the case with most VBR files ripped from a DVD Video If not using the Force Mux Rate option FinishBox LE would produce an unnecessary big MPG file based on the fake high bitrate Using Force Mux Rate the user can specify a mux rate close to the actual bitrate WARNING Be careful when using this option it may produce undesirable results if you choose lower mux rate than the actual video bitrate
380. ow It contains abbreviations of all options enabled on the dongle the AirBox channel number and the name of the currently executed playlist file If the playlist has been changed but not saved there is an asterisk after the playlist name I 2 Menu Bar The MENU BAR is described in detail further in this section See section II 19 AIRBOX 1 3 Multi purpose zone The multi purpose zone is situated to the left of the master counter It consists of several tabs that allow quick navigation through the most frequently used functionalities in AirBox Use the arrows in the upper nght corner to scroll the tabs TIP t To show hide tabs in this zone right click in it and check un check the ones you need E AirBox Streamer H 264 HD PRO MS B 1 2006_08_16_17_50_37_DIMF xml ol sl File dil iew Option ommand Preview Counters Current playlist Playlists Log 4_ gt Ela _ alzel E al Typ Star Mike s MPEG2 48 kHz M New Car E mpe Event MPEG2 48 MPEG2 48 kHz BE 12 41 28 00 03 50 Viktoria_ Mais MPEG2 48 kHz tarzasia foo e gt SEA 00 00 30 SONY MPEG2 48 kHz ass 00 00 00 Show Logo H Event 12 45 49 00 07 07 SD KEE 00 03 50 C men oo Total duration 00 42 24 Loop at 12 57 27 movie_O01c Viktoria_Moliase Counter IBP SMbit_ he Bird MPEG2 48 kHz MPEG2 48 kHz
381. ox Reader you can only view and search the database but there are no editing options 1 Quick Start 1 Launch DataBox 2 Activate the Grid by pressing the GRID button 3 Select a file from your media folder and drag n drop it in the grid 4 A record appears in the grid with the same name as the media file name Congratulations You have just created your first record in the PlayBox database 209 DATABOX ll USER INTERFACE The main part of the interface is dedicated to database visualization It consists of three areas TREE VIEW SEARCH FIELDS and GRID II Tree View This area contains a dendroid chart of the Classification scheme the Credits Persons Companies and Countries the Sequences the Templates and the Expired entries You can add delete or change elements in Tree View by using the right mouse button III Classification scheme and Credits Here you can see the classification scheme and credits as they are defined in the relevant managers When a particular Type Keyword Group or Credit is selected only the entries that correspond to the selected criteria are displayed in the GRID You can add some entry to a specific classification element or credit by drag n dropping it to that element aor Be mE Ru E Search Clear V Global search oS Nema L D Genres Age rate is gt COMMERCI s MUSIC Rue Tite Housel Category Location MediaType Type Gene Keyword _ Person dr NEW
382. ox becomes active Use it to capture only wav files no avi files will be produced M Capture closed caption this box is active when capturing in NTSC standard It allows capturing the VBI information stored on lines 18 19 and 20 Please note that you have to enable them in the DeckLink driver Control Panel gt DeckLink gt VANC and 3 2 Pulldown tab If you check M Preview the currently captured scenes will be shown in the preview window on your desktop CaptureBox can stream the captured material to the network multicast or to a specified IP xi address in MPEG2 Program Stream When in MPG capturing mode a check Capture Format IP Stream Config Bum Date Time Address 2001 box becomes active in the Capture PM Munca Tf af Format tab M Use IP streaming SC ar 2 When you check it a second tab appears Buffer Size IS bytes Interface in the DeckLink Setup dialog IP Stream Config In it you can configure the streaming address mu lticast unicast etc In case you have more than one network connection specify the one to be used for streaming If none is selected CaptureBox will stream through all available network Bes sx Xca connections This tab is active when you check M Burn Date Time in the Capture Format tab There are two fields in it En ES Date Time Settings allows adjusting _SsetueFamat IP Steam Config Bum Date Time iti 1 Date Time Settings Inf
383. p The Mirror mode has two major sub modes Full mode and Idle Mode Full Mode The Slave and the Master AirBox are always playing the same content simultaneously Benefit The Slave channel always runs in perfect sync and you can switch Over to it any time Disadvantage This will double the network traffic since the two AirBox servers will be transferring data at the same time Idle Mode The Slave AirBox is staying idle and listening to the master AirBox activity If the Master AirBox stops responding the Slave AirBox will start playing immediate ly from the same point at which the Master AirBox was last Benefit No additional network traffic overhead Disadvantage It might take up to a second to start the playback process from the point it failed The information about all previously executed external events will not be preserved Thus if the Master was running in video scale mode before the failure the Slave will proceed outputting full screen video In both modes whenever you change anything in the master AirBox playlist the backup AirBox does the same automatically Regardless of the mode you will always use content files that are stored either on local or on network storage The easiest approach is to use content ONLY from a redundant network attached storage NAS or SAN This means that the Slave AirBox will use the same file path as Master AirBox to locate the content files If you are going to use local content files
384. ped IMPORTANT You must have enough uninterrupted free RAM to load a TGA sequence in TitleBox The minimum free RAM needed for loading a TGA animation is calculated after the follo wing formula Animation_Width multiplied by Animation_Height mu Itiplied by 4 multiplied by the Animation_Frame_Count To save or open a project containing such an animation you will have to multiply the needed RAM by 2 Thus the minimum free uninterrupted RAM for saving opening a 100 frame animation with 300x200 frame size will be 300 200 4 100 2 48 000 000 bytes 45 77 MB TIP In order to reduce these requirements you could export your longer animations to sequence files using the Create Animation File object see below 278 TITLEBOX IV 5 6 Create Animation File This object was created to avoid the real time rendering of sequences thus reducing the system resources load during playout We recommend using it for big size animations with numerous frames The resulting file formats are seg2 or PNGAVI The properties of this object appear Sequence EC O x in the dialog to the right It is similar 2 7 Dna Smit tt to the Animation properties dialog ES Range 9A ES and most of the options are the same rm To load an already existing sequence tof a mi A file click in the 2 Open sequence button To create a new sequence file click in the Add Images button and browse for them In the Open se
385. picture coming from AUX source Check the M Use check box to allow this functionality and enter the PC name of the AirBox PC Select the Layer screen layer of the resized picture NOTE Screen layer should be 1 the default value if the resizing concerns AUX source Screen layer should be 16 if the resizing concermes playlist 55 AIRBOX Important While Video ServerM Use is checked and you want to resize both playlist and AUX source you must define AUX source resizing event first into the playlist and than playlist resizing event Audio control this option is used in conjunction with previous option Ifa Video Server is used than you have to select if the audio from AUX source e the resized picture will be used There are three options Full 100 Mute 0 or Mix audio with the audio from AirBox output Layer the same layer number as for the video server VTR Control plug in Although AirBox was designed as a file based playout engine now you can control up to 2 external VTRs through RS422 for tape based playout All you have to do is insert a VIR control event in the playlist The VTR command dialog consists of two tabs General and Advanced In the General tab you have to specify to which VTR AirBox will send the command and the action to be executed at receiving it Play or Stop Below are situated the Play related settings In the Used FPS drop down list select the temporal resolutio
386. plate the following fields are inaccessible gt General gt House ID and Episode No gt Instances gt M edia Notes and Location IMPORTANT If the template record is designed for a sequence and there are any series created for this sequence you can not edit the template record anymore Temp lates do not appear in the Grid of ordinary records 212 DATABOX ll 1 4 Expired node This node is used to show the records that have expired instances You have to decide how to proceed with these instance delete them or change their kill dates ioixi ALL gt Types E Groups Keywords i Persons Companies Ei Countries Sequences Templates Expired lA E H Search Dear IV Global search ee eee Age rate is No Tile Housel Category Location MediaType Type J e Ke Stuart Little Costumes SL 35 Making CINEMA Adventure Comedy Fantasy mc Stuart Little Composition Toothbru SL 36 Making CINEMA Adventure Comedy Fantasy mc Stuart Little Composition Be SL 37 Making CINEMA dyventure Comedy Fant m Stuart Little CG Failures Ma ing CINEMA Adventure Comedy Fantasy mc Al NOTE The expired instances are automatically displayed in this node only if you have assigned notify in Options gt General gt After kill date expired II 2 Grid ALL zx Types E Groups mo Keywords ie Persons Companie
387. plications on different hardware decoders at the same workstation NOTE Depending on the active module AirBox may recognize some files as invalid if these files are not supported by the respective hardware used Check the latest list of platforms supported in AirBox in http www playbox tv or write to playbox playbox tv If there is no hardware platform installed there still are several choices Soft MPEG2 Playback Software based MPEG playback Used mostly for demonstration purposes it represents all features available to Hardware playback except the video signal output If you have a dual head video card with TV output the video overlay preview can be monitored through it Soft DV 2 Playback Software based DV playback Used mostly for demo purposes it represents all features available in the Hardware playback except the video signal output If you have a dual head video card with TV output the video overlay preview can be monitored through it Soft Mixed Playback Software based playout of files with different compressions and frame rates in the same playlist Used mostly for demonstration purposes it represents all features available to Hardware playback except the video signal output If you have a dual head video card with TV output the video overlay preview can be monitored through it DataPump MPEG Program Dumper Dumps the playlist into a single MPEG2 file Doing this does not require any hardware decoder
388. power supply recovery at 10 00 AirBox will resume playback fromthe point in the playlist that is 10 00 hours away from its beginning considering 00 00 00 as initial start time In short AirBox will forward the playlist to the time point of power supply recovery taking 00 00 00 as initial time In order to overcome this you should compile your play lists starting with wait events or fixed time items The wait events values should be set in hours from 00 00 00 to the desired start time of your play list 1 e for the above example your play list should start with a wait for 9 hours event or with a fixed start clip Thus in case of power failure AirBox will account for the initial time set by you and will resume playback fromthe point that corresponds to the power recovery time I e for the above example at 10 00 o clock AirBox will start from the point which corresponds to one hour after the beginning of the playlist set to 9 00 o clock through a wait event NOTE Playback recovery options will not be applied when AirBox is running in daily playlist mode In daily playlist mode AirBox will always try to catch up with schedule according to the playlist start time and the current system time 129 AIRBOX Reload playlist In this section you can adjust settings related to the way AirBox handles playlist reloading Reload playlist on file change reloads the current playlist automatically if in the meantime it has
389. ppears only when the entry Le a a Playout HDD Main Name New stream has parts it has been divided and S EE Part1 Stream Type Program E gt 2 ea Part 2 File Name E mpeg2 Mike s New L3 recorded in several parts or trimmed split By Pats as 0 00 dB i s SS Part IN Point 00 00 00 00 a in separate sections with the Clip Trimmer ES SEN Se as aa amp a E ape ain z If you want to add a new part right BH DVCPROMeda1 If 720 pirels 5 SEN i Height 576 pixels click on the Main Instance and select S d W Video BitRate 4500000 b sec 4Mb sec New part fromthe context menu If you 2 Til SR EE Stream 1 Main trim the file the parts are created DVD R Media 1 EE ouea Frame Rate 25 00 FPS Video Compression MPEG2 Audio Compression Layer 2 Part 0 Language NONE Main No automatically according to the succession of the trimmed sections To delete a part right click it and then click Delete Under one part you can define Streams and Media JV Apply changes when Previous or Next buttons are clicked 1 2 2 2 Main Stream E X conc automatically set if the entry was created through drag n dropping a file The description form to the right contains Name name of the currently selected stream Stream Type describes the stream type It can be a Program Video Audio Subtitles etc stream File Name contains the stream filename and path You can enter a
390. pped during playback The playlist time will be recalculated accordingly if you have left the Show duration of missing files flag unchecked see the Missing files section below e wam Reject 71 AIRBOX The second tab provides some user Interface options Auto popup LogView on error displays the LogView window automatically when an error occurs Auto change items in Block Timer list the block timer will follow the subsequent events in the playlist as chosen in the block timer dialog box If not checked the timer will remain fixed at the selected event in the list After this event is passed the block timer will read negative values because the origin point will remain fixed in the past Add original duration in notes after trimming if checked once you trima clip x General Interface Missing files Skip zones Grid J Auto popup LogView on error IV Auto change items in BlockTimer list Add original duration in notes after trimming T Copy HouselD to TapelD I Show frame values in playlist Color entire row by category J Show external event s thumbnails in the hint 7 Disable misusable critical shortcuts Large status bar JV Use extended MPEG info tip Hide hardware reset button MV Show progress bar in block timer fi 5 ES SEC J Overlay channel number first channel is 0 o Video preview aspect ratio 4 3 DI Row Height fie Frame rate 25 DI A Canc
391. presents the commands that will be sent to TitleBox during the currently selected Action 140 AIRBOX The Preset values list contains the most often used variables that can be added to the script 141 AIRBOX For better understanding of the graphic rules please follow the example below To create a new rule select the group folder to which it should belong and press the New rule button Enter the name of your template and press OK Then go to the Conditions field to the right EI and set what should the conditions be in order Name to execute certain Actions we will set them m later In the example above we have set the Cancel Parameter to Cate gory the Operator to is and the Value Music Thus when the condition Category is Music is fulfilled the Actions below will be executed To add a new action press the New Action button and enter its name here Clip_Start_Show then press OK This action will show the selected information fromthe play at clip start In the Action time offset spin box specify the desired offset for the execution It can be in percentage from the clip duration or in milliseconds select this in the spin box to the right Finally describe carefully the action in the Action script field LOAD_TEMPLAT E TB_Music tmpl This line describes which template will be used to show the text fromthe playlist Background play a Play Command for the picture object Background Title
392. presets so the user will not have to insert the same external events one by one each time he needs them Instead he could pick up one of the available presets from the list he has created For example if you have a matrix switcher which needs to route IN5 to OUT 2 in order to get AirBox on air and it needs to route IN2 to OUT2 in order to get live feed pass through you could predefine 2 complex events with custom names such as To AirBox and To Live These complex events will contain the matrix switcher event with its IN OUT configuration as defined Then you just need to insert the complex event by name So basically a complex event represents a set of external events with their adjustments and offsets The Complex event GE presets editor Boke Default duration 200000 in i EE V TB Beginning events window is divided into iR HECERA two sections dd VTR 1 Time offset 0 The Complex mu Kramer Matrix Switcher Command Time offset 0 items field in the left r contains a list of available presets and UI pro Switcher output several buttons for E ae a e ene a To create a new preset press the Create new complex item button and enter its name in the New Complex Item dialog You can edit this name later by pressing the Edit button Recycle sign To delete a Complex event from the list press the Bin button The Properties field in the right contains the essence of the complex event a sequence of Beginning events
393. provided by our License Management department contact support playbox tv The PlayBox installer will not let you install any PlayBox modules unless you have them enabled on your dongle Then follow the procedure as advised by oursupport personnel 16 PLAQBOX IiI WORKFLOW BASICS PlayBox as a TV automation system includes modules that automate particular processes in a typical T V organization Most of these processes may coincide in time or their results may depend on each other which leads to different PlayBox configurations Media Input There are several content sources Non linear video editing workstation with MPEG2 or DV export Most contemporary NLE stations export either in MPEG2 Programor Transport Streams MPG or DV files You need to select your export format based on the playout compression selection Tape ingest Manual or automated tape ingest either in MPEG2 or DV format Live sources satellite feeds etc Some of these sources come as MPEG2 TS bouquets that have to be demultiplexed in order to extract the desired channel to be recorded This is an integral part of CaptureBox Content Management DataBox can be used for classification and navigation through all the content available Once classified content can be quickly searched sorted and retrieved All this is done by various properties such as title ID country keywords groups language distribution amp usage rights media description credit
394. put and the analog composite video output 114 AIRBOX Please do not change anything in this tab unless advised by oursupport team The Audio tab contains sound related settings Controls the decoded audio output only Does not affect CD ROM pass though audio The volume settings are written in the Windows registry and are remembered from session to session The Audio Volume field contains two volume control sliders Analog volume controls the analog audio output volume This slider does not affect the embedded digital audio output Digital Attenuation available on certain boards only SDM280 SDM290 HDM 500 MUse Digital Attenuation check it to use the Digital Attenuation slider as volume control for the digital audio output MEnable Embedded Audio check it to have embedded digital audio in the SDI output The AES3 Mode field contains four options to control the embedded audio format Consumer Places the uncompressed digital audio output stream in Consumer Format Pro Places the uncompressed digital audio output stream in Professional Format IEC 61937 Mutes analog output and places the compressed digital audio output stream in Consumer Format Used for outputting compressed AC 3 audio to an external consumer AC 3 decoder SMPTE 337M Mutes analog output and places the compressed digital audio output stream in Professional Format Used for outputting compressed AC 3
395. put event you have to start your TitleBox with Net Control function TitleBox gt Network gt Net Control where available TitleBox Light Edition does not support this option To control a project its objects from AirBox you have to create that project in TitleBox first and export it as a template into Template folder TitleBox Network Export project as template The Template folder is created automatically during TitleBox installation If the AirBox module is installed on a different computer or you need to change the folder s location then after the installation of AirBox you have to start the TitleBox Net Control Setup Programs gt Play Box Technology Ltd gt AirBox gt PLNetInst exe Before pressing the Finish button in the TitleBo x Net Control wizard uncheck the O Split Command box Thus only one row will be inserted in the playlist 32 AIRBOX The following paragraph contains an Example playlist prepared with M Split Command If you want to start Crawl Roll1 and Sequence from the football project and stop all objects and clear the screen after two clips the playlist should look like this __ Start time Duration Type Category TI Cd Petfonmer Juge Location 2 4970752 00 01 17 MP2 48 kHz Discreet2000_Chapter09_Testimonial_Co H Mpeg2 PAL Di 17 03 09 00 02 24 MPG2 48 kHz Trailer H Mpea2 PAL Mc E 1317 11 33 00 00 00 Ta event TitleBox Command lt STOP gt L Mila 00 00 00 Ext ev
396. quence dialog select the images to load and click Open C Program Files Digital M C Program Files Digital M C Program Files Digital M C Program Files Digital M C Program Files Digital M C Program Files Digital M C Program Files Digital M oF OM OH m bgO000 tga a bg0001 tga bg0002 tga bg0003 tga bg0004 tga bg0005 tga bg0006 tga x You can use the arrows to change the images order In the Range spin boxes specify which images should be included in the sequence All of themare included by default Court 12 Used 11 Duration continuous Once you have loaded all the frames you want to include in the sequence press the a Export Sequence button and save the file 219 TITLEBOX IV 5 7 Direct Show Media Properties Title Box allows inserting all kinds of Direct Show compatible media DX Media Property 2 x Source Media Crop Source File JE mpeg2 Counter IBP SMbit_ mpg Capture Device Di pp Virtual Channel ID 1 Bi amp Mbit C Custom Support M Support Add Delete Property width WEEN Height A4 S cones First you have to specify the source media The File string contains the file BCE path or URL to play in the object Press File or URL Jinms event 1 com eurosport com reflector 36105 Cf the Load button to the right to browse XK Canc
397. r 9 0 depending on the Provider you have chosen When you are done entering the connection details press Test Connection to check if it works correctly OK Cancel Help After configuring the connection you can open EE the Advanced tab for more configuration options which differ depending on the selected Provider Finally you could view all settings for the current connection in the All tab Click OK and Close in all open windows until you return to the Data Source Manager In it double click on the newly created ODBC Data Provider instance A fine tune dialog will open for you to configure the data Query Press Execute Command to check if the connection is working correctly Press Apply and Close To assign the ODBC Data Provider instance to an object drag it from the list in the nght to the relevant object in the left Close the Data Source Manager window 311 TITLEBOX VI 4 RSS Data Provider Choosing this plug in allows you connect to RSS feeds from the Internet Choose it fromthe list of available plug ins and press Add button The following window will open Instance Configuration RSS Atom Feed http newsrss bbc co uk rss newsonline_uk_edition front_page rss xml Advanced vw If the Feed is unreachable show last Fetched data w If there is no data fetched show instead of empty data show no data In RSS Atom Feed field enter the URL of the needed RSS feed To check the connection press Test Feed b
398. r Ctrl H R ere Stop hides the object fromthe graphics frame buffer Scheduler Properties Add to Scheduler Adds the selected object to the Schedule ae gt Remove From Scheduler Removes the selected object from the Alignments Led Schedule ViewEvents 7 Scheduler Properties Shows the properties of the schedule Bay Object List Order This function is active when there are overlapped objects Jol Property You can move the selected object under or over the others Alignments This function is active when more than one object is selected It allows aligning the objects to each other Assign Task is functionality in TitleBox that allows relating one object s status play stop to another object s status play stop Thus you can trigger or stop objects and send out GPI pulses at stop start of other objects xi In order to assign tasks to your objects On Play Execute you have to create them first so push a iain the Event Manager button in the WS lower left corner of this dialog Please Ce check the detailed description in Project menu gt Plugins section below 12 Property Tools NE Play Crawl 1 Play Roll 1 t Event Manager EM Once you have created a list of possible tasks in the Event manager they will be available in the Assign Event drop down list Back in the Assign Task dialog select the event and the time when it should be executed On Play or On St
399. r E seconds Start delay compensation During play or pause mode 2000 milliseconds 500 milliseconds During stop mode Jf OK X Cancel Both start times are removed if you check this option the start times of the fist and the second fixed time events will be removed and they will be played back as ordered in the playlist without executing the defined start times Both start times are swapped check this and the items start times will be exchanged As a result the first item will be played back first at the start time set to the second item The second item will be played back after that starting at the time set to the first item The first conflicting event wil have its start time removed this will remove the fixed start time of the first item and it will be played back in its turn as an ordinary clip in the playlist The second item will be played after the first one and will preserve its fixed time start The second conflicting event wil have its start time removed this will remove the start time of the second item and it will be played back in 133 AIRBOX its turn as an ordinary clip in the playlist after the first item The first item will be played back as fixed NOTE The playlist is protected against engendering conflict situations when inserting fixed time events You will not be allowed to set a fixed start time to an item if there is another overlapping f
400. r e SE N i H EA example for Cinema these are Action Drama H S NEWS mi Comedy etc e OWN D A m SPORT M Keywords specific keywords assigned to the Je Keywords entry that are used for easier search Gg Groups Christmas E Groups despite their type entries may pertain to Instrumentals the same group For example it may be a special gold CT e fund or Christmas New Year programs etc e S Archives Archive describes the physical location of the copy building floor room etc To add a new classification criterion such as Type Category Genre Keyword or Group or Archive you have to right click an existing element and choose New from the context menu This will open a dialog box to enter the name of the new element type category etc and define a color for color coding The default color is white i e there is no color To change an element s feature name or color right click it and choose Properties from the context menu To delete an element right click it and choose Delete 239 DATABOX I 7 Credits This is a manager for description of video content creators divided in three pages Countries Companies and People Each page contains two lists list of activities positions and list of names For example the activities for Countries might be country of origin target country shooting location etc the acti vities positions for People might be star
401. r file NOTE This option is un checked by default which means Av Playlist mode sell x General Removal Schedule OML Ze mode Transfer operation 7 Automatic Manual Copy C Move IV Lock destination files until copying is finished IT Ignore older files V Remove read only flag Perform checksum verification V Do not copy incomplete files f Guild source directory tree in destination Check source locations every D 0 a sec Max simultaneous jobs 1 E V Copy only daily playlist for fi a day s ahead IT Copy daily playlist for last fo E dayls TT Speed limit 2 Mbps 256 KBs X Cancel that SafeBox will overwrite the newer files in the Destination folder with older files from the Source folder M Remove read only flag will allow you to edit the content after its replication If this boxis not checked the copied content will not be editable you will not be able to delete it either 328 SAFEBOX M Perform checksum verification will check if the transferred files in the Destination folder are identical to those in the Source folder Thus you will be notified any time there is some difference between the source file and its copy M Do not copy incomplete files will not transfer files that are currently open by another program or user M Build source directory tree in destination When ingesting content that contains folders and subfolders Safe
402. r in the manual Black Magic Logo Generator this is the plug in to be used if you want to key logo over a pass through video while A irBox is running on another plug in IMPORTANT You CANNOT use the same Dec kLink board for playback and logo insertion in the same time 91 AIRBOX Pressing the Configure button will open the Video standard Keying type DeckLink Logo generator settings Here you can Pal 720x576 sl specify adjust several settings ER eh Video standard to define the output fe d resolution including HD if the installed DeckLink board supports it Logo Conii X Cancel Keying type should be set to Internal in order to display logos over the pass through video If you choose None only the pass through video will be displayed on the output of the DeckLink board Buffer count this is the number of frames to be kept in the graphics frame buffer WARNING Please do not change the default buffer count unless advised so by our support staff Tally Logo this plug in will raise or lower the x output voltage on a specified COM port when Active level High zj playback reaches a logo event line This is designed to control external logo generators that support GPI STE input i NONE As only two pins on a COM port can be used for GPI n output you can have only two different logo NONE NONE commands per port Thus you will be able to switch ma between Logo and
403. r p VideoBitRate 10000000 bps i LocalHDD Media Video BitRate 10000000 b sec 10Mb se ge ele 4 J o E Part 4 Sample Rate 48 kHz udio stream foun SCH Layer 2 48000 Hz stereo 192 kbps SS Stream 1 Main es Hee Total streams 3 i LocalHDD Media Channels Stereo Type of packs MPEG2 5 Part 5 Frame Rate 25 00 FPS Type of PES MPEG2 CES Stream 1 Main Video Compression MPEG2 Mus rate 1320250 i wmd S z Duration 00 07 07 14 LocalHDD Media Audio Compression Layer 2 Start TC 00 00 00 000 E Part 6 Notes CS Stream 1 Main Part 1 In EN Duration 2 Out a amp LocalHDD Media Language NONE 00 07 07 13 e Suen Main Men Yes Position SE Details Total Duration LocalHDD Media Apply changes when Previous or Next buttons are clicked Previous AS OK Next E mpeg2 0023a mpg You can create as many parts as you wish After Pressing OK all parts will be displayed under the Stream ro w Volume w YOK Balance peme ik De Cancel buj e e AE be ee ol Position 00 05 53 00 Zoom 1 24 00 NM 2 1 6 132 OUT Point By default it contains the latest available timecode depending on the program duration It can be changed by pressing the button in the night of the field It invokes the Clip Trimmer and a new OUT Point can be defined Width the Video Image width in pixels This field is not available when describing a tape Height the
404. rames count the maximum number of B frames in a GOP Some decoding situations such as video conferencing may require no B frames for providing low communication delay Scene change detection enables disables the scene change detection 180 CAPTUREBOX In the lower right corner of the Statistics filed is situated the M Overall PSNR check box It enables disables measuring the Peak Signal to Noise Ratio This requires some CPU resources so check it only if you need this statistics The Advanced Settings tab refers to the AVC H 264 standard specifications It contains more sophisticated options that should not be changed feier unless advised by our support team M Rate Control p Profile 7 IT VBR e Low Complexity 160 sl D HE AAC v1 ao oea Pressing the Audio Encoder Setting button will K ersion M Meader ype D FREE E open the MainConcept s AAC Encoder properties MPEG 4 ADTS dialo g Kee The Bitrate Control specifies the average output i ps 2 S l audio bitrate the Profile sets the object type and the E E Header type sets the output bit stream format raw or with ADTS headers Check M H igh frequency cut off to reduce the encoded data Pressing the Multiplexer Settings button will open the MainConcept Multiplexer properties dialog You can view the parameters of the output MPEG 2 TS stream in it x 12 4 Delta ASI CW G Simple Exc
405. rature within the object have a look at the example to the right TIP You can assign a Weather provider to one object only If you want to display weather information in more than one object you have to add new instances NOTE This plug in is still BETA Working with Yahoo and binding pictures to objects are still in development at this stage Update data Automatic 309 TITLEBOX VI 2 FileLink Data Provider Select this plug in if you intend to link certain objects in TitleBox to text documents The normal file links assigned to text objects show the desired text document as it is The difference between using those file links and FileLink Data Provider is that this plug in allows the user to modify how the text from the desired file is displayed For example using this provider Title Box can interpret Be ES tomt er Hp o o o one text document as a database Let us assume that there Header Col 1 Header Col Header Col is a text document looking as the one which is shown in the example to the left The user can define in what kind of order to display the rows and columns contained within Line 1 col 1 Line 1 col 2 Line 1 col Line 2 col 1 Line 2 col 2 Line 2 col Line 3 col 1 Line 3 col 2 Line 3 col Line 4 col 1 Line 4 col 2 Line 4 col Line 5 col 1 Line 5 col 2 Line 5 col Lal Ly Loi Li Lal Loi Line 6 col 1 Line 6 col 2 Line 6 col the text Press Config whil
406. re are listed the Input Plugins i e PB modules which could be monitored Select a Plugin row and double click the No to the right to turns it to Yes in order to make this Plugin enabled Manage monitor sources er Leite TitlkeBoxInputPlugin EE PingInPlugin Setup Stop Press the Setup button to make the needed settings A Setup window will appear Here you have to specify the IP address and port number of the machine where the needed PlayBox module is installed The default port number for Capture Box is 7803 The default port number for TitleBox is 8015 You can add modify or remove monitored instances by pressing corresponding Add Modify or Remove buttons 342 ALARMBOX For AirBox the setup window is a little bit different In the bottom of the window there is an AutoDiscover field After pressing the Auto Discover button you can see in here the IP addresses of all AirBox channels started in your LAN Select one or more of themand press ADD button to move the IP address to Alpex moniter 3 the Monitored Instances area Montored Instances 192 168 50 101 1 3 5 5 1 There are two system settings available Send getstatus messages on every msec period of time in milliseconds for checking the rule pero Send message on every e eech period of time in 192 168 50 132 2 192 165 50 158 1 seconds for re sending the notification message 192 168 50 101 1 System sett
407. re automatically detected but you can add more manually by double clicking a row in the list of devices 1 NONE 2 NONE etc Video and Audio can be switched separately or together The Device list can be Saved and Loaded You can also set time offset in milliseconds Leitch Matrix Switcher Output is another optional plug in for AirBox When you choose to insert a Leitch Matrix event the dialog to the right is displayed Double click on the relevant level to configure e to specify the number of inputs and outputs in it and click OK Then specify the commands in the grid it will reflect your Configure settings If you 47 AIRBOX 15 x Levels Level 1 00 00 Level 2 00 x 00 Level 3 00 x 00 choose the Command mode you ll have to press OK to insert the event in the playlist In Online mode you can control the matrix switcher in realtime You can also set an event offset if necessary ere ONLINE Level 5 00 x 00 Level 00x00 x Level 7 00 x 00 Level 8 00 x 00 Name Level 4 Level 9 00 x 00 Level 10 00 x 00 Inputs 5 Cancel Outputs 3 _ Conc Run event fe 3 earlier D Clear commands x Cancel Inday Switcher Output is the latest development for switcher control in AirBox After enabling it in Settings gt Modules gt Remote control tab press Configure to specify the COM port to which the Ml inday 4x1 switcher command x devic
408. record s beginning toward the clip s IN point This setting refers to the Print to tape mode 197 CAPTUREBOX NOTE The REC Delay and REC Latency fields are accessible only when the M Editing VCR box is checked Always on top check it if you want to see the RS422 window always on top Editing VCR it should be checked if you use an editing video recorder If the box is checked you can set the REC delay and REC latency fields and the Video recorder edit mode Video recorder edit mode you can choose between Insert and Assemble Reclnhbox allows or forbids the REC button in order to protect the tape from accidental mistakes The Shuttle slider allows shuttling within the particular VTR capabilities If the VTR allows it you could achieve variable speed by shifting this button left or right The Jog slider allows frame accurate positioning IMPORTANT The Play Box modules DO NOT support the Deck Control connector supplied on the DeckLink breakout cable I1 3 4 Audio Control This is an additional window which appears nearby the x Volume Meter Volume main window if the capture device supports audio volume control EE ee You can resize it by stretching its edges Besides you can attach it to the main CaptureBox window by dragging it close to any of its edges The colored field in the window is a volume amp peak meter The green band shows the peak levels and the black line insid
409. roperties Clicking on the field to the right opens a window to define properties Age rate the default Age rate set in New Record gt Traffic gt Age Rate Rating the default Rating set in New Record gt Additional gt Rating Total runs the total number of runs set in New Record gt Traffic gt Runs remaining Original Language the language of the record s content Stream Language the language of the main stream 232 DATABOX 1 3 5 Export Import o x This feature will help you in exchanging General Grid HouselD Default values Export Import Database TCI import _4 gt e metadata and instances It will create Exclude files from import export Fide tes am pp automatically an xml file containing all T Muttiile export the metadata for an instance and will When importing existing record attach it to the instance file Thus you can Skip g A transfer not only instances but all the C Rename metadata related to them AE M Exclude files from import export will not include the stream links file paths to instances from the exported metadata as they will probably not be the same at the destination workstation wi K Cancel M Exclude notes from import export will not include the note fields in the xml file Since generally the notes are related to personal opinion and workstation specific matters checking this field will prevent notes from exporting and you from
410. rt the incomplete still missing clips in the AirBox playlist accordingly Thus if you have set the correct timing CaptureBox will start capturing and AzrBox will start playing back the relevant clips WARNING You must have SCSI or very fast SATA storage for the TDIR option Otherwise capturing will most likely fail 191 CAPTUREBOX 1 2 Print to Tape This CaptureBox page takes care of the playback print to tape mode In this mode you can choose scene sequences from the hard drive and record themto a VTR Important Print to tape mode is available with DeckLink plug in only 1 2 1 Print to Tape Clip Inand Clip Out fields are automatically filled d 2 roo in with 00 00 00 00 and XX XX XX XX o Sep respectively where the second one stands for timecode zitt position of the last clip frame To change the values in am these fields use the numeric keypad or the black arro w E E PER buttons to the right Pressing the latter will enter the vee timecode of the current position in the slider below Duration 00 03 51 03 Pressing a red arrow button will position the file play Video File H Mpea2 PAL Discree head the slider to the corresponding timecode defined Audio File E E in the field Tape In B de The value in the Duration field is calculated ef e REC automatically Duration Clip Out Clip In When a file has been selected for printing to tape its name
411. ry Title etc Use the Add button to add these values as filtering conditions for splitting the playlists and respectively the Apply and Remove buttons to confirm the usage of the created conditions or to remove them Hmm ss House IDJ 4545 Category Test clip OR Start Time gt 12 00 00 34 AIRBOX Back in the first dialog select a template preset from the drop down list now you should have at least one built in the Template builder Press the browse button to point to the File to Import and click OK You can set the currently selected Templates folder and Template preset as default by pressing the Save as Default Template button Ill 1 5 2 Import of playlists with fixed width data fields In addition to the existing schedule import engine for tab delimited or CSV Comma Separated Values files a new schedule type will be available for import flat text with fixed width data fields For importing such playlists go to File menu gt Import playlist Then click the More button and choose the Fixed tab situated at the fourth uppermost horizontal bar to open the dialog below Playlist Template Builder Pick folder Template Fixed width tmpl v Load Save Pick SampleFile Validate MetaData Close Number of lines to skip 0 Comment None x ClearSample Change Font Date format dd MM yyyy Time Format HH mm ss Filter Delimited Fixed 26 66 86 21 66 6
412. s Encoded Frames 0 Restore default Cancel Belo w you can choose the encoding profile and level To the right is situated the Bu Rate Control field In it you can specify the bit rate mode Constant Variable or Constant Quantization Below are the specific bitrate values strings In the GOP structure area you can specify the GOP size N and the reference period M The Advanced Settings page contains more sophisticated options that should not be changed unless advised by our support team Pressing the Graphic Settings button will open the setup dialog of the DMT graphic layer filter This dialog contains three tabs Graphic Layer Scale and Output All settings in it require AirBox restart or at least pressing the Reset Hardware button in the main AirBox window to apply 119 AIRBOX The Graphic layer tab is used for service purposes so please do not change anything there The Scale and Output tabs are described in the Soft MPEG plug in description above gt Inthe Logo tab there are setu x several settings related to the logo and General Loge About subtitle insertion in the output E ee E In the General filed above you can SE Fadeinframe 1 H enable using logo and subtitles When both logo and subtitles are enabled a third check bo x becomes active Check M Logo on top to make sure the logo will not stay beneath the subtitles in case they overlap Below you can set the num
413. s E Countries Sequences Templates Expired fe ONE E Search Fields HH Search Clear V Global search Category is Making FileName contains Stuart Language begins with Stuart Little Costumes Making CINEMA Stuart Little Composition Toothbrush SL 36 Making CINEMA Stuart Little Composition Bed SL 37 Making CINEMA Stuart Little CG Failures Maki Bourne Identity The Making Mak 54 CINEMA Stuart Little 2 The Game Making CINEMA b oe ot eet Le Te IBILIA 213 DATABOX The search fields area could be shown or hidden in the GRID by pressing lt Ctrl gt F as well as by right mouse clicking on the grid and checking Search from the context menu A search inquiry line consists of the following cells Field a field fromthe entry description Title Type Genre etc Operator is means that the search result should be exactly the same as the keyword doesn t the search result should not be exactly the same as the keyword contains the result should contain the keyword does not contain the result should not contain the keyword begins with the result should begin with the keyword ends with the result should end with the keyword before the result should be before the keyword when the keyword is a date after the result should be after the keyword when the keyword is a date Value
414. s etc All this metadata is associated with every piece of visual program in DataBox Program Schedule Creation While on air playlists can be created and edited in AirBox ListBox is a full blown playlist editor with sophisticated editing features such as multi selection Excel export search print etc As opposed to AirBox ListBox does not require a special hardware platform in order to preview content and playlist ListBox is typically used by Program Editors to create playlists prior to airing time Content Playout AirBox pertorms content playout The on air programcan be started manually or automatically at particular time changed during the actual playback interrupted when switching to other sources and so on Various options provide redundant playout multi channel or multi audio subtitles etc 17 PlayBox system is designed to be easily used by everyone A special training course or deep knowledge in computers is not strictly required Anyone with basic computer knowledge will find using PlayBox modules as easy as 1 2 3 Moreover all modules share the same visual and logical concept in order to minimize mistakes and confusion Thus we hope to make the operator s learning process even easier once acquainted with some of the modules the others should look quite familiar In order to fully utilize the system s potential we recommend you to read carefully the following subchapters Each chapter is related to a particular
415. s ASSIgN Then click Configure to setup the input If there are more than one DeckLink boards installed on Audio Type Channels Mono All 1 Ste you system please select which of themto use for capturing Left the cue tones os E Cancel NOTE You cannot use the same DeckLink board for DTMF capturing and playback in the same time Belo w you can select which audio pair contains the cue tones and whether they are coming in the Left or the Right channel Click OK to save yoursettings When you are ready with the plug in setup you can go to the Commandstab to create the needed presets In this tab you have to specify what AirBox xi Commands Input Plugin should do upon receiving certain sequence of DTMF dal ul tones Commercials Start DTMF properties b Name Commercials Stat Enter a Name for the command and specify the orur wee DTMF sequence that will trigger it Then select Command lump to bookmark Z what should happen upon receiving this tone Bip number 147 i 1 Bookmark Commercials 15 00 sequence in the Command drop down list Most So 8 commands are self explanatory but there are several that need to be clarified Jump to Cue to when assigning this command you have to specify the Clip number to which it refers Reset resets the master counter in the main AirBox window equal to stop amp play command This event is executed between
416. s in the preview window i e file 1 can be displayed on monitor 3 etc or by using the blue arrows above the file list The files in the preview window are arranged horizontally in up to 4 rows of up to 4 files each This means that if there are 16 files in the bunch the most possible the first row will contain files 1 to 4 the second one will contain files 5 to 8 etc The MCreate TC file check box is situated at the bottom of the file list If you check this box a TC file will be created automatically saving you settings such as n and Out points file order etc Thus you will be able to use your settings again the next time you open the relevant file Position 00 00 02 17 Zoom 1 24 00 2 1 6 126 E D 4Channels T3_trailer ct avi 325 I 6 Clip Filters This tab provides information about the filters that participate in playing the current clip and an opportunity for changing the filters settings The Windows Registry contains a key Zones Shots HKEY_CURRENT_USER Software Digital Media Technologies a Propet Ltd PlayBox 2 0 DXPresets in which you could create your own Video Renderer e a Default DirectSound Device string values containing groups of preferred filters presets All a MacRae HPLC VANS filters of the currently selected preset are displayed in Filters page eo Gm There is a legend at the bottom of the page A Moonlight Elecard MPEG2 Demutiple The sign marks all filt
417. s that in ListBox you cannot view external preview window while in AirBox you could II 4 Settings menu As the Settings menu contains many playback related options here you will find most of the differences between the two modules II AT General In the General tab of this options dialog there are several fields that are not accessible in ListBox M Restart playback after this setting is always enabled O Enable remote IP control This functionality is related to remote control of playback As ListBox is intended for playlist preparation it is not needed here TC transmission options as they are related to on air subtitling they are not needed in ListBox In the Interface tab there are two options that are always enabled and inaccessible M Hide hardware Reset button as ListBox does not use any hardware this button is not necessary here M Overlay channel number this is the setting that allows overlaying the ListBox watermark in the background of the playlist grid As ListBox and AirBox look very similar it is always good to have it there so the operators can distinguish easily between the two applications The Skip Zones tab is not visible in ListBox 11 4 2 Modules AirBox Output tab here you can find a list of presets that will be used for file verification while building your playlists in ListBox All you have to do is choose the platform and file format you intend to use for playout in AirBox and do
418. s the stream can pass Time To Live To the right modify the buffer size depending on your needs Usually we recommend setting this size to 1316 7 UPD packets of 188 bytes If you have ore than one LAN cards in the machine specify which one should be used for the streaming Otherwise the stream will be output through all network connections Check M No capturing if you do not want to save the incoming streamto a file If you leave it unchecked CaptureBox will write the streamto an MPEG2 TS file M Use File splitting is active when CaptureBox writes the captured stream to a file i e LJ No capturing is not checked This functionality allows you produce chunks of files based on predefined periods You can adjust the period in seconds in the Split Time box below 182 CAPTUREBOX Op settings E 2 5 IP Capture a General This plug in is designed for capturing of MPEG2 Transport Host 127 001 Streams coming fromthe network The resulting file format Port 1234 is MPEG2 TS no re encoding takes place In the setup dialog enter the IP address of the sending SEN S Cancel machine and the port at which it streams If the incoming streamis MPEG2 Transport steam push the Stream Filtering button to select which streams should be left in the captured file In the middle of the Filtering dialog you can find a list of all Programs and Streams that were present in the incoming streamat the time of pressing the SetUp bu
419. scenarios when using bookmarks and DTMF GPI triggers combined When the bookmark Name is used as a reference 1 e the DTM F GPI command is Jump to bookmark Ifthere is a Time range specified in the bookmark s properties and the trigger comes within this time range AirBox will jump to this bookmark Ifthere is a Time range specified in the bookmark s properties and the trigger comes outside this time range AirBox will ignore the command 42 AIRBOX Ifthere is no Time range specified in the bookmark s properties AirBox will jump to that bookmark unconditionally at receiving the trigger tone pulse When the Time zone is used as a reference i e the DIMF GPI command is Jump to bookmark in time range Ifthe trigger comes within the time range AirBox will jump to this bookmark Ifthe trigger comes outside the time range AirBox will jump to the nearest following bookmark according to the systemclock WARNING Please make sure to set the Time zones correctly because at late arrival of the DTMF tone AirBox will jump SET Ctrl Alt 5 to the next bookmark thus possibly skipping ie event Ctri At C Wait event Ctrl Alk W some of the items that are situated between the uerger ap two bookmarks as in the following example Logo event Cato Ifa bookmark s Time zone is set From rine ge Des event LEO A 15 36 32 To 16 36 32 and the DTMF tone does Complex items not arrive AirBox could jump to
420. se for the sound you need You can open all Direct Show compatible sound files wav mp3 etc You can preview all sound tasks in the Event Manager using the Play and Stop buttons above Named Windows Event was developed to synchronize external applications to Title Box Thus if there is a third party application that can accept certain event names it can trigger events in other windows applications Each system event should have a Name You can loj x type it in the Event Name string Below you eene j have to choose the Action and the type of KE Initialization As system events are related to am T additional development please contact Set f Puse f Reset GE support playbox tv if you need further details X Cancel 260 TITLEBOX a SS gt GPI Manager this feature in TitleBox allows controlling objects through receiving certain signals on the PC COM ports In the GPI manager you can view all GPI events and the objects to which they have been assigned To specify the meaning of each signal at each COM port right click in an object and select Assign GPI Event gt Active Event Tally This function keeps you informed whether there is any graphics showing on the screen or not If there is at least one object that is being played a high pulse is sent to the specified COM port When there are no objects played the puke goes low Thus any external GPI device could b
421. second hand Be sure to place the hands ends on the exact centers of the relevant images Bear in mind that the clock object will be the same size as the image in the file It cannot be resized 275 TITLEBOX IV 5 5 Animation Properties The Sequence Property dialog box looks like this IT nis DAAI Gammell nZ I Key Color BR A J Range M Loop E E From D Start fio To 23 End fig Image 0000 Image 0001 Image 0002 Image 0003 Image 0004 Image 0005 Image 000G Image 0007 Image 0008 9 Image 0009 10 Image 0010 11 Image 0011 12 Image 0012 13 Image 0013 14 Image 0014 15 Image 0015 16 Image 0016 17 Image 0017 18 Image 0018 19 Image 0019 20 Image 0020 21 Image 0021 22 Image 0022 23 Image 0023 24 Image 0024 25 Image 0025 xl Count 50 Used 19 Loop 9 Duration 00 00 01 12 X Cancel on opaa e wh oO New button p allows creating a new sequence Open button _ loads a file seq or a sequence of files jpg jpeg tga bmp for an animated logo LI ax Look in S Sports ci E 100 80 R ee Football_new0032 tga e Football_new0043 taa Tee golfo004 taa a fe Football_new0033 tga E tga 2 golron0s tga Bilon Bitootball petz Fos Bitoctball pewftag Los golf0006 tga golfo B Football_new0035 tga BS football_new0046 tga 2 golf0007 taa golfo E Football_new0036 tga BS football_new004
422. specify the output Video Video Standard Flip Image Standard and correct the image orientation and PAL PE fields order Aspect Ratio gt Aspect Size Convertion Startegy gt 4 3 DI Best Fit fo cl NOTE M Flip Image and M Flip fields will affect all files in the playlist SK 2 Conca Aspect Ratio For example in case the default aspect is set to 4 3 and you have to play out clips with aspect 16 9 you can choose how the output video will looks like using the Aspect Size Conversion Strategy drop down menu The follo wing settings are available Best fit will keep the real size of the image Two horizontal black bars will be added above and under the video to fill up the re maining part of the screen The horizontal size of the video is preserved Balanced Letterbox the horizontal black bars will be smaller Small parts on the two sides of the video will be left out of the screen Full screen Zoom the horizontal size of the video will be preserved Video will be cut equally on the top and in the bottom Stretch using this setting there will be no black bars on the screen but a little change in shapes form Custom it is used for custom settings When select it the drop down boxat the right side of the Aspect Size Conversion Strategy box becomes available It allows you to adjust what part of the image and what part of the black bars will be visible in percentage For example
423. supported data providing plug ins You can use themto translate different types of data and display the information they contain in some of the TitleBox objects Please check the Data Source Manager section further below When thet Output aspect ratio is we we d x changed Title Box will automatically change the size x Ge of the objects according to the selected aspect All the aspect changes concerning one particular project are 768 g 576 133 3 listed as presets in the Display resolutions 1024 x 576 73 3 1354 x 576 235 3 dialog To open it press the l button The dialog to the right will appear It provides possibilities for fast Project display resolutions 3 switching between the different presets Pressing the ea button or by double clicking one of the rows will initiate an aspect change To delete a preset use the button 251 TITLEBOX The External aspect control button is pressed by default It is intended for automated switching of the aspect ratio according to an external source Such a source can be WSS present in incoming video for example The Objects list button kt shows a window with a list of all objects available in the current TitleBox project The Properties buttons fl 12 are object re lated They allow viewing or changing the properties of the currently selected object There are two types of properties Standard Properties that provide the standard object options
424. t opens a button menu Bookmark creates a single split point at the current playhead position You can change the Zone name Bookmark by default and timecode manually Simple skip zone creates a two point zone The first point is the current playhead position and the second is 5 seconds later by default You can change the Zone name and timecodes manually Advanced skip zone creates a four point zone The first point is set at the current playhead position By default the second point is 1 second later the third point is 5 seconds later and the fourth point is 6 seconds later You can change the Zone name Advanced Zone by default and timecodes manually o To add a next marker in the Zone press the Add Zone marker button It will add a marker 10 seconds after the last marker in that zone by default H To delete a marker fromthe Zone select it and press the Delete Zone marker button It will delete all markers except the first one which can be deleted only by deleting the whole zone To delete a Zone select it and press the Delete Zone button from the page or from the main window By pressing the Clock buttons you can choose a display mode of the markers 1 K Time shows exact timecodes in HH MM SS FF format LV SS Offset value shows the interval between the current marker and the first one Ou _ Duration shows the time difference between two consecutive zone markers 323 I 3
425. t stream you can choose between UDP and RTP CPU time factor similar to IP Pump in IP Streamer we use the CPU clock to generate the PCRs of the Transport Stream Enter the value from the stream analyzer in this spin box to compensate the inaccuracy of the CPU clock frequency M Flip fields if for some reason the fields order of your content is wrong check this dialog to rectify the output IMPORTANT The fields of all clips will be flipped so do not mix files with different field order in the same playlist Pressing the Encoder Settings button will open the setup dialog of the MainConcept MPEG 2 Video Encoder It consists of three tabs About Main Settings and Advanced Setting The Main Settings page contains basic stream settings In the MPEG Type drop down list are listed all MPEG video compression types available in the Main Concept encoder The Sequence drop down list provides two options for video scanning Interlace each frame divided into two fields and Progressive 25 29 97 whole frames per second MPEG Type wee DI Video Format PaL DI Sequence interlace DI Profile and Level main Profile Main Level D GOP structure I I Distance N 12 Bit Rate Control Mode Variable e Max rate Kb s en Avg rate Kb s 6000 Min rate Kb s 2499 I P Distance M 3 4 m Input info 7 Size 720 x 576 Framerate 25 00 fps Avarage fps 0 00 Statistic
426. t what data to be displayed in them by right clicking in the X Pe columns headers and selecting fromthe drop down list at ee TIP If there is an event in the playlist select Title to view its description Otherwise it will appear as a blank row in the playlist TIP You can change the positions of playlist items by drag n dropping them Besides you can copy playlist items by holding down the lt Ctrl gt key while dragging up down the playlist All missing clips that are not accessible from the relevant AirBox PC will be colored in red The currently playing clip is colored in green and the currently selected clip will appear in dark blue 336 I 3 Content Bin Playlists Folders The content bin occupies almost the entire WEI EEN lower part of the interface It contains two tabs Playlist and Folders You can drag n drop items from the bins to the AirBoxcontrol panels above EAmpeq2 lotampq _00 00 2 24 of In the Playlists bin you can manage all playlists available in the network and add items from these playlists in the control panels above In the web interface you will be able to see only the playlists contained in this tab Therefore add all playlist you d like to view froma remote location here NOTE The playlist editing rights in the web interface depend on the User account The D Add New playlist button will create a new tab in the Playlists bin while the Load playlist button will open the selected playlist i
427. tBox section for details 22 AIRBOX 1 4 Status Bar The status bar is located in the lowest part of the AirBox window Total Length 00 14 52 End at 11 30 04 Selection 00 05 01 IP Pump 1 A Total Length field shows the total playlist duration End At field shows the time when the playlist will end if not looped of course A question mark after Total Lengthand End At means that there are missing files in the playlist and their duration is included in the total duration i e the actual total length of the playlist is smaller and the end time is earlier than displayed You can choose whether the duration of missing files should be included or excluded in the total length by checking the relevant box in Settings gt General gt Missing Files gt M Show duration of missing files IMPORTANT In case there is a question mark in the Total Length and End At fields the displayed total duration and end time are NOT the real ones because the missing files will be skipped during the playback An exclamation mark after Total Length and End At means that there are missing files in the playlist but their duration is not calculated in the total duration i e the duration of missing files is regarded as zero duration in the playlist TIP t You can set AirBox to notify the presence of missing files in the playlist by blinking the Total Length and End at cells in red Besides an audio alarmcan be sounded through the
428. ta Source Manager allows users connect to different data providers through the selected plug ins The data source could contain text numbers graphics and other information This engine allows connecting different properties of a TitleBox object to different data sources or providers Besides the same data source s can be related to different objects in TitleBox The dialog below opens after pressing the Data Source Manager E Button m the main Title Box interface Data Source Manager Object DataSowce Le Update Cursor_ Otfset Effects a los Crawl 1 _ Crawl 2 Ei d Picture 1 ee Roll 1 Weather Data Provider 02 Roll 2 Weather Data Provider 01 ODEC Data Provider 01 BM Data Provider 01 HTML Table Data Provider 01 T Emergency Alert System EAS Data Provider 01 1 JRSS Atom Data Provider 01 SHTML Table Data Provider 02 ee Emergency Alert System EAS Data Provider 02 Weather Data ProviderO2 WindCo 20sec 10sec O The left part of this dialog contains a list of all objects in the current project The left part displays a list of already assigned data source instances To add a new data source instance press the Data Source Manager Add button BAL Data Provider 1 0 2 7 The list of currently available data provider i Emergency Alert System EAS Data Pro 1 0 2 7 plug ins will open In it you can choose the bey Provider 1 0 27 i FileLink Data Provider 1
429. tandard is set to NTSC but you have to play back a file which belongs to the PAL standard so me frame will be repeated in order to stuff up the frame number to 30 By analogy some frames could be skipped Standard corresponds to the 9 Very High quality from the Custom radio button Custom if chosen you have to select an item by your choice fromthe drop down list near this radio button gt Live Input tab ES Here is defined an additional video Logo Advanced AUX Source Live Inputs Al gt source if such is available This Live video Live Names Live Details livel ields source will be used further as a source for Sein Li nt into the playlist or Picture in Channels 2 ve event into the playlist or Picture ae Picture feature BitPeSample 1 gt Press the Add button and select the type of the Live input source It could be Capture Device Color or UDP After selecting the live source and entering its name press OK button and new Setting window will open depending on the type of the source NOTE This Live Input Name is entered into Live event settings or PiP settings in order to select a live video source Important The Name is key sensitive Press the Prop button if you want to change the settings for selected live source Press Rem button to remove the selected live source If the live is source is Capture device the follo wing window will open 105 AIRBOX Ml Mixed Li
430. tasthusanauiieeid datceuneesteaiasasidsanchenesaie 159 II 5 5 Media Folde S tege eege Eege gebei 161 Io COMMANDS MENU 162 we A EE 163 PLAQBOX KZG Ke L RE E E 164 V MULTI BACKUP MANAGER 6ssss sscsvacecasconcavecestensstevesconsescesseness 167 NI GETTING TARTE REN 167 Vil Ds TSIM GU OM eeina EE AEN EE TE 167 WT e 168 V 2 USER INTERFACE a eee 168 Vad The TOODO ee ee TE Eee ee ee Ee ere Pre ere eee err 170 V 2 2 The Master and Slave configuration fielde 173 V 2 3 The active switches monitoring Wwintdow cence eeceneeen scene 174 e PO VIC S T E A N A E 174 SHRED TA KE 175 L SEENEN 175 kle COC SG EE 175 ES CAPTURE SETTING eee eee non ee eee Ea 176 De E 176 Tee TICE WMV EE 178 V2 DeckLink E 179 loas DEAS erede E IS Oe ame bch EE 183 IL USER INTERFACE ee 184 II 1 CATTURE MODE sorar E 184 Tae DO S ere ere ate eReE eee 184 Ii e 188 Ha C exces E A E A E E ES 190 11 1 4 Using the Time Delay Instant Replay option TDIR 191 II 2 IR eaea ce r 192 Ud e 192 II 3 SEI EE Bl a E mre ee tere eee 194 Iad CICA GG E 194 U32 Lip Data Fields seenen E E 195 Iaa R5422 CONTO serie ee ee E OEA OER 197 TES ALIO TE 198 I KENE heeten 199 ISS FEMEN EE 199 TT 1 1 EE 199 II 1 2 EE 199 PLAQBOX II 1 3 Kramer Config sacs xstcsarueasnsinansachisanssncenigenriendeotntadauaneaaeetenitasa 199 II 1 4 OT Ee 199 Uo DIMT EE 200 ULLO P OTC ees 200 EE 201 II 1 6 EE 201 Me E EE 202 TYT 2 1 ER EE 202
431. tching between them will not appear seamless When checking the M Dump to File a browse dialog will open for you to select the location of the MPEG2 TS file to save the output stream In the lower part of this dialog you can view the status of the plug in The O Active box is checked only during playout To the right you can see information about the number of streamed bytes IMPORTANT There will be no Preview window available using this plug in Graphics insertion and Video Resize Control events are not possible NOTE Should you need more information about the ASI solutions and workflo ws in PlayBox please contact support playboxtv We will be glad to provide you with the latest available ASI info pack 110 AIRBOX I1 4 4 10 Deltacast ASI H 264 Streaming Output This is another optional plug in which G d uses MPEG 2 source files and streams poe themas MPEG 4 H 264 video There are Video standard Audio Encoder two tabs in this setup dialog In nee 7 AAC Encoder z the General tab specify the output Video F7 Automatic ee Standard When the TS Mux Rate spin sees box beco mes active you could select SH M Automatic or fix the Mux rate Fip Fields M Reset AitBox to make this option available f OK X Cancel M Flip fields if for some reason the fields order of your content is wrong check this dialog to rectify the output In order to choose an Audio encoder the user can select
432. te your own mattes for the text ee WW objects directly in the TitleBox work area They are true color with 256 level transparency Press the Create Shape button in the object palette and draw a rectangle in the work area By default an oval shape will appear in it and the object specific toolbar will appear under the standard ones ES Ellipse DE P AW Radius 78 SS Outline fis SS Ce WK Square FP i It provides a wide variety of editing options The drop down list of available shapes is situated to the far left The color palette next to it is designated for the background color You can select it fromthe available ones or create it on your own To the right of it there is another palette for the fill effects you can choose between None Gradient color or Texture Fill The fill and outline effects are same as in text objects so please check the Roll Crawl properties section in the manual above NOTE The background color serves as an alpha channel to the fill effect The background color and transparency will be mixed with the fill color and its transparency Use the Radius spin box to enlarge your objects or to make them smaller 286 TITLEBOX The follo wing spin box determines the Outline width The color palettes next to it are for the background color of the outline and its fill effects respectively Similar to the shape background and fill these will be mixed as well The Square check box in th
433. terface Input and Output Kramer S witcher Output Kramer Matrix Switcher output Leitch Matrix Switcher output Ocelot Switcher Output Te Box Net Control Output and VikinX Matrix Switcher output DIME Input Plug ins These plug ins read the DTMF tones received on the selected input device on your xl machine In Settings menu gt Modules gt dala ect Remote tab and select the DTMF Input Deer how EAR Plug ins row Then press the Configure ide Mpeg Input DiniSubli pMpeg i button The dialog to the nght will appear Go to the Input Plugin tab first to select the receiving audio device Currently there Available Inputs ao three oP tions Sound Car d Inp ut Udp Assigned Input Assign Configure Mpeg Input and Deck Link Input Sound Card Input Dimisubsoudcar E lt gt Sound Card Input This plug in is to be used for analog audio X Cancel Eerie x tones received on your PC sound card coming froman IRD for example Select this line and press Assign to load it Then press Configure to select the sound input device and configure it ne Mono check it if the incoming signal is mono F eme Left check it if the incoming audio signal is SSS stereo but you would like AirBox to read only the tones coming in the left channel Right check it if the incoming audio signal is stereo but you would like AirBox to read only the tones coming in the right channel M Device Select Realtek H
434. ternal event you add in the playlist Thus you will not have to enter the same values each time you create an event This offset will not appear in the playlist NOTE Do not forget to account for the pre roll event time when you set additional offsets in the events properties dialogs The offsets and the pre roll event time are summed up in runtime Network files restrictions C Allow The next field Network Files Restrictions is designed to specify the procedure at inserting files that are not saved locally in the AirBox machine This is a precaution option The playback could stop at network failure if all your content is remote or the playlist could end earlier if some Type of your files are locally stored and the network fails AirBox e TAAN will label all remote files as missing skip them and hence the end time of the playlist will be reduced by the duration of all missing files When Warn is checked the rows of all network stored files in the playlist will become dark green A note Remote file will appear in the Type column When Allowis checked you will not be notified whether your files are remote or locally stored Thus you will take the chance to trust your network If Reject is checked the rows of all network stored files in the playlist will become red brown when selected A note Rejected remote file Remote file will appear in the Type column These files are considered missing and will be ski
435. th another level or ungrouping the currently selected pairs or resetting all of them Grouping is convenient for simultaneous switching of all levels in a group 48 AIRBOX Double click over a level will open a dialog where you can define its name and the inputs and outputs numbers Note that you can not do this in Online mode While in this mode the switcher deals only with the existing levels To define inputs and outputs of the selected level mark and unmark the cross cells in the grid by single mouse clicking Double clicking on a column row header invokes a dialog for changin g its label If you want to delete all current commands at all levels use the Clear commands button Note that it works only in Offline mode If Auto refresh is checked the grid will automatically reflect the matrix status each time some of the switcher s Input Output buttons is pressed If not checked you can update this information manually by pressing the Refresh button When in Offline mode you can specify the delay precession of the event in milliseconds The corresponding strings are situated in the lower left part of the window Quartz matrix switcher Output As in all other switcher events properties you can rename the Inputs and Outputs in the interface for easier navigation Just double click in the Input Output you would like to rename and type its r new name ll x Contrat Mode Ze Offline Online
436. the GPI trigger will generate a pulse low or high user defined to the corresponding output pin for a short user defined period pulse duration 348 PLAQBOX According to the number of installed COM ports AirBox supports up to 16 GPE OUT triggers up to 8 COM ports with 2 GPI OUT triggers per port AirBox as a GPISlave A wide variety of AirBox actions can be associated to a GPI trigger o Start playback Pause Resume playback Stop playback Jump to next clip Jump to specific clip predefined playlist index Jump to specific location in the clip playlist predefined timecode Playlist reset during stop mode only Hardware reset terminates the playback Turn logo on Turn logo off Cue the selected clip Cue to specific clip Jump to bookmark in time range Jump to bookmark name O O O O O O OO OO 0 O AirBox as a GPI Master AirBox can activate a GPI trigger though specially designated GPI Output event Please check the following page for GPI Output reference AirBox GPI Settings Panel All GPI IN triggers can be assigned to a specific AirBox action From AirBox Settings gt Modules gt Remote Control select GPI Input enabled to allow the GPI IN trigger Press the Configure button to invoke a table for setting the COM ports GPI groups and the available actions for them All GPI OUT triggers can be activated by specific AirBox event From Settings gt Modules gt Remote Control select GPI O
437. the Title Box template project including the name of the template itself In the example in the screenshot above we have set four actions to be executed when the Category is Music Clip_Start_Show to show the clip title and performer when 5 of the clip duration have passed Clip_Start_Hide to hide the title and the performer when 20 of the clip have passed Clip_ End_Show same commands as in Clip_Start_Show but with 80 Action time offset to show the title and the performer at the end of the clip Clip_End_Hide same commands as in Clip_Start_Hide but with 95 Action time offset to hide the graphics when 95 percent of the clip have passed You can add more variables fromthe Metadata tab in the clip s properties dialog The preset value format for the metadata is metadata_MetadataName where MetadataName is the same as in the Metadata tab of the clip properties dialog in the first column Thus if the metadata name is Producer the preset value script will be metadata_Producer Now you can create an Action script that will send this information to TitleBox for example Producer txt metadata_Producer Metadata categories can also be used for changing the file links in picture and sound objects in TitleBox Thus you could control which picture s sound s should appear over each video clip Let us assume that in one of the rows in the Metadata tab we have typed new picture E Pictures pic A Fantastic
438. the above settings are reapplied ONLY after restarting AirBox or pressing the Reset Hardware button The tabs in the lower part of the window contain specific filter settings that should not be changed The description below is only for your reference Graphic Layer Scale Output WSS About Settings About Settings About Settings 4 gt The Scale page provides M Scale Transition M Source Rect options for resizing the Destination rect P 8 Left jo pixels Speed E fr Left fo pixels video on the output The EE EE EE Scale Transition filed width O pixels j Motion 0 linear Width fo pixels SS contains seven spin boxes Height O pises 2 Color Sieh Height Opies E and a Color palette The Scale Reset Set Source Rect latter is used to define the En 1 See Ade b Y background color that will Zeen Esch S Half Screen Da Antialising Surround the resized video 720 Ea bo Left the distance from the a left margin of the screen Coo EA measured in pixels Top the distance from the top margin ofthe screen in pixels Width the horizontal size of the video in pixels Height the vertical size of the image measured in pixels Speed is the time for transition fromthe original image size to the scaled image size measured in frames Alpha use this spin boxto set the transparency of the scaled video It has 256 levels where 0 means totally transparent an
439. the following Acappella switcher output Ctrl Alt E item in the playlist at 16 36 32 If the DTMF PRESSE ARDE kikca g DTMF Output Ctrl Alt D tone arrives at 17 00 00 AirBox will jump to the Elpro Switcher Output HAAG next bookmark in the playlist that has a later eer GUAR S g Kramer Switcher Output Ctrl Alt K Time zone thus skipping some of the clips that Kramer Matrix Switcher Output Ctrl altem are between the two bookmarks Leitch Matrix Switcher Output Ctrl Alt H NetworkElectronics switcher output Ctrl Alt N NetSender Output Ctrl Alt E WARNING DO NOT use fixed time events Ocelot Switcher Output Ctri Alt E h b k k 9 ti 1 Quartz Matrix Switcher Output Ctrl Alt oQ within a bookmar S time range TitleBoxNetCtrl Output Ctrl Alt T VideoResizectrl Output Ctrl Alt Z Vin Matrix Switcher Output Ctrl Alt X e Event there are two types of events in GEN Geen relation to AirBox internal and external Walt Event They are separated by a thin line above Type d d aus are listed the internal events and below are Wait Until the external ones The supported nternal Events are as follows Stop event Inserting such an event in the playlist will stop the playback automatically at reaching this point in the playlist This function is useful for news and other interactive sessions Stop Cue event Automatically stops the playback at reaching this point of the playlist and shows the f
440. tia About contains more sophisticated options that Pae eaa should not be changed unless advised by our e A e HE AAC v2 support team m MPEG Version r Header Type MPEG 2 C Raw Ze MPEG 4 Ze ADTS Pressing the Audio Encoder Setting i tems button will open the MainConcept s AAC iniiis Encoder properties dialog The Bitrate Control specifies the average output audio bitrate the Profile sets the object type and the Header type sets the output bit stream format raw or with ADTS headers Check M High frequency cut off to reduce the encoded data Pressing the Multiplexer Settings button will open the MainConcept Multiplexer properties dialog You can view the parameters of the output MPEG 2 TS stream in it 11 4 4 11 Stradis MPEG 2 Output The Stradis set up dialog contains five tabs ja ee EE ay eneral Audio Video treaming related to the different features of the Cas g Wideo Standard output signal men 25 RGBHY sl x Cancel In the General tab you can find the Semen Moe iene follo wing settings pO casein a None ingle Field In Fause 7 Video standard to define the SE fv Endin Blid output standard PAL NTSC Auto HD Mo S Gute the list of available standards is hardware p ef Cup dependant Logis WM Limit Buffer 0 5 1 Secs P zj Synch Mode active only when no a 7 WSS Enable Output Aspect Ratio file 1S open C43 Ge 16 9 M Overlay Preview
441. ting at them A V sion in front of a given Source location means that it is currently accessible Ax sign in front of a Source location means that it is currently inaccessible When a source location is being transferred a symbol representing the currently executed action appears in front of it A colored bar in its line displays the progress of transfer Along the lower mid window is situated a colored bar that represents the distribution of the storage Destination location space The blue section stands for Used space the yellow one the space needed for transfer of the selected offline content and the green one represents the free space which will remain after the trans fer SafeBox could perform all necessary actions manually or automatically Set this in the Options menu after pressing the Options button The supported General options are listed in the first tab to open M Lock destination files until copying is finished this check will not allow A irBoxto start playing out a file that is currently being copied This will prevent unexpected end of the video when the copied part of the file is over M gnore older files this means Do Not Copy Older Files Thus if the same file has different last modified date on the Source and the Destination folder and the Source file is older SafeBox will not copy it to the Destination SafeBox will log a message every time a newer file is replaced with an olde
442. to it opens a browse dialog box where you can specify a hard disk and a folder for storing the clip Under the field you can see information about the free E 22 30 00 1311034 disk space on the selected hard drive CH End 2245 00 13 Nov 2003 The Channel field contains information about the TV Duration 007500 Ges channel which will be captured You can select it from the list of available channels in the left string or create ee WE Weekly it in the field next to it Comet SSS Pressing the satellite Gi button opens a dialog box in Title Movies_002 D which you can create the list of up to 16 channels You File Name Movies_002 can add a new channel by double clicking in an empty SE line and typing the channel name Start time End time specify the initial and the final Crash Capture Zi Prepare Capture time respectively NOTE These must be in 24 hours time format AM PM is not supported 195 CAPTUREBOX Duration Its value is automatically calculated by subtracting Start from End values Date the capture starting date Type defines the frequency of capturing once every day or every week Comment contains a description or a comment concerning the particular scene sequence The Clip Name field contains the name of the clip you re going to capture If you leave the field empty it will be automatically filled in with the corresponding file name The LocKbutton
443. to refresh box automatically displays the changes made in the currently loaded text file even during its play out 269 TITLEBOX IV 5 3 Roll Craw Properties There are three groups of properties for these objects common text attributes continuity mode and queue options and dynamic speed properties The first two are controlled through object specific toolbars while the third one can be set in the specially designated dialog box Continuity and Queue mode When a crawl roll object is selected single click the following string appears in the last row of the toolbar a Speed 2 Loop jo as m ds Biso 1E The gear wheel button opens the Embedded Objects list This list xi refers to pictures OLE objects inserted in the Crawl Roll see the common attributes description below You can set an auto refresh peel Pier FE Le period using the arrows Press the clock button in the upper left TIER corner to activate this function Thus if you update the original file SE picture OLB it will be refreshed automatically in your Title Box Invert Aplha Update From File project In addition clicking the right mouse button on an object in the list will invoke a context menu containing several useful options Update OLE only Size you can set custom size to your embedded object Full size display the original size of the object Invert Al pha inverts object s alpha channel Update from file
444. tons are used for testing the connection with AirBox Pressing the Machine button will bring up the input dialog box for the network address The green lights in front of it mean that the connection with AirBox is established If the lights are red the AirBox is not accessible a sign Disconnected will appear in the status bar The New Player button activates a kind of virtual player used for testing the execution of commands Connected to 127 0 0 1 1 TIP Check Appendix 3 at the end of this user s manual for complete VDCP Commands Implementation Chart 166 AIRBOX V Multi Backup Manager Multi Backup Manager MBM is designed for backing up multiple playout channel simultaneously Also known as n m redundancy MBM allows the user to choose the number of backup systems example 4 backups for 12 on air channels reducing overall system cost while maintaining system integrity MBM monitors user defined lists with AirBox Masters and Slaves applications If a Master is non responsive for two seconds it will be automatically replaced by a Slave AirBox Thus in case of failure MBM will replace any non responsive Master AirBox The user can assign a preferred Slave AirBox to each one of the Master AirBoxes The playback status of all Masters is continually monitored MBM keeps track of the playlist the last playback status and position of all Master AirBoxes In case of failure the last known state
445. tor per channel plus a common ground which is relatively cheap easy to arrange but susceptible to interference hence the distance limitation RS 422 Not to be confused with 4 2 2 sampling or 422P MPEG this is a standard for serial data communications defined by EIA standard RS 422 It uses current loop balanced signalling with a twisted pair of conductors per channel two pairs for bi directional operation It is more costly than RS232 but has a high level of immunity to interference and can operate over reasonably long distances up to 300m 1000 ft R RSS is a family of Web feed formats used to publish frequently updated content such as blog entries news headlines and podcasts in a standardized format An RSS document which is called a feed or web feed or channel contains either a summary of content from an associated web site or the full text RSS makes it possible for people to keep up with web sites in an automated manner that can be piped into special programs or filtered displays SS S W Software The instructions executed by a computer as opposed to the physical device on which they run the hardware The term was coined by the eminent statistician John Tukey Programs stored on non volatile storage built from integrated circuits e g ROM or PROM are usually called firmware m F n n Synonyms computer program program code System Clock Reference 364 PLAQBOX Abbreviation The
446. ts xml Edit view Settings Tools Commanc New PlayList Ctrl N Load playlist Ctrl 0 Append playlist Ctrl Alt Ins Insert playlist Ctrl Ins Import playlist Ctrl I Save playlist Ctrl 5 Save playlist as Alt 5 Save daily playlist Ctrl Q Print playlist Ctrl P Export playlist as XLS Export logs in XLS files Export capture list Reload graphic rules Rescan File durations Exit Alt F4 WARNING Loading a playlist on the currently playing AirBox window will stop the playback A warning dialog box will appear each time you try to doso Ill 1 3 Append playlist This item appends another playlist to the end of the currently loaded playlist lll 1 4 Insert playlist x Templates Folder This menu item inserts another playlist c Program Files Common Files DMT E in the currently loaded playlist above Template preset test template exe the currently selected row IL TA Import playlist Using this feature you can import a third party playlists in AirBox II 1 5 1 Import tab delimited file wi Always remember last usec Save as Default Template Start time tolerancefseconds E Default delimiter Tab ze Video Format PAL e Action Load File to Import C Documents and Settings Teddy Dest v Save daily playlists This menu item allows importing all kinds of tab delimited text files All you have to do is tel
447. ts Icons Process Priority f D D i D D Idle Normal Highest Ce New File Last Used Open File Default x Cancel border View Grid Grid color check the box to see the grid and select its color The grid is very useful when you size up the objects Snap to Grid check this box to align the objects in the project to the grid Use the X and Y spin bo xes to define the distance between two neighboring points in the grid Max Undo Count specify the number of latest actions to be saved in the undo history Please note that the higher number here means higher memory usage NOTE There is no undo when deleting objects Show Objects Icons check this box to enable showing the objects icons in the upper left corner of each object in the work area Process Priority this slider will affect all other programs running on the system Please do not change the default setting unless advised H Startup gt Network Options x St Output These options are used for interaction between TitleBox and AirBox Tiebox ChanneliD f S TitleBox Channel ID TitleBox s channel ID it o D corresponds to AirBox Settings gt M odules gt Remote control Title Box Net Control gt Configure Channels Port select a network port 262 TITLEBOX gt Output Options Here you can set the aspect ratio of the output The default setting is Square pixel The slider below camel fie determi
448. tton As IP stream filtering options are identical to the ASI stream filtering p lease check the ASI section above for further details 183 CAPTUREBOX ll USER INTERFACE CaptureBox 08122004 cap lol x File wiew Capture Help Capture Print to Tape Schedule Status Tape In Dal Mode Tie Comment Folder C Program Files Digital Media T e 123 14 29 45 05 14 29 55 12 VA file006 Free disk space 8754 MB ei e 123 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 M file007 CS 123 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 VA file008 Tape ID fi23 Li Gs 123 16 05 00 00 16 06 00 00 VA file009 In 00 00 00 00 sl Out fo0 00 00 00 x Duration 0000 00 00 Clear Comment Title fle009 al File Name file009 w el x Sync Sort L Capture a el H Clone ea Delete Add to List Clear Clip Compensation Setup Device Select xt 00 z 00 S 00 x 00 Auto Capture Manual Capture Sample Driver video Standard PAL E Abort II 1 Capture Mode When the Capture Page is active the module is in Ce 39 File View Capture Help record mode In this mode you can choose a batch of scenes from tapes collect them in the batch capture list or record every single scene manually froma VTR Status Tape in era News N7 mmmmmm M I1 1 1 Batch Grid Capture Print to Tape Schedule The automated batch capture grid occupies a large Capture Print to Tape Schedule
449. tudio higher quality end of the market Sampling is 4 2 2 to give enhanced chroma resolution useful in post production processes e g chroma keying Four 16 bit audio tracks are provided DVD Digital Versatile Disk a high density development of the compact disk It is the same size as a CD but stores upwards from 4 38 GB of actual data seven times CD capacity on a single sided single layer disk DVDs can also be double sided or dual layer storing even more data The capacities commonly available at present DVD 5 Single side single layer 4 38 GB DVD 9 Single side dual layer 7 95 GB DVD 10 Double sided single layer 8 75 GB DVD 18 Double sided dual layer 15 9 GB DVD 5 and DVD 9 are widely used The double sided disks are quite rare partly because they are more difficult to make and they cannot carry a label DVD Video This combines the DVD optical disk with MPEG 2 video compression for recording video on a CD sized disk and has multi channel audio subtitles and copy protection capability To maximise quality and playing time DVD Video uses variable bit rate VBR MPEG 2 coding where the bit rate varies with the demands of the material Field One half of a complete picture or frame interval containing all of the odd or even scanning lines of the picture Frame Video The combination of two sucessive fields Therefore two fields equal a frame Film One image or picture on a motion picture film The sin
450. two clips and does not affect the playback 81 AIRBOX Hardware reset resets the hardware platform WARNING This command will interrupt the playback After resetting the hardware AirBox willremain in Stop mode Cue same as the Cue button in the main AirBox interface this command will pause the playback on the first frame of the currently selected clip in the playlist WARNING This command will interrupt the playback Jump to bookmark in time range this command applies only to bookmarks that have some Time zone specified in their properties AirBox will not care about the bookmark s names There are two possible occasions when working with this command Ifthe cue tone arrives within the Time range specified in the properties of any bookmark in the playlist AirBox jumps to the relevant bookmark according to current system time Ifno bookmark in the playlist has Time range that includes the time of arrival of the cue tone AirBox ignores the command IMPORTANT Please make sure not to create bookmarks with overlapping time zones Otherwise AirBox will jump to the first bookmark in the playlist that is assigned for the relevant time zone Jump to bookmark this command uses bookmarks names for reference You must specify the Bookmark name in the string below so AirBox would know where to jump There are two possible occasions when working with this command a If there is a Time range specified in the book
451. types of tab delimited te xt files into the batch grid You will have to create templates to tell CaptureBox what is the structure of your tab delimited file i e what information does each column contain 185 CAPTUREBOX Pressing the Delimited List Import button will open a dialog for you to specify the template to use when loading your file The Template preset drop down list contains all the templates stored in the Template Folder see the Template Builder description below RE Select the Action you would like to execute from the drop down list You can either Insert Append or Load the file The latter action will delete all previously loaded entries in the batch grid Finally browse for the file you would like to import using the selected template and click OK NOTE The OK button will not be active until you fill in all the strings in this dialog At opening this dialog for the first time you will have to create a template first First select the Template Folder all the templates you create will be stored there until you change it Templates Folder Eu ZS Template preset flog import DI Mor Start time tolerance seconds jo ES Save as Default Template Action Load DI File to Import JE UK DMT_keys_Robert_Lynch txt i i Push the More button to open the Template Builder loxi sf OK X Cancel Tmpl Folder Template fexcel gt Load Save Pick Sample Fil
452. u add the same clip to another playlist it will appear un trimmed there A detailed description of Clip Trimmer can be found further in this user s manual If the use of Clip Trimmer is not enabled the clip s properties dialog will open 30 AIRBOX I1 8 4 Right click Right mouse click over a row invokes a pop up menu of playlist and events commands Add gt gt Add activates a drop down list for emm e ft appending various items to the end of the aoe At Space B Dummy clip Ctri At D D D oop playlist See their detailed description in the SE Incomplete dip Ctri Akt P i 3 S A Q Live stream Ctrl Alt L Edit menu section further in this manual Cut Ctri x D e gt Insert opens a drop down list for oi coy eb Bookmark inserting various items before the currently gege Een x selected item in the playlist The Add and Properties Ctrl Enter Insert drop down lists are identical gt Delete deletes the selected playlist row s a dialog asks confirmation before the deletion gt Jump click it to interrupt the currently playing clip and jump to the currently selected highlighted item in the playlist gt Loop marks the selected clip for repeating until this option is cancelled To remove the check just right click in the clip and choose Loop again NOTE This action differs fromthe Clip Loop button S which loops the currently playing clip not the currently selected one
453. uble click to assign it In the Remote tab you can enable the events plug ins you intend to use in AirBox and configure them If AirBox and ListBox are running on the same server these settings will be shared between them Please check the AirBox section for external events description The Logo tab and the TC tab are not relevant in ListBox therefore they are disabled 247 IL A3 Output As ListBox uses the Mixed Software plug in this menu item will always display the output settings of this module Please check Settings menu gt Output gt Soft Mixed plug in in the AirBox section above for details II 5 Tools menu The Tools menu is identical to the AirBox Tools menu Please check the relevant section above for details II 6 Commands menu The commands menu contains some playback related and logo related commands As they are identical to the AirBox commands please check the relevant section above for details IL Helo menu IL A7 About Clicking this menu item displays the About box of the ListBox module It contains useful information about the module version WIBU Box number license type registration etc UL 23 Help This menu item opens the ListBox context sensitive help It is still under development ll 7 3 PlayBox Doctor Choose it to start a tool that collects automatically data about your system and current setting in order to provide you with proper support All you have to do is fill in the
454. using with the same dimensions as VHS E DAT Video CD Media File Discrete Cosine Transform widely used as the first stage of compression of digital video pictures DCT operates on blocks of the picture usually 8 x 8 pixels resolving them into frequencies and amplitudes DCT itself may not reduce the amount of data but it prepares it for following processes that will do so JPEG MPEG and DV compression depend on DCT Desktop Windows Desktop The area of the screen in graphical user interfaces against which icons and windows appear Synonyms background screen background DirectDraw The DirectDraw feature for Microsoft Windows CE NET is the component of the DirectX application programming interface API that allows you to directly manipulate display memory the hardware blitter hardware overlays and surface flipping DirectShow DirectShow is an architecture for streaming media on the Microsoft Windows platform DirectShow provides for high quality capture and playback of multimedia streams It supports a wide variety of formats including Advanced Systems Format ASF Motion Picture Experts Group MPEG Audio Video Interleaved A VI MPEG Audio Layer 3 MP3 and WA V sound files DTMF Dual Tone Multiple Frequency or touch tone It is a tone consisting of two frequencies superimposed Individual frequencies are chosen such that it is easy to design filters and easy to transmit the tones through a telephon
455. ustom properties could be s a included in xml import export of DataBox 226 DATABOX 1 3 Options Options dialog box allows defining useful settings as well as defining some defaults It contains several pages General Grid HouseID and Default Values 11 3 1 General Data Base displays the currently z Options e ll e General Grid HouselD Default values Export Import Database TCI import _4 gt active database If you want to change it Auto insert Settings press the DrOWS button to the right aoe Template DEFAULT sl e Bec IMPORTANT The server station Ces es d 1 Date format l which will host the database GDB file General Production date P a a ie Convert file names to UNC format should have the hard drive shared as a C veer E Gk production date titer Hie sin gle letter d C etc C YYYY MM After kill date expired notify D e C YYYY MM DD m Fields to Airbox notes For example if your GDB file is on C YYYY DD MM drive D it should be shared EXA CTLY C DD MMAYYYY MM DDZYYYY MMAYYYY Separator as D Windows XP tends to make the default share names explanatory i e D on PC Name so you have to be careful with that Auto insert check it M to make JS OK Cancel auto insertion of files into the database when creating new records through drag n dropping files Template y
456. utput enabled to allow the GPI OUT trigger After that you can Add Insert GPI Output event in the playlist by nght mouse clicking 349 PLAQBOX RS232 9 pin D S UB pinout reference P Name Description Direction 4 DTR DataTerminalReady Out 5 GND SystemGround 6 DSR DataSetReady n 8 CTS In Clear to Send 9 RI RingIndicator GPI INPUT Reference Triggers that control AirBox Title Box and CaptureBox GPI Input GPI 1 D GPI 2 GPI 3 OOOO R O o GPI 4 GPI OUTPUT Reference Pulses sent out from AirBox and Title Box GPI Output GPI 1 TR GPI 2 350 PLAQBOX APPENDIX 2 Events Offset Behavior The events behavior can be affected depending on some specific situations that might occur during playback Please check the following cases to ensure proper event operation p When jumping on an event a If the event has a negative offset it is executed immediately b If the event has zero or positive offset it is executed on time 2 When jumping before an event a If the event has an offset before the jump to point the event is executed immediately b If the event has an offset after the jump to point the event is executed on time 3 When jumping after an event a If the event has an offset before the jump to point the event is not executed b If the event has an offset after the jump to point the event is executed on time 4
457. utton Thus each time this tone sequence appears on the PC sound card CaptureBox will execute the selected command NOTE The DTMF reader operates only in Capture mode It will not execute commands while CaptureBox is running in Print to Tape or Schedule mode Preferences Video Standard PAL J Start in system tray JV Create TCI file IT Stop Capture on YTR ServoLock Lost Jf OK X Cancel IIIe Preferences The preferences dialog box consists of three pages In the General page you can check the current video standard which depends on the selected plug in The video standard can be changed in the specific set up form of the plug in if the relevant plug in supports this functionality The current video standard is also displayed in the bottom of the main CaptureBo x window If you want CaptureBox to start minimized check M Start in system tray 200 CAPTUREBOX NEW TCI files are automatically generated during capturing They contain information about the tape ID In and Out time code on the tape as well as clip duration and notes on the captured files Most of this information can be imported in DataBox for automated creation of new records in the database Please check the TCI Import section in DataBox gt Options description The time codes in tci files can be read by the Clip trimmer for subtitling purposes If you do not need them uncheck M Create TCI files which is checked by default
458. utton You will receive a message if the connection is successful There are two advanced options available for choosing the proper behavior if the RSS feed is not reachable or if there is no data Check the first check box into Advanced area if the RSS feed is not reachable but you want to see the old data in the relative TitleBox object Check the second check box if there is no any data in RSS feed but you want to have some text into related TitleBox object like No data available or please excuse us Ete Press Apply button to accept the settings Press Close button to close the window without changes 312 TITLEBOX VI 5 XML Data Provider Choosing this plug in allows you to insert data into TitleBo x object from an xml file Choose it from the list of available plug ins and press Add button The following window will open Into XML field enter the location of the xml file Into XSL field enter the location of the related xs1 xsIt file Instance Configuration af An XSL eXtensible Stylesheet Language file is XML D Demo lArrival xml XLS D Demo Arrival_tranform xsl O Treat first row as header Engine OEB O Use out of process transformation SS needed for defining XML document transformation and presentation Since the XML language does not use predefined tags it is necessary to provide the application with information on how to interpret the XML document In TitleBox
459. utton to open a browse dialog to locate the clip Let us have a look at the clips description below The first three columns need no explanation but the last one is very important The Truncate column contains info on whether this clip can be truncated or not you can change YES NO by double clicking in the relevant cell This is important because if you have let s say 2 minutes gap and all the clips in the auto fill category are longer than 2 minutes and all of them cannot be truncated there will be a conflict None of the clips will be played out and the default auto fill will be executed instead NOTE When playing auto fill categories AirBox will look for clips that can be played out as a whole then for clips that can be truncated Thus if you have a two minute gap and the auto fill category contains Clip 1 with duration 3 00 Truncate YES Clip 2 with duration 2 05 Truncate NO Clip 3 with duration 1 50 Truncate YES NO AirBox will playout Clip 3 first because it can be played out to its end and then Clip 1 because it can be truncated This comes to illustrate that 132 AIRBOX the order of clips in the category can be changed automatically depending on the gap size To delete a clip fromthe current category select it and press the Delete selected clip button If you want to remove the entire category press the Delete category button lll 4 10 Fixed time event When there is more than one fixed time event i
460. variety of colors fo 3 2 3 fj Inthe Gradient properties dialog fix the Base Line Char Caps Position desired settings fo a Normal Normal X S l xl Set Default vo Cancel Le Ane JW ei Cancel Centex 30 Gi Open Center 18 Se Save Choose a Style for the gradient from the drop down list In the square field to the left drag the cursor to change the gradient positioning In the rectangle below define the gradient colors and their initial points Place the plus sign cursor in the desired position and click A black triangle will appear in that position to mark the currently selected point All other marks will become white Style Scale 100 271 TITLEBOX Double click on the black triangle to invoke the Color setting dialog Modify the color for this color change point at your will and click OK Back in the Gradient properties dialog you can change the position of the point by dragging it Besides you can add as many color change points in the gradient as you like Finally click OK x Pressing LP invokes the Paragraph formatting dialog box es where you can set all paragraph formatting options fet ae z 1 Left Indent First Line Space Before ui Wee buttons to the right concern the G We mm car ps to view a transparency background during editing in the aie ete See preview area Gu amp Jbwsx zu S The follo wing fields in the toolb
461. ve Settings Bela Into Video Device field select a device froma Name Live list of available for this workstation devices Video In the Video Format field select a video format Device Deckink Video Capture v from the list Format 720 x 486 29 97 16 bits zs If it is needed check the Flip Fields checkbox Filip Fields Into Audio area select the audio device and audio gee Device Decklink Audio Capt format of a live source i ecklink Audio Capture v Format pE EH If the selected live source is Color the dialog for setting a color will appear You have to specify values for the three main colours Red Green Blue in order to define your preffered colour If the selected live source is UDP a dialog for entering an IP address and port number appears Settings gt AUX Source tab There are settings for using an additional video Advanced AUX Source Live Inputs About 4 gt source There are three possible AUX sources lee PIP with Video Use Second Flip previously prepared file you need to enter d Events Source Audio Fields its location O File j UDP stream enter the IP address and port EE live video video signal coming from Live E pe a Input as it is defined in Live Input settings 3 wm OK XM Cancel window Here you have to enter the name of rie the live source exactly like it is entered in the Live input window The additional video source is usually used for creati
462. ve only if the M Multicast box is checked The higher the TTL value the longer the packets will live and pass through more routers By default it is 1 which is enough for local networks In the Buffer Size field you can specify the size of the IP packets to be sent along the network It should be multiple of 188 bytes which is the size of an MPEG 2 TS packet The Advance time value represents the maximum time for buffering before initiating the streaming Use the M Dump to file checkbox is for recording the playlist to a file M Fixed Mux Rate This check forces the plug in to output a stream with fixed bit rate This is done through zero packets also known as stuffing packets Applicable only for transport stream output Protocol now RTP is supported along the UDP protocol RTP is considered a more professional choice because of the time stamping in the packets headers Applicable only for transport streams Packet Dispersion Quality as the name states this forces the plug in to output better dispersed packets This means that the jitter will be much lower thus producing a more professional stream Bettershould comply with the standard MPEG 2 Real Time Interface Specification ISO IEC 13818 9 65 If you have multiple channel licenses specify their number in the spin box in the bottom of this dialog Thus you will be able to see the same number of IP pump plug ins in Settings gt Module s gt Output By
463. vent but with zero duration AirBox is playing the clip situated before the complex event in the playlist 5 seconds before its end Event C will be executed Two seconds later 3 seconds before the clip s end Event A will be executed Three seconds later the clip ends and the next clip in the playlists starts playing Two seconds after its beginning Event B will be executed 139 AIRBOX IL A 123 Graphic Rules The information contained in the AirBox playlist can be displayed automatically over the video output through the TitleBox Net Control functionality The main application of this feature is at music channels to display the performers names and songs titles First of all you have to create a TitleBo x temp late with the objects that will display the information contained in the playlist In the example below we have created TB_Music tmpl It contains a background picture we called this object Background a text object for the performer s name called Star and a text object for the song s title called Title 3 Once the template is created JV Use graphic rules for current AirBox Rules ee and av ailab le in the te mplates H L la a RE check movie fo ld er s CC Tit leBo X EL Music Vide Ek Offsetters AA Search_M NetControl description in the seas Edit menu section above go Eb Media D Gre Vie to AirBox Settings menu gt Lees Graphic rules Se P Param Notes
464. view mode is outlined in blue You can change this color in Project menu gt Options gt General tab 250 TITLEBOX 1 2 Toolbars The Toolbar is designed to facilitate the project management individual object control as well as object ordering and align ment JOS x oax w SF D Se l amaj a anake o One 2 Name t F LS Ce S By Da 2 LI z t e 317 e y 178 wi E IN Iin Cut None The New Open and Save buttons correspond to the relevant commands in File Menu The Cut Copy Paste and Delete buttons correspond to the relevant commands in Edit Menu ua Paste as Copy In Slide will create a new instance of the object that is copied in the clipboard Unlike simple Paste that creates a new object Paste as Copy does not create objects All changes applied to the originally copied object will be applied to all its instances The Select Display device l button opens the list of available hard ware drivers from which you can select the one to work with See also the corresponding section in the Project Menu description TIP If you want to change the driver before its initialization hold down lt Ctrl Shift gt during TitleBox startup to open the Driver select dialog 0s i The ZOOM spin boxallows resizing the work area so you could see the whole project at a glance It is very useful for viewing HD projects 3 This button opens the Data Source Manager window It contains all
465. w ZEN missing i The IN OUT and Duration strings egen X Call z New contain the IN point OUT point and clip duration data You can change these values in order to make your clips 58 AIRBOX shorter The Duration is calculated automatically fromthe IN and OUT values Besides if you change the Duration the OUT point will adjust accordingly If there is information about the timecodes of the first and last frame in the clip you can check TC Value check box and than into IN and OUT strings you will see these timecodes The TC field is necessary when there are subtitles to be displayed together with the clip as time code is the reference for displaying them If you change the TC value it will be saved in the playlist for future use When using subtitles you should also enter a Tape D value read more in the SubtitieBox section further in this manual You can view and edit the File type Starand Category information in the relevant strings The colored square next to the Category string represents the color which will be displayed in the Category column of the playlist You can change this color by double clicking in the square Use the Notes string to type your notes about the clip Program ID is checked when the stream is MPTS it could be a live MPEG2 stream coming from the network ora file Type the Program ID for example 12060 not the number of the program i e not 1 2 or 3 If you are going to playback a clip while
466. will receive allcommands coming from AirBox units in the local area network and will control the switcher accordingly Currently we can offer switcher servers for Kramer matrix switchers VikinX matrix switchers Elpro switchers and Quartz matrix switchers The setup principles are similar for all of them IMPORTANT When using a matrix server you have to start it first before running the AirBox channels that will send commands to it TitleBox NetControl Output This is actually a set of events which is used to manage objects in TitleBox It could be a TitleBox object which you d like to control from AirBox or a command for controlling a currently 50 AIRBOX open project in TitleBox ora eer combination between them For a complete description of AirBox with TitleBox integration see Appendix 4 Template Cortral Global Control Play Stop ClearScreen of TheBorg Ce Play Provect Play Template Project ce Single Object The TitleBox Control Wizard appears after selecting Edit Add Insert gt Event gt TitleBox NetCtrl Output It will guide you through creating a TitleBox Net Control Output event Follow the instructions and select the TitleBox project and or object and the desired action You can evoke the Wizard also by right clicking on a playlist row and selecting the relevant command from the drop down menu Add nsert Event gt If you press the Advanced button in the left lower corner o
467. wing format clip_title n Then create a script to send this information to Title Box Next text clip_title 1 Where Next is the name of the text object in TitleBox and 1 is the index off setter to show the title of the following clip Moreover a bookmark can be used as a reference for presenting information about an item in the playlist Let us assume that the Bookmark name is Test and you want to display information about the title of the following clip Then the descriptor value should be clip_title BM_Test1 To display the start time of an upcoming clip type clip_start n HHMMSS The command to Title Box could be Start te xt clip_start 3 HHMM To show the start time and the title of an up coming clip create the follo wing command Next text clip_start 4 HHMM clip_title 4 where Next is the name of the text object in Title Box 4 is the off setter HHMM is the time format The time format can also be HH or HHMMSS or HHMMSSFF As in NTSC mode the start time appears as drop frame time code in the playlist it would be more convenient to display the start time according to the system time on the PC There are two options for the system time script T for short system time according to the Regional settings and TT 144 AIRBOX for long system time according to the Regional settings Thus instead of Next text clip_start HHMM you should type Next text
468. wn GC lt Ctrl Shift gt enter the desired clip s number Preset 11 and then release the lt Ctrl Shift gt SE Preset 14 Preset 15 Preset 16 162 AIRBOX IL Help Menu This menu contains useful information about the AirBox module and the possibilities for getting technical support fromus PlayBox Help opens the AirBox context sensitive help About Displays the About box of the AirBox module It contains Y ir 4 0 60 build 720 ersion AU ul a e Copyright 1999 2007 DMT Ltd useful information such as module NOT FOR RESALE version WIBU Box number mode WIBU Box 8 5536091 Connected to Software MPEG 2 Playback 2 registration etc In the bottomis displayed the name of currently selected platform PlayBox Doctor this module gives the opportunity to generate easily complete problem reports It is integrated in each PlayBox module It can gather almost all the information needed for PlayBox support team in order to provide you with the prompt answers without too many questions about your system configuration The Basic User s manual contains a detailed description of the PlayBox Doctor Report and other functionalities If you do not have the Basic manual you can download it in our website www playbox tv gt Support gt Download gt Play Box Literature 163 AIRBOX IV VDCP Manager AirBox can now be controlled through peripheral VDCP controllers with the help of the VDCP Man
469. ws the actual starting time for each clip If there has been a JUMP command or a clip has been trimmed during Play mode the starting times of the following clips will be recalculated accordingly If for any reason a file is removed or renamed after the playlist is loaded it will be considered missing and hence colored in red AirBox will skip it and will jump to the next available clip The Start Time column will be recalculated accordingly Duration shows the actual duration of each clip Naturally if a clip has been trimmed its actual duration will be reduced The duration of the part to be shown will be displayed in the playlist and will be used for calculation of the starting times of all following clips Type shows the type such as MPEG of the clip this is quite useful to determine the major type of compression since many decoders do not allow different compression types to co exist in the same play list Category contains category information fed by DataBox The background color is the same as the actual category color You can define another field color for clip description in AirBox using DataBox Options gt Default values gt Color to AirBox The Category and its color can also be defined manually in ListBox or in AirBox You can fill in the entire clip rows with their Category colors in AirBox choose Settings gt General gt Interface gt MColor entire row by category Title shows the clip s title or filename
470. x Use the button to browse for a watch folder To enable disable a watch folder double click in the Active cell in the beginning of its row Double click in the watch folder s path to change it To the nght of it you can enable disable watching subfolders In last column in the watch directories grid you can assign a default category for each watch folder Thus every time a new clip appears in the relevant folder the default category will be assigned automatically during its import in the database This means that if you specify Documentary as Default Category all clips imported from TCI Directory path D _test db will automatically become category Documentary 233 DATABOX NOTE As Categories are subentries of database types it is quite possible that the same categories appear in more than one type In such a case all new entries will be assigned as the highest TYPE in the database tree that contains the specified default category For example if both type CINEMA and type NEWS contain category Documentary the new entries will be assigned type CINEMA at it is higher than NEWS in the database tree To delete a watch folder select it in the folders list and click the Sg button M Delete TCI files after check can be used if you want DataBox to delete all tci files after each import operation IMPORTANT Automated database insertion will not be carried out if there are no TCI files 236 IL 3
471. x object Data Source Manager Object DataSource Field F Text 1 HTML Table Data Provid Object Link properties Object Text 1 Data Source HTML Table Data Provider 02 M Links Link Name Field Column 0 e Column 0 Data control Cursor offset s Data Sources L 2BSS Atom Data Provider 01 eather Data Provider 02 weather Data Provider 01 ODBC Data Provider 01 mL Data Provider 01 HTML Table Data Provider 01 HTML Table Data Provider 02 in out effects DataSource Link properties XK Cancel Into Links area there are three main columns Link Name Field Master column In Data control area you can set a Cursor offset as a number of rows which will be skipped If you want to use in out effects you have to check the relative check bo x Press OK button to save the settings 308 TITLEBOX VI 1 Weather Data Provider This plug in displays information coming from data providers such as Google or Yahoo It provides a way for the online weather information to be shown in the objects You will be able to not only show text information but pictures and animations as well for example to bind a picture of a yellow sun when the forecast is Sunny To adjust the Weather Data Provider click the Ki button in the main TitleBox interface The Data Source Manager dialog will open The left part of it contains a list of all objects in the current project To add anew Weather
472. x while using browser objects This will make the objects disappear off the screen 287 TITLEBOX IV 5 16 Screen Capture object This object will allow you show some parts of your desktop on E the Screen S SEH ous SE The window to the nght will appear as soon as you create the Geen screen capture object Its size is the same as of the rectangle you drew in the work area Drag it to the area you would like to show on the screen In the upper right corner there is a two sided arrow button Use it to minimize ma ximize the main TitleBox window but leave the Screen Capture window ON Please note that if you use the minimize maximize buttons in the main TitleBox window the screen capture dialog will be affected as well In the lower left corner you can find two other buttons that control the mouse pointer The first one is for showing hiding it from the screen The second button will invert the cursor color Thus if the background of your desktop is light you can turn the cursor black so it will be easier seen on the screen When ascreen capture object is selected in the work area the object specific tool bar will appear under the regular toolbars KE Ramon The first two buttons in it duplicate the ones for cursor control in the lower left corner of the Screen Capture window To the right is the Antialiasing check box Use it to make the sharp edges smoother thus avoiding possible aliasing effects on the output CaptureBox Cu
473. xpress tt L Il e Eies ae all The follo wing fields and buttons are situated along the upper panel of the window 240 Name of the printer it may be local or network connected printer Font type and Font size Arial la Button Print hit this button to start printing the list DATABOX Page Orientation buttons choose Portrait or Landscape 723 Button Selection hit it to print only the selected grid rows Button First page Ei go to the first page Button J go to the previous page Button Pie page gt go to the last page Button J go to the next page Button Refresh table S refreshes the table if the content has been changed in the meantime II 9 Media Folders Is Check Scop Allrecords C All visible in grid Not defined C Selected records IV Log search progress F Check file size F Save old trim points l X Close Begin search Current record Scorpion King The Music ideo Current record Scorpion King The Trailer urent record Scorpion King The Making Searching Trueserver E Mpeg2 PAL Making po Searching Trueserver E Mpeg2 PAL Albena Making1 mpg RESRRbRSRRRRERRRRRRR RER ERR RR RR ERR RR RRERR This option is used for searching for files described in the database but not presented in the respective folders The search concerns only the main instances of the records
474. y to the specified Title Box Server For a detailed step by step guide on how to integrate TitleBox with AirBox look up in APPENDIX 4 Integration of AirBox wth TitleBox TIP Go to the Edit menu section of this chapter to check how to insert Title Box Net Control commands in the playlist Video Resize Control Output 89 AIRBOX This is a brand new event that ensures automated scaling of the video output for Bloo mberg style layouts Presses the Configure button to open the Set Up form and create your video resize presets For more information check AirBox Edit menu gt Add gt Events gt Video Resize Control Output section above in this chapter VikinX Matrix Switcher Output Vikinx Switcher setup me Pressing the Configure button while the VikinX Com port Switcher row is selected will evoke a setup dialog where you Readdelay IZ can define COM Port Use the drop down list of available COM E ports to select the one that will be connected to the switcher Read delay the delay between the command given to the switcher and its response By default it is 50 ms and it is not recommended to change this value 90 AIRBOX VTR Control Plug in You can use it to control up to two VI Rs for combined file based tape based playout Enable it and press Configure The x VIP name VTR 1 Com port COM1 X Max rewind time foo 00 05 00 follo wing dialog will open for you to make page
475. yed yet clip If you hit the playlist 25 AIRBOX will be reset and next time you hit PLAY the playback will start from the very beginning of the playlist Simply put it is a kind of play list rewinding el Randomize selection press it to re arrange the currently selected clips in a random manner IE This button will display the Properties of the currently selected line ES While a clip is selected in the playlist grid below press this button to open the Clip Trimmer E Undo up to 6 latest actions 26 AIRBOX II 7 The Volume Slider Probably the less noticeable part of the user interface the Volume slider is situated between the multi purpose zone and the playback control buttons It is used to compensate different sound volume in separate clips You can control it with the and numeric keys on your keyboard or just by dragging the slider Check the box under it to mute the output sound I 8 The Playlist Grid This is the main part of the interface dedicated to the playlist play order visualization 1 8 1 The Grid Columns Start Time this column contains each clip s starting time During Stop mode it shows the current time for the clip that will be played first when the Play button is pressed The time refreshes every 2 seconds The following clips hold positive times calculated according to the current time and the duration of the preceding clips During Play mode this column sho
476. ylist has been modified and saved Reload playlist immediately and Wait for playing clip end act the same in relation to playback position only the time shift is different There are two possible situations to be reviewed A Regular not Daily playlist operation a The Currently playing clip its List ID is available in the edited playlist too New items are added before or after it Action AirBox will reload the playlist and will start playing the next item in the playlist Thus if Reload playlist immediately is checked AirBox will jump to the next item in the playlist If Wait for playing clip end is selected AirBox will finish playing the clip that was on when the playlist file was changed Then it will load the new playlist and will start playing the next clip accordingly 130 AIRBOX b Currently playing clip List ID is removed in the edited playlist Action AirBox will reload the playlist and will start playing from the beginning of the playlist B Daily playlist operation No matter if the currently playing clip has been removed or not AirBox will reload the playlist and will go to the position where the playlist should be according to its start time and the current system time Daily playlist loading tolerance loading a playlist always takes a few moments depending on its length AirBox calculates the exact point to start playback after the playlist is loaded Thus if there is an event in the
477. you check the MActivate nowbox in the event dialog box the logo will appear immediately You can also activate the logo before or after the beginning of the following clip by setting an offset to it Return event This event will return the playback at the position before a previously executed Jump For example if you have a movie in your playlist and at a certain time you decide to jump to a block of commercials somewhere in the playlist and then go back to the same position in the movie insert a Return event after the commercials you d like to play Thus the movie playback will resume after the end of the commercial break from the point before the jump Fill event opens the Fill event properties dialog For more information see section Settings menu Auto fill further in this chapter Complex Items opens the Custom Complex Event dialog A list of all previously defined complex events is displayed for the sake of AIRBOX convenience For more information see section Settings menu gt Complex items further in this chapter NOTE The External Events are part of the AirBox PRO option The follo wing section contains a description of these events Acappella Switcher Output is an event for controlling an external video audio router Depending on the switcher model the currently available inputs outputs will be displayed in a matrix grid In it you can configure the command you need Press OK when ready

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

GXV3651 FHD IP Camera User Manual  Auto Close Gateway  Soyntec Sticker netbook Laptatoos 237  LG 47LW6500 Specification Sheet  Samsung 31.5" Curved monitor with incredible picture quality User Manual  Oricom TP29 User's Manual  SK－EMシリーズ 取扱説明書 まえがき 目次 安全に関する注意事項  manual - Navigation.com  Manual do utilizador FORUM® Archive FORUM® Viewer  Connecting to MN CAREWare - Minnesota Department of Health  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file